+REGLAMENTO DE EJECUCIÓN (UE) 2021/637 DE LA COMISIÓN de 15 de marzo de 2021 por el que se establecen normas técnicas de ejecución en lo que respecta a la divulgación pública por las entidades de la información a que se refiere la parte octava, títulos II y III, del Reglamento (UE) n. o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, y se derogan el Reglamento de Ejecución (UE) n. o 1423/2013 de la Comisión, el Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2015/1555 de la Comisión, el Reglamento de Ejecución (UE) 2016/200 de la Comisión y el Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2017/2295 de la Comisión (Texto pertinente a efectos del EEE)
---+Artículo 1 Divulgación de los indicadores clave y panorámica de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo
------+Artículo 1 1.
------+Artículo 1 2.
------+Artículo 1 3.
------+Artículo 1 4.
---+Artículo 2 Divulgación de los objetivos y las políticas de gestión del riesgo
---+Artículo 3 Divulgación de información sobre el ámbito de aplicación
------+Artículo 3 1.
------+Artículo 3 2.
------+Artículo 3 3.
------+Artículo 3 4.
---+Artículo 4 Divulgación de información sobre los fondos propios
---+Artículo 5 Divulgación de información sobre los colchones de capital anticíclicos
---+Artículo 6 Divulgación de información sobre la ratio de apalancamiento
---+Article 6a Disclosure of indicators of global systemic importance
------+Article 6a 1.
------+Article 6a 2.
---+Artículo 7 Divulgación de los requisitos de liquidez
---+Artículo 8 Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones al riesgo de crédito y al riesgo de dilución y la calidad crediticia
------+Artículo 8 1.
------+Artículo 8 2.
------+Artículo 8 3.
------+Artículo 8 4.
------+Artículo 8 5.
------+Artículo 8 6.
---+Artículo 9 Divulgación de información sobre el uso de técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito
---+Artículo 10 Divulgación de información sobre la utilización del método estándar
---+Artículo 11 Divulgación de información sobre la aplicación del método IRB al riesgo de crédito
---+Artículo 12 Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones de financiación especializada y de renta variable sujetas al método simple de ponderación de riesgo
---+Artículo 13 Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones al riesgo de contraparte
---+Artículo 14 Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones a posiciones de titulización
---+Artículo 15 Divulgación de información sobre la utilización del método estándar y de los modelos internos para el riesgo de mercado
------+Artículo 15 1.
------+Artículo 15 2.
---+Artículo 16 Divulgación de información sobre el riesgo operativo
---+Article 16a Disclosure of exposures to interest rate risk on positions not held in the trading book
------+Article 16a 1.
------+Article 16a 2.
------+Article 16a 3.
---+Artículo 17 Divulgación de información sobre la política de remuneración
---+Artículo 18 Divulgación de información sobre los activos con cargas y sin cargas
---+Article 18a Disclosure of environmental, social and governance risks (ESG risks)
------+Article 18a 1.
------+Article 18a 2.
------+Article 18a 3.
---+Artículo 19 Disposiciones generales
------+Artículo 19 1.
------+Artículo 19 2.
------+Artículo 19 3.
------+Artículo 19 4.
------+Artículo 19 5.
---+Artículo 20 Derogación
---+Artículo 21 Entrada en vigor
---+ANEXO I
---+ANEXO II
---+ANEXO III
---+ANEXO IV
---+ANEXO V
---+ANEXO VI
---+ANEXO VII
---+ANEXO VIII
---+ANNEX IX
---+ANEXO X Instrucciones para la divulgación de información sobre los colchones de capital anticíclicos
---+ANNEX XI
---+ANNEX XII Instructions for leverage ratio disclosures
---+ANNEX XIII
---+ANNEX XIV Instructions for the liquidity requirements templates
---+ANNEX XV
---+ANNEX XVI
---+ANNEX XVII
---+ANNEX XVIII
---+ANNEX XIX
---+ANEXO XX Instrucciones relativas a la divulgación de información sobre el uso del método estándar para el riesgo de crédito (excluidos el riesgo de contraparte y las posiciones de titulización)
---+ANNEX XXI
---+ANNEX XXII Disclosure of the use of the IRB Approach to credit risk (excluding counterparty credit risk)
---+ANNEX XXIII
---+ANNEX XXIV Disclosure of specialised lending and equity exposures under the simple risk weight approach
---+ANNEX XXV
---+ANNEX XXVI
---+ANNEX XXVII
---+ANNEX XXVIII
---+ANNEX XXIX
---+ANEXO XXX Cuadros y plantillas para la divulgación de información sobre los métodos estándar e interno para el riesgo de mercado: Instrucciones
---+ANNEX XXXI
---+ANNEX XXXII Instructions for operational risk disclosure templates
---+ANNEX XXXIII
---+ANNEX XXXIV
---+ANNEX XXXV
---+ANNEX XXXVI
---+ANNEX XXXVII
---+ANNEX XXXVIII
---+ANNEX XXXIX Prudential disclosures on ESG risks (Article 449a CRR)
---+ANNEX XL Instructions for disclosure of ESG risks
English - European Union - Financial Industry - Banking -

REGLAMENTO DE EJECUCIÓN (UE) 2021/637 DE LA COMISIÓN de 15 de marzo de 2021 por el que se establecen normas técnicas de ejecución en lo que respecta a la divulgación pública por las entidades de la información a que se refiere la parte octava, títulos II y III, del Reglamento (UE) n. o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, y se derogan el Reglamento de Ejecución (UE) n. o 1423/2013 de la Comisión, el Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2015/1555 de la Comisión, el Reglamento de Ejecución (UE) 2016/200 de la Comisión y el Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2017/2295 de la Comisión (Texto pertinente a efectos del EEE)

REGLAMENTO DE EJECUCIÓN (UE) 2021/637 DE LA COMISIÓN

de 15 de marzo de 2021

por el que se establecen normas técnicas de ejecución en lo que respecta a la divulgación pública por las entidades de la información a que se refiere la parte octava, títulos II y III, del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, y se derogan el Reglamento de Ejecución (UE) n.o 1423/2013 de la Comisión, el Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2015/1555 de la Comisión, el Reglamento de Ejecución (UE) 2016/200 de la Comisión y el Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2017/2295 de la Comisión

(Texto pertinente a efectos del EEE)

1. Resumen

,
Título Regulación
Artículo 1 Divulgación de los indicadores clave y panorámica de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo

Divulgación de los indicadores clave y panorámica de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo

Artículo 2 Divulgación de los objetivos y las políticas de gestión del riesgo

Artículo 2

Divulgación de los objetivos y las políticas de gestión del riesgo

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 435 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 utilizando los cuadros EU OVA y EU OVB del anexo III del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo IV del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 3 Divulgación de información sobre el ámbito de aplicación

Divulgación de información sobre el ámbito de aplicación

Artículo 4 Divulgación de información sobre los fondos propios

Artículo 4

Divulgación de información sobre los fondos propios

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 437 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 437, letras a), d), e) y f), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando las plantillas EU CC1 y EU CC2 del anexo VII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo VIII del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 437, letras b) y c), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando el cuadro EU CCA del anexo VII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo VIII del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 5 Divulgación de información sobre los colchones de capital anticíclicos

Artículo 5

Divulgación de información sobre los colchones de capital anticíclicos

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 440 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 440, letra a), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CCYB1 del anexo IX del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo X del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 440, letra b), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CCYB2 del anexo IX del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo X del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 6 Divulgación de información sobre la ratio de apalancamiento

Divulgación de información sobre la ratio de apalancamiento

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 451 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 451, apartado 1, letras a), b) y c), y apartados 2 y 3, del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando las plantillas EU LR1, EU LR2 y EU LR3 del anexo XI del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XII del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 451, apartado 1, letras d) y e), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando el cuadro EU LRA del anexo XI del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XII del presente Reglamento.

Divulgación de información sobre los indicadores de importancia sistémica mundial

Article 6a Disclosure of indicators of global systemic importance
Artículo 7 Divulgación de los requisitos de liquidez

Artículo 7

Divulgación de los requisitos de liquidez

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refieren el artículo 435, apartado 1, y el artículo 451 bis del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refieren el artículo 435, apartado 1, y el artículo 451 bis, apartado 4, del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando el cuadro EU LIQA del anexo XIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XIV del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 451 bis, apartado 2, del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU LIQ1 y el cuadro EU LIQB del anexo XIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XIV del presente Reglamento;

c) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 451 bis, apartado 3, del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU LIQ2 del anexo XIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XIV del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 8 Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones al riesgo de crédito y al riesgo de dilución y la calidad crediticia

Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones al riesgo de crédito y al riesgo de dilución y la calidad crediticia

Artículo 9 Divulgación de información sobre el uso de técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito

Artículo 9

Divulgación de información sobre el uso de técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 453, letras a) a f), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 453, letras a) a e), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando el cuadro EU CRC del anexo XVII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XVIII del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 453, letra f), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CR3 del anexo XVII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XVIII del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 10 Divulgación de información sobre la utilización del método estándar

Artículo 10

Divulgación de información sobre la utilización del método estándar

Las entidades que calculen los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo con arreglo al método estándar divulgarán la información a que se refieren el artículo 444 y el artículo 453, letras g), h) e i), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 444, letras a) a d), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando el cuadro EU CRD del anexo XIX del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XX del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refieren el artículo 453, letras g), h) e i), y el artículo 444, letra e), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CR4 del anexo XIX del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XX del presente Reglamento;

c) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 444, letra e), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CR5 del anexo XIX del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XX del presente Reglamento, y la información sobre los valores de exposición deducidos de los fondos propios a que se refiere ese mismo artículo, utilizando la plantilla EU CC1 del anexo VII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo VIII del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 11 Divulgación de información sobre la aplicación del método IRB al riesgo de crédito

Artículo 11

Divulgación de información sobre la aplicación del método IRB al riesgo de crédito

Las entidades que calculen los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo con arreglo al método IRB divulgarán la información a que se refieren los artículos 438 y 452 y el artículo 453, letras g) y j), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 452, letras a) a f), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando el cuadro EU CRE y la plantilla EU CR6-A del anexo XXI del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXII del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 452, letra g), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CR6 del anexo XXI del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXII del presente Reglamento;

c) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 453, letras g) y j), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando las plantillas EU CR7-A y EU CR7 del anexo XXI del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXII del presente Reglamento;

d) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 438, letra h), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CR8 del anexo XXI del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXII del presente Reglamento;

e) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 452, letra h), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando las plantillas EU CR9 y EU CR9.1 del anexo XXI del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXII del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 12 Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones de financiación especializada y de renta variable sujetas al método simple de ponderación de riesgo

Artículo 12

Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones de financiación especializada y de renta variable sujetas al método simple de ponderación de riesgo

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 438, letra e), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 utilizando la plantilla EU CR10 del anexo XXIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXIV del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 13 Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones al riesgo de contraparte

Artículo 13

Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones al riesgo de contraparte

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refieren el artículo 438, letra h), y el artículo 439 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 439, letras a), b), c) y d), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando el cuadro EU CCRA del anexo XXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVI del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 439, letras f), g), k) y m), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CCR1 del anexo XXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVI del presente Reglamento;

c) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 439, letra h), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CCR2 del anexo XXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVI del presente Reglamento;

d) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 439, letra l), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando las plantillas EU CCR3 y EU CCR4 del anexo XXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVI del presente Reglamento;

e) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 439, letra e), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CCR5 del anexo XXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVI del presente Reglamento;

f) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 439, letra j), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CCR6 del anexo XXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVI del presente Reglamento;

g) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 438, letra h), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CCR7 del anexo XXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVI del presente Reglamento;

h) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 439, letra i), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU CCR8 del anexo XXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVI del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 14 Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones a posiciones de titulización

Artículo 14

Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones a posiciones de titulización

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 449 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 449, letras a) a i), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando el cuadro EU SECA del anexo XXVII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVIII del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 449, letra j), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando las plantillas EU SEC1 y EU SEC2 del anexo XXVII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVIII del presente Reglamento;

c) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 449, letra k), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando las plantillas EU SEC3 y EU SEC4 del anexo XXVII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVIII del presente Reglamento;

d) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 449, letra l), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU SEC5 del anexo XXVII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXVIII del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 15 Divulgación de información sobre la utilización del método estándar y de los modelos internos para el riesgo de mercado

Divulgación de información sobre la utilización del método estándar y de los modelos internos para el riesgo de mercado

Artículo 16 Divulgación de información sobre el riesgo operativo

Divulgación de información sobre el riesgo operativo

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refieren el artículo 435, el artículo 438, letra d), y los artículos 446 y 454 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 utilizando el cuadro EU ORA y la plantilla EU OR1 del anexo XXXI del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXXII del presente Reglamento.

Divulgación de información sobre las exposiciones al riesgo de tipo de interés en relación con posiciones no mantenidas en la cartera de negociación

Article 16a Disclosure of exposures to interest rate risk on positions not held in the trading book
Artículo 17 Divulgación de información sobre la política de remuneración

Artículo 17

Divulgación de información sobre la política de remuneración

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 450 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del siguiente modo:

a) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 450, apartado 1, letras a) a f), j) y k), y apartado 2, de dicho Reglamento, utilizando el cuadro EU REMA del anexo XXXIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXXIV del presente Reglamento;

b) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 450, apartado 1, letra h), incisos i) y ii), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU REM1 del anexo XXXIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXXIV del presente Reglamento;

c) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 450, apartado 1, letra h), incisos v), vi) y vii), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU REM2 del anexo XXXIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXXIV del presente Reglamento;

d) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 450, apartado 1, letra h), incisos iii) y iv), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando la plantilla EU REM3 del anexo XXXIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXXIV del presente Reglamento;

e) 

la información a que se refiere el artículo 450, apartado 1, letras g) e i), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013, utilizando las plantillas EU REM4 y EU REM5 del anexo XXXIII del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXXIV del presente Reglamento.

Artículo 18 Divulgación de información sobre los activos con cargas y sin cargas

Divulgación de información sobre los activos con cargas y sin cargas

Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 443 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 utilizando las plantillas EU AE1, EU AE2 y EU AE3 y el cuadro EU AE4 del anexo XXXV del presente Reglamento y siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el anexo XXXVI del presente Reglamento.

Divulgación de información sobre riesgos ambientales, sociales y de gobernanza (riesgos ASG)

Article 18a Disclosure of environmental, social and governance risks (ESG risks)
Artículo 19 Disposiciones generales

Disposiciones generales

Artículo 20 Derogación

Artículo 20

Derogación

Quedan derogados el Reglamento de Ejecución (UE) n.o 1423/2013, el Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2015/1555, el Reglamento de Ejecución (UE) 2016/200 y el Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2017/2295.

Artículo 21 Entrada en vigor

Artículo 21

Entrada en vigor

El presente Reglamento entrará en vigor a los veinte días de su publicación en el Diario Oficial de la Unión Europea.

Será aplicable a partir del 28 de junio de 2021.

El presente Reglamento será obligatorio en todos sus elementos y directamente aplicable en cada Estado miembro.

ANEXO I

ANEXO I


Plantilla EU OV1 – Resumen de los importes totales de exposición al riesgo

 

Importe total de exposición al riesgo (ITER)

Requisitos de fondos propios totales

a

b

c

T

T-1

T

1

Riesgo de crédito (excluido el riesgo de crédito de contraparte)

 

 

 

2

Del cual: con el método estándar

 

 

 

3

Del cual: con el método básico basado en calificaciones internas (F-IRB)

 

 

 

4

Del cual: con el método de asignación

 

 

 

EU 4a

Del cual: valores con el método simple de ponderación de riesgo

 

 

 

5

Del cual: con el método avanzado basado en calificaciones internas (A-IRB)

 

 

 

6

Riesgo de crédito de contraparte (RCC)

 

 

 

7

Del cual: con el método estándar

 

 

 

8

Del cual: el método del modelo interno (MMI)

 

 

 

EU 8a

Del cual: exposiciones frente a una contraparte central

 

 

 

EU 8b

Del cual: ajuste de valoración del crédito (AVC)

 

 

 

9

Del cual: otro riesgo de contraparte

 

 

 

10

No aplicable

 

 

 

11

No aplicable

 

 

 

12

No aplicable

 

 

 

13

No aplicable

 

 

 

14

No aplicable

 

 

 

15

Riesgo de liquidación

 

 

 

16

Exposiciones de titulización de la cartera de inversión (después de aplicar el límite máximo)

 

 

 

17

Del cual: el método SEC-IRBA

 

 

 

18

Del cual: el método SEC-ERBA (incluido el método de evaluación interna)

 

 

 

19

Del cual: el método SEC-SA

 

 

 

EU 19a

Del cual: 1 250  % / deducción

 

 

 

20

Riesgos de posición, de tipo de cambio y de materias primas (riesgo de mercado)

 

 

 

21

Del cual: con el método estándar

 

 

 

22

Del cual: con el método de modelos internos (MMI)

 

 

 

EU 22a

Grandes exposiciones

 

 

 

23

Riesgo operativo

 

 

 

EU 23a

Del cual: con el método del indicador básico

 

 

 

EU 23b

Del cual: con el método estándar

 

 

 

EU 23c

Del cual: con el método de medición avanzada

 

 

 

24

Importes por debajo de los umbrales de deducción (con una ponderación de riesgo del 250 %)

 

 

 

25

No aplicable

 

 

 

26

No aplicable

 

 

 

27

No aplicable

 

 

 

28

No aplicable

 

 

 

29

Total

 

 

 


Plantilla EU KM1 – Plantilla de indicadores clave

 

a

b

c

d

e

T

T-1

T-2

T-3

T-4

 

Fondos propios disponibles (importes)

1

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario

 

 

 

 

 

2

Capital de nivel 1

 

 

 

 

 

3

Capital total

 

 

 

 

 

 

Importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo

4

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ratios de capital (en porcentaje del importe de la exposición ponderada por riesgo)

5

Ratio de capital de nivel 1 ordinario (%)

 

 

 

 

 

6

Ratio de capital de nivel 1 (%)

 

 

 

 

 

7

Ratio de capital total (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (en porcentaje del importe de la exposición ponderada por riesgo)

EU 7a

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (%)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 7b

De los cuales: estarán compuestos por capital de nivel 1 ordinario (puntos porcentuales)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 7c

De los cuales: estarán compuestos por capital de nivel 1 (puntos porcentuales)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 7d

Total de los requisitos de fondos propios del PRES (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Colchón combinado y requisito global de capital (en porcentaje del importe de la exposición ponderada por riesgo)

8

Colchón de conservación de capital (%)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 8a

Colchón de conservación debido al riesgo macroprudencial o sistémico observado en un Estado miembro (%)

 

 

 

 

 

9

Colchón de capital anticíclico específico de la entidad (%)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 9a

Colchón de riesgo sistémico (%)

 

 

 

 

 

10

Colchón de entidades de importancia sistémica mundial (%)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 10a

Colchón de otras entidades de importancia sistémica (%)

 

 

 

 

 

11

Requisitos combinados de colchón (%)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 11a

Requisitos globales de capital (%)

 

 

 

 

 

12

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario disponible tras cumplir el total de los requisitos de fondos propios del PRES (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ratio de apalancamiento

13

Medida de la exposición total

 

 

 

 

 

14

Ratio de apalancamiento (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente al riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (en porcentaje de la medida de la exposición total)

EU 14a

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente al riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (%)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 14b

De los cuales: estarán compuestos por capital de nivel 1 ordinario (puntos porcentuales)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 14c

Total de los requisitos de ratio de apalancamiento del PRES (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Colchón de ratio de apalancamiento y requisito global de ratio de apalancamiento (en porcentaje de la medida de la exposición total)

EU 14d

Requisito de colchón de ratio de apalancamiento (%)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 14e

Requisito de ratio de apalancamiento global (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ratio de cobertura de liquidez

15

Total de activos líquidos de alta calidad (HQLA, por sus siglas en inglés) (valor ponderado, media)

 

 

 

 

 

EU 16a

Salidas de efectivo — Valor ponderado total

 

 

 

 

 

EU 16b

Entradas de efectivo — Valor ponderado total

 

 

 

 

 

16

Total de salidas netas de efectivo (valor ajustado)

 

 

 

 

 

17

Ratio de cobertura de liquidez (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ratio de financiación estable neta

18

Total de financiación estable disponible

 

 

 

 

 

19

Total de financiación estable total requerida

 

 

 

 

 

20

Ratio de financiación estable neta (%)

 

 

 

 

 


Plantilla EU INS1 – Participaciones en seguros

 

a

b

Valor de exposición

Importe de la exposición al riesgo

1

Instrumentos de fondos propios mantenidos en empresas de seguros o reaseguros o en una sociedad de cartera de seguros no deducidos de los fondos propios

 

 


Plantilla EU INS2 – Conglomerados financieros – Información sobre fondos propios y coeficiente de adecuación del capital

 

a

T

1

Requisitos adicionales de fondos propios del conglomerado financiero (importe)

 

2

Coeficiente de adecuación del capital del conglomerado financiero (%)

 


Cuadro EU OVC – Información del proceso de evaluación de la adecuación del capital interno

Proceso de evaluación de la adecuación del capital interno y evaluación continua de los riesgos del banco, cómo se propone mitigar esos riesgos y cuánto capital actual y futuro es necesario teniendo en cuenta otros factores atenuantes

Celdas de texto libre para la publicación de información sobre aspectos cualitativos

Base jurídica

Número de fila

Formato libre

Artículo 438 bis del RRC

a)

Método de evaluación de la adecuación del capital interno

Artículo 438 quater del RRC

b)

A petición de la autoridad competente pertinente, el resultado del proceso interno de evaluación de la adecuación del capital de la entidad

ANEXO II

ANEXO II

Instrucciones para las plantillas de divulgación de información general

Plantilla EU OV1 – Panorámica de los importes totales de la exposición al riesgo. Formato fijo.

1. Las entidades aplicarán las instrucciones que figuran a continuación para cumplimentar la plantilla EU OV1 presentada en el anexo I del presente Reglamento de Ejecución, en aplicación del artículo 438, letra d), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 ( 5 ) (en lo sucesivo, «RRC»).

2. Cuando proceda, las entidades incluirán junto con la plantilla una reseña del efecto que tiene en el cálculo de los fondos propios y de los importes de la exposición al riesgo aplicar niveles mínimos de capital y no deducir elementos de los fondos propios.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de columna

Explicación

a

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo calculado con arreglo al artículo 92, apartado 3, y a los artículos 95, 96 y 98 del RRC.

b

Importe total de exposición al riesgo T-1

Importe total de exposición al riesgo tal como se divulgó en el anterior período.

c

Requisitos de fondos propios totales

Requisitos de fondos propios correspondientes a las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo para las diferentes categorías de riesgo.

Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1

Riesgo de crédito (excluido el riesgo de contraparte)

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados con arreglo a la parte tercera, título II, capítulos 1 a 4, del RRC, y al artículo 379 del RRC. Los importes ponderados por riesgo de las exposiciones de titulización de la cartera de inversión y de las exposiciones al riesgo de contraparte están excluidos y se divulgan en las filas 6 y 16 de esta plantilla. Las entidades incluirán, en el importe divulgado en esta fila, las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y los requisitos de fondos propios por riesgo de operaciones incompletas calculados de conformidad con el artículo 379 del RRC.

2

Riesgo de crédito (excluido el riesgo de contraparte) – Del cual: método estándar

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados con arreglo al método estándar (parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, del RRC, y artículo 379 del RRC).

3

Riesgo de crédito (excluido el riesgo de contraparte) – Del cual: método IRB básico (F-IRB)

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados con arreglo al método basado en calificaciones internas básico para el riesgo de crédito (parte tercera, título II, capítulo 3, del RRC), excluidas las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo divulgadas en la fila 4 para las exposiciones de financiación especializada sujetas al método de asignación, y en la fila EU 4a para las exposiciones de renta variable sujetas al método simple de ponderación de riesgo, e incluyendo las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y los requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con el artículo 379 del RRC.

4

Riesgo de crédito (excluido el riesgo de contraparte) – Del cual: método de asignación

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios para las exposiciones de financiación especializada sujetas al método de asignación calculados de conformidad con el artículo 153, apartado 5, del RRC.

EU 4a

Riesgo de crédito (excluido el riesgo de contraparte) – Del cual: exposiciones de renta variable con arreglo al método simple de ponderación de riesgo

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios para las exposiciones de renta variable con arreglo al método simple de ponderación de riesgo calculados de conformidad con el artículo 155, apartado 2, del RRC.

5

Riesgo de crédito (excluido el riesgo de contraparte) – Del cual: método IRB avanzado (A-IRB)

Las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y los requisitos de fondos propios calculados con arreglo al método basado en calificaciones internas avanzado para el riesgo de crédito (parte tercera, título II, capítulo 3, del RRC), excluidas las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo divulgadas en la fila 4 para las exposiciones de financiación especializada sujetas al método de asignación, y en la fila EU 4a para las exposiciones de renta variable con arreglo al método simple de ponderación de riesgo, e incluyendo las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y los requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con el artículo 379 del RRC.

6

Riesgo de contraparte

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados con arreglo a la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 6, del RRC, en cuanto al riesgo de contraparte.

7

Riesgo de contraparte – Del cual: método estándar

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 6, sección 3, del RRC.

8

Riesgo de contraparte – Del cual: método de modelos internos (MMI)

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados con arreglo al artículo 283 del RRC.

EU 8a

Riesgo de contraparte – Del cual: exposiciones frente a una entidad de contrapartida central

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 6, sección 9, del RRC.

EU 8b

Riesgo de contraparte – Del cual: ajuste de valoración del crédito (AVC)

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título VI, del RRC.

9

Riesgo de contraparte – Del cual: otro riesgo de contraparte

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo de contraparte y requisitos de fondos propios por riesgo de contraparte que no figuren en las filas 7, 8, EU 8a y EU 8b.

10

No aplicable.

11

No aplicable.

12

No aplicable.

13

No aplicable.

14

No aplicable.

15

Riesgo de liquidación

Importe de la exposición al riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados para el riesgo de liquidación/entrega con arreglo al artículo 378 del RRC.

16

Exposiciones de titulización de la cartera de inversión (después de aplicar el límite máximo)

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 5, del RRC.

17

Titulización – De la cual: método SEC-IRBA

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con el método reglamentario SEC-IRBA, utilizado de conformidad con el orden de preferencia de los métodos establecido en el artículo 254 del RRC.

18

Titulización – De la cual: método SEC-ERBA (incluido el método de evaluación interna)

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con el método reglamentario SEC-ERBA (incluido el método de evaluación interna), utilizado de conformidad con el orden de preferencia de los métodos establecido en el artículo 254 del RRC.

19

Titulización – De la cual: método SEC-SA

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con el método reglamentario SEC-SA, utilizado de conformidad con el orden de preferencia de los métodos establecido en el artículo 254 del RRC.

EU 19a

Titulización – De la cual: 1 250  % / deducción

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios para las exposiciones de titulización de la cartera de inversión a las que se aplique una ponderación del 1 250  % o que se deduzcan de los fondos propios de conformidad con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 5, del RRC.

20

Riesgos de posición, de tipo de cambio y de materias primas (riesgo de mercado)

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, del RRC.

21

Riesgo de mercado – Del cual: método estándar

Exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulos 2 a 4, del RRC.

22

Riesgo de mercado – Del cual: método de modelos internos

Importe de la exposición al riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, del RRC.

EU 22a

Grandes exposiciones

Importe de la exposición al riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con el artículo 92, apartado 3, letra b), inciso ii), del RRC.

23

Riesgo operativo

Importe de la exposición al riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título III, del RRC.

EU 23a

Riesgo operativo – Del cual: método del indicador básico

Importe de la exposición al riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título III, capítulo 2, del RRC.

EU 23b

Riesgo operativo – Del cual: método estándar

Importe de la exposición al riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título III, capítulo 3, del RRC.

EU 23c

Riesgo operativo – Del cual: método avanzado de cálculo

Importe de la exposición al riesgo y requisitos de fondos propios calculados de conformidad con la parte tercera, título III, capítulo 4, del RRC.

24

Importe por debajo de los umbrales de deducción (con una ponderación de riesgo del 250 %)

El importe corresponderá a la suma de los importes de los elementos sujetos a una ponderación de riesgo del 250 % a tenor del artículo 48, apartado 4, del RRC tras la aplicación de la ponderación de riesgo del 250 %. Estos importes incluyen:

— Los activos por impuestos diferidos que dependan de rendimientos futuros y se originen por diferencias temporales y que en términos agregados sean iguales o inferiores al 10 % de los elementos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario calculados con arreglo al artículo 48, apartado 1, letra a), del RRC.

— Las inversiones significativas en un ente del sector financiero, las tenencias, directas, indirectas y sintéticas por la entidad de instrumentos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario de esos entes que, en términos agregados, sean iguales o inferiores al 10 % de los elementos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario de la entidad con arreglo al artículo 48, apartado 1, letra b), del RRC.

La información de esta fila solo se divulga con fines informativos, ya que el importe incluido aquí también se incluye en la fila 1, en la que se pide a las entidades que revelen información sobre el riesgo de crédito.

25

No aplicable.

26

No aplicable.

27

No aplicable.

28

No aplicable.

29

Total

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo calculado con arreglo al artículo 92, apartado 3, y a los artículos 95, 96 y 98 del RRC.

Plantilla EU KM1 – Plantilla de indicadores clave. Formato fijo.

3. Las entidades aplicarán las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU KM1 presentada en el anexo I del presente Reglamento de Ejecución, en aplicación del artículo 447, letras a) a g), y del artículo 438, letra b), del RRC.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de columna

Explicación

a - e

Los períodos de divulgación T, T-1, T-2, T-3 y T-4 se definen como períodos trimestrales y se cumplimentarán en función de la frecuencia establecida en los artículos 433 bis, 433 ter y 433 quater del RRC.

Las entidades que divulguen la información contenida en esta plantilla con periodicidad trimestral facilitarán los datos correspondientes a los períodos T, T-1, T-2, T-3 y T-4; las entidades que divulguen la información de esta plantilla semestralmente facilitarán los datos correspondientes a los períodos T, T-2 y T-4; y las entidades que revelen la información de esta plantilla con periodicidad anual facilitarán los datos correspondientes a los períodos T y T-4.

Las entidades divulgarán las fechas correspondientes a los períodos de divulgación.

Cuando los datos se divulguen por primera vez, no se exigirá la divulgación de datos de períodos anteriores.

Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario

El importe de capital de nivel 1 ordinario será el importe divulgado por las entidades en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 29 de la plantilla EU CC1 «Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios»).

2

Capital de nivel 1

El importe de capital de nivel 1 será el importe divulgado por las entidades en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 45 de la plantilla EU CC1 «Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios»).

3

Capital total

El importe total de capital será el importe divulgado por las entidades en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 59 de la plantilla EU CC1 «Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios»).

4

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo

El importe total de la exposición al riesgo será el importe divulgado por las entidades en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 60 de la plantilla EU CC1 «Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios»).

5

Ratio de capital de nivel 1 ordinario (%)

La ratio de capital de nivel 1 ordinario será el valor divulgado por las entidades en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 61 de la plantilla EU CC1 «Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios»).

6

Ratio de capital de nivel 1 (%)

La ratio de capital de nivel 1 será el valor divulgado por las entidades en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 62 de la plantilla EU CC1 «Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios»).

7

Ratio de capital total (%)

La ratio de capital total será el valor divulgado por las entidades en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 63 de la plantilla EU CC1 «Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios»).

EU 7a

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (%)

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo impuestos por la autoridad competente con arreglo al artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la DRC, expresados como porcentaje del importe total de la exposición al riesgo.

EU 7b

De los cuales: compuestos por capital de nivel 1 ordinario (puntos porcentuales)

La parte de los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo impuestos por la autoridad competente en virtud del artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la DRC, que debe satisfacerse mediante capital de nivel 1 ordinario de conformidad con el artículo 104 bis, apartado 4, párrafos primero y tercero.

EU 7c

De los cuales: compuestos por capital de nivel 1 (puntos porcentuales)

La parte de los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo impuestos por la autoridad competente en virtud del artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la DRC, que debe satisfacerse mediante capital de nivel 1 de conformidad con el artículo 104 bis, apartado 4, párrafos primero y tercero.

EU 7d

Total de requisitos de fondos propios según el PRES (ratio del PRES) (%)

La suma de los valores determinados con arreglo a los incisos i) y ii), como sigue:

i)  la ratio de capital total (8 %) tal como se especifica en el artículo 92, apartado 1, letra c), del RRC;

ii)  los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (requisitos del pilar 2) impuestos por la autoridad competente con arreglo al artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la DRC y determinados de conformidad con los criterios especificados en las Directrices sobre procedimientos y metodologías comunes para el proceso de revisión y evaluación supervisora (PRES) y las pruebas de resistencia supervisoras elaboradas por la ABE (1) (Directrices PRES de la ABE), expresados como porcentaje del total de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.

Esta partida reflejará la ratio del requisito de capital total según el PRES conforme a lo comunicado a la entidad por la autoridad competente. El requisito de capital total según el PRES se define en la sección 1.2 de las Directrices PRES de la ABE.

Cuando la autoridad competente no haya comunicado requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo, solo se divulgará el inciso i).

8

Colchón de conservación de capital (%)

Importe de los fondos propios que las entidades están obligadas a mantener de conformidad con el artículo 128, apartado 1, y el artículo 129 de la DRC, expresado como porcentaje del total de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.

EU 8a

Colchón de conservación debido al riesgo macroprudencial o sistémico observado en un Estado miembro (%)

Importe del colchón de conservación debido al riesgo macroprudencial o sistémico observado en un Estado miembro, que puede exigirse con arreglo al artículo 458 del RRC adicionalmente al colchón de conservación de capital, expresado como porcentaje del total de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.

9

Colchón de capital anticíclico específico de la entidad (%)

Importe de los fondos propios que las entidades están obligadas a mantener de conformidad con el artículo 128, apartado 2, el artículo 130 y los artículos 135 a 140 de la DRC, expresado como porcentaje del total de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.

El porcentaje reflejará el importe de los fondos propios necesarios para cumplir los respectivos requisitos de colchón de capital en la fecha de divulgación.

EU 9a

Colchón de riesgo sistémico (%)

Importe de los fondos propios que las entidades están obligadas a mantener de conformidad con el artículo 128, apartado 5, y los artículos 133 y 134 de la DRC, expresado como porcentaje del total de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.

El porcentaje reflejará el importe de los fondos propios necesarios para cumplir los respectivos requisitos de colchón de capital en la fecha de divulgación.

10

Colchón de entidades de importancia sistémica mundial (%)

Importe de los fondos propios que las entidades están obligadas a mantener de conformidad con el artículo 128, apartado 3, y el artículo 131 de la DRC, expresado como porcentaje del total de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.

El porcentaje reflejará el importe de los fondos propios necesarios para cumplir los respectivos requisitos de colchón de capital en la fecha de divulgación.

EU 10a

Colchón de otras entidades de importancia sistémica (%)

Importe de los fondos propios que las entidades están obligadas a mantener de conformidad con el artículo 128, apartado 4, y el artículo 131 de la DRC, expresado como porcentaje del total de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.

El porcentaje reflejará el importe de los fondos propios necesarios para cumplir los respectivos requisitos de colchón de capital en la fecha de divulgación.

11

Requisitos combinados de colchón (%)

De conformidad con el punto 6 del artículo 128 de la DRC, expresado como porcentaje del total de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.

EU 11a

Requisitos globales de capital (%)

La suma de i) y ii), como sigue:

i)  la ratio del requisito de capital total según el PRES señalada en la fila EU 7d;

ii)  en la medida en que sea legalmente aplicable, la ratio de requisitos combinados de colchón a que se refiere el artículo 128, punto 6, de la DRC.

Esta partida reflejará la ratio del requisito global de capital tal como se define en la sección 1.2 de las Directrices PRES de la ABE.

Si no se aplica ningún requisito de colchón, solo se divulgará lo señalado en i).

12

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario disponible tras cumplir el total de los requisitos de fondos propios según el PRES (%)

13

Medida de la exposición total

La medida de la exposición total de conformidad con el importe divulgado por las entidades en el anexo XI del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 24 de la plantilla EU LR2 - LRCom: Cuadro divulgativo común de la ratio de apalancamiento)

14

Ratio de apalancamiento (%)

La ratio de apalancamiento de conformidad con el valor divulgado por las entidades en el anexo XI del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 25 de la plantilla EU LR2 - LRCom: Cuadro divulgativo común de la ratio de apalancamiento)

EU 14a

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente al riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (%)

Los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente al riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo impuestos por la autoridad competente con arreglo al artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la DRC, expresados como porcentaje de la medida de la exposición total.

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales de conformidad con el valor divulgado por las entidades en el anexo XI del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila EU-26a de la plantilla EU LR2 - LRCom: Cuadro divulgativo común de la ratio de apalancamiento)

EU 14b

De los cuales: compuestos por capital de nivel 1 ordinario (puntos porcentuales)

La parte de los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente al riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo impuestos por la autoridad competente en virtud del artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la DRC, que debe satisfacerse mediante capital de nivel 1 ordinario de conformidad con el artículo 104 bis, apartado 4, párrafo tercero.

Requisitos de fondos propios adicionales de conformidad con el valor divulgado por las entidades en el anexo XI del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila EU-26b de la plantilla EU LR2 - LRCom: Cuadro divulgativo común de la ratio de apalancamiento)

EU 14c

Total de los requisitos de ratio de apalancamiento según el PRES (%)

La suma de i) y ii), como sigue:

i)  el requisito de ratio de apalancamiento mínimo, tal como se especifica en el artículo 92, apartado 1, letra d), del RRC, o el requisito de ratio de apalancamiento ajustado calculado de conformidad con el artículo 429 bis, apartado 7, del RRC, según proceda;

ii)  los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente al riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (requisitos del pilar 2) impuestos por la autoridad competente con arreglo al artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la DRC, expresados como porcentaje de la medida de la exposición total.

Esta partida reflejará el requisito de ratio de apalancamiento total según el PRES conforme a lo comunicado a la entidad por la autoridad competente.

Si la autoridad competente no ha impuesto requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente al riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo, solo se divulgará el inciso i).

EU 14d

Requisito de colchón de ratio de apalancamiento (%)

Artículo 92, apartado 1 bis, del RRC.

Colchón de ratio de apalancamiento de conformidad con el valor divulgado por las entidades en el anexo XI del presente Reglamento de Ejecución (fila 27 de la plantilla EU LR2 - LRCom: Cuadro divulgativo común de la ratio de apalancamiento)

EU 14e

Requisito de ratio de apalancamiento global (%)

Suma de las filas UE 14c y UE 14d

15

Total de activos líquidos de calidad elevada (HQLA) (valor ponderado - media)

Las entidades divulgarán como valor ponderado el valor de los activos líquidos de conformidad con el artículo 9 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2015/61 de la Comisión (2) antes de aplicar el mecanismo de ajuste establecido en el artículo 17, apartado 2, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2015/61.

EU 16a

Salidas de efectivo — Valor ponderado total

Las entidades divulgarán la suma del valor ponderado de sus salidas de efectivo, según se indica en el anexo XIII (fila 16 de la plantilla EU LIQ1 - Información cuantitativa de la ratio de cobertura de liquidez).

EU 16b

Entradas de efectivo — Valor ponderado total

Las entidades divulgarán la suma del valor ponderado de sus entradas de efectivo, según se indica en el anexo XIII (fila 20 de la plantilla EU LIQ1 - Información cuantitativa de la ratio de cobertura de liquidez).

16

Total de salidas netas de efectivo (valor ajustado)

Las entidades comunicarán como valor ajustado la salida neta de liquidez, que será igual al total de salidas, menos la reducción correspondiente a las entradas totalmente exentas, menos la reducción correspondiente a las entradas sujetas al límite máximo del 90 %, menos la reducción correspondiente a las entradas sujetas al límite máximo del 75 %.

17

Ratio de cobertura de liquidez (%)

Las entidades comunicarán como valor ajustado el porcentaje de la partida «ratio de cobertura de liquidez (%)», tal como se define en el artículo 4, apartado 1, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2015/61.

La ratio de cobertura de liquidez será igual a la ratio entre el colchón de liquidez de una entidad de crédito y sus salidas netas de liquidez durante un período de tensión de 30 días naturales, y se expresará en porcentaje.

18

Total de financiación estable disponible

Las entidades comunicarán el importe de la financiación estable disponible calculado de conformidad con la parte sexta, título IV, capítulo 3, del RRC, tal como figura en el anexo XIII (fila 14 de la plantilla EU LIQ2 — Ratio de financiación estable neta).

19

Total de financiación estable total requerida

Las entidades comunicarán el importe de la financiación estable exigida calculado de conformidad con la parte sexta, título IV, capítulo 4, del RRC, tal como figura en el anexo XIII (fila 33 de la plantilla EU LIQ2 — Ratio de financiación estable neta).

20

Ratio de financiación estable neta (%)

Ratio de financiación estable neta calculada con arreglo al artículo 428 ter del RRC.

(1)   

Directrices de la Autoridad Bancaria Europea de 19 de julio de 2018 sobre procedimientos y metodologías comunes para el proceso de revisión y evaluación supervisora y las pruebas de resistencia supervisoras (EBA/GL/2018/03).

(2)   

Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2015/61 de la Comisión, de 10 de octubre de 2014, por el que se completa el Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo en lo que atañe al requisito de cobertura de liquidez aplicable a las entidades de crédito (DO L 11 de 17.1.2015, p. 1).

Plantilla EU INS1 – Participaciones en seguros. Formato fijo.

4. Las entidades seguirán las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU INS1, que se recoge en el anexo I, en aplicación del artículo 438, letra f), del RRC.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de columna

Explicación

a

Valor de exposición

El valor de exposición de los instrumentos de fondos propios mantenidos en cualquier empresa de seguros, empresa de reaseguros o sociedad de cartera de seguros que las entidades no deduzcan de sus fondos propios de conformidad con el artículo 49 del RRC cuando calculen sus requisitos de capital en base individual, subconsolidada y consolidada.

b

Importe de la exposición al riesgo

El importe de la exposición al riesgo de los instrumentos de fondos propios mantenidos en cualquier empresa de seguros, empresa de reaseguros o sociedad de cartera de seguros que las entidades no deduzcan de sus fondos propios de conformidad con el artículo 49 del RRC cuando calculen sus requisitos de capital en base individual, subconsolidada y consolidada.

Plantilla EU INS2 – Conglomerados financieros – Información sobre fondos propios y ratio de adecuación del capital. Formato fijo.

5. Las entidades seguirán las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU INS2, que se recoge en el anexo I del presente Reglamento de Ejecución, en aplicación del artículo 438, letra g), del RRC.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1

Requisitos adicionales de fondos propios del conglomerado financiero (importe)

El importe de los requisitos adicionales de fondos propios del conglomerado financiero calculado de conformidad con el artículo 6 de la Directiva 2002/87/CE del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo (1) y el anexo I de dicha Directiva cuando se apliquen los métodos 1 o 2 establecidos en el anexo I.

2

Ratio de adecuación del capital del conglomerado financiero (%)

La ratio de adecuación del capital del conglomerado financiero calculada de conformidad con el artículo 6 de la Directiva 2002/87/CE y el anexo I de dicha Directiva cuando se apliquen los métodos 1 o 2 establecidos en el anexo I.

(1)   

Directiva 2002/87/CE del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, de 16 de diciembre de 2002, relativa a la supervisión adicional de las entidades de crédito, empresas de seguros y empresas de inversión de un conglomerado financiero, y por la que se modifican las Directivas 73/239/CEE, 79/267/CEE, 92/49/CEE, 92/96/CEE, 93/6/CEE y 93/22/CEE del Consejo y las Directivas 98/78/CE y 2000/12/CE del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo (DO L 35 de 11.2.2003, p. 1).

Cuadro EU OVC – Información del proceso de evaluación de la adecuación del capital interno. Formato flexible

6. Las entidades seguirán las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU OVC, que se recoge en el anexo I, en aplicación del artículo 438, letras a) y c), del RRC.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

a)

Método de evaluación de la adecuación del capital interno.

Las entidades publicarán un resumen de su método de evaluación de la adecuación de su capital interno para apoyar las actividades actuales y futuras.

b)

A petición de la autoridad competente pertinente, el resultado del proceso de evaluación de la adecuación del capital interno de la entidad.

Las entidades solo divulgarán esta información cuando así lo exija la autoridad competente pertinente.

ANEXO III

ANEXO III


Cuadro EU OVA – Método de gestión del riesgo de las instituciones

Casillas de texto de formato libre para la divulgación de información cualitativa

Base jurídica

Número de fila

Información cualitativa – Formato libre

Artículo 435, apartado 1, letra f), del RRC.

a)

Divulgación de una declaración de riesgo concisa aprobada por el órgano de dirección.

Artículo 435, apartado 1, letra b), del RRC.

b)

Información sobre la estructura de la gobernanza del riesgo para cada tipo de riesgo.

Artículo 435, apartado 1, letra e), del RRC.

c)

Declaración aprobada por el órgano de dirección sobre la adecuación de los mecanismos de gestión del riesgo.

Artículo 435, apartado 1, letra c), del RRC.

d)

Divulgación del alcance y la naturaleza de los sistemas de divulgación o medición del riesgo.

Artículo 435, apartado 1, letra c), del RRC.

e)

Divulgar información sobre las principales características de los sistemas de medición del riesgo y de divulgación de información al respecto.

Artículo 435, apartado 1, letra a), del RRC.

f)

Estrategias y procesos para gestionar los riesgos para cada categoría de riesgo.

Artículo 435, apartado 1, letras a) y d), del RRC.

g)

Información sobre las estrategias y los procesos para gestionar, cubrir y reducir los riesgos, así como sobre el seguimiento de la eficacia de las coberturas y las técnicas de reducción.


Cuadro EU OVB – Información sobre los mecanismos de gobernanza

Casillas de texto de formato libre para la divulgación de información cualitativa

Base jurídica

Número de fila

Formato libre

Artículo 435, apartado 2, letra a), del RRC.

a)

El número de cargos directivos que ocupan los miembros del órgano de dirección.

Artículo 435, apartado 2, letra b), del RRC.

b)

Información relativa a la política de contratación para la selección de los miembros del órgano de dirección y sus conocimientos, competencias y experiencia.

Artículo 435, apartado 2, letra c), del RRC.

c)

Información sobre la política de diversidad con respecto a los miembros del órgano de dirección.

Artículo 435, apartado 2, letra d), del RRC.

d)

Información sobre si la institución ha creado o no un comité de riesgos independiente y acerca de la frecuencia de las reuniones.

Artículo 435, apartado 2, letra e), del RRC.

e)

Descripción del flujo de información sobre riesgos al órgano de dirección.

ANEXO IV

ANEXO IV

Instrucciones para la divulgación de los objetivos y las políticas de gestión del riesgo

Cuadro EU OVA – Método de gestión del riesgo de la entidad: Casillas de texto de formato libre para la divulgación de información cualitativa.

1. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 435, apartado 1, del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 ( 6 ) (RRC) siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU OVA, que se recoge en el anexo III del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

a)

La breve declaración sobre riesgos aprobada por el órgano de dirección en aplicación del artículo 435, apartado 1, letra f), del RRC describirá cómo el modelo de negocio determina e interactúa con el perfil de riesgo global: por ejemplo, los principales riesgos relacionados con el modelo de negocio y cómo se refleja y describe cada uno de estos riesgos en la divulgación de información sobre el riesgo, o cómo interactúa el perfil de riesgo de la entidad con la tolerancia al riesgo aprobada por el órgano de dirección.

En la declaración sobre riesgos en aplicación del artículo 435, apartado 1, letra f), del RRC, las entidades informarán de la naturaleza, el alcance, el propósito y el contenido económico de las operaciones importantes dentro del grupo, las filiales y las partes vinculadas. La comunicación se limitará a las operaciones que tienen un efecto significativo en el perfil de riesgo de la entidad (incluido el riesgo de reputación) o en la distribución de riesgos dentro del grupo. Las entidades también incluirán ratios y cifras clave que muestren cómo interactúa su perfil de riesgo con la tolerancia al riesgo establecida por el órgano de dirección.

b)

La información que debe divulgarse en aplicación del artículo 435, apartado 1, letra b), del RRC incluye la estructura de gobernanza del riesgo para cada tipo de riesgo: las responsabilidades atribuidas en todos los niveles de la entidad (incluidas, cuando proceda, la supervisión y delegación de responsabilidad y el desglose de responsabilidades entre el órgano de dirección, las líneas de negocio y la función de gestión de riesgos por tipo de riesgo, unidad de negocio y otra información pertinente); las relaciones entre los órganos y las funciones que intervienen en los procesos de gestión de riesgos (incluidos, en su caso, el órgano de dirección, el comité de riesgos, la función de gestión de riesgos, la función de verificación del cumplimiento y la función de auditoría interna); y los procedimientos organizativos y de control interno.

Cuando se divulgue la estructura y la organización de la función de gestión del riesgo pertinente, las entidades complementarán la divulgación con la siguiente información:

— Información sobre el marco de control interno general y sobre cómo están organizadas sus funciones de control (competencias, recursos, rango, independencia), las principales tareas que realizan y cualquier modificación relevante real o prevista de estas funciones.

— Los límites aprobados de riesgos a los que está expuesta la entidad.

— Las modificaciones de los responsables del control interno, la gestión del riesgo, el cumplimiento y la auditoría interna.

— Vías de comunicación, deterioro y cumplimiento de la cultura de riesgo dentro de la entidad (por ejemplo, si existen códigos de conducta, manuales que incluyan límites operativos o procedimientos para tratar las violaciones o incumplimientos de los umbrales de riesgo o procedimientos para plantear y compartir asuntos relacionados con el riesgo entre las líneas de negocio y las funciones de riesgo).

c)

La declaración que las entidades divulgarán, de conformidad con el artículo 435, apartado 1, letra e), del RRC, sobre la adecuación de los mecanismos de gestión del riesgo, debe ser aprobada por el órgano de dirección y ofrecer garantías de que los sistemas de gestión del riesgo establecidos son adecuados, teniendo en cuenta el perfil de riesgo de la entidad y su estrategia.

d)

Dentro de la información exigida por el artículo 435, apartado 1, letra c), del RRC, las entidades indicarán el alcance y la naturaleza de la información sobre riesgos divulgada o los sistemas de medición, y facilitarán una descripción del flujo de información sobre el riesgo hasta el órgano de dirección y la alta dirección.

e)

Cuando se proporcione información sobre las características principales de los sistemas de medición del riesgo y de divulgación de información al respecto en aplicación del artículo 435, apartado 1, letra c), del RRC, las entidades divulgarán sus políticas relativas a las revisiones sistemáticas y periódicas de las estrategias de gestión del riesgo así como la evaluación periódica de su eficacia.

f)

La información divulgada sobre las estrategias y los procesos de gestión del riesgo en aplicación del artículo 435, apartado 1, letra a), del RRC incluirá información cualitativa sobre las pruebas de resistencia, como las carteras sujetas a pruebas de resistencia, los escenarios adoptados y las metodologías utilizadas, así como el uso de dichas pruebas en la gestión del riesgo.

g)

Las entidades proporcionarán información sobre las estrategias y los procesos de gestión, cobertura y reducción del riesgo, así como sobre el control de la eficacia de las coberturas y las técnicas de reducción con arreglo al artículo 435, apartado 1, letras a) y d), del RRC, para los riesgos que surgen del modelo de negocio de las entidades.

Cuadro EU OVB – Información sobre los mecanismos de gobernanza: Casillas de texto de formato libre para la divulgación de información cualitativa

2. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 435, apartado 2, del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU OVB, que se recoge en el anexo III del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

a)

Las entidades divulgarán el número de cargos directivos que ocupan los miembros del órgano de dirección con arreglo al artículo 435, apartado 2, letra a), del RRC. Cuando se divulgue esta información, se aplicarán las siguientes especificaciones:

— Las entidades incluidas en el ámbito de aplicación del artículo 91, apartados 3 y 4, de la Directiva 2013/36/UE (1) (DRC) harán público el número de cargos directivos contabilizados según dicho artículo.

— Las entidades divulgarán el número de cargos directivos que cada miembro del órgano de dirección ocupa efectivamente (indicando si es una empresa del grupo o no, una participación cualificada o una entidad dentro del mismo sistema institucional de protección y si la dirección es ejecutiva o no ejecutiva), con independencia de si el cargo directivo está en una entidad que no persigue un fin comercial.

— En los casos en que la autoridad competente hubiera aprobado un cargo directivo adicional, todas las entidades en las que el miembro ocupe un cargo directivo informarán de este hecho, junto con el nombre de la autoridad competente que aprobó la existencia de dicho cargo adicional.

b)

Al divulgar información sobre la política de contratación para la selección de los miembros del órgano de dirección de conformidad con el artículo 435, apartado 2, letra b), del RRC, las entidades incluirán información sobre los conocimientos, competencias y experiencia reales de los miembros. Las entidades incluirán información sobre esta política que pueda derivarse de la planificación de la sucesión y sobre cualquier cambio previsible dentro de la composición general del órgano de dirección.

c)

Cuando divulguen su política de diversidad de conformidad con el artículo 435, apartado 2, letra c), del RRC, las entidades divulgarán información sobre los objetivos y las metas pertinentes establecidos en dicha política, así como sobre en qué medida se han alcanzado dichos objetivos y metas.

En particular, las entidades divulgarán la política en materia de diversidad de género, en particular:

— Los casos en que se ha establecido un objetivo respecto del género infrarrepresentado y respecto de las políticas en materia de diversidad en términos de edad, formación, experiencia profesional y procedencia geográfica; el objetivo establecido y la medida en que se han cumplido los objetivos.

— En los casos en que no se cumpla un objetivo, las entidades comunicarán los motivos y, cuando proceda, las medidas adoptadas para cumplir el objetivo en un determinado plazo.

d)

La entidad indicará si se ha creado un comité de riesgos independiente y el número de veces que el comité de riesgos se ha reunido de conformidad con el artículo 435, apartado 2, letra d), del RRC.

e)

Como parte de los datos relativos al flujo de información sobre riesgos destinada al órgano de dirección en aplicación del artículo 435, apartado 2, letra e), las entidades describirán el proceso por el que proporcionen información sobre el riesgo al órgano de dirección, en especial la frecuencia, el alcance y el principal contenido de la exposición al riesgo y cómo el órgano de dirección ha participado en la definición del contenido que debe divulgarse.

(1)   

Directiva 2013/36/UE del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, de 26 de junio de 2013, relativa al acceso a la actividad de las entidades de crédito y a la supervisión prudencial de las entidades de crédito y las empresas de inversión, por la que se modifica la Directiva 2002/87/CE y se derogan las Directivas 2006/48/CE y 2006/49/CE (DO L 176 de 27.6.2013, p. 338).

ANEXO V

ANEXO V


Plantilla EU LI1 – Diferencias entre el ámbito de consolidación contable y el ámbito de consolidación prudencial y correspondencia de las categorías de estados financieros con las categorías de riesgo reglamentario

 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

Valores contables según se publican en los estados financieros

Valores contables con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial

Valores contables de las partidas

Sujeto al marco de riesgo de crédito

Sujeto al marco de riesgo de crédito de contraparte

Sujeto al marco de titulización

Sujeto al marco de riesgo de mercado

No sujetas a requisitos de fondos propios o sujetas a deducción de los fondos propios

 

Desglose por clases de activos según el balance en los estados financieros publicados

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

…

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxx

Total activos

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Desglose por clases de pasivos según el balance en los estados financieros publicados

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

...

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxx

Total pasivos

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Plantilla EU LI2 – Principales fuentes de discrepancias entre las cuantías de las exposiciones con fines reguladores y los valores contables en los estados financieros

 

a

b

c

d

e

Total

Partidas sujetas a

Marco del riesgo de crédito

Marco de titulización

Marco de riesgo de crédito de contraparte

Marco de riesgo de mercado

1

Importe correspondiente al valor contable del activo en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial (según plantilla LI1)

 

 

 

 

 

2

Importe correspondiente al valor contable del pasivo en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial (según plantilla LI1)

 

 

 

 

 

3

Importe neto total en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial:

 

 

 

 

 

4

Saldos fuera del balance

 

 

 

 

 

5

Diferencias en las valoraciones

 

 

 

 

 

6

Diferencias debidas a normas de compensación distintas de las incluidas en la fila 2

 

 

 

 

 

7

Diferencias debidas a la consideración de las provisiones

 

 

 

 

 

8

Diferencias debidas al uso de técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito

 

 

 

 

 

9

Diferencias debidas a factores de conversión del crédito

 

 

 

 

 

10

Diferencias debidas a titulizaciones con transferencia de riesgo

 

 

 

 

 

11

Otras diferencias

 

 

 

 

 

12

Cuantías de las exposiciones con fines reguladores

 

 

 

 

 


Plantilla EU LI3 – Esquema de las diferencias en los ámbitos de consolidación (ente por ente)

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

Nombre de la entidad

Método de consolidación contable

Método de consolidación prudencial

Descripción del ente

Consolidación íntegra

Consolidación proporcional

Método de equivalencia

Ni consolidado ni deducido

Deducidas

 

Entidad A

Consolidación íntegra

X

 

 

 

 

Entidad de crédito

Ente N

Consolidación íntegra

 

X

 

 

 

Entidad de crédito

Ente Z

Consolidación íntegra

 

 

 

X

 

Entidad aseguradora

Ente AA

Consolidación íntegra

 

 

X

 

 

Sociedad de arrendamiento financiero no material


Cuadro EU LIA – Explicaciones de las discrepancias entre los importes de la exposición contable y la exposición con fines reguladores

Casillas de texto de formato libre para la divulgación de información cualitativa

Base jurídica

Número de fila

Información cualitativa – Formato libre

Artículo 436 ter del RRC

a)

Diferencias entre las columnas a) y b) de la plantilla EU LI1

Artículo 436 quinquies del RRC

b)

Información cualitativa sobre las principales fuentes de diferencias entre el ámbito contable y el ámbito reglamentario de consolidación que figura en la plantilla EU LI2


Cuadro EU LIB – Otras informaciones cualitativas sobre el ámbito de aplicación

Casillas de texto de formato libre para la divulgación de información cualitativa

Base jurídica

Número de fila

Información cualitativa – Formato libre

Artículo 436 septies del RRC

a)

Impedimento para la transferencia rápida de fondos propios o el reembolso de pasivo dentro del grupo

Artículo 436 octies del RRC

b)

Filiales no incluidas en la consolidación con fondos propios inferiores a lo exigido

Artículo 436 nonies RRC

c)

Uso de la excepción a que se refiere el artículo 7 del RRC o método de consolidación individual establecido en el artículo 9 del RRC

Artículo 436 octies del RRC

d)

Importe agregado en el que los fondos propios reales son inferiores a los exigidos en todas las filiales no incluidas en la consolidación


Plantilla EU PV1 — Ajustes de valoración prudente (PVA)

Formato fijo

 

a

b

c

d

e

EU e1

EU e2

f

g

h

Categoría de riesgo

AVA a nivel de categoría – Incertidumbre de valoración

Total a nivel de categoría tras diversificación

 

 

AVA a nivel de categoría

Valores participativos

Tipos de interés

Tipo de cambio

Crédito

Materias primas

AVA por diferenciales de crédito no devengados

AVA por costes de inversión y financiación

Del cual: Total enfoque principal de la cartera de negociación

Del cual: Total enfoque principal de la cartera bancaria

1

Incertidumbre de precios de mercado

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

No aplicable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Coste de cierre

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Posiciones concentradas

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Cese anticipado

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Riesgo de modelo

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Riesgo operativo

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

No aplicable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

No aplicable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

Costes administrativos futuros

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

No aplicable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

Total ajustes de valoración adicionales

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANEXO VI

ANEXO VI

Instrucciones para la divulgación de información sobre el ámbito de aplicación del marco reglamentario

Plantilla EU LI1 – Diferencias entre los ámbitos de consolidación contable y consolidación prudencial y correspondencia de las categorías de los estados financieros con las categorías de riesgo reglamentarias. Formato flexible

1. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 436, letra c), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 ( 7 ) (RRC) siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU LI1, que se recoge en el anexo V del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1 a XXX

Total activo

La estructura de las filas será la misma que la estructura de las filas del balance utilizada en el último informe financiero disponible de la entidad.

«Informes financieros»: los estados financieros anuales individuales o consolidados definidos en los artículos 4 y 24 de la Directiva 2013/34/UE (1), así como (en su caso) los estados financieros en el sentido de las normas internacionales de contabilidad adoptadas en la UE en aplicación del Reglamento (CE) n.o 1606/2002 (2).

1 a XXX

Total pasivo

La estructura de las filas será la misma que la estructura de las filas del balance utilizada en el último informe financiero disponible de la entidad.

«Informes financieros»: los estados financieros anuales individuales o consolidados definidos en los artículos 4 y 24 de la Directiva 2013/34/UE, así como (en su caso) los estados financieros en el sentido de las normas internacionales de contabilidad adoptadas en la UE en aplicación del Reglamento (CE) n.o 1606/2002.

(1)   

Directiva 2013/34/UE del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, de 26 de junio de 2013, sobre los estados financieros anuales, los estados financieros consolidados y otros informes afines de ciertos tipos de empresas, por la que se modifica la Directiva 2006/43/CE del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo y se derogan las Directivas 78/660/CEE y 83/349/CEE del Consejo (DO L 182 de 29.6.2013, p. 19).

(2)   

Reglamento (CE) n.o 1606/2002 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, de 19 de julio de 2002, relativo a la aplicación de normas internacionales de contabilidad (DO L 243 de 11.9.2002, p. 1).


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Referencia de la columna

Explicación

a

Valores en libros según se publican en los estados financieros

El importe comunicado en el activo y en el pasivo del balance determinado con arreglo a los requisitos de consolidación del marco contable aplicable, incluidos los marcos basados en las Directivas 2013/34/UE y 86/635/CEE (1) o en las normas internacionales de contabilidad adoptadas en la UE.

b

Valores en libros con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial

Importe comunicado en el activo y en el pasivo del balance determinado con arreglo a los requisitos de consolidación reglamentaria de la parte primera, título II, secciones 2 y 3, del RRC.

Si el ámbito de consolidación contable coincide exactamente con el ámbito de consolidación prudencial las columnas a y b de esta plantilla se fusionarán.

c

Valores en libros de los elementos sujetos al marco relativo al riesgo de crédito

Importes en libros incluidos en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial de las partidas (distintas de las partidas fuera de balance) a las que se aplica la parte tercera, título II, capítulos 2 y 3, del RRC.

d

Valores en libros de los elementos sujetos al marco relativo al riesgo de contraparte

Importes en libros incluidos en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial de las partidas (distintas de las partidas fuera de balance) a las que se aplica la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 6, del RRC.

e

Valores en libros de los elementos sujetos al marco de titulización

Importes en libros incluidos en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial de las partidas (distintas de las partidas fuera de balance) correspondientes a la cartera de inversión a las que se aplica la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 5, del RRC.

f

Valores en libros de los elementos sujetos al marco relativo al riesgo de mercado

Importes en libros incluidos en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial de las partidas (distintas de las partidas fuera de balance) a las que se aplica la parte tercera, título IV, del RRC. En esta columna se incluirán las partidas correspondientes a posiciones de titulización de la cartera de negociación a las que se aplican los requisitos de la parte tercera, título IV, del RRC.

g

Valores en libros de elementos no sujetos a requisitos de fondos propios o sujetos a deducción de los fondos propios

Importes en libros incluidos en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial de las partidas (distintas de las partidas fuera de balance) no sujetas a los requisitos de fondos propios de conformidad con el RRC; importes en libros incluidos en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial de las partidas (distintas de las partidas fuera de balance) sujetas a deducciones de los fondos propios de conformidad con la parte segunda del RRC.

Las partidas deducidas podrán incluir, por ejemplo, las partidas que se indican en los artículos 37, 38, 39 y 41 del RRC.

Los importes de los activos serán los importes ya deducidos de los fondos propios, teniendo en cuenta cualquier compensación con los pasivos (y cualquier umbral) autorizados por la deducción aplicable, tal como se indica en los artículos correspondientes de la parte segunda del RRC.

Cuando los elementos enumerados en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra k), y en el artículo 48 del RRC reciban una ponderación de riesgo del 1 250  % en lugar de ser deducidos, no se divulgarán en la columna g de esta plantilla, sino en las demás columnas pertinentes de la plantilla EU LI1. Esto se aplica asimismo a cualquier otra partida cuya ponderación de riesgo es del 1 250  % con arreglo a los requisitos del RRC.

Los importes de los pasivos serán los importes de los pasivos que deben tenerse en cuenta para determinar el importe de los activos que deberán deducirse de los fondos propios, según lo dispuesto en los correspondientes artículos de la parte segunda del RRC. Además, todos los pasivos distintos de los que i) sean pertinentes para la aplicación de los requisitos de la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 4, del RRC, o ii) sean pertinentes para la aplicación de los requisitos de la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 6, y de la parte tercera, título IV, del RRC se divulgarán en esta columna.

Todas

Cuando una misma partida lleve asociados requisitos de capital con arreglo a más de un marco de riesgo, los valores se divulgarán en todas las columnas correspondientes a los requisitos de capital a los que estén asociados. Como consecuencia, la suma de los valores de las columnas c a g de esta plantilla podrá ser mayor que el valor de la columna b de esta plantilla. Las entidades proporcionarán explicaciones cualitativas sobre los activos y pasivos que están sujetos a requisitos de capital con arreglo a varios de los marcos de riesgos enumerados en la parte tercera del RRC.

(1)   

Directiva 86/635/CEE del Consejo, de 8 de diciembre de 1986, relativa a las cuentas anuales y a las cuentas consolidadas de los bancos y otras entidades financieras (DO L 372 de 31.12.1986, p. 1).

Plantilla EU LI2 – Principales fuentes de discrepancias entre las cuantías de las exposiciones con fines reguladores y los valores contables en los estados financieros. Formato fijo.

2. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 436, letra d), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU LI2, que se recoge en el anexo V del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1

Importe en libros de los activos con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial

Los importes de las columnas b a e de esta plantilla serán los mismos que los importes de las columnas c a f de la plantilla EU LI1.

2

Importe en libros de los pasivos con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial

Los importes de las columnas b a e de esta plantilla serán los mismos que los importes de las columnas c a f de la plantilla EU LI1.

3

Importe neto total con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial

Importe tras la compensación dentro de balance entre activos y pasivos con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial, con independencia de si dichos activos y pasivos son idóneos para la aplicación de las normas específicas de compensación según lo dispuesto en la parte tercera, título II, capítulos 4 y 5, así como título IV, del RRC.

El importe de esta fila será igual al valor de la fila 1 menos el valor de la fila 2 de esta plantilla.

4

Importes fuera de balance

Incluirán las exposiciones originales fuera de balance, antes de utilizar un factor de conversión, cuando proceda, del estado fuera de balance establecido, siguiendo el ámbito de consolidación prudencial de las columnas a a d de esta plantilla.

5

Diferencias en las valoraciones

Efecto del importe en libros de los ajustes de valoración, con arreglo a lo dispuesto en la parte segunda, título I, capítulo 2, artículo 34, y la parte tercera, título I, capítulo 3, artículo 105, del RRC tanto de las exposiciones de la cartera de negociación como de la cartera de inversión valoradas al valor razonable con arreglo al marco contable aplicable.

Este importe será coherente con el importe de la fila 7 de la plantilla EU CC1, así como con el importe de la fila 12, columna f, de la plantilla EU PV1.

6

Diferencias debidas a normas de compensación distintas de las incluidas en la fila 2 de esta plantilla

Esta partida se refiere a los importes netos de las exposiciones fuera de balance y dentro de balance después de aplicar las normas de compensación específicas de la parte tercera, título II, capítulos 4 y 5, así como de la parte tercera, título IV del RRC. El efecto de la aplicación de las normas de compensación podrá ser negativo (en caso de que se deban compensar más exposiciones de lo que resulta del uso de la compensación dentro de balance de la fila 2 de esta plantilla) o positivo (en caso de que la aplicación de las normas de compensación del RRC dé como resultado un valor inferior a compensar que el de la compensación dentro de balance de la fila 2 de esta plantilla).

7

Diferencias debidas a la consideración de las provisiones

Reintegración en el valor de exposición de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico y por riesgo de crédito general (tal como quedan definidos en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 183/2014 de la Comisión (1)) que hayan sido deducidos, con arreglo al marco contable aplicable, del importe en libros de las exposiciones de conformidad con lo dispuesto en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 3, del RRC a efectos de ponderación de riesgo. Respecto de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo con arreglo a lo dispuesto en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, del RRC, cuando el importe en libros de los estados financieros con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial haya sido reducido con elementos clasificados como ajustes por riesgo de crédito general con arreglo a lo dispuesto en el mencionado Reglamento Delegado, estos elementos serán reintegrados en el valor de exposición.

8

Diferencias debidas al uso de técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito

Impacto en el valor de exposición con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial de la aplicación de técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito, tal como se definen en el RRC.

9

Diferencias debidas a factores de conversión del crédito

Impacto en el valor de exposición de las exposiciones fuera de balance con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial de la aplicación de los factores de conversión pertinentes de conformidad con el RRC.

El factor de conversión para las partidas fuera de balance que deban ponderarse por riesgo en aplicación de la parte tercera, título II, del RRC se determinará de conformidad con los artículos 111, 166, 167 y 182 (según proceda, para el riesgo de crédito) y con el artículo 246 del RRC (según proceda, para el riesgo de titulización).

10

Diferencias debidas a titulizaciones con transferencia de riesgo

Impacto en el valor de exposición de las exposiciones titulizadas del uso de operaciones titulizadas para transferir el riesgo de crédito a terceros de conformidad con el RRC.

11

Otras diferencias (si procede)

Otros factores determinantes de las diferencias entre los valores en libros de los estados financieros dentro del ámbito de consolidación reglamentario y los importes de exposición considerados a efectos reglamentarios

Las entidades complementarán la información cuantitativa incluida en esta fila con explicaciones cualitativas sobre los principales factores determinantes de estas diferencias en el cuadro EU LIA.

12

Importes de las exposiciones con fines reglamentarios

Importe agregado considerado como punto de partida del cálculo de la exposición ponderada por riesgo después de aplicar los métodos de reducción del riesgo de crédito distintos de la compensación de la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 4, del RRC y después de aplicar los requisitos de compensación de la parte tercera, título II, capítulos 4 y 5, y de la parte tercera, título IV, del RRC para cada categoría de riesgo.

En caso de que se aplique el método estándar, se trata del valor tras los ajustes de crédito específicos, los ajustes de valoración adicionales de conformidad con los artículos 34 y 110 del RRC y otras reducciones de fondos propios relacionadas con el activo considerado. Para las partidas fuera de balance enumeradas en el anexo I del presente Reglamento de Ejecución, el valor de exposición será el valor nominal tras la reducción de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico, multiplicado por el porcentaje aplicable mencionado en el artículo 111, apartado 1, letras a) y d), del RRC.

En el método IRB, el valor divulgado será el valor de exposición en el sentido de los artículos 166, 167 y 168 del RRC.

Así pues, los valores en libros comunicados en los estados financieros con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial se indicarán en las filas correspondientes 1 a 3 de esta plantilla, mientras que las exposiciones originales fuera de balance se divulgarán en la fila 4 de esta plantilla. Cualquier adición o reducción reglamentaria específica relativa a estos importes debe incluirse en las filas 5 a 11 de esta plantilla para explicar cómo conciliar estos importes con el importe de la exposición que se toma, a efectos reglamentarios, como punto de partida del cálculo de la exposición ponderada por riesgo de conformidad con cada uno de los marcos mencionados en las columnas b a e de esta plantilla. Esto significa que, en particular en lo que respecta al riesgo de crédito, los importes de las exposiciones considerados a efectos reglamentarios en la fila 12 de esta plantilla serán diferentes de los valores en libros comunicados en los estados financieros con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial, debido al tratamiento normativo particular de las provisiones contables para el cálculo de la exposición ponderada por riesgo.

(1)   

Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 183/2014 de la Comisión, de 20 de diciembre de 2013, por el que se completa el Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, sobre los requisitos prudenciales de las entidades de crédito y las empresas de inversión, en lo que respecta a las normas técnicas de regulación para especificar el cálculo de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico y por riesgo de crédito general (DO L 57 de 27.2.2014, p. 3).


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Referencia de la columna

Explicación

a

Total

Total en la columna a) de la plantilla EU LI2 = Importes en la columna b de la plantilla EU LI1 – Importes en la columna g de la plantilla EU LI1.

 

El desglose de columnas en las categorías de riesgo reglamentarias b a e corresponde al desglose incluido en la parte tercera del RRC:

b

Marco del riesgo de crédito

Exposiciones contempladas en la parte tercera, título II, del RRC.

Las exposiciones sujetas al marco del riesgo de crédito corresponderán bien al importe de la exposición aplicado en el método estándar para el riesgo de crédito (véase la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, artículo 111, del RRC), bien a las exposiciones en caso de impago (EAD) en el método IRB para el riesgo de crédito (véanse los artículos 166, 167 y 168 de la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 3, del RRC).

c

Marco de titulización

Exposiciones de la cartera de inversión incluidas en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 5, del RRC.

Las exposiciones de titulización se determinarán de conformidad con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 5, artículo 246, del RRC.

d

Marco del riesgo de contraparte

Exposiciones contempladas en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 6, del RRC.

e

Marco del riesgo de mercado

Las exposiciones al riesgo de mercado correspondientes a las posiciones sujetas al marco del riesgo de mercado de la parte tercera, título IV, del RRC.

Solo se divulgarán las filas 1 a 3 y 12 de esta plantilla en lo que respecta a esta columna.

Todas

Cuando un solo elemento esté sujeto a requisitos de capital con arreglo a más de un marco de riesgo, se divulgará en todas las columnas pertinentes correspondientes a los requisitos de capital. Como consecuencia, la suma de los valores de las columnas b a e de esta plantilla podrá ser mayor que el valor de la columna a de esta plantilla. Las entidades proporcionarán explicaciones cualitativas sobre los activos y pasivos que están sujetos a requisitos de capital con arreglo a varios de los marcos de riesgos enumerados en la parte tercera del RRC.

Plantilla EU LI3 – Esquema de las diferencias en los ámbitos de consolidación (ente por ente)

3. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 436, letra b), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU LI3, que se recoge en el anexo V del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

 

Las filas son flexibles. Se proporcionará información respecto de los entes incluidos dentro de los ámbitos contable y reglamentario de consolidación, definidos con arreglo al marco contable aplicable y a lo dispuesto en la parte primera, título II, secciones 2 y 3, del RRC, cuyo método de consolidación contable es diferente del método de consolidación reglamentaria. Una fila por ente.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Referencia de la columna

Explicación

a

Nombre del ente

Nombre comercial de cualquier ente incluido o deducido del ámbito reglamentario y contable de consolidación de una entidad.

b

Método de consolidación contable

Método de consolidación utilizado con arreglo al marco contable aplicable.

c a g

Método de consolidación reglamentaria

Método de consolidación aplicado a efectos de la parte primera, título II, capítulo 2, del RRC.

Como mínimo, se comunicarán los métodos enumerados en el artículo 436, letra b), del RRC.

Las entidades marcarán las columnas pertinentes para determinar el método de consolidación de cada ente con arreglo al marco contable y si, en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial, cada ente está i) consolidado plenamente; ii) consolidado proporcionalmente; iii) reconocido según el método de la participación; iv) ni consolidado ni deducido; o v) deducido.

h

Descripción del ente

Breve descripción del ente, con indicación (como mínimo) de su sector de actividad.

Cuadro EU LIA – Explicaciones de las discrepancias entre los importes de las exposiciones contables y reglamentarios. Casillas de texto de formato libre para la divulgación de información cualitativa.

4. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 436, letras b) y d), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU LIA, que se recoge en el anexo V del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

a)

Las entidades explicarán y cuantificarán el origen de todas las discrepancias significativas entre los valores de las columnas a y b en la plantilla EU LI1, con independencia de si las mismas derivan de la aplicación de distintas normas de consolidación o del uso de distintas normas de contabilidad entre la consolidación reglamentaria y contable.

b)

Las entidades explicarán el origen de las diferencias entre los valores en libros con arreglo al ámbito de consolidación prudencial y los importes considerados a efectos reglamentarios que se muestran en la plantilla EU LI2.

Cuadro EU LIB – Otras informaciones cualitativas sobre el ámbito de aplicación. Casillas de texto de formato libre para la divulgación de información cualitativa.

5. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 436, letras f), g) y h), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU LIB, que se recoge en el anexo V del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

a)

Las entidades divulgarán cualquier impedimento práctico o jurídico significativo, actual o previsto, para la transferencia rápida de fondos propios o el reembolso de pasivos entre la empresa matriz y sus filiales.

b)

Cuando proceda, las entidades divulgarán el nombre o nombres de las filiales que no estén incluidas en la consolidación.

c)

Cuando proceda, las entidades divulgarán las circunstancias en las que se haga uso de la excepción a que se refiere el artículo 7 del RRC o del método de consolidación individual establecido en el artículo 9 del RRC.

d)

Cuando proceda, las entidades divulgarán el importe agregado en el que los fondos propios reales sean inferiores a los exigidos en todas las filiales que no estén incluidas en la consolidación, así como el nombre o nombres de dichas filiales.

Plantilla EU PV1 – Ajustes de valoración prudente (PVA): Formato fijo.

6. Las entidades que apliquen el enfoque principal para determinar el ajuste de valoración adicional por valoración prudente de conformidad con el capítulo III del Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 2016/101 de la Comisión ( 8 ) divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 436, letra e), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU PV1, que se recoge en el anexo V del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

Filas 1 a 10

AVA a nivel de categoría

Los AVA a nivel de categoría por incertidumbre de los precios de mercado, costes de cierre, riesgo de modelo, posiciones concentradas, costes administrativos futuros, cancelación anticipada y riesgo operativo se determinarán de conformidad con los artículos 9 a 11 y 14 a 17, respectivamente, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

Para las categorías de incertidumbre de los precios de mercado, costes de cierre y riesgo de modelo, en las que son aplicables beneficios de diversificación según lo establecido en el artículo 9, apartado 6, el artículo 10, apartado 7, y el artículo 11, apartado 7, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101, respectivamente, los AVA a nivel de categoría se divulgarán en las columnas a a EU-e2 de esta plantilla como la suma directa de los AVA individuales antes del beneficio de diversificación. Los beneficios de diversificación de conformidad con el artículo 9, apartado 6, el artículo 10, apartado 7, y el artículo 11, apartado 7, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión se incluirán en la columna f de esta plantilla.

1

Incertidumbre de precios de mercado

Artículo 105, apartado 10, del RRC

Los AVA por incertidumbre de los precios de mercado se calcularán de conformidad con el artículo 9 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

2

No aplicable.

3

Costes de cierre

Artículo 105, apartado 10, del RRC

Los AVA por costes de cierre se calcularán de conformidad con el artículo 10 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

4

Posiciones concentradas

Artículo 105, apartado 11, del RRC

Los AVA por posiciones concentradas se calcularán de conformidad con el artículo 14 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

5

Cancelación anticipada

Artículo 105, apartado 10, del RRC

Los AVA por cancelación anticipada se calcularán de conformidad con el artículo 16 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

6

Riesgo de modelo

Artículo 105, apartado 10, del RRC

Los AVA por riesgo de modelo se calcularán de conformidad con el artículo 11 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

7

Riesgo operativo

Artículo 105, apartado 10, del RRC

Los AVA por riesgo operativo se calcularán de conformidad con el artículo 17 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

8

No aplicable.

9

No aplicable.

10

Costes administrativos futuros

Artículo 105, apartado 10, del RRC

Los AVA por costes administrativos futuros se calcularán de conformidad con el artículo 15 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

11

No aplicable.

12

Total de ajustes de valoración adicionales

El total de AVA que deben deducirse de los fondos propios con arreglo a los artículos 34 y 105 del RRC se consignará en la fila 12, columna f, de esta plantilla. Este importe será coherente con el importe de la fila 7 de la plantilla EU CC1, así como con el importe de la fila 5, columna a, de la plantilla EU LI2.

En el caso de las carteras sujetas al enfoque principal establecido en el capítulo III del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101, sobre valoración prudente, el total de AVA será la suma de los importes de las filas 1 a 10 de esta plantilla y los importes calculados de conformidad con el artículo 7, apartado 2, letra b), incisos i) a iii), del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101, para las carteras sujetas al enfoque alternativo, en su caso.

En el caso de las carteras sujetas al enfoque simplificado establecido en el capítulo II del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101, sobre valoración prudente, el total de AVA incluido en la columna f de esta plantilla será el importe calculado de conformidad con el artículo 5 de dicho capítulo.

Letra de la columna

Explicación

a-e

Desglose por CATEGORÍA DE RIESGO

Las entidades asignarán sus activos y pasivos a valor razonable incluidos en el cálculo del umbral de conformidad con el artículo 4, apartado 1, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión (cartera de negociación y cartera de inversión) de acuerdo con las siguientes categorías de riesgo: tipos de interés, tipos de cambio, crédito, renta variable, materias primas.

El desglose de estas columnas excluye los AVA calculados de conformidad con los artículos 12 y 13 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión, que figuran en las columnas EU-e1 y EU-e2 de esta plantilla.

EU e1

AVA a nivel de categoría – Incertidumbre de valoración: AVA por diferenciales de crédito no devengados

Artículo 105, apartado 10, del RRC y artículo 12 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

El AVA total por diferenciales de crédito no devengados («AVA sobre AVC») y su distribución entre AVA por incertidumbre de los precios de mercado, costes de cierre o riesgo de modelo se determinarán de conformidad con el artículo 12 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

EU e2

AVA a nivel de categoría – AVA por costes de inversión y financiación

Artículo 105, apartado 10, del RRC y artículo 13 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

El AVA total por costes de inversión y financiación y su distribución entre AVA por incertidumbre de los precios de mercado, costes de cierre o riesgo de modelo se determinarán de conformidad con el artículo 13 del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

f

Total a nivel de categoría tras diversificación

En el caso de las carteras sujetas al enfoque principal establecido en el capítulo III del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión, el total a nivel de categoría tras diversificación englobará el total de AVA calculados de conformidad con el enfoque principal para los activos y pasivos a valor razonable incluidos en el cálculo del umbral de conformidad con el artículo 4, apartado 1, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión. Incluirá los beneficios de diversificación definidos con arreglo al artículo 9, apartado 6, al artículo 10, apartado 7, y al artículo 11, apartado 7, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

El total de AVA de la fila 12, columna f, de esta plantilla incluirá los importes calculados de conformidad con el artículo 7, apartado 2, letra b), incisos i) a iii), del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101, para las carteras sujetas al enfoque alternativo, en su caso.

En el caso de las carteras sujetas al enfoque simplificado establecido en el capítulo II del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101, sobre valoración prudente, el total de AVA incluido en la fila 12 de esta plantilla será el importe calculado de conformidad con el artículo 5 de dicho capítulo.

g

Del cual: total enfoque principal en la cartera de negociación

Por cada categoría pertinente de AVA, para las carteras sujetas al enfoque principal establecido en el capítulo III del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión, la parte de los AVA derivada de las posiciones mantenidas en la «cartera de negociación»: todas las posiciones en instrumentos financieros y materias primas que mantenga una entidad con fines de negociación o para cubrir posiciones mantenidas con fines de negociación de conformidad con el artículo 104 del RRC.

El valor divulgado incluirá los beneficios de diversificación definidos de conformidad con el artículo 9, apartado 6, el artículo 10, apartado 7, y el artículo 11, apartado 7, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

h

Del cual: total enfoque principal en la cartera bancaria

Por cada categoría pertinente de AVA, para las carteras sujetas al enfoque principal establecido en el capítulo III del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión, la parte de los AVA derivada de las posiciones valoradas a valor razonable en instrumentos financieros y materias primas no mantenidas en la cartera de negociación.

El valor divulgado incluirá los beneficios de diversificación determinados de conformidad con el artículo 9, apartado 6, el artículo 10, apartado 7, y el artículo 11, apartado 7, del Reglamento Delegado (UE) 2016/101 de la Comisión.

ANEXO VII

ANEXO VII

Plantilla EU CC1 – Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios


 

a)

b)

Importes

Fuente basada en números o letras de referencia del balance en el ámbito reglamentario de consolidación

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario instrumentos y reservas

1

Los instrumentos de capital y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión

 

h)

 

De los cuales: Tipo de instrumento 1

 

 

 

De los cuales: Tipo de instrumento 2

 

 

 

De los cuales: Tipo de instrumento 3

 

 

2

Ganancias acumuladas

 

 

3

Otro resultado integral acumulado (y otras reservas)

 

 

EU-3a

Fondos para riesgos bancarios generales.

 

 

4

Importe de los elementos a que se refiere el artículo 484, apartado 3, del RRC y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 ordinario

 

 

5

Participaciones minoritarias (importe admitido en el capital de nivel 1 ordinario consolidado).

 

 

EU-5 a

Beneficios provisionales verificados de forma independiente, netos de todo posible gasto o dividendo previsible.

 

 

6

Capital ordinario de nivel 1 antes de los ajustes reglamentarios

 

 

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario ajustes reglamentarios

7

Ajustes de valor adicionales (importe negativo).

 

 

8

Activos intangibles (neto de deuda tributaria) (importe negativo).

 

a) menos d)

9

No aplicable.

 

 

10

Los activos por impuestos diferidos que dependen de rendimientos futuros con exclusión de los que se deriven de diferencias temporarias (neto de los correspondientes pasivos por impuestos cuando se cumplan las condiciones establecidas en el artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC) (importe negativo).

 

 

11

Reservas al valor razonable relacionadas con pérdidas o ganancias por coberturas de flujos de efectivo de instrumentos financieros no valorados al valor razonable

 

 

12

Los importes negativos que resulten del cálculo de las pérdidas esperadas.

 

 

13

Todo incremento del patrimonio neto que resulte de los activos titulizados (importe negativo).

 

 

14

Pérdidas o ganancias por pasivos valorados al valor razonable que se deriven de cambios en la propia calidad crediticia.

 

 

15

Los activos de fondos de pensión de prestaciones definidas (importe negativo).

 

 

16

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios de capital de nivel 1 ordinario por parte de una entidad (importe negativo).

 

 

17

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad (importe negativo).

 

 

18

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo).

 

 

19

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo).

 

 

20

No aplicable.

 

 

EU-20a

Importe de la exposición de los siguientes elementos, que pueden recibir una ponderación de riesgo del 1 250  %, cuando la entidad opte por la deducción.

 

 

EU-20b

De los cuales: participaciones cualificadas fuera del sector financiero (importe negativo)

 

 

EU-20c

De los cuales: posiciones de titulización (importe negativo).

 

 

EU-20d

De los cuales: operaciones incompletas (importe negativo)

 

 

21

Activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporarias (importe superior al umbral del 10 %, neto de pasivos por impuestos conexos, siempre y cuando se cumplan las condiciones establecidas en el artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC) (importe negativo).

 

 

22

Importe que supere el umbral del 17,65 % (importe negativo).

 

 

23

De los cuales: tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas por la entidad de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes.

 

 

24

No aplicable.

 

 

25

De los cuales: activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporarias

 

 

EU-25 a

Pérdidas del ejercicio en curso (importe negativo)

 

 

EU-25b

Cargas fiscales previsibles relativas a los elementos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario, excepto cuando la entidad ajuste adecuadamente el importe de los elementos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario en la medida en que tales cargas fiscales reduzcan el importe hasta el cual dichos elementos pueden utilizarse para cubrir riesgos o pérdidas (importe negativo).

 

 

26

No aplicable.

 

 

27

Deducciones admisibles del capital de nivel 1 adicional que superen los elementos de nivel 1 adicional de la entidad (importe negativo).

 

 

27a

Otros ajustes reglamentarios.

 

 

28

Total de los ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 1 ordinario

 

 

29

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario

 

 

Capital de nivel 1 adicional instrumentos

30

Los instrumentos de capital y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión

 

i)

31

De los cuales: clasificados como capital en virtud de las normas contables aplicables

 

 

32

De los cuales: clasificados como pasivo en virtud de las normas contables aplicables

 

 

33

Importe de los elementos a que se refiere el artículo 484, apartado 4, del RRC y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 adicional.

 

 

EU-33a

Importe de los elementos a que se refiere el artículo 494 bis, apartado 1, del RRC objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 adicional.

 

 

EU-33b

Importe de los elementos a que se refiere el artículo 494 ter, apartado 1, del RRC objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 adicional.

 

 

34

Capital de nivel 1 admisible incluido en el capital de nivel 1 adicional consolidado (incluidas las participaciones minoritarias no incluidas en la fila 5) emitido por filiales y en manos de terceros.

 

 

35

De los cuales: instrumentos emitidos por filiales sujetos a exclusión gradual.

 

 

36

Capital de nivel 1 adicional antes de los ajustes reglamentarios

 

 

Capital de nivel 1 adicional ajustes reglamentarios

37

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios de capital de nivel 1 adicional por parte de una entidad (importe negativo).

 

 

38

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad (importe negativo).

 

 

39

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo).

 

 

40

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo).

 

 

41

No aplicable.

 

 

42

Deducciones admisibles del capital de nivel 2 que superen los elementos de nivel 2 de la entidad (importe negativo)

 

 

42a

Otros ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 1 adicional

 

 

43

Total de los ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 1 adicional

 

 

44

Capital de nivel 1 adicional

 

 

45

Capital de nivel 1 (Capital de nivel 1 = capital de nivel 1 ordinario + capital de nivel 1 adicional)

 

 

Capital de nivel 2: instrumentos

46

Los instrumentos de capital y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión

 

 

47

Importe de los elementos a que se refiere el artículo 484, apartado 5, del RRC y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 2, según se describe en el artículo 486, apartado 4, del RRC.

 

 

EU-47a

Importe de los elementos a que se refiere el artículo 494 bis, apartado 2, del RRC objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 2.

 

 

EU-47b

Importe de los elementos a que se refiere el artículo 494 ter, apartado 2, del RRC objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 2.

 

 

48

Instrumentos de fondos propios admisibles incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 consolidado (incluidas las participaciones minoritarias y los instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional no incluidos en las filas 5 o 34) emitidos por filiales y en manos de terceros

 

 

49

De los cuales: instrumentos emitidos por filiales sujetos a exclusión gradual.

 

 

50

Ajustes por riesgo de crédito

 

 

51

Capital de nivel 2 antes de los ajustes reglamentarios

 

 

Capital de nivel 2: ajustes reglamentarios

52

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios capital de nivel 2 por parte de una entidad (importe negativo).

 

 

53

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y de préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad (importe negativo).

 

 

54

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo).

 

 

EU-54a

No aplicable.

 

 

55

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo).

 

 

56

No aplicable.

 

 

EU-56a

Deducciones admisibles del pasivo que superen los elementos del pasivo de la entidad (importe negativo).

 

 

EU-56b

Otros ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 2.

 

 

57

Total de los ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 2

 

 

58

Capital de nivel 2

 

 

59

Capital total (Capital total = capital de nivel 1 + capital de nivel 2)

 

 

60

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo.

 

 

Ratios y requisitos de capital, incluidos los colchones

61

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario

 

 

62

Capital de nivel 1

 

 

63

Capital total

 

 

64

Requisitos generales de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de la entidad.

 

 

65

De los cuales: requisito relativo al colchón de conservación de capital.

 

 

66

De los cuales: requisito relativo al colchón de capital anticíclico.

 

 

67

De los cuales: requisito relativo al colchón por riesgo sistémico.

 

 

EU-67a

De los cuales: Requisito de colchón para las entidades de importancia sistémica mundial (EISM) o para otras entidades de importancia sistémica (OEIS).

 

 

EU-67b

De los cuales: requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (%).

 

 

68

Capital ordinario de nivel 1 (en porcentaje del importe de la exposición al riesgo) disponible tras cumplir los requisitos mínimos de capital

 

 

Mínimos nacionales (si difieren de Basilea III)

69

No aplicable

 

 

70

No aplicable

 

 

71

No aplicable

 

 

Importes por debajo de los umbrales de deducción (antes de la ponderación del riesgo)

72

Tenencias directas e indirectas de fondos propios y pasivos admisibles de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe inferior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles).

 

 

73

Tenencias directas e indirectas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe inferior al umbral del 17,65 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles).

 

 

74

No aplicable.

 

 

75

Los activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporarias (importe inferior al umbral del 17,65 %, neto de pasivos por impuestos conexos, siempre y cuando se reúnan las condiciones establecidas en el artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC).

 

 

Límites aplicables en relación con la inclusión de provisiones en el capital de nivel 2

76

Los ajustes por riesgo de crédito incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 en lo que respecta a las exposiciones sujetas al método estándar (antes de la aplicación del límite).

 

 

77

Límite relativo a la inclusión de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito en el capital de nivel 2 con arreglo al método estándar.

 

 

78

Los ajustes por riesgo de crédito incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 en lo que respecta a las exposiciones sujetas al método basado en calificaciones internas (antes de la aplicación del límite).

 

 

79

Límite relativo a la inclusión de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito en el capital de nivel 2 con arreglo al método basado en calificaciones internas.

 

 

Instrumentos de capital sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual (solo aplicable entre el 1 de enero de 2014 y el 1 de enero de 2022)

80

Límite actual para instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual.

 

 

81

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 1 ordinario debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos).

 

g

82

Límite actual para instrumentos capital de nivel 1 adicional sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual.

 

 

83

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 1 adicional debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos).

 

 

84

Límite actual para instrumentos capital de nivel 2 sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual.

 

 

85

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 2 debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos).

 

 

Plantilla EU CC2 – Conciliación de los fondos propios reglamentarios con el balance en los estados financieros auditados

Plantilla flexible Las filas deben divulgarse de acuerdo con el balance incluido en los estados financieros auditados de las entidades. Las columnas se mantendrán fijas, a menos que la entidad tenga el mismo ámbito contable y reglamentario de consolidación, en cuyo caso se fusionarán las columnas a) y b).


 

a

b

c

Balance según los estados financieros publicados

En el ámbito reglamentario de consolidación

Referencia

Al final del período

Al final del período

 

Activos – Desglose por clases de activos según el balance de los estados financieros publicados

1

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxx

Activos totales

 

 

 

Pasivos – Desglose por clases de pasivos según el balance en los estados financieros publicados

1

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxx

Total pasivo

 

 

 

Recursos propios

 

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

xxx

Total recursos propios

 

 

 

Plantilla EU CCA Principales características de los instrumentos reglamentarios de fondos propios y los instrumentos de pasivos admisibles


 

a

Información cualitativa o cuantitativa – Formato libre

1

Emisor

 

2

Identificador único (por ejemplo, CUSIP, ISIN o identificador Bloomberg para la colocación privada de valores)

 

2a

Colocación pública o privada

 

3

Legislación aplicable al instrumento

 

3a

Reconocimiento contractual de las competencias de depreciación y conversión de las autoridades de resolución.

 

 

Tratamiento normativo

 

4

Tratamiento actual teniendo en cuenta, en su caso, las normas transitorias del RRC.

 

5

Normas del RRC posteriores a la transición.

 

6

Admisibles a título individual/ (sub)consolidado/individual y (sub)consolidado

 

7

Tipo de instrumento (cada país especificará los tipos pertinentes).

 

8

Importe reconocido en el capital reglamentario o en los pasivos admisibles (moneda en millones, en la fecha de información más reciente).

 

9

Importe nominal de instrumento.

 

EU-9a

Precio de emisión.

 

EU-9b

Precio de reembolso

 

10

Clasificación contable.

 

11

Fecha de emisión inicial.

 

12

Perpetuos o con vencimiento establecido.

 

13

Fecha de vencimiento inicial.

 

14

Opción de compra del emisor sujeta a la aprobación previa de las autoridades de supervisión.

 

15

Fecha opcional de ejercicio de la opción de compra, fechas de ejercicio contingentes e importe a reembolsar.

 

16

Fechas de ejercicio posteriores, si procede.

 

 

Cupones/dividendos

 

17

Dividendo o cupón fijo o variable.

 

18

Tipo de interés del cupón y cualquier índice conexo

 

19

Existencia de limitaciones al pago de dividendos.

 

EU-20a

Plenamente discrecional, parcialmente discrecional u obligatorio (en términos de calendario).

 

EU-20b

Plenamente discrecional, parcialmente discrecional u obligatorio (en términos de importe).

 

21

Existencia de un incremento del cupón u otros incentivos al reembolso

 

22

Acumulativo o no acumulativo

 

23

Convertible o no convertible

 

24

Si son convertibles, factor(es) que ponen en marcha la conversión.

 

25

Si son convertibles, total o parcialmente

 

26

Si son convertibles, tipo de conversión aplicable

 

27

Si son convertibles, conversión obligatoria u opcional

 

28

Si son convertibles, especifíquese el tipo de instrumento en que se pueden convertir

 

29

Si son convertibles, especifíquese el emisor del instrumento en que se convierte.

 

30

Características de la depreciación

 

31

En caso de depreciación, factor(es) que la desencadenan.

 

32

En caso de depreciación, total o parcial.

 

33

En caso de depreciación, permanente o temporal.

 

34

Si la depreciación es provisional, descripción del mecanismo de apreciación

 

EU-34a

Tipo de subordinación (solo para los pasivos admisibles).

 

EU-34b

Orden de prelación del instrumento en los procedimientos de insolvencia ordinarios.

 

35

Posición en la jerarquía de subordinación en la liquidación (especifíquese el tipo de instrumento de rango inmediatamente superior).

 

36

Características no conformes tras la transición.

 

37

En caso afirmativo, especifíquense las características no conformes.

 

EU-37a

Enlace al mandato completo y a las condiciones del instrumento (señalización).

 

(1) Introduzca «n/a» cuando la pregunta no proceda.

ANEXO VIII

ANEXO VIII

Instrucciones para las plantillas de divulgación de información sobre fondos propios

Plantilla EU CC1 – Composición de los fondos propios reglamentarios

1. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 437, letras a), d), e) y f), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 ( 9 ) (RRC) siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU CC1, que se recoge en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.

2. A efectos de la plantilla EU CC1, los ajustes reglamentarios comprenden las deducciones de los fondos propios y los filtros prudenciales.

3. Las entidades deben cumplimentar la columna b de esta plantilla para mostrar la fuente de cada uno de los elementos principales, que deberá hacer referencia a las filas correspondientes de la plantilla EU CC2.

4. Las entidades incluirán en la reseña adjunta a la plantilla una descripción de todas las restricciones aplicadas al cálculo de los fondos propios de conformidad con el RRC y de los instrumentos, filtros prudenciales y deducciones a los que se aplican dichas restricciones. Incluirán además una explicación exhaustiva de la base utilizada para calcular las ratios de capital cuando se calculen a partir de elementos de los fondos propios determinados sobre una base distinta de la prevista en el RRC.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1

Instrumentos de capital y correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión

Instrumentos de capital y correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión de conformidad con el artículo 26, apartado 1, letras a) y b), y con los artículos 27, 28 y 29 del RRC y la lista de la ABE a que se refiere el artículo 26, apartado 3, del RRC, y su desglose por tipo de instrumento.

2

Ganancias acumuladas

Las ganancias acumuladas previas a todos los ajustes reglamentarios, de conformidad con el artículo 26, apartado 1, letra c), del RRC (anteriores a la inclusión de las pérdidas o beneficios intermedios netos)

3

Otro resultado global acumulado (y otras reservas)

Importe de otro resultado global acumulado y otras reservas, de conformidad con el artículo 26, apartado 1, letras d) y e), del RRC.

EU-3a

Fondos para riesgos bancarios generales

Importe de los fondos para riesgos bancarios generales con arreglo al artículo 26, apartado 1, letra f), del RRC.

4

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 484, apartado 3, del RRC y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 ordinario

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 484, apartado 3, del RRC y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 ordinario, según se describe en el artículo 486, apartado 2, del RRC.

5

Intereses minoritarios (importe admitido en el capital de nivel 1 ordinario consolidado)

Intereses minoritarios (importe admitido en el capital de nivel 1 ordinario consolidado) con arreglo al artículo 84 del RRC.

EU-5a

Beneficios provisionales verificados de forma independiente, netos de todo posible gasto o dividendo previsible

Beneficios provisionales verificados de forma independiente, netos de todo posible gasto o dividendo previsible con arreglo al artículo 26, apartado 2, del RRC.

6

Capital ordinario de nivel 1 antes de los ajustes reglamentarios

Suma de los importes de las filas 1 a EU-5a de esta plantilla.

7

Ajustes de valor adicionales (importe negativo)

Ajustes de valor adicionales de conformidad con los artículos 34 y 105 del RRC (importe negativo).

8

Activos intangibles (netos de pasivos por impuestos conexos) (importe negativo)

Activos intangibles (netos de pasivos por impuestos conexos) con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra b), y al artículo 37 del RRC (importe negativo).

9

No aplicable.

10

Activos por impuestos diferidos que dependen de rendimientos futuros con exclusión de los que se deriven de diferencias temporales (netos de pasivos por impuestos conexos cuando se cumplan las condiciones del artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC) (importe negativo)

Los activos por impuestos diferidos que dependen de rendimientos futuros con exclusión de los que se deriven de diferencias temporales (netos de pasivos por impuestos conexos cuando se cumplan las condiciones establecidas en el artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC) de conformidad con el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra c), y con el artículo 38 del RRC (importe negativo).

11

Reservas al valor razonable relacionadas con pérdidas o ganancias por coberturas de flujos de efectivo de instrumentos financieros no valorados al valor razonable

Reservas al valor razonable relacionadas con pérdidas o ganancias por coberturas de flujos de efectivo de instrumentos financieros no valorados al valor razonable de conformidad con el artículo 33, apartado 1, letra a), del RRC.

12

Importes negativos resultantes del cálculo de las pérdidas esperadas

Importes negativos resultantes del cálculo de los importes de las pérdidas esperadas de conformidad con el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra d), y con el artículo 40 del RRC.

13

Incremento del patrimonio neto que resulte de los activos titulizados (importe negativo)

Todo incremento del patrimonio neto que resulte de los activos titulizados, de conformidad con el artículo 32, apartado 1, del RRC (importe negativo).

14

Pérdidas o ganancias por pasivos valorados al valor razonable que se deriven de cambios en la propia calidad crediticia

Pérdidas o ganancias por pasivos valorados al valor razonable que se deriven de cambios en la propia calidad crediticia, de conformidad con el artículo 33, apartado 1, letra b), del RRC.

15

Activos de fondos de pensiones de prestaciones definidas (importe negativo)

Activos de fondos de pensiones de prestaciones con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra e), y al artículo 41 del RRC (importe negativo).

16

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios de capital de nivel 1 ordinario por parte de una entidad (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios de capital de nivel 1 ordinario por parte de una entidad, tal como se describen en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra f), y en el artículo 42 del RRC (importe negativo).

17

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad, según se describe en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra g), y el artículo 44 del RRC (importe negativo).

18

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles), según lo descrito en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra h), los artículos 43, 45 y 46, el artículo 49, apartados 2 y 3, y el artículo 79 del RRC (importe negativo).

19

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles), según lo descrito en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra i), los artículos 43, 45 y 47, el artículo 48, apartado 1, letra b), y el artículo 49, apartados 1 a 3, del RRC (importe negativo).

20

No aplicable.

EU-20a

Importe de la exposición de los siguientes elementos, que pueden recibir una ponderación de riesgo del 1 250  %, cuando la entidad opte por la deducción

Importe de la exposición que puede recibir una ponderación de riesgo del 1 250  %, cuando la entidad opte por la deducción, tal como se describe en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra k), del RRC.

EU-20b

Del cual: participaciones cualificadas fuera del sector financiero (importe negativo)

Del importe en EU-20a, el correspondiente a las participaciones cualificadas fuera del sector financiero, de conformidad con el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra k), inciso i), y con los artículos 89 a 91 del RRC (importe negativo).

EU-20c

Del cual: posiciones de titulización (importe negativo)

Del importe en EU-20a de esta plantilla, el importe relativo a las posiciones de titulización, de conformidad con el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra k), inciso ii), el artículo 243, apartado 1, letra b), el artículo 244, apartado 1, letra b), y el artículo 258 del RRC (importe negativo).

EU-20d

Del cual: operaciones incompletas (importe negativo)

Del importe en EU-20a de esta plantilla, el importe relativo a las operaciones incompletas con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra k), inciso iii), y al artículo 379, apartado 3, del RRC (importe negativo).

21

Activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporales (importe superior al umbral del 10 %, neto de pasivos por impuestos conexos, siempre y cuando se cumplan las condiciones del artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC) (importe negativo)

Los activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporales (importe superior al umbral del 10 %, neto de pasivos por impuestos conexos, siempre y cuando se cumplan las condiciones del artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC), según lo descrito en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra c), el artículo 38 y el artículo 48, apartado 1, letra a), del RRC (importe negativo).

22

Importe que supere el umbral del 17,65 % (importe negativo)

Importe que supera el umbral del 17,65 % con arreglo al artículo 48, apartado 1, del RRC (importe negativo).

23

Del cual: tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas por la entidad de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes

Del importe de la fila 22 de esta plantilla, el importe de las tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero en los que la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa, tal como se describe en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra i), y en el artículo 48, apartado 1, letra b), del RRC.

24

No aplicable.

25

Del cual: activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporales

Del importe de la fila 22 de esta plantilla, el importe de los activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporales, tal como se describe en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra c), en el artículo 38 y en el artículo 48, apartado 1, letra a), del RRC.

EU-25a

Pérdidas del ejercicio en curso (importe negativo)

Pérdidas del ejercicio en curso con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra a) del RRC (importe negativo).

EU-25b

Impuestos previsibles conexos a los elementos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario, excepto cuando la entidad ajuste adecuadamente el importe de los elementos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario en la medida en que tales impuestos reduzcan el importe por el cual dichos elementos pueden utilizarse para cubrir riesgos o pérdidas (importe negativo)

Importe de los impuestos conexos a los elementos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario que resulten previsibles en el momento de calcularlos, salvo cuando la entidad ajuste debidamente el importe de los elementos del capital de nivel 1 ordinario, en la medida en que tales impuestos reduzcan el importe de esos elementos que puede destinarse a la cobertura de riesgos o pérdidas, de conformidad con el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra l), del RRC (importe negativo).

26

No aplicable.

27

Deducciones admisibles del capital de nivel 1 adicional que superen los elementos del capital de nivel 1 adicional de la entidad (importe negativo)

Deducciones admisibles del capital de nivel 1 adicional que superen los elementos del capital de nivel 1 adicional de la entidad, según se describe en el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra j), del RRC (importe negativo).

EU-27a

Otros ajustes reglamentarios

Las entidades divulgarán en esta fila cualquier ajuste reglamentario aplicable, comunicado dentro de la información presentada con fines de supervisión y no incluido en ninguna otra fila de esta plantilla, incluido el importe resultante de las disposiciones transitorias de la NIIF 9, cuando proceda y hasta el final del período transitorio.

28

Total de los ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 1 ordinario

Calculado como la suma de los importes de las filas 7 a EU-20a, 21, 22 y EU-25a a EU-27a de esta plantilla.

29

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario

Calculado como la fila 6 menos la fila 28 de esta plantilla.

30

Instrumentos de capital y correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión

Instrumentos de capital y correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión con arreglo a los artículos 51 y 52 del RRC.

31

De los cuales: clasificados como patrimonio neto en virtud de las normas contables aplicables

Importe de la fila 30 de esta plantilla clasificado como patrimonio neto con arreglo a las normas contables aplicables.

32

De los cuales: clasificados como pasivo en virtud de las normas contables aplicables

Importe de la fila 30 de esta plantilla clasificado como pasivo con arreglo a las normas contables aplicables.

33

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 484, apartado 4, del RRC y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 adicional

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 484, apartado 4, del RRC y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 adicional, de conformidad con el artículo 486, apartado 3, del RRC.

EU-33a

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 494 bis, apartado 1, del RRC objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 adicional

EU-33b

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 494 ter, apartado 1, del RRC objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 1 adicional

34

Capital de nivel 1 admisible incluido en el capital de nivel 1 adicional consolidado (incluidos los intereses minoritarios no incluidos en la fila 5) emitido por filiales y en manos de terceros

Capital de nivel 1 admisible incluido en el capital de nivel 1 adicional consolidado (incluidos los intereses minoritarios no incluidos en la fila 5 de esta plantilla) emitido por filiales y en manos de terceros, tal como se describe en los artículos 85 y 86 del RRC.

35

Del cual: instrumentos emitidos por filiales objeto de exclusión gradual

Importe de la fila 34 de esta plantilla que se refiere a los instrumentos emitidos por filiales objeto de exclusión gradual, tal como se describe en el artículo 486, apartado 3, del RRC.

36

Capital de nivel 1 adicional antes de los ajustes reglamentarios

Suma de los importes de las filas 30, 33, EU-33a, EU-33b y 34 de esta plantilla.

37

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios de capital de nivel 1 adicional por parte de una entidad (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios de capital de nivel 1 adicional por parte de una entidad, tal como se describen en el artículo 52, apartado 1, letra b), en el artículo 56, letra a), y en el artículo 57 del RRC (importe negativo).

38

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad, según se describe en el artículo 56, letra b), y el artículo 58 del RRC (importe negativo).

39

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles), según lo descrito en el artículo 56, letra c), y en los artículos 59, 60 y 79 del RRC (importe negativo).

40

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (neto de posiciones cortas admisibles), según se describe en el artículo 56, letra d), y en los artículos 59 y 79 del RRC (importe negativo).

41

No aplicable

42

Deducciones admisibles del capital de nivel 2 que superen los elementos del capital de nivel 2 de la entidad (importe negativo)

Deducciones admisibles del capital de nivel 2 que superen los elementos del capital de nivel 2 de la entidad según se describe en el artículo 56, letra e), del RRC (importe negativo).

EU-42a

Otros ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 1 adicional

Las entidades divulgarán en esta fila cualquier ajuste reglamentario aplicable, comunicado dentro de la información presentada con fines de supervisión y no incluido en ninguna otra fila de esta plantilla.

43

Total de los ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 1 adicional

Suma de los importes de las filas 37 a EU-42 a de esta plantilla.

44

Capital de nivel 1 adicional

Capital de nivel 1 adicional, calculado como la fila 36 menos la fila 43 de esta plantilla.

45

Capital de nivel 1 (= capital de nivel 1 ordinario + capital de nivel 1 adicional).

Capital de nivel 1, calculado como la fila 29 más la fila 44 de esta plantilla.

46

Instrumentos de capital y correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión

Instrumentos de capital y correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión como se describe en los artículos 62 y 63 del RRC.

47

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 484, apartado 5, del RRC y las correspondientes cuentas de primas de emisión objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 2, según se describe en el artículo 486, apartado 4, del RRC

EU-47a

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 494 bis, apartado 2, del RRC objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 2

EU-47b

Importe de los elementos admisibles a que se refiere el artículo 494 ter, apartado 2, del RRC objeto de exclusión gradual del capital de nivel 2

48

Instrumentos de fondos propios admisibles incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 consolidado (incluidos los intereses minoritarios y los instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional no incluidos en las filas 5 o 34) emitidos por filiales y en manos de terceros

Instrumentos de fondos propios admisibles incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 consolidado (incluidos los intereses minoritarios e instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional no incluidos en las filas 5 o 34 de esta plantilla) emitidos por filiales y en manos de terceros, tal como se describe en los artículos 87 y 88 del RRC.

49

De los cuales: instrumentos emitidos por filiales objeto de exclusión gradual

Del importe de la fila 48, el importe que se refiere a los instrumentos emitidos por filiales objeto de exclusión gradual, tal como se describe en el artículo 486, apartado 4, del RRC.

50

Ajustes por riesgo de crédito

Ajustes por riesgo de crédito de conformidad con el artículo 62, letras c) y d), del RRC.

51

Capital de nivel 2 antes de los ajustes reglamentarios

Suma de los importes de las filas 46 a 48 y de la fila 50 de esta plantilla.

52

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios de capital de nivel 2 por parte de una entidad (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos propios de capital de nivel 2 y de préstamos subordinados por parte de una entidad, tal como se describe en el artículo 63, letra b), inciso i), en el artículo 66, letra a), y en el artículo 67 del RRC (importe negativo).

53

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y de préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando estos entes tengan una tenencia recíproca con la entidad destinada a incrementar artificialmente los fondos propios de la entidad, según se describe en el artículo 66, letra b), y el artículo 68 del RRC (importe negativo).

54

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y de préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe superior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles), según lo descrito en el artículo 66, letra c), y en los artículos 69, 70 y 79 del RRC (importe negativo).

54a

No aplicable

55

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) (importe negativo)

Tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y de préstamos subordinados de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (neto de posiciones cortas admisibles), de conformidad con el artículo 66, letra d), y los artículos 69 y 79 del RRC (importe negativo).

56

No aplicable

EU-56a

Deducciones admisibles de pasivos admisibles que superen los pasivos admisibles de la entidad (importe negativo)

Deducciones admisibles de pasivos admisibles que superen los pasivos admisibles de la entidad de conformidad con el artículo 66, letra e), del RRC (importe negativo).

EU-56b

Otros ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 2

Las entidades divulgarán en esta fila cualquier ajuste reglamentario aplicable, comunicado dentro de la información presentada con fines de supervisión y no incluido en ninguna otra fila de esta plantilla.

57

Total de los ajustes reglamentarios del capital de nivel 2

Suma de los importes de las filas 52 a EU-56b de esta plantilla.

58

Capital de nivel 2

Capital de nivel 2, calculado como la fila 51 menos la fila 57 de esta plantilla.

59

Capital total (= capital de nivel 1 + capital de nivel 2).

Capital total, calculado como la fila 45 más la fila 58 de esta plantilla.

60

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo del grupo.

61

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario (en porcentaje del importe total de la exposición al riesgo), calculado como la división de la fila 29 por la fila 60 (expresado en porcentaje), de conformidad con el artículo 92, apartado 2, letra a), del RRC.

62

Capital de nivel 1

Capital de nivel 1 (en porcentaje del importe total de la exposición al riesgo), calculado como la división de la fila 45 por la fila 60 (expresado en porcentaje), de conformidad con el artículo 92, apartado 2, letra b), del RRC.

63

Capital total

Capital total (en porcentaje del importe total de la exposición al riesgo), calculado como la división de la fila 59 por la fila 60 (expresado en porcentaje), de conformidad con el artículo 92, apartado 2, letra c), del RRC.

64

Requisitos globales de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de la entidad

Los requisitos globales de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de la entidad se calcularán como el requisito de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de conformidad con el artículo 92, apartado 1, letra a), del RRC, más el requisito adicional de capital de nivel 1 ordinario que las entidades están obligadas a mantener de conformidad con el artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la Directiva 2013/36/UE (DRC), más los requisitos combinados de colchón de conformidad con el artículo 128, apartado 6, de la DRC, expresados como porcentaje del importe de la exposición al riesgo.

Se calculará como el 4,5 % más los requisitos adicionales del pilar 2 que las entidades están obligadas a mantener de conformidad con el artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la DRC, más los requisitos combinados de colchón calculados de conformidad con los artículos 128, 129, 130, 131 y 133 de la DRC.

Esta fila mostrará la ratio de capital de nivel 1 ordinario pertinente para la evaluación de las restricciones en materia de distribuciones.

65

De los cuales: requisito relativo al colchón de conservación de capital

El importe de la fila 64 (expresado como porcentaje del importe total de la exposición al riesgo) de esta plantilla que corresponda al requisito de colchón de conservación de capital de conformidad con el artículo 129 de la DRC.

66

De los cuales: requisito relativo al colchón de capital anticíclico

El importe de la fila 64 (expresado como porcentaje del importe total de la exposición al riesgo) de esta plantilla que corresponda al requisito de colchón anticíclico de conformidad con el artículo 130 de la DRC.

67

De los cuales: requisito relativo al colchón por riesgo sistémico

El importe de la fila 64 (expresado como porcentaje del importe total de exposición al riesgo) de esta plantilla que corresponda al requisito de colchón por riesgo sistémico de conformidad con el artículo 133 de la DRC.

EU-67a

De los cuales: requisito de colchón para las entidades de importancia sistémica mundial (EISM) o para otras entidades de importancia sistémica (OEIS)

El importe de la fila 64 (expresado como porcentaje del importe total de la exposición al riesgo) de esta plantilla que corresponda al requisito de colchón para las EISM u OEIS de conformidad con el artículo 131 de la DRC.

EU-67b

De los cuales: requisitos de fondos propios adicionales para hacer frente a riesgos distintos del riesgo de apalancamiento excesivo (%)

Importe de la fila 64 (expresado como porcentaje del importe total de la exposición al riesgo) de esta plantilla que corresponda a los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales resultantes del proceso de revisión supervisora, que deben satisfacerse mediante capital de nivel 1 ordinario, a que se refiere el artículo 104, apartado 1, letra a), de la Directiva 2013/36/UE.

68

Capital de nivel 1 ordinario (en porcentaje del importe de la exposición al riesgo) disponible tras cumplir los requisitos mínimos de capital

Se calculará como la fila 61 menos 4,5 (puntos porcentuales), menos EU-67b, menos el capital de nivel 1 ordinario utilizado por la entidad para cumplir sus requisitos de capital de nivel 1 adicional y capital de nivel 2.

69

No aplicable

70

No aplicable

71

No aplicable

72

Tenencias directas e indirectas de fondos propios y pasivos admisibles de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe inferior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles)

Tenencias directas e indirectas de fondos propios y pasivos admisibles de entes del sector financiero en los que la entidad no mantenga una inversión significativa (importe inferior al umbral del 10 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles) de conformidad con el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra h), y con los artículos 45 y 46, el artículo 56, letra c), los artículos 59 y 60, el artículo 66, letra c), y los artículos 69, 70 y 72 decies del RRC.

73

Tenencias directas e indirectas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe inferior al umbral del 17,65 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles)

Tenencias directas e indirectas de instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero cuando la entidad mantenga una inversión significativa en esos entes (importe inferior al umbral del 17,65 % y neto de posiciones cortas admisibles), de conformidad con el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra i), los artículos 43, 45 y 47, el artículo 48, apartado 1, letra b), y el artículo 49, apartados 1 a 3, del RRC (el importe total de dichas inversiones que no figuren en las filas 19 y 23 de esta plantilla).

74

No aplicable

75

Activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporales (importe inferior al umbral del 17,65 %, neto de pasivos por impuestos conexos, siempre y cuando se reúnan las condiciones del artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC)

Activos por impuestos diferidos que se deriven de diferencias temporales (importe inferior al umbral del 17,65 % con arreglo al artículo 48, apartado 2, letra b), del RRC, neto de pasivos por impuestos conexos, cuando se cumplan las condiciones del artículo 38, apartado 3, del RRC), de conformidad con el artículo 36, apartado 1, letra c), y con los artículos 38 y 48 del RRC (importe total de dichos activos por impuestos diferidos que no figuren en las filas 21 y 25 de esta plantilla).

76

Ajustes por riesgo de crédito incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 en lo que respecta a las exposiciones sujetas al método estándar (antes de la aplicación del límite)

Los ajustes por riesgo de crédito incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 en lo que respecta a las exposiciones sujetas al método estándar, de conformidad con el artículo 62, letra c), del RRC.

77

Límite relativo a la inclusión de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito en el capital de nivel 2 con arreglo al método estándar

Límite relativo a la inclusión de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito en el capital de nivel 2 con arreglo al método estándar, de conformidad con el artículo 62, letra c), del RRC.

78

Ajustes por riesgo de crédito incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 en lo que respecta a las exposiciones sujetas al método basado en calificaciones internas (antes de la aplicación del límite)

Los ajustes por riesgo de crédito incluidos en el capital de nivel 2 en lo que respecta a las exposiciones sujetas al método basado en calificaciones internas, con arreglo a lo dispuesto en el artículo 62, letra d), del RRC.

79

Límite relativo a la inclusión de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito en el capital de nivel 2 con arreglo al método basado en calificaciones internas

Límite relativo a la inclusión de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito en el capital de nivel 2 con arreglo al método basado en calificaciones internas, de conformidad con el artículo 62, letra d), del RRC.

80

Límite actual aplicable a los instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual

Límite actual aplicable a los instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual de conformidad con el artículo 484, apartado 3, y con el artículo 486, apartados 2 y 5, del RRC.

81

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 1 ordinario debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos)

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 1 ordinario debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos), conforme al artículo 484, apartado 3, y al artículo 486, apartados 2 y 5, del RRC.

82

Límite actual aplicable a los instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual

Límite actual aplicable a los instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual, de conformidad con el artículo 484, apartado 4, y el artículo 486, apartados 3 y 5, del RRC.

83

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 1 adicional debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos)

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 1 adicional debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos), conforme al artículo 484, apartado 4, y al artículo 486, apartados 3 y 5, del RRC.

84

Límite actual aplicable a los instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual

Límite actual aplicable a los instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 sujetos a disposiciones de exclusión gradual, de conformidad con el artículo 484, apartado 5, y el artículo 486, apartados 4 y 5, del RRC.

85

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 2 debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos)

Importe excluido del capital de nivel 2 debido al límite (exceso sobre el límite después de reembolsos y vencimientos), conforme al artículo 484, apartado 5, y al artículo 486, apartados 4 y 5, del RRC.

Plantilla EU CC2 – Conciliación de los fondos propios reglamentarios con el balance de los estados financieros auditados

5. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 437, letra a), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU CC2, que se recoge en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.

6. Las entidades divulgarán el balance incluido en sus estados financieros publicados. Los estados financieros serán los estados financieros auditados para la divulgación de información de cierre de ejercicio.

7. Las filas de la plantilla son flexibles y serán divulgadas por las entidades de acuerdo con sus estados financieros. Los elementos de los fondos propios que figuren en los estados financieros auditados incluirán todos los elementos que formen parte o se deduzcan de los fondos propios reglamentarios, en particular, el patrimonio neto, pasivos tales como la deuda, u otras partidas del balance que afecten a los fondos propios reglamentarios, como los activos intangibles, el fondo de comercio o los activos por impuestos diferidos. Las entidades ampliarán los elementos de los fondos propios del balance según sea necesario para garantizar que todos los componentes incluidos en la plantilla de divulgación de información sobre la composición de los fondos propios (plantilla EU CC1) aparezcan por separado. Las entidades solo ampliarán los elementos del balance hasta el nivel de detalle necesario para obtener los componentes requeridos por la plantilla EU CC1. La información divulgada será proporcionada a la complejidad del balance de la entidad.

8. Las columnas son fijas y se divulgarán como sigue:

a. 

Columna a: Las entidades incluirán las cifras consignadas en el balance integrado en sus estados financieros publicados de conformidad con el ámbito de consolidación contable.

b. 

Columna b: Las entidades divulgarán las cifras correspondientes al ámbito de consolidación prudencial.

c. 

Columna c: Las entidades incluirán la referencia cruzada entre el elemento de fondos propios de la plantilla EU CC2 y los elementos pertinentes de la plantilla EU CC1 para la divulgación de información sobre fondos propios. La referencia de la columna c de la plantilla EU CC2 se vinculará con la referencia que figura en la columna b de la plantilla EU CC1.

9. 

En los casos siguientes en los que el ámbito de consolidación contable de las entidades coincide exactamente con el ámbito de consolidación prudencial, las columnas a y b de esta plantilla se fusionarán y esto se especificará claramente:

d. 

Cuando las entidades cumplan las obligaciones establecidas en la parte octava del RRC en base consolidada o subconsolidada, pero el ámbito de consolidación y el método de consolidación utilizados para el balance de los estados financieros sean idénticos al ámbito de consolidación y al método de consolidación definidos con arreglo a la parte primera, título II, capítulo 2, del RRC, y las entidades indiquen claramente la ausencia de diferencias entre los respectivos ámbitos y métodos de consolidación.

e. 

Cuando las entidades cumplan las obligaciones establecidas en la parte octava del RRC en base individual.

Cuadro UE CCA – Principales características de los instrumentos de fondos propios reglamentarios y los instrumentos de pasivos admisibles

10. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 437, letras b) y c), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU CCA, que se recoge en el anexo VII del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.

11. Las entidades deberán cumplimentar el cuadro EU CCA para las siguientes categorías: Instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario, instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional, instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 y, en el sentido del artículo 72 ter del RRC, instrumentos de pasivos admisibles.

12. Los cuadros incluirán columnas separadas con las características de cada instrumento de fondos propios reglamentarios e instrumento de pasivos admisibles. En caso de que los distintos instrumentos de una misma categoría presenten características idénticas, las entidades podrán cumplimentar únicamente una columna indicando dichas características idénticas e identificarán las emisiones a las que se refieran las características idénticas. Al divulgar las columnas correspondientes a estos instrumentos, las entidades los agruparán en tres secciones (horizontalmente a lo largo del cuadro) para indicar si son para cumplir i) solo los requisitos de fondos propios (y no de pasivos admisibles); ii) los requisitos de fondos propios y de pasivos admisibles; o iii) solo los requisitos de pasivos admisibles (y no de fondos propios).

13. En relación con los instrumentos de pasivos admisibles que no estén subordinados a pasivos excluidos, las entidades divulgarán únicamente los valores que sean instrumentos financieros fungibles y negociables, con exclusión de los préstamos y depósitos.


Instrucciones para cumplimentar el cuadro de características principales de los instrumentos de fondos propios reglamentarios y los instrumentos de pasivos admisibles

Número de fila

Explicación

1

Emisor

Las entidades identificarán la razón social del emisor.

Texto libre

2

Identificador único (por ejemplo, CUSIP, ISIN o identificador Bloomberg para la colocación privada de valores)

Texto libre

EU-2a

Colocación pública o privada

Las entidades especificarán si el instrumento se ha colocado de forma pública o privada.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Pública] [Privada]

3

Legislación aplicable al instrumento

Las entidades especificarán la legislación aplicable al instrumento.

Texto libre

3a

Reconocimiento contractual de las competencias de amortización y conversión de las autoridades de resolución

Las entidades especificarán si el instrumento contiene una cláusula en virtud de la cual, previa decisión de una autoridad de resolución o de una autoridad pertinente de un tercer país, el principal del instrumento se amortizará de forma permanente o el instrumento se convertirá en un instrumento de capital de nivel 1 ordinario, cuando proceda, en el sentido de las siguientes disposiciones:

— En relación con los instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional, artículo 52, apartado 1, letra p), del RRC.

— En relación con los instrumentos de capital de nivel 2, artículo 63, letras n) u o), del RRC.

— En relación con los pasivos admisibles, artículo 72 ter, apartado 2, letra n), del RRC.

— En relación con cualquiera de los anteriores que se rija por la legislación de un tercer país, artículo 55 de la Directiva 2019/879/UE (1) (Directiva sobre reestructuración y resolución bancarias).

La amortización y la conversión pueden ser ambas conformes con el artículo 55 de la Directiva sobre reestructuración y resolución bancarias y cualquiera de los tres primeros guiones.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Sí] [No]

4

Tratamiento actual teniendo en cuenta, en su caso, las normas transitorias del RRC

Las entidades especificarán el tratamiento transitorio de los fondos propios reglamentarios contenido en el RRC. La clasificación original del instrumento es el punto de referencia con independencia de posibles reclasificaciones en niveles inferiores de fondos propios.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Capital de nivel 1 ordinario] [Capital de nivel 1 adicional] [Capital de nivel 2] [No admisible] [n/p]

Texto libre: especifíquese si se ha reclasificado una fracción de la emisión en niveles inferiores de capital.

5

Normas del RRC posteriores a la transición

Las entidades especificarán el tratamiento de los fondos propios reglamentarios con arreglo al RRC, sin tener en cuenta el tratamiento transitorio.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Capital de nivel 1 ordinario] [Capital de nivel 1 adicional] [Capital de nivel 2] [Pasivos admisibles] [No admisible]

6

Admisible a título individual/(sub)consolidado/individual y (sub)consolidado

Las entidades especificarán el nivel o niveles dentro del grupo en los que se incluye el instrumento en los fondos propios / pasivos admisibles.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Individual] [(Sub)consolidado] [Individual y (sub)consolidado]

7

Tipo de instrumento (cada país especificará los tipos pertinentes)

Las entidades especificarán el tipo de instrumento en función del país.

En el caso de los instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario, seleccione el nombre del instrumento en la lista del capital de nivel 1 ordinario publicada por la ABE con arreglo al artículo 26, apartado 3, del RRC.

Para los demás instrumentos, seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: cada país proporcionará a las entidades las opciones del menú – insértense las referencias jurídicas de los artículos del RRC para cada tipo de instrumento.

8

Importe reconocido en el capital reglamentario o en los pasivos admisibles (moneda en millones, en la fecha de información más reciente)

Las entidades especificarán el importe reconocido en los fondos propios reglamentarios o pasivos admisibles.

Texto libre: especifíquese, en particular, si determinadas partes de los instrumentos corresponden a diferentes niveles de los fondos propios reglamentarios y si el importe reconocido en los fondos propios reglamentarios es diferente del importe emitido.

9

Importe nominal del instrumento

Importe nominal del instrumento en la moneda de emisión y en la moneda utilizada a efectos de las obligaciones de información.

Texto libre

EU-9a

Precio de emisión

Precio de emisión del instrumento.

Texto libre

EU-9b

Precio de reembolso

Precio de reembolso del instrumento.

Texto libre

10

Clasificación contable

Las entidades especificarán la clasificación contable.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Patrimonio neto] [Pasivo — coste amortizado] [Pasivo — opción del valor razonable] [Participación no dominante en filial consolidada]

11

Fecha de emisión inicial

Las entidades especificarán la fecha de emisión.

Texto libre

12

Perpetuo o con vencimiento establecido

Las entidades especificarán si un instrumento tiene fecha de vencimiento o es perpetuo.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Perpetuo] [Vencimiento determinado]

13

Fecha de vencimiento inicial

Para los instrumentos con fecha de vencimiento, las entidades especificarán la fecha de vencimiento original (día, mes y año). En el caso de los instrumentos perpetuos, se especificará «sin vencimiento».

Texto libre

14

Opción de compra del emisor sujeta a la aprobación previa de las autoridades de supervisión

Las entidades especificarán si existe una opción de compra del emisor (todos los tipos de opciones de compra).

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Sí] [No]

15

Fecha opcional de ejercicio de la opción de compra, fechas de ejercicio contingentes e importe a reembolsar.

Para instrumentos con opción de compra del emisor, las entidades especificarán la primera fecha de ejercicio si el instrumento tiene una opción de compra en una determinada fecha (día, mes y año) y, además, especificarán si el instrumento tiene una opción de compra en función de un evento reglamentario o tributario. Las entidades también especificarán el precio de reembolso, que ayuda a evaluar la permanencia.

Texto libre

16

Fechas de ejercicio posteriores, si procede

Las entidades especificarán la existencia y frecuencia de las siguientes fechas de ejercicio de la opción de compra, en su caso, que ayudan a evaluar la permanencia.

Texto libre

17

Dividendo o cupón fijo o variable

Las entidades especificarán si el cupón/dividendo es fijo a lo largo de la vida del instrumento, varía a lo largo de la vida de este, actualmente es fijo pero pasará a ser variable en el futuro, o varía actualmente pero pasará a ser fijo en el futuro.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Fijo], [Variable] [De fijo a variable], [De variable a fijo]

18

Tipo de interés del cupón y cualquier índice conexo

Las entidades especificarán el tipo de interés del cupón del instrumento y cualquier índice conexo al que esté referenciado el tipo de interés del cupón o dividendo.

Texto libre

19

Existencia de limitaciones al pago de dividendos

Las entidades especificarán si la ausencia de pago de un cupón o dividendo en relación con el instrumento prohíbe el pago de dividendos por las acciones ordinarias (es decir, si existen limitaciones al pago de dividendos).

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Sí] [No]

EU-20a

Plenamente discrecional, parcialmente discrecional u obligatorio (en términos de calendario)

Las entidades especificarán si el emisor tiene plena discrecionalidad, discrecionalidad parcial o ningún margen de discrecionalidad sobre si se paga o no un cupón o dividendo. Si la entidad tiene plena discrecionalidad para cancelar los pagos de cupones o dividendos en cualquier circunstancia, debe elegir «plenamente discrecional» (incluso cuando existan limitaciones al pago de dividendos que no impidan a la entidad cancelar los pagos por el instrumento). Si existen condiciones que deban cumplirse antes de que pueda cancelarse el pago (por ejemplo, si los fondos propios deben situarse por debajo de un umbral determinado), la entidad debe seleccionar «parcialmente discrecional». Si la entidad no puede cancelar el pago (salvo en caso de insolvencia) debe seleccionar «obligatorio».

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Plenamente discrecional] [Parcialmente discrecional] [Obligatorio]

Texto libre (especifíquense los motivos de la discrecionalidad, la existencia de obligaciones condicionales de pago de dividendos, limitaciones al pago de dividendos, ACSM).

EU-20b

Plenamente discrecional, parcialmente discrecional u obligatorio (en términos de importe)

Las entidades especificarán si el emisor tiene plena discrecionalidad, discrecionalidad parcial o ningún margen de discrecionalidad sobre el importe del cupón o dividendo.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Plenamente discrecional] [Parcialmente discrecional] [Obligatorio]

21

Existencia de un incremento del cupón u otros incentivos al reembolso

Las entidades especificarán si existe un incremento del cupón u otro incentivo al reembolso.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Sí] [No]

22

Acumulativo o no acumulativo

Las entidades especificarán si los dividendos o cupones son acumulativos o no.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [No acumulativo] [Acumulativo] [ACSM]

23

Convertible o no convertible

Las entidades especificarán si un instrumento es convertible o no.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Convertible] [No convertible]

24

Si es convertible, factor(es) desencadenante(s) de la conversión

Las entidades especificarán las condiciones en las que se convertirá el instrumento, incluido el punto de inviabilidad. En caso de que una o varias autoridades estén facultadas para poner en marcha la conversión, se enumerarán todas ellas. Para cada una de las autoridades se indicará si lo que proporciona la base jurídica para poner en marcha la conversión son las condiciones del contrato del instrumento (enfoque contractual) o bien una determinada normativa (enfoque normativo).

Texto libre

25

Si es convertible, total o parcialmente

Las entidades especificarán si el instrumento se convertirá siempre totalmente, puede convertirse total o parcialmente o siempre se convertirá parcialmente.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Siempre totalmente] [Total o parcialmente] [Siempre parcialmente]

26

Si es convertible, coeficiente de conversión

Las entidades especificarán el coeficiente de conversión en instrumentos con mayor capacidad de absorción de pérdidas.

Texto libre

27

Si es convertible, conversión obligatoria u opcional

En el caso de los instrumentos convertibles, las entidades especificarán si la conversión es obligatoria u opcional.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Obligatoria] [Opcional] [n/p] y [a elección de los titulares] [a elección del emisor] [a elección de los titulares y del emisor]

28

Si es convertible, especifíquese el tipo de instrumento en que se puede convertir

En el caso de los instrumentos convertibles, las entidades especificarán el tipo de instrumento en que se pueden convertir. Ayuda a evaluar la capacidad de absorción de pérdidas.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Capital de nivel 1 ordinario] [Capital de nivel 1 adicional] [Capital de nivel 2] [Otros]

29

Si es convertible, especifíquese el emisor del instrumento en que se convierte

Texto libre

30

Características de la amortización

Las entidades especificarán si existe una cláusula de amortización.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Sí] [No]

31

En caso de amortización, factor(es) desencadenantes

Las entidades especificarán las circunstancias en las que se pondrán en marcha las amortizaciones, incluido el punto de inviabilidad. En caso de que una o varias autoridades estén facultadas para iniciar la amortización, se enumerarán todas ellas. Para cada una de las autoridades se indicará si lo que proporciona la base jurídica para iniciar la amortización son las condiciones del contrato del instrumento (enfoque contractual) o bien una determinada normativa (enfoque normativo).

Texto libre

32

En caso de amortización, total o parcial

Las entidades especificarán si el instrumento se amortizará siempre totalmente, puede amortizarse parcialmente o siempre se amortizará parcialmente. Ayuda a evaluar el nivel de absorción de pérdidas en caso de amortización.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Siempre plenamente] [Total o parcialmente] [Siempre parcialmente]

33

En caso de amortización, permanente o temporal

En el caso de instrumentos susceptibles de amortización, las entidades especificarán si la amortización es permanente o temporal.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Permanente] [Temporal] [n/p]

34

Si la amortización es temporal, descripción del mecanismo de revalorización

Las entidades describirán el mecanismo de revalorización.

Texto libre

34a

Tipo de subordinación (solo para los pasivos admisibles)

Las entidades especificarán si el instrumento se ajusta a alguno de los tipos de subordinación descritos en el artículo 72 ter, apartado 2, letra d), incisos i), ii) y iii), del RRC.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones:

[Contractual] si el instrumento cumple los requisitos establecidos en el artículo 72 ter, apartado 2, letra d), inciso i), del RRC.

[Normativo] si el instrumento cumple los requisitos establecidos en el artículo 72 ter, apartado 2, letra d), inciso ii), del RRC.

[Estructural] si el instrumento cumple los requisitos establecidos en el artículo 72 ter, apartado 2, letra d), inciso iii), del RRC.

[Exención de subordinación] cuando el instrumento no se ajuste a ninguna de las formas de subordinación mencionadas y siempre que la entidad haya sido autorizada, de conformidad con el artículo 72 ter, apartado 4, del RRC, a incluir pasivos no subordinados como pasivos admisibles.

EU-34b

Orden de prelación del instrumento en los procedimientos de insolvencia ordinarios

Las entidades especificarán el orden de prelación del instrumento en los procedimientos de insolvencia ordinarios.

Tal como se define en [NTE sobre la notificación del MREL].

35

Posición en la jerarquía de subordinación en la liquidación (especifíquese el tipo de instrumento de rango inmediatamente superior)

Las entidades especificarán el instrumento al que esté subordinado más inmediatamente. En su caso, los bancos especificarán los números de columna, en el cuadro cumplimentado de presentación de las principales características, de los instrumentos a los que el instrumento se subordina de forma inmediata.

Texto libre

36

Características no conformes tras la transición

Las entidades especificarán si existen características no conformes.

Seleccione entre las siguientes opciones: [Sí] [No]

37

En caso afirmativo, especifíquense las características no conformes.

Si existen características no conformes, la entidad deberá especificarlas.

Texto libre

EU-37a

Enlace a los términos y condiciones completos del instrumento (hiperenlace).

Las entidades incluirán el hiperenlace que dé acceso al folleto de la emisión, incluidas todas las condiciones del instrumento.

(1)   

Directiva (UE) 2019/879 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, de 20 de mayo de 2019, por la que se modifica la Directiva 2014/59/UE en relación con la capacidad de absorción de pérdidas y de recapitalización de las entidades de crédito y empresas de servicios de inversión, así como la Directiva 98/26/CE (DO L 150 de 7.6.2019, p. 296).

ANNEX IX




ANNEX IX



Template EU CCyB1 - Geographical distribution of credit exposures relevant for the calculation of the countercyclical buffer

 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

General credit exposures

Relevant credit exposures – Market risk

Securitisation exposures Exposure value for non-trading book

Total exposure value

Own fund requirements

Risk-weighted exposure amounts

Own fund requirements weights (%)

Countercyclical buffer rate (%)

Exposure value under the standardised approach

Exposure value under the IRB approach

Sum of long and short positions of trading book exposures for SA

Value of trading book exposures for internal models

Relevant credit risk exposures - Credit risk

Relevant credit exposures – Market risk

Relevant credit exposures – Securitisation positions in the non-trading book

Total

010

Breakdown by country:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Country: 001

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Country: 002

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

…

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Country: NNN

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

020

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



Template EU CCyB2 - Amount of institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer

 

a

1

Total risk exposure amount

 

2

Institution specific countercyclical capital buffer rate

 

3

Institution specific countercyclical capital buffer requirement

 

ANEXO X Instrucciones para la divulgación de información sobre los colchones de capital anticíclicos

ANEXO X

Instrucciones para la divulgación de información sobre los colchones de capital anticíclicos

Plantilla EU CCyB1 – Distribución geográfica de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes para el cálculo del colchón de capital anticíclico. Formato fijo para las columnas, formato flexible para las filas.

1. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 440, letra a), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 ( 10 ) (RRC) siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU CCyB1, que se recoge en el anexo IX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.

2. El ámbito de la plantilla EU CCyB1 se limita a las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes para el cálculo del colchón anticíclico de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, de la Directiva 2013/36/UE ( 11 ) (DRC).


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

010-01X

Desglose por países

Lista de países en los que la entidad tiene exposiciones crediticias pertinentes para el cálculo del colchón anticíclico específico de cada entidad con arreglo al Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 1152/2014 de la Comisión (1).

El número de filas puede variar en función del número de países en los que la entidad tenga exposiciones crediticias pertinentes para el cálculo del colchón anticíclico. Las entidades numerarán consecutivamente las filas correspondientes a cada país, empezando por 010.

De conformidad con el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 1152/2014 de la Comisión, si las exposiciones de la cartera de negociación o las exposiciones crediticias en el extranjero de la entidad representan menos del 2 % del total agregado de sus exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo, la entidad puede asignar estas exposiciones a su lugar de establecimiento (es decir, al Estado miembro de origen de la entidad). Si las exposiciones del lugar de establecimiento incluyen exposiciones de otros países, estas se identificarán claramente en una nota a pie de página de la plantilla de divulgación de información.

020

Total

Valor de acuerdo con la explicación de las columnas a a m de esta plantilla.

(1)   

Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 1152/2014 de la Comisión, de 4 de junio de 2014, por el que se completa la Directiva 2013/36/UE del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo en cuanto a las normas técnicas de regulación relativas a la determinación de la ubicación geográfica de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes para el cálculo del porcentaje de colchón de capital anticíclico específico de cada entidad (DO L 309 de 30.10.2014, p. 5).


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de columna

Explicación

a

Valor de exposición de las exposiciones crediticias generales con arreglo al método estándar

Valor de exposición de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra a), de la DRC, y el artículo 111 del RRC.

El valor de exposición de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra c), de la DRC, y el artículo 248, letras a) y c), del RRC no se incluirá aquí, sino en la columna e de esta plantilla.

El desglose geográfico se efectuará de conformidad con lo dispuesto en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 1152/2014 de la Comisión.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todas las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra a), de la DRC, y el artículo 111 del RRC.

b

Valor de exposición de las exposiciones crediticias generales con arreglo al método IRB

Valor de exposición de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra a), de la DRC, y los artículos 166, 167 y 168 del RRC.

El valor de exposición de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra c), de la DRC, y el artículo 248, letras a) y c), del RRC no se incluirá aquí, sino en la columna e de esta plantilla.

El desglose geográfico se efectuará de conformidad con lo dispuesto en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 1152/2014 de la Comisión.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todas las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra a), de la DRC, y los artículos 166, 167 y 168 del RRC.

c

Suma de las posiciones largas y cortas de las exposiciones de la cartera de negociación para el método estándar

Suma de las posiciones largas y cortas de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra b), de la DRC, calculada como la suma de las posiciones largas y cortas determinada de conformidad con el artículo 327 del RRC.

El desglose geográfico se efectuará de conformidad con lo dispuesto en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 1152/2014 de la Comisión.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todas las posiciones largas y cortas de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra b), de la DRC, y se calculará como la suma de las posiciones largas y cortas determinada de conformidad con el artículo 327 del RRC.

d

Valor de las exposiciones de la cartera de negociación para los modelos internos

Resultado de sumar los siguientes elementos:

— Valor razonable de las posiciones en efectivo que representen exposiciones crediticias pertinentes determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra b), de la DRC, y el artículo 104 del RRC.

— Valor nocional de los derivados que representan exposiciones crediticias pertinentes determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra b), de la DRC.

El desglose geográfico se efectuará de conformidad con lo dispuesto en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 1152/2014 de la Comisión.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma del valor razonable de todas las posiciones en efectivo que representen exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra b), de la DRC y el artículo 104 del RRC, y la suma del valor nocional de todos los derivados que representen exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra b), de la DRC.

e

Valor de exposición de las exposiciones de titulización para la cartera de inversión

Valor de exposición de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra c), de la DRC, y el artículo 248, letras a) y c), del RRC.

El desglose geográfico se efectuará de conformidad con lo dispuesto en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 1152/2014 de la Comisión.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todas las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra c), de la DRC, y el artículo 248, letras a) y c), del RRC.

f

Valor total de exposición

Suma de los importes de las columnas a, b, c, d y e de esta plantilla.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todas las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, de la DRC.

g

Requisitos de fondos propios – Exposiciones crediticias pertinentes – Riesgo de crédito

Requisitos de fondos propios por las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes en el país de que se trate, determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra a), de la DRC, y con la parte tercera, título II, del RRC, teniendo en cuenta los requisitos de fondos propios vinculados a cualquier ajuste específico por país de las ponderaciones de riesgo establecido de conformidad con el artículo 458 del RRC.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todos los requisitos de fondos propios por las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra a), de la DRC, y con la parte tercera, título II, del RRC.

h

Requisitos de fondos propios – Exposiciones crediticias pertinentes – Riesgo de mercado

Requisitos de fondos propios por las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes en el país de que se trate, determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra b), de la DRC, y con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 2, del RRC, en lo que respecta al riesgo específico, o con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, del RRC, en lo que respecta al riesgo incremental de impago y migración.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todos los requisitos de fondos propios por las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra b), de la DRC, y con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 2, del RRC, en lo que respecta al riesgo específico, o con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, del RRC, en lo que respecta al riesgo incremental de impago y migración.

i

Requisitos de fondos propios – Exposiciones crediticias pertinentes – Posiciones de titulización de la cartera de inversión

Requisitos de fondos propios por las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes en el país de que se trate, determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra c), de la DRC, y con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 5, del RRC.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todos los requisitos de fondos propios por las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, letra c), de la DRC, y con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 5, del RRC.

j

Requisitos de fondos propios – Total

Suma de los importes de las columnas g, h e i de esta plantilla.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todos los requisitos de fondos propios por las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, de la DRC.

k

Importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo

Importes ponderados por riesgo de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes, determinadas de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, de la DRC, desglosadas por países y teniendo en cuenta cualquier ajuste específico por país de las ponderaciones de riesgo establecido de conformidad con el artículo 458 del RRC.

Fila 020 (Total): La suma de todos los importes ponderados por riesgo de las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes se determinará de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 4, de la DRC.

l

Ponderaciones de los requisitos de fondos propios (%)

Ponderación aplicada al porcentaje del colchón anticíclico en cada país, calculada como el total de los requisitos de fondos propios correspondiente a las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes en el país en cuestión (fila 01X, columna j de esta plantilla), dividido por el total de los requisitos de fondos propios correspondiente a todas las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes para el cálculo del colchón anticíclico con arreglo a lo dispuesto en el artículo 140, apartado 4, de la DRC (fila 020, columna j de esta plantilla).

Este valor se consignará como un porcentaje con 2 decimales.

m

Porcentaje de colchón de capital anticíclico (%)

Porcentaje de colchón de capital anticíclico aplicable en el país en cuestión, y establecido de conformidad con los artículos 136, 137, 138 y 139 de la DRC.

Esta columna no incluirá los porcentajes de colchón de capital anticíclico ya fijados, pero todavía no aplicables en el momento del cómputo del colchón de capital anticíclico específico de cada entidad objeto de divulgación.

Este valor se consignará como porcentaje con el mismo número de decimales que el establecido de conformidad con los artículos 136, 137, 138 y 139 de la DRC.

Plantilla EU CCyB2 – Importe del colchón de capital anticíclico específico de cada entidad

3. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 440, letra b), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU CCyB2, que se recoge en el anexo IX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1

Importe total de la exposición al riesgo

El importe total de la exposición al riesgo calculado de conformidad con el artículo 92, apartado 3, del RRC.

2

Porcentaje del colchón de capital anticíclico específico de la entidad

Porcentaje del colchón de capital anticíclico específico de la entidad, determinado de conformidad con el artículo 140, apartado 1, de la DRC.

El porcentaje de colchón de capital anticíclico específico de cada entidad se calculará como la media ponderada de los porcentajes de colchón anticíclico que se apliquen en los países en que se encuentren las exposiciones crediticias pertinentes de la entidad, indicados en las filas 010.1 a 010.X de la columna m de la plantilla EU CCyB1.

La ponderación aplicada al porcentaje del colchón de capital anticíclico en cada país es igual a la proporción de los requisitos de fondos propios respecto del total de los requisitos de fondos propios, y figura en la columna 1 de la plantilla EU CCyB1.

Este valor se consignará como un porcentaje con 2 decimales.

3

Requisito de colchón de capital anticíclico de cada entidad

Requisito de colchón de capital anticíclico específico de cada entidad, calculado como el porcentaje de colchón anticíclico específico de cada entidad, divulgado en la fila 2 de esta plantilla, aplicado al importe total de la exposición al riesgo, tal como se divulga en la fila 1 de esta plantilla.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de columna

Explicación

a

Valor de acuerdo con la explicación de las columnas 1 a 3 de esta plantilla.

ANNEX XI




ANNEX XI

Template EU LR1 - LRSum: Summary reconciliation of accounting assets and leverage ratio exposures



 

 

a

 

 

Applicable amount

1

Total assets as per published financial statements

 

2

Adjustment for entities which are consolidated for accounting purposes but are outside the scope of prudential consolidation

 

3

(Adjustment for securitised exposures that meet the operational requirements for the recognition of risk transference)

 

4

(Adjustment for temporary exemption of exposures to central banks (if applicable))

 

5

(Adjustment for fiduciary assets recognised on the balance sheet pursuant to the applicable accounting framework but excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (i) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

 

6

Adjustment for regular-way purchases and sales of financial assets subject to trade date accounting

 

7

Adjustment for eligible cash pooling transactions

 

8

Adjustment for derivative financial instruments

 

9

Adjustment for securities financing transactions (SFTs)

 

10

Adjustment for off-balance sheet items (ie conversion to credit equivalent amounts of off-balance sheet exposures)

 

11

(Adjustment for prudent valuation adjustments and specific and general provisions which have reduced Tier 1 capital)

 

EU-11a

(Adjustment for exposures excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (c) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

 

EU-11b

(Adjustment for exposures excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (j) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

 

12

Other adjustments

 

13

Total exposure measure

 

Template EU LR2 - LRCom: Leverage ratio common disclosure



 

CRR leverage ratio exposures

 

a

b

T

T-1

On-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives and SFTs)

1

On-balance sheet items (excluding derivatives, SFTs, but including collateral)

 

 

2

Gross-up for derivatives collateral provided, where deducted from the balance sheet assets pursuant to the applicable accounting framework

 

 

3

(Deductions of receivables assets for cash variation margin provided in derivatives transactions)

 

 

4

(Adjustment for securities received under securities financing transactions that are recognised as an asset)

 

 

5

(General credit risk adjustments to on-balance sheet items)

 

 

6

(Asset amounts deducted in determining Tier 1 capital)

 

 

7

Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives and SFTs)

 

 

Derivative exposures

8

Replacement cost associated with SA-CCR derivatives transactions (ie net of eligible cash variation margin)

 

 

EU-8a

Derogation for derivatives: replacement costs contribution under the simplified standardised approach

 

 

9

Add-on amounts for potential future exposure associated with SA-CCR derivatives transactions

 

 

EU-9a

Derogation for derivatives: Potential future exposure contribution under the simplified standardised approach

 

 

EU-9b

Exposure determined under Original Exposure Method

 

 

10

(Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared trade exposures) (SA-CCR)

 

 

EU-10a

(Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared trade exposures) (simplified standardised approach)

 

 

EU-10b

(Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared trade exposures) (Original Exposure Method)

 

 

11

Adjusted effective notional amount of written credit derivatives

 

 

12

(Adjusted effective notional offsets and add-on deductions for written credit derivatives)

 

 

13

Total derivatives exposures

 

 

Securities financing transaction (SFT) exposures

14

Gross SFT assets (with no recognition of netting), after adjustment for sales accounting transactions

 

 

15

(Netted amounts of cash payables and cash receivables of gross SFT assets)

 

 

16

Counterparty credit risk exposure for SFT assets

 

 

EU-16a

Derogation for SFTs: Counterparty credit risk exposure in accordance with Articles 429e(5) and 222 CRR

 

 

17

Agent transaction exposures

 

 

EU-17a

(Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared SFT exposure)

 

 

18

Total securities financing transaction exposures

 

 

Other off-balance sheet exposures

19

Off-balance sheet exposures at gross notional amount

 

 

20

(Adjustments for conversion to credit equivalent amounts)

 

 

21

(General provisions deducted in determining Tier 1 capital and specific provisions associated associated with off-balance sheet exposures)

 

 

22

Off-balance sheet exposures

 

 

Excluded exposures

EU-22a

(Exposures excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (c) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

 

 

EU-22b

(Exposures exempted in accordance with point (j) of Article 429a(1) CRR (on and off balance sheet))

 

 

EU-22c

(Excluded exposures of public development banks (or units) - Public sector investments)

 

 

EU-22d

(Excluded exposures of public development banks (or units) - Promotional loans)

 

 

EU-22e

(Excluded passing-through promotional loan exposures by non-public development banks (or units))

 

 

EU-22f

(Excluded guaranteed parts of exposures arising from export credits)

 

 

EU-22g

(Excluded excess collateral deposited at triparty agents)

 

 

EU-22h

(Excluded CSD related services of CSD/institutions in accordance with point (o) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

 

 

EU-22i

(Excluded CSD related services of designated institutions in accordance with point (p) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

 

 

EU-22j

(Reduction of the exposure value of pre-financing or intermediate loans)

 

 

EU-22k

(Total exempted exposures)

 

 

Capital and total exposure measure

23

Tier 1 capital

 

 

24

Total exposure measure

 

 

Leverage ratio

25

Leverage ratio (%)

 

 

EU-25

Leverage ratio (excluding the impact of the exemption of public sector investments and promotional loans) (%)

 

 

25a

Leverage ratio (excluding the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) (%)

 

 

26

Regulatory minimum leverage ratio requirement (%)

 

 

EU-26a

Additional own funds requirements to address the risk of excessive leverage (%)

 

 

EU-26b

of which: to be made up of CET1 capital

 

 

27

Leverage ratio buffer requirement (%)

 

 

EU-27a

Overall leverage ratio requirement (%)

 

 

Choice on transitional arrangements and relevant exposures

EU-27b

Choice on transitional arrangements for the definition of the capital measure

 

 

Disclosure of mean values

28

Mean of daily values of gross SFT assets, after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivable

 

 

29

Quarter-end value of gross SFT assets, after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables

 

 

30

Total exposure measure (including the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) incorporating mean values from row 28 of gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables)

 

 

30a

Total exposure measure (excluding the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) incorporating mean values from row 28 of gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables)

 

 

31

Leverage ratio (including the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) incorporating mean values from row 28 of gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables)

 

 

31a

Leverage ratio (excluding the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) incorporating mean values from row 28 of gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables)

 

 

Template EU LR3 - LRSpl: Split-up of on balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures)



 

a

 

 

CRR leverage ratio exposures

EU-1

Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs, and exempted exposures), of which:

 

EU-2

Trading book exposures

 

EU-3

Banking book exposures, of which:

 

EU-4

Covered bonds

 

EU-5

Exposures treated as sovereigns

 

EU-6

Exposures to regional governments, MDB, international organisations and PSE, not treated as sovereigns

 

EU-7

Institutions

 

EU-8

Secured by mortgages of immovable properties

 

EU-9

Retail exposures

 

EU-10

Corporates

 

EU-11

Exposures in default

 

EU-12

Other exposures (eg equity, securitisations, and other non-credit obligation assets)

 

Table EU LRA: Disclosure of LR qualitative information



 

 

a

Row

Free format

(a)

Description of the processes used to manage the risk of excessive leverage

 

(b)

Description of the factors that had an impact on the leverage ratio during the period to which the disclosed leverage ratio refers

 

ANNEX XII Instructions for leverage ratio disclosures




ANNEX XII

Instructions for leverage ratio disclosures

Template EU LR1 - LRSum: Summary reconciliation of accounting assets and leverage ratio exposures. Fixed format template.

1. Institutions shall apply the instructions provided in this section to complete template EU LR1 - LRSum in application of point (b) of Article 451(1) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 ( 12 ) (‘CRR’).



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1

Total assets as per published financial statements

Institutions shall disclose the total assets as published in their financial statements under the applicable accounting framework as defined in point (77) of Article 4(1) CRR.

2

Adjustment for entities which are consolidated for accounting purposes but are outside the scope of prudential consolidation

Institutions shall disclose the difference in value between the total exposure measure as disclosed in row 13 of template EU LR1 - LRSum and total accounting assets as disclosed in row 1 of template EU LR1 - LRSum, which results from differences between the accounting scope of consolidation and the scope of prudential consolidation.

If this adjustment leads to an increase in exposure, institutions shall disclose this as a positive amount. If this adjustment leads to a decrease in exposure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

3

(Adjustment for securitised exposures that meet the operational requirements for the recognition of risk transference)

Point (m) of Article 429a(1) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the amount of the securitised exposures from traditional securitisations that meet the conditions for significant risk transfer set out in Article 244(2) CRR.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

4

(Adjustment for temporary exemption of exposures to central banks (if applicable))

Point (n) of Article 429a(1) CRR

If applicable, institutions shall disclose the amount of coins and banknotes constituting legal currency in the jurisdiction of the central bank and assets representing claims on the central bank, including reserves held at the central bank. These exposures may be temporarily exempted subject to the conditions mentioned in Article 429a(5) and (6) CRR.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

5

(Adjustment for fiduciary assets recognised on the balance sheet pursuant to the applicable accounting framework but excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (i) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

Institutions shall disclose the amount of derecognised fiduciary items in accordance with point (i) of Article 429a(1) CRR.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

6

Adjustment for regular-way purchases and sales of financial assets subject to trade date accounting

Article 429g(1) and (2) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the adjustment of the accounting value related to regular-way purchases or sales awaiting settlement subject to trade date accounting in accordance with Article 429g(1) and (2) CRR. The adjustment is the sum of:

— The amount offset between cash receivables for regular-way sales awaiting settlement and cash payables for regular-way purchases awaiting settlement allowed under the accounting framework. This is a positive amount.

— The amount offset between cash receivables and cash payables where both the related regular-way sales and purchases are settled on a delivery-versus-payment basis in accordance with Article 429g(2) CRR. This is a negative value.

Regular-way purchases or sales awaiting settlement subject to settlement date accounting in accordance with Article 429g(3) CRR shall be included in row 10 of template EU LR1 - LRSum.

If this adjustment leads to an increase in exposure, institutions shall disclose this as a positive amount. If this adjustment leads to a decrease in exposure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

7

Adjustment for eligible cash pooling transactions

Article 429b(2) and (3) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the difference between the accounting value and the leverage ratio exposure value of cash pooling arrangements in accordance with the conditions mentioned in Article 429b(2) and (3) CRR.

If this adjustment leads to an increase in exposure, due to transactions that are represented net under the applicable accounting framework but do not meet the conditions for net presentation under Article 429b(2) and (3) CRR, institutions shall disclose this as a positive amount. If this adjustment leads to a decrease in exposure, due to transactions that are not represented net under the applicable accounting framework but do meet the conditions for net presentation under Article 429b(2) and (3) CRR, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

8

Adjustment for derivative financial instruments

For credit derivatives and contracts listed in Annex II of CRR, institutions shall disclose the difference in value between the accounting value of the derivatives recognised as assets and the leverage ratio exposure value as determined by application of point (b) of Article 429(4), Article 429c, 429d, points (g) and (h) of Article 429a(1), and of Article 429(5) CRR.

If this adjustment leads to an increase in exposure, institutions shall disclose this as a positive amount. If this adjustment leads to a decrease in exposure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

9

Adjustment for securities financing transactions (SFTs)

For SFTs institutions shall disclose the difference in value between the accounting value of the SFTs recognised as assets and the leverage ratio exposure value as determined by application of points (a) and (c) of Article 429(4) in conjunction with Article 429e, point (b) of Article 429(7) and with point (b) of Article 429b(1), with Article 429b(4), and with points (g) and (h) of 429a(1) CRR.

If this adjustment leads to an increase in the exposure, institutions shall disclose this as a positive amount. If this adjustment leads to a decrease in exposure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

10

Adjustment for off-balance sheet items (i.e. conversion to credit equivalent amounts of off- balance sheet exposures)

Institutions shall disclose the difference in value between the leverage ratio exposure as disclosed in row 13 of template EU LR1 - LRSum and total accounting assets as disclosed in row 1 of template EU LR1 - LRSum that results from the inclusion of off-balance sheet items in the leverage ratio total exposure measure.

This includes the commitments to pay related to regular-way purchases under settlement date accounting as calculated in accordance with Article 429g(3) CRR.

As this adjustment increases the total exposure measure, it shall be disclosed as a positive amount.

11

(Adjustment for prudent valuation adjustments and specific and general provisions which have reduced Tier 1 capital)

Institutions shall disclose the amount of prudent valuation adjustments in accordance with points (a) and (b) of Article 429a(1) CRR and the amount of specific (if relevant) and general credit risk adjustments to on- and off-balance-sheet items as per the last sentence of Article 429(4) and Article 429f(2) CRR that have reduced Tier 1 capital. Specific provisions shall only be included if, in accordance with the applicable accounting framework, they are not already deducted from the gross carrying amount values.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-11a

(Adjustment for exposures excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (c) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

Point (c) of Article 429a(1) and Article 113(6) and (7) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the on-balance sheet portion of exposures excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (c) of Article 429a(1) CRR.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-11b

(Adjustment for exposures excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (j) of Article 429a(1) CRR

Point (j) of Article 429a(1), Article 116(4) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the on-balance sheet portion of exposures excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (j) of Article 429a(1) CRR.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the values in this row between brackets (negative amount).

12

Other adjustments

Institutions shall include any remaining difference in value between the total exposure measure and total accounting assets. Institutions shall consider the exposure adjustments in accordance with Article 429(8) CRR and other exposure adjustments mentioned in points (d), (e), (f), (h), (k), (l), (o), (p) of Article 429a(1) CRR that are not disclosed anywhere in the template.

If these adjustments lead to an increase in the exposure, institutions shall disclose this as a positive amount. If these adjustments lead to a decrease in exposure, the institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

13

Total exposure measure

Total exposure measure (also disclosed in row 24 of template EU LR2 - LRCom), which is the sum of the previous items.

Template EULR2 - LRCom: Leverage ratio common disclosure. Fixed format template

2. Institutions shall apply the instructions provided in this section to complete template EU LR2 - LRCom in application of points (a) and (b) of Article 451(1) CRR and of Article 451(3) CRR, taking into account, where applicable, point (c) of Article 451(1) and Article 451(2) CRR.

3. Institutions shall disclose in column ‘a’ the values of the different rows for the disclosure period and in column ‘b’ the values of the rows for the previous disclosure period.

4. Institutions shall explain in the narrative accompanying the template the composition of promotional loans disclosed in rows EU-22d and EU-22e of this template, including information by type of counterparty.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1

On-balance sheet items (excluding derivatives, SFTs, but including collateral)

Article 429 and 429b CRR

Institutions shall disclose all assets, other than contracts listed in Annex II CRR, credit derivatives, and SFTs. Institutions shall base the valuation of these assets on the principles set out in Article 429(7) and 429b(1) CRR.

Institutions shall take into account in this calculation, if applicable, points (i), (m) and (n) of Article 429a(1) CRR, Article 429g and the last paragraph of Article 429(4) CRR.

Institutions shall include in this cell cash received or any security that is provided to a counterparty via SFTs and that is retained on the balance sheet (i.e. the accounting criteria for derecognition under the applicable accounting framework are not met).

Institutions shall not take into account in this calculation Article 429(8) and points (a)-(h), (j) and (k) of Article 429a(1) CRR, i.e. they shall not reduce the amount to be disclosed in this row by those exemptions.

2

Gross-up for derivatives collateral provided, where deducted from the balance sheet assets pursuant to the applicable accounting framework

Article 429c(2) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the amount of any derivatives collateral provided where the provision of that collateral reduces the amount of assets under the applicable accounting framework, as set out in Article 429c(2) CRR.

Institutions shall not include in this cell initial margin for client-cleared derivative transactions with a qualifying CCP (QCCP) or eligible cash variation margin, as defined in Article 429c(3) CRR.

3

(Deductions of receivables assets for cash variation margin provided in derivatives transactions)

Article 429c(3) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the receivables for variation margin paid in cash to the counterparty in derivatives transactions if the institution is required, under the applicable accounting framework, to recognise these receivables as an asset, provided that the conditions in points (a) to (e) of Article 429c(3) CRR are met.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

4

(Adjustment for securities received under securities financing transactions that are recognised as an asset)

Adjustment for securities received under a securities financing transaction where the bank has recognised the securities as an asset on its balance sheet. These amounts are to be excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with Article 429e(6) CRR.

As the adjustments in this row reduce the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

5

(General credit risk adjustments to on-balance sheet items)

The amount of general credit risk adjustments corresponding to on-balance sheet items referred to in point (a) of Article 429(4) CRR, which institutions deduct in accordance with the last paragraph of Article 429(4) CRR.

As the adjustments in this row reduce the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

6

(Asset amounts deducted in determining Tier 1 capital)

Points (a) and (b) of Article 429a(1) and Article 499(2) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the amount of regulatory value adjustments made to Tier 1 amounts in accordance with the choice made pursuant to Article 499(2) CRR.

More specifically, institutions shall disclose the value of the sum of all the adjustments that target the value of an asset and which are required by:

— Articles 32 to 35 CRR, or

— Articles 36 to 47 CRR, or

— Articles 56 to 60 CRR, as applicable.

Institutions shall include in this cell the amount referred to in point (a) of Article 429a(1) CRR.

Where the choice to disclose Tier 1 capital is made in accordance with point (a) of Article 499(1) CRR, institutions shall take into account the exemptions, alternatives and waivers to such deductions laid down in Articles 48, 49 and 79 CRR, without taking into account the derogation laid down in Chapters 1 and 2 of Title I of Part Ten CRR. In contrast, where the choice to disclose Tier 1 capital is made in accordance with point (b) of Article 499(1) CRR, institutions shall take into account exemptions, alternatives and waivers to such deductions laid down in Articles 48, 49 and 79 CRR, in addition to taking into account the derogations laid down in Chapter 1 and 2 of Title I of Part Ten CRR.

To avoid double counting, institutions shall not disclose adjustments already applied pursuant to Article 111 CRR when calculating the exposure value, nor shall they disclose any adjustment that does not deduct the value of a specific asset.

As the amount in this row reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this cell between brackets (negative amount).

7

Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives and SFTs)

Sum of rows 1 to 6

8

Replacement cost associated with SA-CCR transactions (i.e. net of eligible cash variation margin)

Articles 274, 275, 295, 296, 297, 298, 429c and 429c(3) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the current replacement cost as specified in Article 275(1) of contracts listed in Annex II CRR and credit derivatives including those that are off-balance sheet. These replacement costs shall be net of eligible cash variation margin in accordance with Article 429c(3) CRR whereas any cash variation margin received on an exempted CCP leg in accordance with points (g) or (h) of Article 429a(1) CRR shall not be included.

As determined by Article 429c(1) CRR, institutions may take into account the effects of contracts for novation and other netting agreements in accordance with Article 295 CRR. Cross-product netting shall not apply. However, institutions may net within the product category referred to in point (c) of Article 272(25) CRR and credit derivatives when they are subject to a contractual cross-product netting agreement referred to in point (c) of Article 295 CRR.

Institutions shall not include in this cell contracts measured by application of the approaches in accordance with Articles 429c(6), i.e. the approaches in Section 4 or 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR (the simplified SA-CCR or Original Exposure Method).

When calculating the replacement costs institutions shall include, in accordance with Article 429c(4) CRR, the effect of the recognition of collateral on NICA on derivative contracts with clients where those contracts are cleared by a QCCP.

The amount shall be disclosed with the 1,4 alpha factor as specified in Article 274(2) CRR.

EU-8a

Derogation for derivatives: replacement costs contribution under the simplified standardised approach

Articles 429c(6) and 281 CRR

This cell provides the exposure measure of contracts listed in points 1 and 2 of Annex II CRR, calculated in accordance with the simplified standardised approach set out in Article 281 CRR, without the effect of collateral on NICA. The amount shall be disclosed with the 1,4 alpha factor applied as specified in Article 274(2) CRR.

Institutions that apply the simplified standardised approach shall not reduce the total exposure measure by the amount of margin received in accordance with Article 429c(6) CRR. Hence the exception for derivative contracts with clients where those contracts are cleared by a QCCP in Article 429c(4) CRR shall not apply.

Institutions shall not consider in this cell contracts measured by application of the SA-CCR or the original exposure method.

9

Add-on amounts for potential future exposure associated with SA-CCR derivatives transactions

Articles 274, 275, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299 (2) and 429c CRR

Institutions shall disclose the add-on for the potential future exposure of contracts listed in Annex II of CRR and of credit derivatives including those that are off-balance sheet calculated in accordance with Article 278 CRR for contracts listed in Annex II CRR and Article 299(2) CRR for credit derivatives and applying netting rules in accordance with Article 429c(1) CRR. In determining the exposure value of those contracts, institutions may take into account the effects of contracts for novation and other netting agreements in accordance with Article 295 CRR. Cross-product netting shall not apply. However, institutions may net within the product category referred to in point (c) of Article 272(25) CRR and credit derivatives when they are subject to a contractual cross-product netting agreement referred to in point (c) of Article 295 CRR.

In accordance with Article 429c(5) CRR, institutions shall set the value of the multiplier used in the calculation of the potential future exposure in accordance with Article 278(1) CRR to one, except in the case of derivative contracts with clients where those contracts are cleared by a QCCP.

Institutions shall not include in this cell contracts measured by application of the approaches in accordance with Articles 429c(6), i.e. the approaches in Section 4 or 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR (the simplified SA-CCR or Original Exposure Method).

EU-9a

Derogation for derivatives: Potential future exposure contribution under the simplified standardised approach

Article 429c(5) CRR

The potential future exposure in accordance with the simplified standardised approach set out in Article 281 CRR, assuming a multiplier of 1. The amount shall be disclosed with the 1,4 alpha factor applied as specified in Article 274(2) CRR.

Institutions that apply the simplified standardised approach shall not reduce the total exposure measure by the amount of margin received in accordance with Article 429c(6) CRR. Hence, the exception for derivative contracts with clients where those contracts are cleared by a QCCP in Article 429c(5) CRR shall not apply.

Institutions shall not consider in this cell contracts measured by application of the SA-CCR or the original exposure method.

EU-9b

Exposure determined under Original Exposure Method

Article 429c(6) and Section 4 or 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

Institutions shall disclose the exposure measure of contracts listed in points 1 and 2 of Annex II CRR calculated in accordance with the Original Exposure Method set out in Section 4 or 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

Institutions that apply the Original Exposure Method shall not reduce the exposure measure by the amount of margin they have received in accordance with Article 429c(6) CRR.

Institutions that do not use the Original Exposure Method shall not disclose this cell.

10

(Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared trade exposures) (SA-CCR)

Points (g) and (h) of Article 429a(1) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the exempted trade exposures to a QCCP from client-cleared derivatives transactions (SA-CCR), provided that those items meet the conditions laid down in point (c) Article 306(1) CRR.

Since it reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this cell between brackets (negative amount).

The amount disclosed must also be included in the applicable cells above as if no exemption applied.

EU-10a

(Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared trade exposures) (simplified standardised approach)

Points (g) and (h) of Article 429a(1) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the exempted trade exposures to a QCCP from client-cleared derivatives transactions (simplified standardised approach), provided that those items meet the conditions laid down in point (c) of Article 306(1) CRR. The amount shall be disclosed with the 1,4 alpha factor applied as specified in Article 274(2) CRR (negative amount).

The disclosed amount must also be included in the applicable cells above as if no exemption applied.

EU-10b

(Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared trade exposures) (Original Exposure Method)

Points (g) and (h) of Article 429a(1) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the exempted trade exposures to a QCCP from client-cleared derivatives transactions (original exposure method), provided that those items meet the conditions laid down in point (c) of Article 306(1) CRR.

Since it reduces the total exposure measure institutions shall place the value in this cell between brackets (negative amount).

The disclosed amount must also be included in the applicable cells above as if no exemption applied.

11

Adjusted effective notional amount of written credit derivatives

Article 429d CRR

Institutions shall disclose the capped notional value of written credit derivatives (i.e. where the institution is providing credit protection to a counterparty) as set out in Article 429d CRR.

12

(Adjusted effective notional offsets and add-on deductions for written credit derivatives)

Article 429d CRR

Institutions shall disclose the capped notional value of purchased credit derivatives (i.e. where the institution is buying credit protection from a counterparty) on the same reference names as those credit derivatives written by the institution, where the remaining maturity of the purchased protection is equal to or greater than the remaining maturity of the sold protection. Hence, the value shall not be greater than the value entered in row 11 of template EU LR2 - LRCom for each reference name.

Since the disclosed amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this cell between brackets (negative amount).

The disclosed amount must also be included in the previous cell as if no adjustment applied.

13

Total derivatives exposures

Sum of rows 8 to 12

14

Gross SFT assets (with no recognition of netting), after adjustment for sales accounting transactions

Point (77) of Article 4(1), Articles 206 and 429e(6) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the accounting balance sheet value, under the applicable accounting framework, of SFTs both covered and not covered by a master netting agreement eligible under Article 206 CRR, where the contracts are recognised as assets on the balance sheet assuming no prudential or accounting netting or risk mitigation effects (i.e. the accounting balance sheet value adjusted for the effects of accounting netting or risk mitigation).

Furthermore, where sale accounting is achieved for a SFT under the applicable accounting framework, institutions shall reverse all sales related accounting entries in accordance with Article 429e(6) CRR.

Institutions shall not include in this cell cash received or any security that is provided to a counterparty via the aforementioned transactions and is retained on the balance sheet (i.e. the accounting criteria for derecognition are not met).

15

(Netted amounts of cash payables and cash receivables of gross SFT assets)

Point (77) of Article 4(1), Article 206, point (b) of Article 429b(1), Articles 429b(4) and 429e(6) CRR.

Institutions shall disclose the cash payables amount of gross SFT assets that have been netted in accordance with Article 429b(4) CRR.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

16

Counterparty credit risk exposure for SFT assets

Article 429e(1) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the add-on for SFTs counterparty credit risk, including those that are off-balance sheet, determined in accordance with Article 429e(2) or (3) CRR, as applicable.

Institutions shall include in this cell transactions in accordance with point (c) of Article 429e(7) CRR.

Institutions shall not include in this cell agent SFTs where the institution provides an indemnity or guarantee to a customer or counterparty limited to any difference between the value of the security or cash the customer has lent and the value of collateral the borrower has provided in accordance with point (a) of Article 429e(7) CRR.

EU-16a

Derogation for SFTs: Counterparty credit risk exposure in accordance with Articles 429e(5) and 222 CRR

Articles 429e(5) and 222 CRR

Institutions shall disclose the add-on for SFTs including those that are off-balance sheet calculated in accordance with Article 222 CRR, subject to a 20 % floor for the applicable risk weight.

Institutions shall include in this cell transactions in accordance with point (c) of Article 429e(7) CRR.

Institutions shall not include in this cell transactions for which the add-on part of the leverage ratio exposure value is determined in accordance with the method defined in Article 429e(1) CRR.

17

Agent transaction exposures

Article 429e(2)(3) and point (a) of Article 429e(7) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the exposure value for agent SFTs where the institution provides an indemnity or guarantee to a customer or counterparty limited to any difference between the value of the security or cash the customer has lent and the value of collateral the borrower has provided in accordance with point (a) of Article 429e(7) CRR. The exposure value shall consist only of the add-on determined in accordance with Article 429e(2) or (3) CRR, as applicable.

Institutions shall not include in this cell transactions in accordance with point (c) of Article 429e(7) CRR.

EU-17a

(Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared SFT exposure)

Points (g) and (h) of Article 429a(1) and point (c) of Article 306(1) CRR.

Institutions shall disclose the exempted CCP leg of client-cleared trade exposures of SFTs, provided that those items meet the conditions laid down in point (c) of Article 306(1) CRR.

Where the exempted leg to the CCP is a security, it shall not be included in this cell, unless it is a repledged security that under the applicable accounting framework (i.e. in accordance with the first sentence of Article 111(1) CRR) is included at full value.

As this adjustment reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

The disclosed amount must also be included in the applicable cells above as if no exemption applied.

18

Total securities financing transaction exposures

Sum of rows 14 to EU-17a

19

Off-balance sheet exposures at gross notional amount

Article 429f CRR

Institutions shall disclose the nominal value of all off-balance sheet items as defined in Article 429f CRR, before any adjustment for conversion factors and specific credit risk adjustments.

20

(Adjustments for conversion to credit equivalent amounts)

Article 429f CRR

Reduction in gross amount of off-balance sheet exposures due to the application of CCFs. Since it reduces the total exposure measure, the value disclosed in this row shall contribute negatively in the calculation of the sum to be disclosed in row 22 of template EU LR2 - LRCom.

21

(General provisions deducted in determining Tier 1 capital and specific provisions associated with off-balance sheet exposures)

Articles 429(4) and 429f(1) and (2) CRR

Institutions may reduce the credit exposure equivalent amount of an off-balance-sheet item by the corresponding amount of general credit risk adjustments that are deducted from Tier 1 capital. The calculation shall be subject to a floor of zero.

Institutions may reduce the credit exposure equivalent amount of an off-balance-sheet item by the corresponding amount of specific credit risk adjustments. The calculation shall be subject to a floor of zero.

The absolute value of these credit risk adjustments shall not exceed the sum of rows 19 and 20.

As these adjustments reduce the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

The disclosed amount shall also be included in the applicable cells above as if this reduction did not apply.

22

Off-balance sheet exposures

Articles 429f, 111(1) and 166(9) CRR; sum of rows 19 to 21

Institutions shall disclose the leverage ratio exposure values for off-balance sheet items determined in accordance with Article 429f CRR taking into account the relevant conversion factors.

Institutions shall take into account that rows 20-21 of template EU LR2 - LRCom contribute negatively in the calculation of this sum.

EU-22a

(Exposures excluded from the total exposure measure in accordance with point (c) of Article 429a(1) CRR))

Point (c) of Article 429a(1) and Article 113(6) and (7) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the exposures exempted in accordance with point (c) of Article 429a(1).

The disclosed amount shall also be included in the applicable cells above as if no exemption applied.

Since this amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22b

(Exposures exempted in accordance with point (j) of Article 429a(1) CRR (on and off balance sheet))

Point (j) of Article 429a(1) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the exposures exempted in accordance with point (j) of Article 429a(1) CRR subject to the therein stated conditions being met.

The disclosed amount shall also be included in the applicable cells above as if no exemption applied.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22c

(Excluded exposures of public development banks (or units) – Public sector investments)

Point (d) of Article 429a(1) and Article 429a(2) CRR

The exposures arising from assets that constitute claims on central governments, regional governments, local authorities or public sector entities in relation to public sector investments, which can be excluded in accordance with point (d) of Article 429a(1) CRR. This shall only include cases where the institution is a public development credit institution, or the exposures are held within a unit treated as a public development unit in accordance with the last subparagraph of Article 429a(2) CRR.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this cell between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22d

(Excluded exposures of public development banks (or units) – Promotional loans)

Point (d) of Article 429a(1) and Article 429a(2) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the excluded promotional loans in accordance with point (d) of Article 429a(1) CRR. This shall only include cases where the institution is a public development credit institution or promotional loans are held within a unit treated as a public development unit in accordance with the last subparagraph of Article 429a(2) CRR.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22e

(Excluded passing-through promotional loan exposures by non-public development banks (or units))

Point (e) of Article 429a(1) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the excluded exposures in accordance with point (e) of Article 429a(1) CRR relating to the parts of exposures arising from passing-through promotional loans to other credit institutions. This shall only include cases where the institution is not a public development credit institution and the activity is not with any unit treated as a public development unit in accordance with the last subparagraph of Article 429a(2) CRR.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22f

(Excluded guaranteed parts of exposures arising from export credits)

Point (f) of Article 429a(1) CRR

The guaranteed parts of exposures arising from export credits that can be excluded when the conditions of point (f) of Article 429a(1) CRR are met.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22g

(Excluded excess collateral deposited at triparty agents)

Point (k) of Article 429a(1) CRR

The excess collateral deposited at triparty agents that has not been lent out, which can be excluded in accordance with point (k) of Article 429a(1) CRR.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22h

(Excluded CSD related services of CSD/institutions in accordance with point (o) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

Point (o) of Article 429a(1) CRR

The Central Securities Depositories (CSD) related services of CSD/ institutions that can be excluded in accordance with point (o) of Article 429a(1) CRR.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22i

(Excluded CSD related services of designated institutions in accordance with point (p) of Article 429a(1) CRR)

Point (p) of Article 429a(1) CRR

The CSD related services of designated institutions that can be excluded in accordance with point (p) of Article 429a(1) CRR.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22j

(Reduction of the exposure value of pre-financing or intermediate loans)

Article 429(8) CRR

The amount reduced from the exposure value of a pre-financing loan or an intermediate loan, in accordance with Article 429(8) CRR.

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

EU-22k

(Total excluded exposures)

Sum of rows EU-22a to EU-22j

Since the amount reduces the total exposure measure, institutions shall place the value in this row between brackets (negative amount).

23

Tier 1 capital

Articles 429(3) and 499(1) and (2) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the amount of Tier 1 capital calculated in accordance with the choice that the institution has made pursuant to Article 499(2) CRR, as disclosed in row EU-27 of template EU LR2 - LRCom.

More specifically, where the institution has chosen to disclose Tier 1 capital in accordance with point (a) of Article 499(1) CRR, it shall disclose the amount of Tier 1 capital as calculated in accordance with Article 25 CRR, without taking into account the derogations laid down in Chapters 1 and 2 of Title I of Part Ten of CRR.

In contrast, where the institution has chosen to disclose Tier 1 capital in accordance with point (b) of Article 499(1) CRR, it shall disclose the amount of Tier 1 capital as calculated in accordance with Article 25 CRR, after taking into account the derogations laid down in Chapters 1 and 2 of Title I of Part Ten CRR.

24

Total exposure measure

Sum of amounts in rows 7, 13, 18, 22, and EU-22k of EU LR2 - LRCom

25

Leverage ratio (%)

Institutions shall disclose the amount in row 23 of template EU LR2 - LRCom expressed as a percentage of the amount in row 24 of template EU LR2 - LRCom.

EU-25

Leverage ratio (excluding the impact of the exemption of public sector investments and promotional loans) (%)

In accordance with Article 451(2) CRR, public development credit institutions as defined in Article 429a(2) CRR shall disclose the leverage ratio without the adjustment to the total exposure measure determined in accordance with point (d) of Article 429a(1) CRR, i.e. the adjustment that is disclosed in rows EU-22c and EU-22d of this template.

25a

Leverage ratio (excluding the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) (%)

If an institution’s total exposure measure is subject to the temporary exemption of central bank reserves set out in point (n) of Article 429a(1) CRR, this ratio is defined as the Tier 1 capital measure divided by the sum of the total exposure measure and the amount of the central bank reserves exemption, with this ratio expressed as a percentage.

If the institution’s total exposure measure is not subject to a temporary exemption of central bank reserves, this ratio will be identical to the ratio disclosed in row 25.

26

Regulatory minimum leverage ratio requirement (%)

Point (d) of Article 92(1), point (n) of Article 429a(1) and Article 429a(7) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the leverage ratio requirement as set out in point (d) of Article 92(1) CRR. Where an institution excludes the exposures referred to in point (n) of Article 429a(1) CRR, it shall disclose the adjusted leverage ratio requirement calculated in accordance with Article 429a(7) CRR.

EU-26a

Additional own funds requirements to address the risk of excessive leverage (%)

The additional own funds requirements to address the risk of excessive leverage imposed by the competent authority under point (a) of Article 104(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU (‘CRD’), expressed as a percentage of the total exposure measure

EU-26b

of which: to be made up of CET1 capital (percentage points)

The part of the additional own funds requirements to address the risk of excessive leverage imposed by the competent authority under point (a) of Article 104(1) CRD, which has to be met with CET 1 capital in accordance with the third subparagraph of Article 104a(4)

27

Leverage ratio buffer requirement (%)

Article 92(1a) CRR

Institutions that are subject to Article 92(1a) CRR shall disclose their applicable leverage ratio buffer requirement.

EU-27a

Overall leverage ratio requirement (%)

Sum of rows 26, EU-26a, and 27 of this template

EU-27b

Choice on transitional arrangements for the definition of the capital measure

Article 499(2) CRR

Institutions shall specify their choice of transitional arrangements for capital for the purpose of disclosure requirements by disclosing one of the following two labels:

— ‘Fully phased in’ if the institution chooses to disclose the leverage ratio in accordance with point (a) of Article 499(1) CRR;

— ‘Transitional’ if the institution chooses to disclose the leverage ratio in accordance with point (b) of Article 499(1) CRR.

28

Mean of daily values of gross SFT assets, after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables

Article 451(3) CRR; mean of the sums of rows 14 and 15, based on the sums calculated as of each day of the disclosure quarter

29

Quarter-end value of gross SFT assets, after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables

If rows 14 and 15 are based on quarter-end values, this amount is the sum of rows 14 and 15.

If rows 14 and 15 are based on averaged values, this amount is the sum of quarter-end values corresponding to the content of rows 14 and 15.

30

Total exposure measure (including the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) incorporating mean values from row 28 of gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables)

Article 451(3) CRR

Total exposure measure (including the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves), using mean values calculated as of each day of the disclosure quarter for the amounts of the exposure measure associated with gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables).

30a

Total exposure measure (excluding the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) incorporating mean values from row 28 of gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables)

Article 451(3) CRR

Total exposure measure (excluding the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves), using mean values calculated as of each day of the disclosure quarter for the amounts of the exposure measure associated with gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables).

If an institutions total exposure measure is not subject to a temporary exemption of central bank reserves, this value will be identical to the value disclosed in row 30 of this template.

31

Leverage ratio (including the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) incorporating mean values from row 28 of gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables)

Article 451(3) CRR

31a

Leverage ratio (excluding the impact of any applicable temporary exemption of central bank reserves) incorporating mean values from row 28 of gross SFT assets (after adjustment for sale accounting transactions and netted of amounts of associated cash payables and cash receivables)

Article 451(3) CRR

Template EU LR3 - LRSpl: Split-up of on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures). Fixed format

5. Institutions shall apply the instructions provided in this section to complete template LRSpl in application of point (b) Article 451(1) CRR.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

EU-1

Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives and SFTs, and exempted exposures), of which:

Institutions shall disclose the sum of the amounts in row EU-2 and EU-3 of template EU LR3 - LRSpl.

EU-2

Trading book exposures

Institutions shall disclose the exposures which are part of the total exposure value of assets belonging to the trading book excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures.

EU-3

Banking book exposures, of which:

Institutions shall disclose the sum of values in rows EU-4 to EU-12 of template EU LR3-LRSpl.

EU-4

Covered Bonds

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the total exposure value of assets that are in the form of covered bonds as defined in Article 129 and in point (d) of Article 161(1) CRR.

Institutions shall disclose the covered bonds total exposure net of defaulted exposures.

EU-5

Exposures treated as sovereigns

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the total exposure value towards entities that are treated as sovereigns under CRR. (Central governments and central banks (Article 114, and point (a) of Article 147(2) CRR); regional governments and local authorities treated as sovereigns (Article 115(2) and (4), and point (a) of Article 147(3) CRR), multilateral development banks and international organisations treated as sovereigns (Articles 117(2) and 118, and points (b) and (c) of Article 147(3) CRR), public sector entities (Article 116(4) and point (a) of Article 147(3) CRR)

Institutions shall disclose the sovereign total exposure net of defaulted exposures.

EU-6

Exposures to regional governments, MDB, International organisations and PSE, not treated as sovereigns

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the total exposure value towards regional governments and local authorities as defined in Article 115(1), (3) and (5) CRR for SA exposures and in point (a) of Article 147(4) CRR for IRB exposures; multilateral development banks as defined in Article 117(1) and (3) CRR for SA exposures and in point (c) of Article 147(4) CRR for IRB exposures; international organisations and public sector entities as defined in Article 116(1), (2), (3) and (5) CRR for SA exposures and in point (b) of Article 147(4) CRR for IRB exposures that are not treated as sovereigns under CRR.

Institutions shall disclose the abovementioned total exposure net of defaulted exposures.

EU-7

Institutions

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the exposure value of exposures towards institutions that fall under Articles 119 to 121 CRR for SA exposures and for IRB exposures - that fall under point (b) of Article 147(2) CRR and are not exposures in the form of covered bonds under point (d) of Article 161 (1) CRR and do not fall under points (a) to (c) of Article 147(4) CRR.

Institutions shall disclose the total exposure net of defaulted exposures.

EU-8

Secured by mortgages of immovable properties

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the exposure value of assets that are exposures secured by mortgages on immovable properties that fall under Article 124 CRR in case of SA exposures and that are exposures to corporate under point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR or retail exposures under point (d) of Article 147(2) CRR if these exposures are secured by mortgages on immovable property in accordance with point (a) of Article 199(1) CRR for IRB exposures.

Institutions shall disclose the total exposure net of defaulted exposures.

EU-9

Retail exposures

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the total exposure value of assets that are retail exposures under Article 123 CRR in case of SA exposures and that are exposures under point (d) of Article 147(2) CRR, if these exposures are not secured by mortgages on immovable property in accordance with point (a) of Article 199(1) CRR – for IRB exposures.

Institutions shall disclose the total exposure net of defaulted exposures.

EU-10

Corporates

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the total exposure value of assets that are corporate exposure (i.e. financial and non-financial). For SA exposures, these are exposures to corporates that fall under Article 122 CRR and for IRB exposures - that are exposures to corporates under point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR if these exposures are not secured by mortgages on immovable property in accordance with point (a) of Article 199(1) CRR.

Financial corporates shall mean regulated and unregulated undertakings other than institutions referred to in EU-7 of this template, whose principal activity is to acquire holdings or to pursue one or more of the activities listed in Annex I CRD, as well as undertakings as defined in point (27) of Article 4(1) CRR, other than institutions referred to in EU-7 of this template.

For the purpose of this cell, the term 'small and medium enterprise' is defined in accordance with point (b) of Article 501(2) CRR.

Institutions shall disclose the total exposure net of defaulted exposures.

EU-11

Exposures in default

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the total exposure value of assets that are in default and – for SA exposures - fall under Article 127 CRR or, in case of IRB exposures, are categorised in the exposures classes listed in Article 147(2) CRR if a default in accordance with Article 178 CRR has occurred.

EU-12

Other exposures (eg equity, securitisations, and other non-credit obligation assets)

Institutions shall disclose the sum of exposures, which is the total exposure value of other non-trading book exposures under CRR (e.g. equity, securitisations and non-credit obligation assets; in case of SA exposures these are assets categorised in the exposures classes listed in points (k), (m), (n), (o), (p) and (q) of Article 112 CRR, and in case of IRB exposures – in points (e), (f) and (g) of Article 147(2) CRR). Institutions shall include assets that are deducted in determining Tier 1 capital and therefore are disclosed in row 2 of template EU LR2-LRCom, unless these assets are included in row EU-2, EU-4 to EU-11 of template EU LR3- LRSpl.

Table EU LRA - Disclosure of LR qualitative information. Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information

6. Institutions shall complete table EU LRA by applying the following instructions, in application of points (d) and (e) of Article 451(1) CRR



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

(a)

Description of the processes used to manage the risk of excessive leverage

Point (d) of Article 451(1) CRR

‘Description of the processes used to manage the risk of excessive leverage’ shall include any relevant information on:

(a)  procedures and resources used to assess the risk of excessive leverage;

(b)  quantitative tools, if any, used to assess the risk of excessive leverage including details on potential internal targets, and whether other indicators than the leverage ratio of CRR are being used;

(c)  ways of how maturity mismatches and asset encumbrance are taken into account in managing the risk of excessive leverage;

(d)  processes for reacting to leverage ratio changes, including processes and timelines for potential increase of Tier 1 capital to manage the risk of excessive leverage; or processes and timelines for adjusting the leverage ratio denominator (total exposure measure) to manage the risk of excessive leverage.

(b)

Description of the factors that had an impact on the leverage ratio during the period to which the disclosed leverage ratio refers

Point (e) of Article 451(1) CRR

‘Description of the factors that had an impact on the leverage ratio during the period to which the disclosed leverage ratio refers’ shall include any material information on:

(a)  quantification of the change in the leverage ratio since the previous disclosure reference date;

(b)  the main drivers of the leverage ratio since the previous disclosure reference date with explanatory comments on:

(1)  the nature of the change and whether it was a change in the numerator of the ratio, in the denominator of the ratio, or in both;

(2)  whether it resulted from an internal strategic decision and, where so, whether that strategic decision was aimed directly at the leverage ratio or whether it impacted the leverage ratio only indirectly;

(3)  the most significant external factors related to the economic and financial environments that had an impact on the leverage ratio.

ANNEX XIII




ANNEX XIII

Table EU LIQA - Liquidity risk management

in accordance with Article 451a(4) CRR



Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

(a)

Strategies and processes in the management of the liquidity risk, including policies on diversification in the sources and tenor of planned funding,

 

(b)

Structure and organisation of the liquidity risk management function (authority, statute, other arrangements).

 

(c)

A description of the degree of centralisation of liquidity management and interaction between the group’s units

 

(d)

Scope and nature of liquidity risk reporting and measurement systems.

 

(e)

Policies for hedging and mitigating the liquidity risk and strategies and processes for monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges and mitigants.

 

(f)

An outline of the bank's contingency funding plans.

 

(g)

An explanation of how stress testing is used.

 

(h)

A declaration approved by the management body on the adequacy of liquidity risk management arrangements of the institution providing assurance that the liquidity risk management systems put in place are adequate with regard to the institution’s profile and strategy.

 

(i)

A concise liquidity risk statement approved by the management body succinctly describing the institution’s overall liquidity risk profile associated with the business strategy. This statement shall include key ratios and figures (other than those already covered in the EU LIQ1 template under this ITS ) providing external stakeholders with a comprehensive view of the institution’s management of liquidity risk, including how the liquidity risk profile of the institution interacts with the risk tolerance set by the management body.

These ratios may include:

 

— Concentration limits on collateral pools and sources of funding (both products and counterparties)

— Customised measurement tools or metrics that assess the structure of the bank’s balance sheet or that project cash flows and future liquidity positions, taking into account off-balance sheet risks which are specific to that bank

— Liquidity exposures and funding needs at the level of individual legal entities, foreign branches and subsidiaries, taking into account legal, regulatory and operational limitations on the transferability of liquidity

— Balance sheet and off-balance sheet items broken down into maturity buckets and the resultant liquidity gaps

Template EU LIQ1 - Quantitative information of LCR

Scope of consolidation: (solo/consolidated)



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

Total unweighted value (average)

Total weighted value (average)

EU 1a

Quarter ending on (DD Month YYY)

T

T-1

T-2

T-3

T

T-1

T-2

T-3

EU 1b

Number of data points used in the calculation of averages

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

HIGH-QUALITY LIQUID ASSETS

1

Total high-quality liquid assets (HQLA)

image

 

 

 

 

CASH - OUTFLOWS

2

Retail deposits and deposits from small business customers, of which:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Stable deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Less stable deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Unsecured wholesale funding

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Operational deposits (all counterparties) and deposits in networks of cooperative banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Non-operational deposits (all counterparties)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Unsecured debt

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Secured wholesale funding

image

 

 

 

 

10

Additional requirements

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

Outflows related to derivative exposures and other collateral requirements

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

Outflows related to loss of funding on debt products

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13

Credit and liquidity facilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

14

Other contractual funding obligations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

15

Other contingent funding obligations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16

TOTAL CASH OUTFLOWS

image

 

 

 

 

CASH - INFLOWS

17

Secured lending (e.g. reverse repos)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

18

Inflows from fully performing exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

19

Other cash inflows

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

EU-19a

(Difference between total weighted inflows and total weighted outflows arising from transactions in third countries where there are transfer restrictions or which are denominated in non-convertible currencies)

image

 

 

 

 

EU-19b

(Excess inflows from a related specialised credit institution)

image

 

 

 

 

20

TOTAL CASH INFLOWS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

EU-20a

Fully exempt inflows

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

EU-20b

Inflows subject to 90% cap

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

EU-20c

Inflows subject to 75% cap

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TOTAL ADJUSTED VALUE

EU-21

LIQUIDITY BUFFER

image

 

 

 

 

22

TOTAL NET CASH OUTFLOWS

image

 

 

 

 

23

LIQUIDITY COVERAGE RATIO

image

 

 

 

 

Table EU LIQB on qualitative information on LCR, which complements template EU LIQ1.

in accordance with Article 451a(2) CRR



Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

(a)

Explanations on the main drivers of LCR results and the evolution of the contribution of inputs to the LCR’s calculation over time

 

(b)

Explanations on the changes in the LCR over time

 

(c)

Explanations on the actual concentration of funding sources

 

(d)

High-level description of the composition of the institution's liquidity buffer.

 

(e)

Derivative exposures and potential collateral calls

 

(f)

Currency mismatch in the LCR

 

(g)

Other items in the LCR calculation that are not captured in the LCR disclosure template but that the institution considers relevant for its liquidity profile

 

Template EU LIQ2: Net Stable Funding Ratio

In accordance with Article 451a(3) CRR



 

a

b

c

d

e

(in currency amount)

Unweighted value by residual maturity

Weighted value

No maturity

< 6 months

6 months to < 1yr

≥ 1yr

Available stable funding (ASF) Items

1

Capital items and instruments

 

 

 

 

 

2

Own funds

 

 

 

 

 

3

Other capital instruments

 

 

 

 

 

4

Retail deposits

 

 

 

 

 

5

Stable deposits

 

 

 

 

 

6

Less stable deposits

 

 

 

 

 

7

Wholesale funding:

 

 

 

 

 

8

Operational deposits

 

 

 

 

 

9

Other wholesale funding

 

 

 

 

 

10

Interdependent liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

11

Other liabilities:

 

 

 

 

 

12

NSFR derivative liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

13

All other liabilities and capital instruments not included in the above categories

 

 

 

 

 

14

Total available stable funding (ASF)

 

 

 

 

 

Required stable funding (RSF) Items

15

Total high-quality liquid assets (HQLA)

 

 

 

 

 

EU-15a

Assets encumbered for a residual maturity of one year or more in a cover pool

 

 

 

 

 

16

Deposits held at other financial institutions for operational purposes

 

 

 

 

 

17

Performing loans and securities:

 

 

 

 

 

18

Performing securities financing transactions with financial customers collateralised by Level 1 HQLA subject to 0% haircut

 

 

 

 

 

19

Performing securities financing transactions with financial customer collateralised by other assets and loans and advances to financial institutions

 

 

 

 

 

20

Performing loans to non- financial corporate clients, loans to retail and small business customers, and loans to sovereigns, and PSEs, of which:

 

 

 

 

 

21

With a risk weight of less than or equal to 35% under the Basel II Standardised Approach for credit risk

 

 

 

 

 

22

Performing residential mortgages, of which:

 

 

 

 

 

23

With a risk weight of less than or equal to 35% under the Basel II Standardised Approach for credit risk

 

 

 

 

 

24

Other loans and securities that are not in default and do not qualify as HQLA, including exchange-traded equities and trade finance on-balance sheet products

 

 

 

 

 

25

Interdependent assets

 

 

 

 

 

26

Other assets:

 

 

 

 

 

27

Physical traded commodities

 

 

 

 

 

28

Assets posted as initial margin for derivative contracts and contributions to default funds of CCPs

 

 

 

29

NSFR derivative assets

 

 

 

30

NSFR derivative liabilities before deduction of variation margin posted

 

 

 

31

All other assets not included in the above categories

 

 

 

 

 

32

Off-balance sheet items

 

 

 

 

 

33

Total RSF

 

 

 

 

 

34

Net Stable Funding Ratio (%)

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX XIV Instructions for the liquidity requirements templates




ANNEX XIV

Instructions for the liquidity requirements templates

Instructions on Table EU LIQA on liquidity risk management and on template EU LIQ1 regarding LCR

1. Institutions subject to Part Six of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 13 ) (‘CRR’) shall disclose the information referred to in Article 451a CRR by completing table EU LIQA, template EU LIQ1 and table EU LIQB.

Table EU LIQA - Liquidity risk management

2. Institutions subject to Part Six CRR shall disclose the information referred to in Article 451a(4) CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete table EU LIQA which is presented in Annex XIII to this Implementing Regulation.

3. For the purposes of table EU LIQA, institutions subject to Part Six CRR shall consider the text boxes provided in the table as free-text boxes. They shall provide relevant information, both qualitative and quantitative, on risk management objectives and policies for liquidity risk, depending upon their business models and liquidity risk profiles, organisation and functions involved in liquidity risk management, in accordance with Article 435(1) CRR and the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 ( 14 ) with regard to liquidity coverage requirement for Credit Institutions.

Template EU LIQ1 - Quantitative information of LCR

4. Institutions subject to Part Six CRR shall disclose the information referred to in Article 451a(2) CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU LIQ1 as presented in Annex XIII to this Implementing Regulation.

5. When disclosing the information required in this template, institutions subject to Part Six CRR shall include the values and figures required for each of the four calendar quarters (January-March, April-June, July-September, October-December) preceding the disclosure date. Institutions shall calculate these values and figures as the simple averages of month-end observations over the twelve months preceding the end of each quarter.

6. The information required in template EU LIQ1 shall include all items irrespective of the currency in which they are denominated and shall be disclosed in the reporting currency as defined in Article 3 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

7. To calculate the unweighted and weighted inflows and outflows and the weighted HQLA for the purpose of template EU LIQ1, institutions shall apply the following instructions:

(a) 

Inflows/outflows: the unweighted value of inflows and outflows shall be calculated as the outstanding balances of various categories or types of liabilities, off-balance sheet items or contractual receivables. The 'weighed' value for inflows and outflows shall be calculated as the value after the inflow and outflow rates are applied.

(b) 

HQLA: the 'weighted' value of High Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) shall be calculated as the value after haircuts are applied.

8. In order to calculate the adjusted value of the liquidity buffer in item 21 and the adjusted value of total net cash outflows in item 22 of template EU LIQ1, institutions shall apply each of the following instructions:

(a) 

the adjusted value of the liquidity buffer is the value of total HQLA after the application of both haircuts and any applicable cap;

(b) 

the adjusted value of net cash outflows shall be calculated after the cap on inflows is applied, where applicable.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1

Total high quality liquid assets (HQLA)

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the amount in accordance with Article 9 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 of the liquid assets before applying the adjustment mechanism as referred to in Article 17(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

2

Retail deposits and deposits from small business customers, of which:

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value the amount of the retail deposits in accordance with Articles 24 and 25 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the outflow of the retail deposits in accordance with Articles 24 and 25 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose here on retail deposits in accordance with Article 411(2) CRR.

In accordance with Article 28(6) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 institutions shall also disclose within the appropriate retail deposit category the amount of the notes, bonds and other securities issued which are sold exclusively in the retail market and held in a retail account. Institutions will consider for this category of liability the applicable outflow rates provided for by the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 for the different categories of retail deposits.

3

Stable deposits

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value the sum of the amount of the stable deposits in accordance with Article 24 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the sum of the outflow of the stable deposits in accordance with Article 24 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose here the part of the amounts of retail deposits covered by a Deposit Guarantee Scheme in accordance with Directive 94/19/EC (1) or Directive 2014/49/EU (2) or an equivalent deposit guarantee scheme in a third country and either is part of an established relationship making withdrawal highly unlikely or is held in a transactional account in accordance with Article 24 (2) and (3) of the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 respectively and where:

— These deposits do not fulfil the criteria for a higher outflow rate in accordance with Article 25(2), (3), or (5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, and

— These deposits have not been taken in third countries where a higher outflow is applied in accordance with Article 25(5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

4

Less stable deposits

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value the sum of the amount of the retail deposits in accordance with Article 25 (1), (2) and (3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the sum of the outflow of the retail deposits in accordance with Article 25(1), (2) and (3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

5

Unsecured wholesale funding

Institutions shall disclose the sums of the unweighted and weighted amounts that are necessary to be disclosed in row 6 'Operational deposits (all counterparties) and deposits in networks of cooperative banks', row 7 'Non-operational deposits (all counterparties)' and row 8 'Unsecured debt' of this template.

6

Operational deposits (all counterparties) and deposits in networks of cooperative banks

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value the amount of the operational deposits in accordance with Article 27 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the outflows of the operational deposits in accordance with Article 27 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose here the part of the operational deposits, in accordance with Article 27 of the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, which is necessary for the provision of operational services. Deposits arising out of a correspondent banking relationship or from the provision of prime brokerage services shall be considered non-operational deposits in accordance with Article 27(5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

The part of the operational deposits in excess of the amount necessary for the provision of operational services shall not be disclosed here.

7

Non-operational deposits (all counterparties)

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value the amount of the non-operational deposits following Article 27(5), Article 28(1) and Article 31A(1) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the outflow of the non- operational deposits following Article 27(5), Article 28(1) and Article 31A(1) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose here on deposits arising out of a correspondent banking or from the provision of prime brokerage services in accordance with Article 27(5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

The part of operational deposits in accordance with Article 27(5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, in excess of those required for the provision of operational services, shall be disclosed here.

8

Unsecured debt

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value the outstanding balance of notes, bonds and other debt securities, issued by the institution other than that disclosed as retail deposits as referred to in Article 28(6) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. This amount includes also coupons that come due in the next 30 calendar days referred to all these securities.

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the outflow of those notes, bonds and other debt securities indicated in the previous paragraph.

9

Secured Wholesale funding

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the sum of the outflow resulting from secured lending or capital market-driven transactions as referred to in in Article 28(3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and from collateral swaps and other transactions with a similar form in accordance with Articles 28(4) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

10

Additional requirements

Institutions shall disclose the sums of the unweighted and weighted amounts that are necessary to be disclosed in row 11 'Outflows related to derivative exposures and other collateral requirements', row 12 'Outflows related to loss of funding on debt products' and row 13 'Credit and liquidity facilities' of this template.

11

Outflows related to derivative exposures and other collateral requirements

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the sum of the following amounts and outflows respectively:

— The market value and relevant outflows of collateral other than Level 1 collateral which is posted for contracts listed in Annex II CRR and credit derivatives, following Article 30(1) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— The market value and relevant outflows of Level 1 EHQ Covered Bonds assets collateral posted for contracts listed in Annex II CRR and credit derivatives following Article 30(1) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— The total amount of additional outflows calculated and notified to the competent authorities in accordance with Article 30(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 as material outflows due to deterioration of own credit quality.

— The amount of outflows stemming from an impact of an adverse market scenario on derivatives transactions as envisaged in Article 30(3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and calculated in accordance with Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2017/208 (3).

— The amount of outflows expected over 30 calendar days from contracts listed in Annex II CRR and from credit derivatives as envisaged in Article 30(4) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and calculated in accordance with Article 21 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— The market value, and relevant outflows, of excess collateral that the institution holds and that can be contractually called at any times by the counterparty as envisaged in point (a) of Article 30(6) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— The market value, and relevant outflows, of collateral that is due to be posted to counterparty within the 30 calendar day period as envisaged in point (b) of Article 30(6) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— The market value, and relevant outflows, of collateral that qualifies as liquid assets for the purpose of Title II of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 that can be substituted for assets corresponding to assets that would not qualify as liquid assets for the purpose of Title II of the same Regulation without the consent of the institution, as envisaged in point (c) of Article 30(6) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

12

Outflows related to loss of funding on debt products

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the amount and outflows respectively, of the loss of funding on structured financing activities, as envisaged in Article 30(8) to 30(10) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall assume 100 % outflow for loss of funding on asset backed securities, covered bonds and other structured financing instruments maturing within the 30 calendar day period issued by the credit institution or by sponsored conduits or SPVs.

Institutions that are providers of liquidity facilities associated with financing programs disclosed here do not need to double count the maturing financing instrument and the liquidity facility for consolidated programs.

13

Credit and liquidity facilities

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the amount and outflow respectively, of the credit and liquidity facilities in accordance with Article 31 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall also disclose here on committed facilities in accordance with Article 29 of the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

14

Other contractual funding obligations

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the sum of amounts and outflows respectively, of the following items:

— Assets borrowed on an unsecured basis, and maturing within the 30 days as envisaged in Article 28(7) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. These assets shall be assumed to run off in full, leading to a 100 % outflow. Institutions shall disclose the market value of assets borrowed on an unsecured basis and maturing within the 30 days period where the credit institution does not own the securities and they do not form part of institutions liquidity buffer.

— Short positions covered by an unsecured security borrowing. As established in Article 30(5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, institutions shall add an additional outflow corresponding to 100 % of the market value of the securities or other assets sold short unless the terms upon which the credit institution has borrowed them require their return only after 30 calendar days. If the short position is covered by a collateralized securities financing transaction, the credit institution shall assume the short positon will be maintained throughout the 30 calendar day period and received a 0 % outflow.

— Liabilities resulting from operating expenses. As established in Article 28(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, institutions shall disclose the amount of the outstanding balance of liabilities resulting from the credit institution's own operating expenses. These liabilities do not trigger outflows.

— Other unsecured transactions that come due in the next 30 calendar days and are not included in Articles 24 to 31 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, that, as established in Article 31A(1) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, trigger 100 % outflows.

15

Other contingent funding obligations

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the sum of amounts and outflows respectively, of the following items:

— Other products and services as referred to in Article 23 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. Institutions shall disclose here on those products or services referred to in Article 23(1) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. The amount to be disclosed shall be the maximum amount that could be drawn from those products or services referred to in Article 23(1) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— Excess of contractual commitments to extend funding to non-financial customers within 30 calendar days as envisaged in Article 31A(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— Internal netting of clients positions in accordance with Article 30(11) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. Institutions shall disclose here the market value of the non-liquid assets of a client that, in relation to prime brokerage services, the credit institution has used to cover short sales of another client by internally matching them.

16

TOTAL CASH OUTFLOWS

Institutions shall disclose the sum of the weighted value of the following items under these instructions:

— Row 2: Retail deposits and deposits from small business customers of this template;

— Row 5: Unsecured wholesale funding of this template,

— Row 9: Secured wholesale funding of this template,

— Row 10: Additional requirements of this template,

— Row 14: Other contractual funding obligations of this template;

— Row 15: Other contingent funding obligations of this template.

17

Secured lending (e.g. reverse repos)

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value the sum of:

— The amounts of secured lending and capital market driven transactions with a residual maturity of no more than 30 days as envisaged in points (b), (c) and (f) of Article 32(3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— The market value of collateral lent in collateral swaps as envisaged in Article 32(3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the sum of:

— Inflows from secured lending and capital market driven transactions with a residual maturity of no more than 30 days as envisaged in points (b), (c) and (f) of Article 32(3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— Inflows from collateral swaps as envisaged in Article 32(3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

18

Inflows from fully performing exposures

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the sum of the total amounts and inflows, respectively, of the items:

— monies due from non-financial customers (except for central banks) as envisaged in point (a) of Article 32(3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— monies due from central banks and financial customers as envisaged in point (a) of Article 32(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— monies due from trade financing transactions as envisaged in point (b) of Article 32(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 with a residual maturity of no more than 30 days.

— inflows corresponding to outflows in accordance with promotional loan commitments as referred to in Article 31(9) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

19

Other cash inflows

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the sum of the total amounts and inflows respectively, of the items:

— monies due from securities maturing within 30 days as envisaged in point (c) of Article 32(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— loans with an undefined contractual end date as envisaged in point (i) of Article 32(3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— monies due from positions in major index equity instruments provided that there is no double counting with liquid assets as envisaged in point (d) of Article 32(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. Position shall include monies contractually due within 30 calendar days, such as cash dividends from those major indexes and cash due from those equity instruments sold but not yet settled, if they are not recognized as liquid assets in accordance with Title II of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— inflows from the release of balances held in segregated accounts in accordance with regulatory requirements for the protection of customer trading assets as envisaged in Article 32(4) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. Inflows shall only be considered if these balances are maintained in liquid assets as specified in Title II of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— inflows from derivatives as envisaged in Article 32(5) in conjunction with Article 21 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— inflows from undrawn credit or liquidity facilities provided by members of a group or an institutional protection scheme where the competent authorities have granted permission to apply a higher inflow rate in accordance with Article 34 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

— other inflows following Article 32(2) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

EU-19a

(Difference between total weighted inflows and total weighted outflows arising from transactions in third countries where there are transfer restrictions or which are denominated in non-convertible currencies)

As envisaged in Article 32(8) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, institutions shall disclose as the weighted value the excess of those weighted inflows with respect to those outflows.

EU-19b

(Excess inflows from a related specialised credit institution)

As envisaged in point (e) of Article 2(3) and in Article 33(6) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, credit institutions, for the purposes of disclosing in a consolidated basis, shall disclose as the weighted value the inflows arising from a related specialised credit institution referred to in Article 33(3) and (4) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 that are in excess of the amount of outflows arising from the same undertaking.

20

TOTAL CASH INFLOWS

Institutions shall disclose the sum of the unweighted and weighted value of the following items under these instructions:

— Row 17: Secured lending (e.g. reverse repos) of this template

— Row 18: Inflows from fully performing exposures of this template

— Row 19: Other cash inflows of this template

— minus:

— Row EU-19a: (Difference between total weighted inflows and total weighted outflows arising from transactions in third countries where there are transfer restrictions or which are denominated in non-convertible currencies) of this template

— Row Eu-19b: (Excess inflows from a related specialised credit institution) of this template.

EU-20a

Fully exempt inflows

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the total amount of assets/monies due/maximum amount that can be drawn and their relevant total inflows, respectively, which are exempted from the cap on inflows in accordance with Article 32, Article 33 and Article 34 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

EU-20b

Inflows subject to 90 % cap

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the total amount of assets/monies due/maximum amount that can be drawn and their relevant total inflows, respectively, which are subject to the 90 % inflows cap in accordance with Article 32, Article 33 and Article 34 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

EU-20c

Inflows subject to 75 % cap

Institutions shall disclose as the unweighted value and as the weighted value the total amount of assets/monies due/maximum amount that can be drawn and their relevant total inflows, respectively, which are subject to the 75 % inflows cap in accordance with Article 32, Article 33 and Article 34 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

EU-21

LIQUIDITY BUFFER

Institutions shall disclose as the adjusted value the value of the institution's Liquidity buffer calculated in accordance with Annex I – Formulae for the determination of the liquidity buffer composition of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

22

TOTAL NET CASH OUTFLOWS

Institutions shall disclose as the adjusted value the net liquidity outflow which equals total outflows less the reduction for fully exempt inflows less the reduction for inflows subject to the 90 % cap less the reduction for inflows subject to the 75 % cap.

23

LIQUIDITY COVERAGE RATIO (%)

Institutions shall disclose as the adjusted value the percentage of the item 'Liquidity coverage ratio (%)' as defined in Article 4(1) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

The liquidity coverage ratio shall be equal to the ratio of a credit institution's liquidity buffer to its net liquidity outflows over a 30 calendar day stress period and shall be expressed as a percentage.

(1)   

DIRECTIVE 94/19/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 30 May 1994 on deposit-guarantee schemes (OJ L 135, 31.5.1994, p. 5).

(2)   

DIRECTIVE 2014/49/EU OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 16 April 2014 on deposit guarantee schemes (OJ L 173, 12.6.2014, p. 149).

(3)   

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) 2017/208 of 31 October 2016 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to regulatory technical standards for additional liquidity outflows corresponding to collateral needs resulting from the impact of an adverse market scenario on an institution's derivatives transactions (OJ L 33, 8.2.2017, p. 14).

Table EU LIQB on qualitative information on LCR, which complements template EU LIQ1.

9. Institutions subject to Part Six of CRR shall disclose the information referred to in Article 451a(2) CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete table EU LIQB which is presented in Annex XIII to this Implementing Regulation.

10. Table EU LIQB shall provide qualitative information on the items included in template EU LIQ1 on quantitative information on LCR.

11. Institutions subject to Part Six CRR shall consider the text boxes provided in this table as free-text boxes and disclose the items included there, where possible, in accordance with their consideration in the context of the definition of the LCR in Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and of the additional liquidity monitoring metrics as set out in Chapter 7b of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 680/2014 ( 15 ).

Instructions on template EU LIQ2 on disclosure of Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)

12. Institutions subject to Part Six CRR shall disclose the information included in template EU LIQ2 in application of Article 451a(3) CRR in accordance with the instructions included in this Annex. Quarter-end figures for each quarter of the relevant disclosure period shall be disclosed. For e.g. annual disclosure this includes four data sets covering the latest and the three previous quarters.

13. The information required in template EU LIQ2 shall include all assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet items irrespective of the currency in which they are denominated and shall be disclosed in the reporting currency as defined in Article 411(15) CRR.

14. To avoid any double counting, institutions shall not disclose assets or liabilities that are associated with collateral posted or received as variation margin in accordance with Articles 428k(4) and with Article 428ah(2) CRR, initial margin and contribution to the default fund of a CCP in accordance with point (a) of Article 428ag and with point (b) of Article 428ag CRR.

15. Deposits maintained in the context of an institutional protection scheme or a cooperative network that are considered as liquid assets shall be disclosed as such. Other items within a group or an institutional protection scheme shall be disclosed in the relevant general categories in the template of stable funding required or available.

16. Institutions shall always disclose as ‘Unweighted value by residual maturity’ in columns a, b, c and d of the template the accounting values, except for the cases of derivative contracts, for which institutions shall refer to the fair value as specified in Article 428d(2) CRR.

17. Institutions shall disclose the ‘weighted value’ in column e of this template. This value shall reflect the value in accordance with Article 428c(2) CRR which is the result of the unweighted value multiplied by the stable funding factors.

18. The amount of assets and liabilities resulting from securities financing transactions (SFTs) with a single counterparty shall be considered on a net basis where Article 428e CRR applies. In the case that the individual transactions netted were subject to different required stable funding (RSF) factors if they were considered separately, the netted amount to be disclosed, if an asset, shall be subject to the higher RSF factor of them.

19. Institutions shall provide in the narrative accompanying this template any explanations needed to facilitate an understanding of the results and the accompanying data. At least, institutions shall explain:

a. 

the drivers of their NSFR results and the reasons for intra-period changes as well as the changes over time (e.g., changes in strategies, funding structure, circumstances); and

b. 

the composition of the institution’s interdependent assets and liabilities and to what extent these transactions are interrelated.

Available stable funding (ASF) Items

20. In accordance with Article 428i CRR, unless specified otherwise in Chapter 3 of Title IV of Part Six CRR, the amount of available stable funding (ASF) shall be calculated by multiplying the amount of liabilities and own funds, as unweighted value, by the available stable funding factors. The weighted value in column ‘e’ of this template reflects the amount of available stable funding.

21. All liabilities and own funds shall be disclosed with a breakdown by their residual maturity in columns a, b, c and d of this template, calculated in accordance with Articles 428j, 428o and 428ak CRR, with the following breakdown in terms of maturity buckets:

a. 

no maturity: Items to be disclosed in the ‘no maturity’ time bucket do not have a stated maturity or are perpetual;

b. 

residual maturity of less than six months;

c. 

residual maturity of a minimum of six months but less than one year; and

d. 

residual maturity of one year or more.

Required stable funding (RSF) Items

22. Institutions shall disclose in the appropriate category all assets on which they retain beneficial ownership even if they are not accounted for in their balance sheet. Assets on which institutions do not retain beneficial ownership shall not be disclosed even if these assets are accounted for in their balance sheet.

23. In accordance with Article 428p CRR, unless specified otherwise in Chapter 4 of Title IV of Part Six CRR, the amount of required stable funding (RSF) shall be calculated by multiplying the unweighted value of assets and off-balance sheet items by the required stable funding factors.

24. Assets that are eligible as high-quality liquid assets (HQLA) in accordance with Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 shall be disclosed as such, in a designated row regardless of their residual maturity.

25. All non-HQLA assets and off-balance sheet items shall be disclosed with a breakdown by their residual maturity in accordance with Article 428q CRR. The maturity buckets of the amounts, standard factors and applicable factors are the following:

a. 

residual maturity of less than six months or without stated maturity;

b. 

residual maturity of a minimum of six months but less than one year; and

c. 

residual maturity of one year or more.



Legal references and instructions

Row

Explanation

 

Available stable funding (ASF) Items

1

Capital items and instruments

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of amounts in row 2 and row 3 of this template.

2

Own funds

Points (a), (b) and (c) of Article 428o CRR

Institutions shall include here the sum of the following items:

— common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) items before the application of prudential filters, deductions and exemption or alternatives stipulated in Articles 32 to 36, 48, 49 and 79 CRR;

— additional Tier 1 items (AT1) before the application of the deductions and exemptions stipulated in Articles 56 and 79 CRR; and

— tier 2 (T2) items before the application of the deductions and exemptions stipulated in Articles 66 and 79 CRR and having a residual maturity of one year or more at the disclosure reference date.

CET1 and AT1 items are perpetual instruments that shall be disclosed in the ‘no maturity’ bucket. In the case of AT1 items callable by the institution, only if the time period to the date of the call options is below one year, they will not be disclosed in the no maturity bucket but in the applicable time bucket (i.e., residual maturity of less than six months or residual maturity of a minimum of six months but less than one year). This is regardless of whether the option has been exercised or not.

Regarding T2 items, the maturity bucket of one year or more shall include those instruments with an equivalent residual maturity and, in the exceptional cases of T2 instruments with no maturity, also these instruments. In case T2 items were callable by the institution, and irrespective of whether the institution has exercised the call option, the residual maturity of the instrument will be determined by the date of the call option. In this case, the institution shall disclose these items in the relevant time bucket and shall not apply a 100 % ASF factor if the option may be exercised within one year.

3

Other capital instruments

Point (d) of Article 428o and point (d) of Article 428k(3) CRR

Other capital instruments with a residual maturity of one year or more at the disclosure reference date.

In case other capital instruments were callable by the institution, and irrespective of whether the institution has exercised the call option, the residual maturity of the instrument will be determined by the date of the call option. In this case, the institution shall disclose these items in the relevant time bucket and shall not apply a 100 % ASF factor if the option may be exercised within one year.

4

Retail deposits

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of amounts in row 5 and row 6 of this template.

5

Stable retail deposits

Article 428n CRR

Institutions shall include the part of the amounts of retail deposits covered by a Deposit Guarantee Scheme in accordance with Directive 94/19/EC or Directive 2014/49/EU or an equivalent deposit guarantee scheme in a third country and either is part of an established relationship making withdrawal highly unlikely or is held in a transactional account in accordance with Articles 24(2) and (3) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 respectively and where:

— these deposits do not fulfill the criteria for a higher outflow rate in accordance with Articles 25(2), (3) and (5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 in which case they shall be included as ‘less stable deposits’; or

— these deposits have not been taken in third countries where a higher outflow is applied in accordance with Article 25(5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 in which case they shall be included as ‘less stable deposits’.

6

Less stable retail deposits

Article 428m CRR

Institutions shall disclose the amount of other retail deposits than those captured as ‘stable retail deposits’ in row 5 of this template.

7

Wholesale funding:

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of amounts in row 8 and row 9 of this template.

8

Operational deposits

Point (a) of Article 428l CRR

Institutions shall disclose here the part of deposits received (both from financial customers and from other non-financial customers) that fulfil the criteria for operational deposits set out with Article 27 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 which is necessary for the provision of operational services. Operational deposits in excess of the amount necessary for the provision of operational services shall not be included here but within row 9, ‘Other wholesale funding’ of this template.

Deposits arising out of a correspondent banking relationship or from the provision of prime brokerage services shall be considered non-operational deposits in accordance with Article 27(5) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and shall be disclosed under row 9 ‘Other wholesale funding’ of this template.

9

Other wholesale funding

Points (b) to (d) of Article 428l, Article 428g and points (c) and (d) of Article 428k (3) CRR

Institutions shall disclose here wholesale funding other than the amount of operational deposits that is necessary for the provision of operational services. This shall include liabilities provided by central governments, regional governments, local authorities, public sector entities, multilateral development banks, international organisations, central banks and by any other non-financial or financial customers as well as liabilities where the counterparty cannot be determined, including securities issued where the holder cannot be identified.

10

Interdependent liabilities

Point (b) of Article 428k(3) CRR

Institutions shall disclose liabilities that, having been approved by the relevant competent authority, are treated as interdependent with assets in accordance with Article 428f CRR.

11

Other liabilities

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of amounts in rows 12 and 13 of this template.

12

NSFR derivative liabilities

Article 428k(4) CRR

Institutions shall disclose the absolute amount of the negative difference between netting sets calculated in accordance with Article 428k(4) CRR.

13

All other liabilities and capital instruments not included in the above categories

Articles 428k(1) and 428k(3) CRR

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of the following items:

— trade date payables arising from purchases of financial instruments, foreign currencies and commodities that are expected to settle within the standard settlement cycle or period that is customary for the relevant exchange or type of transactions or that have failed to, but are still expected to settle, in accordance with point (a) of Article 428k(3) CRR;

— deferred tax liabilities, considering the nearest possible date on which their amount can be realised as residual maturity, in accordance with point (a) of Article 428k(2) CRR;

— minority interests, considering the term of the instrument as residual maturity, in accordance with point (b) of Article 428k(1) CRR; and

— other liabilities, for example short positions and open maturity positions, in accordance with Articles 428k(1) and 428k(3) CRR.

14

Total available stable funding (ASF)

Chapter 3 of Title IV of Part Six CRR

Institutions shall disclose here the total of the items providing available stable funding in accordance with Chapter 3 of Title IV of Part Six CRR (sum of amounts in rows 1, 4, 7, 10 and 11 of this template).

 

Required stable funding (RSF) Items

15

Total high-quality liquid assets (HQLA)

Institutions shall also include here encumbered and unencumbered high-quality liquid assets pursuant to Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, regardless if they comply with the operational requirements referred to in Article 8 of that Delegated Regulation, in accordance with Articles 428r to 428ae CRR.

EU-15a

Assets encumbered for a residual maturity of one year or more in a cover pool

Article 428ag(h) CRR

Institutions shall disclose here the amount of monies due from loans that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 CRR and liquid assets, that are encumbered for a residual maturity of one year or more in a cover pool funded by covered bonds as referred to in Article 52(4) of Directive (EC) 2009/65 (1) or covered bonds which meet the eligibility requirements for the treatment as set out in Article 129(4) or (5) CRR.

16

Deposits held at other financial institutions for operational purposes

Point (b) of Article 428ad CRR

Institutions shall disclose here those amounts of monies due from loans that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 CRR, that are operational deposits pursuant to Commission Delegated regulation (EU) 2015/61 and necessary for the provision of operational services.

17

Performing loans and securities:

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of amounts in rows 18, 19, 20, 22 and 24 of this template.

18

Performing securities financing transactions with financial customers collateralised by Level 1 HQLA subject to 0 % haircut

Article 428e, point (g) of Article 428r(1) and point (b) of Article 428s CRR

Institutions shall disclose here the amount of monies due from securities financing transactions, that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 CRR, with financial customers and that are collateralized by level 1 assets eligible for 0 % haircut pursuant to Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

19

Performing securities financing transactions with financial customers collateralised by other assets and other loans and advances to financial institutions

Point (b) of Article 428s, point (d) of Article 428ad, point (b) of Article 428ah(1) and point (a) of Article 428v CRR

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of the following items:

— the amount of monies due from securities financing transactions, that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 CRR, with financial customers and are collateralized by assets other than level 1 assets eligible for 0 % haircut pursuant to Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61; and

— the amount of monies due from other loans and advances, that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 CRR, to financial customers, in accordance with point (a) of Article 428v and with point (d)(iii) of Article 428ad CRR.

20

Performing loans to non- financial corporate clients, loans to retail and small business customers, and loans to sovereigns, and PSEs, of which:

Point (c) of Article 428ad, 428af and point (c) of Article 428ag CRR

Institutions shall disclose here those amounts of monies due from loans that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 CRR, which are residential loans fully guaranteed by an eligible protection provider as referred to in point (e) of Article 129(1) CRR or loans, excluding loans to financial customers and loans referred to in Articles 428r to 428ad except point (c) of Article 428ad CRR, regardless the risk weights assigned to these loans. This amount shall not include exposures secured by mortgages on residential property.

21

With a risk weight of less than or equal to 35 % under the Basel II Standardised Approach for credit risk

Point (c) of Article 428ad and 428af CRR

Institutions shall disclose here those amounts of loans from row 21 of this template which are assigned a risk weight of less than or equal to 35 % in accordance with Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

22

Performing residential mortgages, of which:

Point (c) of Article 428ad, point (a) of 428af and point (c) of 428ag CRR

Institutions shall disclose here those amounts of monies due from loans that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 CRR, which are loans secured by mortgages on residential property, excluding loans to financial customers and loans referred to in Articles 428r to 428ad CRR, except paragraph (c) of Article 428ad CRR, regardless the risk weights assigned to these loans.

23

With a risk weight of less than or equal to 35 % under the Basel II Standardised Approach for credit risk

Point (c) of Article 428ad and point (a) of 428af CRR

Institutions shall include here those amounts of loans from row 22 of this template, which are assigned a risk weight of less than or equal to 35 % in accordance with Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

24

Other loans and securities that are not in default and do not qualify as HQLA, including exchange-traded equities and trade finance on-balance sheet products

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of:

— following points (e) and (f) of Article 428ag CRR, securities that are not in default in accordance with Article 178 CRR and that are not liquid assets pursuant to Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, regardless if they comply with the operational requirements laid down therein; and

— trade finance on-balance sheet related products in accordance with point (b) of Article 428v, point (e) of 428ad and point (d) of 428ag CRR.

25

Interdependent assets

Article 428f and point (f) of Article 428r(1) CRR

Institutions shall disclose here assets that, having been authorized by competent authorities, are being interdependent with liabilities in accordance with Article 428f CRR.

26

Other assets:

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of amounts in rows 27, 28, 29, 30, and 31 of this template.

27

Physically traded commodities

Point (g) of Article 428ag CRR

Institutions shall disclose here the amount of physically traded commodities. This amount shall not include commodity derivatives.

28

Assets posted as initial margin for derivative contracts and contributions to default funds of CCPs

Institutions shall disclose here the sum of the following amounts:

— the amount of required stable funding arising from derivatives, in accordance with Articles 428d, 428s(2), point (a) of Article 428ag and 428ah(2) CRR, which is related to initial margins for derivative contracts; and

— The amount related to items posted as contribution to the default fund of a CCP, in accordance with point (b) of Article 428ag CRR.

29

NSFR derivative assets

Articles 428d and 428ah(2) CRR

Institutions shall include here the amount of required stable funding arising from derivatives, in accordance with Articles 428d, 428s(2), point (a) of Article 428ag and 428ah(2) CRR, which is calculated as the absolute amount of the positive difference between netting sets calculated in accordance with Article 428ah(2) CRR.

30

NSFR derivative liabilities before deduction of variation margin posted

Article 428s(2) CRR

Institutions shall disclose here the amount of required stable funding related to derivative liabilities, in accordance with Articles 428d, 428s(2), point (a) of 428ag and 428ah(2) CRR, which is the absolute fair value of netting sets with a negative fair value calculated in accordance with Article 428s(2) CRR.

31

All other assets not included in the above categories

Institutions shall include here the sum of the following items:

— trade date receivables in accordance with point (e) of Article 428r(1) CRR;

— non-performing assets in accordance with point (b) of Article 428ah(1) CRR;

— reserves at central banks that are not considered as HQLA; and

— other assets not referred to in the previous items listed above.

32

Off-balance sheet items

Institutions shall disclose here the amount of off-balance sheet items that are subject to the required stable funding requirements.

33

Total required stable funding (RSF)

Chapter 4 of Title IV of Part Six CRR

Institutions shall include here the total items subject to the required stable funding in accordance with Chapter 4 of Title IV of Part Six CRR (sum of amounts in rows 15, EU-15a, 16, 17, 25, 26, and 32 of this template).

34

Net Stable Funding Ratio (%)

NSFR calculated in accordance with Article 428b(1) CRR

(1)   

DIRECTIVE 2009/65/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 13 July 2009 on the coordination of laws, regulations and administrative provisions relating to undertakings for collective investment in transferable securities (UCITS) (OJ L 302, 17.11.2009, p. 32).

ANNEX XV




ANNEX XV

Table EU CRA: General qualitative information about credit risk

Institutions shall describe their risk management objectives and policies for credit risk by providing the following information:



Qualitative disclosures

(a)

In the concise risk statement in accordance with point (f) of Article 435(1) CRR, how the business model translates into the components of the institution’s credit risk profile.

(b)

When discussing their strategies and processes to manage credit risk and the policies for hedging and mitigating that risk in accordance with points (a) and (d) of Article 435(1) CRR, the criteria and approach used for defining the credit risk management policy and for setting credit risk limits.

(c)

When informing on the structure and organisation of the risk management function in accordance with point (b) of Article 435(1) CRR, the structure and organisation of the credit risk management and control function.

(d)

When informing on the authority, status and other arrangements for the risk management function in accordance with point (b) of Article 435(1) CRR, the relationships between credit risk management, risk control, compliance and internal audit functions.

Table EU CRB: Additional disclosure related to the credit quality of assets



Qualitative disclosures

(a)

The scope and definitions of ‘past-due’ and ‘impaired’ exposures used for accounting purposes and the differences, if any, between the definitions of past due and default for accounting and regulatory purposes as specified by the EBA Guidelines on the application of the definition of default in accordance with Article 178 CRR.

(b)

The extent of past-due exposures (more than 90 days) that are not considered to be impaired and the reasons for this.

(c)

Description of methods used for determining general and specific credit risk adjustments.

(d)

The institution’s own definition of a restructured exposure used for the implementation of point (d) of Article 178(3) CRR specified by the EBA Guidelines on defaultin accordance with Article 178 CRR when different from the definition of forborne exposure defined in Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Template EU CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount

Accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions

Accumulated partial write-off

Collateral and financial guarantees received

Performing exposures

Non-performing exposures

Performing exposures – accumulated impairment and provisions

Non-performing exposures – accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions

On performing exposures

On non-performing exposures

 

Of which stage 1

Of which stage 2

 

Of which stage 2

Of which stage 3

 

Of which stage 1

Of which stage 2

 

Of which stage 2

Of which stage 3

005

Cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

010

Loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

020

Central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

030

General governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

040

Credit institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

050

Other financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

060

Non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

070

Of which SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

080

Households

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

090

Debt securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

100

Central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

110

General governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

120

Credit institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

130

Other financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

140

Non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

150

Off-balance-sheet exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

160

Central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

170

General governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

180

Credit institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

190

Other financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

200

Non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

210

Households

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

220

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CR1-A: Maturity of exposures



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

Net exposure value

On demand

<= 1 year

> 1 year <= 5 years

> 5 years

No stated maturity

Total

1

Loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Debt securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CR2: Changes in the stock of non-performing loans and advances



 

a

Gross carrying amount

010

Initial stock of non-performing loans and advances

 

020

Inflows to non-performing portfolios

 

030

Outflows from non-performing portfolios

 

040

Outflows due to write-offs

 

050

Outflow due to other situations

 

060

Final stock of non-performing loans and advances

 

Template EU CR2a: Changes in the stock of non-performing loans and advances and related net accumulated recoveries



 

a

b

Gross carrying amount

Related net accumulated recoveries

010

Initial stock of non-performing loans and advances

 

 

020

Inflows to non-performing portfolios

 

 

030

Outflows from non-performing portfolios

 

 

040

Outflow to performing portfolio

 

 

050

Outflow due to loan repayment, partial or total

 

 

060

Outflow due to collateral liquidations

 

 

070

Outflow due to taking possession of collateral

 

 

080

Outflow due to sale of instruments

 

 

090

Outflow due to risk transfers

 

 

100

Outflows due to write-offs

 

 

110

Outflow due to other situations

 

 

120

Outflow due to reclassification as held for sale

 

 

130

Final stock of non-performing loans and advances

 

 

Template EU CQ1: Credit quality of forborne exposures



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount of exposures with forbearance measures

Accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions

Collateral received and financial guarantees received on forborne exposures

Performing forborne

Non-performing forborne

On performing forborne exposures

On non-performing forborne exposures

 

Of which collateral and financial guarantees received on non-performing exposures with forbearance measures

 

Of which defaulted

Of which impaired

 

005

Cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

010

Loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

020

Central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

030

General governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

040

Credit institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

050

Other financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

060

Non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

070

Households

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

080

Debt Securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

090

Loan commitments given

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

100

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CQ2: Quality of forbearance



 

a

Gross carrying amount of forborne exposures

010

Loans and advances that have been forborne more than twice

 

020

Non-performing forborne loans and advances that failed to meet the non-performing exit criteria

 

Template EU CQ3: Credit quality of performing and non-performing exposures by past due days



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount

Performing exposures

Non-performing exposures

 

Not past due or past due ≤ 30 days

Past due > 30 days ≤ 90 days

 

Unlikely to pay that are not past due or are past due ≤ 90 days

Past due > 90 days ≤ 180 days

Past due > 180 days ≤ 1 year

Past due > 1 year ≤ 2 years

Past due > 2 years ≤ 5 years

Past due > 5 years ≤ 7 years

Past due > 7 years

Of which defaulted

005

Cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

010

Loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

020

Central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

030

General governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

040

Credit institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

050

Other financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

060

Non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

070

Of which SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

080

Households

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

090

Debt securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

100

Central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

110

General governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

120

Credit institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

130

Other financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

140

Non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

150

Off-balance-sheet exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

160

Central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

170

General governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

180

Credit institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

190

Other financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

200

Non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

210

Households

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

220

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CQ4: Quality of non-performing exposures by geography



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

Gross carrying/nominal amount

Accumulated impairment

Provisions on off-balance-sheet commitments and financial guarantees given

Accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk on non-performing exposures

 

Of which non-performing

Of which subject to impairment

 

Of which defaulted

010

On-balance-sheet exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

020

Country 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

030

Country 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

040

Country 3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

050

Country 4

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

060

Country N

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

070

Other countries

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

080

Off-balance-sheet exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

090

Country 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

100

Country 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

110

Country 3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

120

Country 4

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

130

Country N

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

140

Other countries

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

150

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CQ5: Credit quality of loans and advances to non-financial corporations by industry



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

Gross carrying amount

Accumulated impairment

Accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk on non-performing exposures

 

Of which non-performing

Of which loans and advances subject to impairment

 

Of which defaulted

010

Agriculture, forestry and fishing

 

 

 

 

 

 

020

Mining and quarrying

 

 

 

 

 

 

030

Manufacturing

 

 

 

 

 

 

040

Electricity, gas, steam and air conditioning supply

 

 

 

 

 

 

050

Water supply

 

 

 

 

 

 

060

Construction

 

 

 

 

 

 

070

Wholesale and retail trade

 

 

 

 

 

 

080

Transport and storage

 

 

 

 

 

 

090

Accommodation and food service activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

100

Information and communication

 

 

 

 

 

 

110

Financial and insurance actvities

 

 

 

 

 

120

Real estate activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

130

Professional, scientific and technical activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

140

Administrative and support service activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

150

Public administration and defense, compulsory social security

 

 

 

 

 

 

160

Education

 

 

 

 

 

 

170

Human health services and social work activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

180

Arts, entertainment and recreation

 

 

 

 

 

 

190

Other services

 

 

 

 

 

 

200

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CQ6: Collateral valuation - loans and advances



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

Loans and advances

 

Performing

Non-performing

 

 

Unlikely to pay that are not past due or are past due ≤ 90 days

Past due > 90 days

 

Of which past due > 30 days ≤ 90 days

 

Of which past due > 90 days ≤ 180 days

Of which: past due > 180 days ≤ 1 year

Of which: past due > 1 years ≤ 2 years

Of which: past due > 2 years ≤ 5 years

Of which: past due > 5 years ≤ 7 years

Of which: past due > 7 years

010

Gross carrying amount

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

020

Of which secured

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

030

Of which secured with immovable property

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

040

Of which instruments with LTV higher than 60% and lower or equal to 80%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

050

Of which instruments with LTV higher than 80% and lower or equal to 100%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

060

Of which instruments with LTV higher than 100%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

070

Accumulated impairment for secured assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

080

Collateral

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

090

Of which value capped at the value of exposure

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

100

Of which immovable property

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

110

Of which value above the cap

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

120

Of which immovable property

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

130

Financial guarantees received

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

140

Accumulated partial write-off

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CQ7: Collateral obtained by taking possession and execution processes



 

a

b

Collateral obtained by taking possession

Value at initial recognition

Accumulated negative changes

010

Property, plant and equipment (PP&E)

 

 

020

Other than PP&E

 

 

030

Residential immovable property

 

 

040

Commercial Immovable property

 

 

050

Movable property (auto, shipping, etc.)

 

 

060

Equity and debt instruments

 

 

070

Other collateral

 

 

080

Total

 

 

Template EU CQ8: Collateral obtained by taking possession and execution processes – vintage breakdown



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

Debt balance reduction

Total collateral obtained by taking possession

 

Foreclosed ≤ 2 years

Foreclosed > 2 years ≤ 5 years

Foreclosed > 5 years

Of which non-current assets held-for-sale

Gross carrying amount

Accumulated negative changes

Value at initial recognition

Accumulated negative changes

Value at initial recognition

Accumulated negative changes

Value at initial recognition

Accumulated negative changes

Value at initial recognition

Accumulated negative changes

Value at initial recognition

Accumulated negative changes

010

Collateral obtained by taking possession classified as PP&E

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

020

Collateral obtained by taking possession other than that classified as PP&E

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

030

Residential immovable property

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

040

Commercial immovable property

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

050

Movable property (auto, shipping, etc.)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

060

Equity and debt instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

070

Other collateral

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

080

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX XVI




ANNEX XVI

Instructions for disclosure of risk management objectives and policies, exposures to credit risk, dilution risk and credit quality

1. Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation includes a set of templates that are applicable to all institutions subject to Article 442 CRR. It also includes some additional templates required to large institutions that have a ratio between the gross carrying amount of loans and advances that fall under Article 47a(3) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 and the total gross carrying amount of loans and advances that fall under Article 47a(1) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 equal to or higher than 5 %. For the purpose of this ratio, and of the templates included in Annex XV, loans and advances classified as held for sale, cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits shall be excluded both from the denominator and the numerator of the ratios, and from the rows on loans and advances included in the templates. The information on cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits is disclosed separately in some of them.

2. The additional templates are required to convey sufficiently comprehensive and comparable information for users of that information to assess the risk profiles of institutions. For this reason, when reading these instructions, institutions shall take into account the proportionality criteria included in Article 9 of this implementing regulation.

Table EU CRA: General qualitative information about credit risk

3. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in points (a), (b), (d) and (f) of Article 435(1) of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 16 ) (‘CRR’) on their risk management objectives and policies for credit risk by following the instructions set out in this Annex to complete table EU CRA which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

(a)

In the concise risk statement in accordance with point (f) of Article 435(1) CRR, how the business model translates into the components of the institution’s credit risk profile.

(b)

When discussing their strategies and processes to manage credit risk and the policies for hedging and mitigating that risk in accordance with points (a) and (d) of Article 435(1) CRR, the criteria and approach used for defining the credit risk management policy and for setting credit risk limits.

(c)

When informing on the structure and organisation of the risk management function in accordance with point (b) of Article 435(1) CRR, the structure and organisation of the credit risk management and control function.

(d)

When informing on the authority, status and other arrangements for the risk management function in accordance with point (b) of Article 435(1) CRR, the relationships between credit risk management, risk control, compliance and internal audit functions.

Table EU CRB: Additional disclosure related to the credit quality of assets

4. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to points (a) and (b) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below to complete table EU CRB which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

(a)

The scope and definitions of ‘past-due’ and ‘impaired’ exposures used for accounting purposes and the differences, if any, between the definitions of past due and default for accounting and regulatory purposes in accordance with Article 178 CRR.

(b)

The extent of past-due exposures (more than 90 days) that are not considered to be impaired and the reasons for this.

(c)

Description of methods used for determining general and specific credit risk adjustments.

(d)

The institution’s own definition of a restructured exposure used for the implementation of point (d) of Article 178(3) CRR in accordance with Article 178 CRR when different from the definition of exposures with forbearance measures as defined in Article 47b CRR.

Template EU CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions

5. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in points (c) and (e) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR1 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

005

Cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits

Institutions shall disclose this information in line with the information reported in Annexes III and IV to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014 (1).

010

Loans and advances

Loans and advances are debt instruments held by the institutions that are not securities; this item includes ‘loans’ in accordance with Regulation (EU) 1071/2013 (‘ECB BSI Regulation’) (2) as well as advances that cannot be classified as ‘loans’ in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation, as defined in paragraph 32 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014, but excluding loans and advances classified as held for sale, cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits.

020 – 060, 080, 100 – 140, 160 –210

Counterparty breakdown

Institutions shall apply the breakdown by counterparty as defined in paragraph 42 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Counterparty sector allocation shall be based exclusively on the nature of the immediate counterparty. The classification of exposures incurred jointly by more than one obligor shall be done based on the characteristics of the obligor that was the more relevant, or determinant, for the institution’s decision to grant the exposure. Among other classifications, the distribution of jointly incurred exposures by counterparty sector, country of residence and NACE code shall be driven by the characteristics of the more relevant or determinant obligor.

070

SMEs

As defined in paragraph 5(i) of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

090

Debt securities

Debt securities are debt instruments held by the institution issued as securities that are not loans in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation, as defined in paragraph 31 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

150

Off-balance-sheet exposures

Off-balance sheet exposures shall include the off-balance sheet items listed in Annex I CRR.

220

Total

(1)   

COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) No 680/2014 of 16 April 2014 laying down implementing technical standards with regard to supervisory reporting of institutions according to Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 191, 28.6.2014, p. 1).

(2)   

REGULATION (EU) No 1071/2013 OF THE EUROPEAN CENTRAL BANK of 24 September 2013 concerning the balance sheet of the monetary financial institutions sector (ECB/2013/33) (OJ L 297, 7.11.2013, p. 1).



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount on performing exposures

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

b, c, e, f, h, i, k and l

Of which stage 1/stage 2/stage 3

For institutions applying IFRS, categories of impairment, as defined in IFRS 9.5.5. ‘Stage 1’ refers to impairment measured in accordance with IFRS 9.5.5.5. ‘Stage 2’ refers to impairment measured in accordance with IFRS 9.5.5.3. ‘Stage 3’ refers to impairment on credit-impaired assets, as defined in Appendix A to IFRS 9.

The columns ‘Of which stage 1’, ‘Of which stage 2’ and ‘Of which stage 3’ shall not be disclosed by institutions that apply national generally accepted accounting principles based on Council Directive (EEC) 86/635 (1) on the annual accounts and consolidated accounts of banks and other financial institutions.

d

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount on non-performing exposures

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a CRR.

g

Performing exposures – accumulated impairment and provisions

This shall include the amounts determined in accordance with paragraphs 11, 69 to 71, 106 and 110 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

j

Non-performing – accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions

Non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a CRR

This shall include the amounts determined in accordance with paragraphs 11, 69 to 71, 106 and 110 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

m

Accumulated partial write-off

This is to include the accumulated partial amount at the reference date of principal and accrued past-due interest and fees for any debt instrument that has been de-recognised to date using either of the methods described in paragraph 74 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014, to be disclosed because the institution has no reasonable expectation of recovering the contractual cash flows. These amounts are to be disclosed until the total extinguishment of all the institution’s rights by expiry of the statute-of-limitations period, forgiveness or another cause, or until recovery. Therefore, where the written-off amounts are not recovered, they are to be disclosed while they are subject to enforcement activities.

Write-offs constitute a de-recognition event and relate to a financial asset in its entirety or (in the case of a partial write-off) to a portion of it, including where the modification of an asset leads the institution to give up its right to collect cash flows either on a portion or on the entirety of that asset.

n

Collateral and financial guarantees received on performing exposures

Amounts for collateral received and guarantees received shall be calculated in accordance with paragraph 239 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. The sum of amounts for both collateral and guarantees is to be capped at the carrying amount of the related exposure.

o

Collateral and financial guarantees received on non-performing exposures

Non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a CRR

Amounts for collateral received and guarantees received shall be calculated in accordance with paragraph 239 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. The sum of amounts for both collateral and guarantees is to be capped at the carrying amount of the related exposure.

(1)   

COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 86/635/EEC of 8 December 1986 on the annual accounts and consolidated accounts of banks and other financial institutions (OJ L 372, 31.12.1986, p. 1).

Template EU CR1-A: Maturity of exposures

6. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (g) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below to complete template EU CR1-A which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Loans and advances

Loans and advances are debt instruments held by the institutions that are not securities; this item includes ‘loans’ in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation as well as advances that cannot be classified as ‘loans’ in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation, as defined in paragraph 32 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014, but excluding loans and advances classified as held for sale, cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits.

020

Debt securities

Debt securities are debt instruments held by the institution issued as securities that are not loans in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation, as defined in paragraph 31 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

030

Total



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a to e

Net exposure values

The net values shall be disclosed by residual contractual maturities.

Net value of the exposure: For on-balance-sheet items, the net value is the gross carrying value of exposure less allowances/impairments. For off-balance-sheet items, the net value is the gross carrying value of exposure less provisions.

Exposure: In accordance with Article 5 CRR, exposure refers to an asset or an off-balance-sheet item that gives rise to a credit risk exposure in accordance with the CRR.

Gross carrying values: The accounting value before any allowance/impairments but after considering write-offs. Institutions shall not take into account any CRM technique in the application of Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three CRR. Off-balance-sheet items shall be disclosed for their nominal amount gross of any CCF applicable in accordance with Article 111 and 166 CRR or CRM techniques, and gross of any provision, particularly (a) guarantees given (the maximum amount that the institution would have to pay if the guarantee were called) and (b) loan commitments and other commitments (the total amount that the institution has committed to lend).

In this disclosure:

— When a counterparty has a choice of when an amount is repaid, the amount is allocated to column ‘on demand’. The column includes balances receivable on demand (call), at short notice, current accounts and similar balances (which may include loans that are overnight deposits for the borrower, regardless of their legal form). It also includes ‘overdrafts’ that are debit balances on current account balances;

— When an exposure has no stated maturity for reasons other than the counterparty having the choice of the repayment date, the amount of this exposure shall be disclosed in column ‘no stated maturity’.

— When the amount is repaid in instalments, the exposure shall be allocated in the maturity bucket corresponding to the last instalment.

f

Total

Template EU CR2: Changes in the stock of non-performing loans and advances

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (f) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below to complete template EU CR2 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation. Institutions shall explain in the narrative accompanying these templates any material difference between the non-performing values disclosed in each row and the values as if the definition of defaulted in accordance with Article 178 CRR was applied.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Initial stock of non-performing loans and advances

The gross carrying amount of the stock of non-performing loans and advances at the end of the last financial year

020

Inflows to non-performing portfolios

The gross carrying amount of loans and advances that entered non-performing status during the period (since the end of last financial year)

030

Outflows from non-performing portfolios

The gross carrying amount of loans and advances that exited non-performing status

040

Outflow due to write-offs

Full or partial write-offs of total loans and advances recorded during the reference period

A write-off (full or partial) constitutes a de-recognition event. Therefore, the gross carrying amount of loans and advances is reduced by the amount of the write-offs. Furthermore, debt forgiveness in the context of forbearance measures, i.e. write-offs for which the amount of debt outstanding from the borrower was cancelled (the institution forfeits the right to legally recover it), is also to be included in this category.

050

Outflow due to other situations

Any other decreases to the carrying amount of loans and advances other than write-off shall be included in this row. Those adjustments might include, for instance, the outflow due to: i) loan repayment, partial or total; ii) collateral liquidations; iii) taking possession of collateral, iv) sale of instruments; v) risk transfers; vi) FX changes; vii) other closure actions; viii) reclassifications between asset classes, etc. Moreover, the adjustments shall include the outflow due to reclassification as held for sale.

Where the amount for this category is significant, institutions are asked to provide additional information in the narrative accompanying this template.

060

Final stock of non-performing loans and advances

The gross carrying amount of the stock of non-performing loans and advances at the disclosure reference date.



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Gross carrying amount

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Template EU CR2a: Changes in the stock of non-performing loans and advances and related net accumulated recoveries

2. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in points (c) and (f) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below to complete template EU CR2a which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation. Institutions shall explain in the narrative accompanying these templates any material difference between the non-performing values disclosed in each row and the values as if the definition of defaulted in accordance with Article 178 CRR was applied, in particular for rows 010, 030, 100 and 130.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Initial stock of non-performing loans and advances

The gross carrying amount of the stock of non-performing loans and advances at the end of the last financial year

020

Inflows to non-performing portfolios

The gross carrying amount of loans and advances that entered non-performing status during the period (since the end of last financial year)

030

Outflows from non-performing portfolios

The gross carrying amount of loans and advances that exited non-performing status

040

Outflow to performing portfolio

The gross carrying amount of loans and advances that exited non-performing status and became performing during the period (since the end of last financial year)

050

Outflow due to loan repayment, partial or total

The reduction in the gross carrying amount of non-performing loans and advances due to cash payments, namely regular payments of capital and any ad hoc repayments during the period (since the end of last financial year)

060

Outflow due to collateral liquidations

The effect on the gross carrying amount of an instrument from the liquidation of any kind of collateral shall be disclosed in this row. Outflows due to other liquidation or legal procedures and voluntary sale of property are also to be included in this row. For the avoidance of doubt, please note that the gross carrying amount of the instrument shall be disclosed, including any potential accompanying partial write-off. Please also note that outflows might not be equal to the sum of net cumulated recoveries and partial write-offs.

060 column b

Related net accumulated recoveries

Cash recoveries or cash equivalents collected due to collateral liquidations (net of respective collateral liquidation costs) are to be disclosed in this row.

070

Outflow due to taking possession of collateral

The effect on the gross carrying amount of an instrument due to the foreclosure of any kind of collateral shall be disclosed in this row. Taking possession refers to the acquisition of non-cash collateral of which the institution or a group subsidiary has acquired ownership and which it has not yet sold to a third party. Debt asset swaps, voluntary surrenders and debt equity swaps are also to be included in this category. For the avoidance of doubt, please note that the gross carrying amount of the instrument shall be disclosed, including any potential accompanying partial write-offs. Please also note that outflows might not be equal to the sum of net cumulated recoveries and partial write-offs.

070 column b

Related net accumulated recoveries

The initial recognition in the institution’s balance sheet of the fair value of the collateral at the moment of taking possession is to be disclosed in this row. Cash recoveries or cash equivalents collected in the context of taking possession of collateral net of costs shall not be included in this row but be disclosed under Outflow due to loan repayment, partial or total.

080

Outflow due to sale of instruments

Total balance changes stemming from loans and advances sold to other institutions, excluding intragroup transactions

For the avoidance of doubt, institutions shall note that the gross carrying amount of the loans and advances sold is to be disclosed (including any potential accompanying partial write-offs) and not its valuation or price during the transaction. Institutions shall also note that outflows might not be equal to the sum of net cumulated recoveries and partial write-offs.

080 column b

Related net accumulated recoveries

Cash recoveries or cash equivalents collected in the context of the sale of loans and advances, net of selling costs, shall be included in this row.

090

Outflow due to risk transfers

The gross reduction in non-performing loans and advances due to securitisation or other risk transfers qualifying for de-recognition from the balance sheet

Institutions shall note that outflows might not be equal to the sum of net cumulated recoveries and partial write-offs.

090 column b

Related net accumulated recoveries

Cash recoveries or cash equivalents collected in the context of the outflows due to significant risk transfers are to be disclosed in this row.

100

Outflow due to write-offs

Full or partial write-offs of total loans and advances recorded during the reference period

A write-off (full or partial) constitutes a de-recognition event. Therefore, the gross carrying amount of loans and advances is reduced by the amount of the write-offs. For the avoidance of doubt, please note that this row reflects changes in the gross carrying amount of loans and advances, and any potential partial write-offs that have already been disclosed in previous rows (e.g. accompanying sale of loans and advances, collateral liquidation, taking possession of collateral or significant risk transfer) shall not be included in this row. Furthermore, debt forgiveness in the context of forbearance measures, i.e. write-offs for which the amount of debt outstanding from the borrower was cancelled (the institution forfeits the right to legally recover it), is also to be included in this category.

110

Outflow due to other situations

Any other decreases to the carrying amount of loans and advances that are not covered by the events mentioned above shall be included in this row. Those adjustments might include, for instance, FX changes, other closure actions, reclassifications between asset classes, etc. Where the amount for this category is significant, institutions are asked to provide additional information in the narrative accompanying this template.

120

Outflow due to reclassification as held for sale

Decreases to the carrying amount of non-performing loans and advances due to their reclassification as instruments held for sale

130

Final stock of non-performing loans and advances

The gross carrying amount of the stock of non-performing loans and advances at the disclosure reference date



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Gross carrying amount

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

b

Related net accumulated recoveries

Please refer to the definitions for the rows in this template.

Template EU CQ1: Credit quality of forborne exposures

3. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (c) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below to complete template EU CQ1 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

005

Cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits

Institutions shall disclose this information in line with the information reported in Annexes III and IV Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

010

Loans and advances

See the definition in EU-CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

020 - 070

Counterparty breakdown

Institutions shall apply the breakdown by counterparty as defined in paragraph 42 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Counterparty sector allocation shall be based exclusively on the nature of the immediate counterparty. The classification of exposures incurred jointly by more than one obligor shall be done based on the characteristics of the obligor that was the more relevant, or determinant, for the institution’s decision to grant the exposure. Among other classifications, the distribution of jointly incurred exposures by counterparty sector, country of residence and NACE code shall be driven by the characteristics of the more relevant or determinant obligor.

080

Debt securities

See the definition in EU-CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

090

Loan commitments given

For loan commitments given, the nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014 shall be disclosed.

100

Total



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount of exposures with forbearance measures – of which performing forborne

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; exposures with forbearance measures as defined in Article 47b CRR

The gross carrying amount related to the exposures subject to impairment is the net of accumulated partial and total write-off.

Depending on whether forborne exposures satisfy the required conditions set out in Articles 47a CRR, they can be identified as performing or non-performing.

b

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount of exposures with forbearance measures – of which non-performing forborne

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

The gross carrying amount related to the exposures subject to impairment is the net of accumulated partial and total write-off.

Non-performing exposures with forbearance measures (non-performing forborne exposures) shall comprise forborne exposures that meet the criteria to be considered non-performing and are included in the non-performing exposures category. Those non-performing forborne exposures are to include the following: (a) exposures that have become non-performing due to the application of forbearance measures; (b) exposures that were non-performing prior to the extension of forbearance measures; (c) forborne exposures that have been reclassified from the performing category, including exposures reclassified pursuant to Article 47a CRR.

c

Of which defaulted

Forborne exposures that are also classified as defaulted in accordance with Article 178 CRR

d

Of which impaired

Forborne exposures that are also impaired in accordance with the applicable accounting framework under paragraph 215 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

e

Accumulated impairments, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions on performing forborne exposures

Exposures with forbearance measures as defined in Article 47b CRR.

Institutions shall include the amounts determined in accordance with paragraphs 11, 69 to 71, 106 and 110 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Depending on whether forborne exposures satisfy the required conditions set out in Article 47a and 47b CRR, they can be identified as performing or non-performing.

f

Accumulated impairments, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions on non-performing forborne exposures

This shall include the amounts determined in accordance with paragraphs 11, 69 to 71, 106 and 110 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Non-performing exposures with forbearance measures (non-performing forborne exposures) shall comprise forborne exposures that meet the criteria to be considered non-performing and are included in the non-performing exposures category. Those non-performing forborne exposures are to include the following: (a) exposures that have become non-performing due to the application of forbearance measures; (b) exposures that were non-performing prior to the extension of forbearance measures; (c) forborne exposures that have been reclassified from the performing category, including exposures reclassified pursuant to Article 47a CRR.

g

Collateral received and financial guarantees received on forborne exposures

These shall be disclosed for all exposures with forbearance measures, regardless of their performing or non-performing status. Amounts for collateral received and guarantees received shall be calculated in accordance with paragraph 239 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. The sum of amounts for both collateral and guarantees is to be capped at the carrying amount of the related exposure.

h

Of which collateral and financial guarantees received on non-performing exposures with forbearance measures

Amounts for collateral received and guarantees received shall be calculated in accordance with paragraph 239 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. The sum of amounts for both collateral and guarantees is to be capped at the carrying amount of the related exposure.

Non-performing exposures with forbearance measures (non-performing forborne exposures) shall comprise forborne exposures that meet the criteria to be considered non-performing and are included in the non-performing exposures category. Those non-performing forborne exposures are to include the following: (a) exposures that have become non-performing due to the application of forbearance measures; (b) exposures that were non-performing prior to the extension of forbearance measures; (c) forborne exposures that have been reclassified from the performing category, including exposures reclassified pursuant to Article 47a CRR.

Template EU CQ2: Quality of forbearance

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (c) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CQ2 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Loans and advances that have been forborne more than twice

Gross carrying amount of loans and advances that had been granted forbearance measures in the past and more than twice

Loans and advances for which forbearance was granted that exited the forborne category (i.e. cured forborne loans and advances) are also included here when a new forborne measure has been granted.

020

Non-performing forborne loans and advances that failed to meet the non-performing exit criteria

Gross carrying amount of non-performing forborne loans and advances that are in the category of non-performing forborne loans and advances under the cure period of 1 year and that failed to comply with the forbearance measures after the 12-month cure period and therefore did not succeed in moving towards performing forborne status but retained non-performing forborne within cure period status



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Gross carrying amount of forborne exposures

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; exposures with forbearance measures as defined in Article 47b CRR

Depending on whether forborne exposures satisfy the required conditions set out in Article 47a or 47b CRR, they can be identified as performing or non-performing.

Template EU CQ3: Credit quality of performing and non-performing exposures by past due days

4. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (d) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CQ3 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

005

Cash balances at central banks and other demand deposits

Institutions shall disclose this information in line with the information reported in Annexes III and IV Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

010

Loans and advances

See the definition in EU-CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

020 – 060, 080, 100 – 140, 160 –210

Counterparty breakdown

Institutions shall apply the breakdown by counterparty as defined in paragraph 42 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Counterparty sector allocation shall be based exclusively on the nature of the immediate counterparty. The classification of exposures incurred jointly by more than one obligor shall be done based on the characteristics of the obligor that was the more relevant, or determinant, for the institution’s decision to grant the exposure. Among other classifications, the distribution of jointly incurred exposures by counterparty sector, country of residence and NACE code shall be driven by the characteristics of the more relevant or determinant obligor.

070

SMEs

As defined in paragraph 5(i) of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

090

Debt securities

See the definition in EU-CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

150

Off-balance-sheet exposures

See the definition in EU-CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

210

Total



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount on performing exposures

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

b

Of which: Not past due or past due ≤ 30 days

Subcategory of performing exposures that are not past due or are 1–30 days past due

c

Of which: Past due > 30 days ≤ 90 days

Subcategory of performing exposures that are 31–90 days past due

In addition, exposures that are more than 90 days past due that are not material are included in this subcategory.

d

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount on non-performing exposures

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a CRR.

e

Of which: Unlikely to pay that are not past due or are past due ≤ 90 days

Subcategory of exposures that are either not past due or are up to 90 days past due but are nevertheless identified as non-performing, pursuant to Article 47a CRR

f

Of which: Past due > 90 days ≤ 180 days

Subcategory of non-performing exposures that are past due for more than 90 days, but not more than 180 days

g

Of which: Past due > 180 days ≤ 1 year

Subcategory of non-performing exposures that are past due for more than 180 days, but not more than 1 year

h

Of which: Past due > 1 year ≤ 2 years

Subcategory of non-performing exposures that are past due for more than 1 year, but not more than 2 years

i

Of which: Past due > 2 years ≤ 5 years

Subcategory of non-performing exposures that are past due for more than 2 years, but not more than 5 years

j

Of which: Past due > 5 years ≤ 7 years

Subcategory of non-performing exposures that are past due for more than 5 years, but not more than 7 years

k

Of which: Past due > 7 years

Subcategory of non-performing exposures that are past due for more than 7 years

l

Of which defaulted

Defaulted exposures in accordance with Article 178 CRR

Template EU CQ4: Quality of non-performing exposures by geography

5. Where non-domestic original exposures in all non-domestic countries in all exposure classes are equal to or higher than 10 % of the total (domestic and non-domestic) original exposures, institutions shall disclose the information referred to in points (c) and (e) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CQ4 which is s presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

On-balance-sheet exposures

Total on-balance-sheet exposures

020 – 070 and 090 - 140

Country

A country in which the institution’s exposures are material in accordance with Article 432 CRR

When the materiality of countries is determined using a materiality threshold, that threshold shall be disclosed, as shall the list of immaterial countries included in the ‘Other countries’ rows.

Institutions shall allocate exposures to a significant country based on the residence of the immediate counterparty. Exposures to supranational organisations shall be assigned not to the country of residence of the institution but to ‘Other countries’.

080

Off-balance-sheet exposures

See the definition in EU-CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

150

Total



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

The gross carrying amount related to the exposures subject to impairment is the net of accumulated partial and total write-off.

b

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount – of which non-performing

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; nominal amount as defined in paragraph 118 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a CRR.

c

Of which defaulted

Defaulted exposures in accordance with Article 178 CRR

d

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount – of which subject to impairment

The gross carrying or nominal amount related to exposures that are subject to the impairment requirements of the applicable accounting framework

e

Accumulated impairment

This shall include the amounts determined in accordance with paragraphs 11, 69 to 71, 106 and 110 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

f

Provisions on off-balance-sheet commitments and financial guarantees given

This row shall include the provisions off-balance-sheet commitments and financial guarantees given.

g

Accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk on non-performing exposures

This shall include the amounts determined in accordance with paragraphs 11, 69 to 71, 106 and 110 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Template EU CQ5: Credit quality of loans and advances to non-financial corporations by industry

6. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in points (c) and (e) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CQ5 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010 - 190

Counterparty breakdown by industry

Counterparty sector allocation includes only the sectors related to non-financial corporation counterparty.

Counterparty sector allocation shall be based exclusively on the nature of the immediate counterparty. The classification of exposures incurred jointly by more than one obligor shall be done based on the characteristics of the obligor that was the more relevant, or determinant, for the institution’s decision to grant the exposure.

The rows shall be used to disclose the material industry sectors or counterparty types to which institutions have exposures. Materiality shall be assessed in accordance with Article 432 CRR, and immaterial industry sectors or counterparty types shall be aggregated in the row ‘Other services’.

200

Total



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Gross carrying amount

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

The gross carrying amount related to the exposures subject to impairment is the net of accumulated partial and total write-off.

b

Gross carrying amount – of which non-performing

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014; non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a CRR

c

Of which defaulted

Defaulted exposures in accordance with Article 178 CRR

d

Gross carrying amount – of which loans and advances subject to impairment

The gross carrying amount related to loans and advances that are subject to the impairment requirements of the applicable accounting framework

e

Accumulated impairment

This shall include the amounts determined in accordance with paragraphs 11, 69 to 71, 106 and 110 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

f

Accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk on non-performing exposures

Non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a CRR

Institutions shall include the amounts determined in accordance with paragraphs 11, 69 to 71, 106 and 110 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Template EU CQ6: Collateral valuation - loans and advances

7. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (c) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CQ6 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Gross carrying amount

Gross carrying amount as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

020

Of which secured

Gross carrying amount, as defined in paragraph 34 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014, of secured and partially secured loans shall be disclosed in this row.

Unsecured loans and advances shall include exposures for which neither collateral was pledged nor financial guarantees were received; the unsecured part of a partially secured or partially guaranteed exposure shall be included in this row, in accordance with paragraph 323 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

Therefore, secured loans and advances must be calculated as the difference between the gross carrying amount of all loans and advances and the gross carrying amount of unsecured loans and advances, and will include both the secured and the unsecured part of the loan.

In case of overcollateralization the gross carrying amount of the loan shall be disclosed.

030

Of which secured with immovable property

Loans collateralized by immovable property shall include loans and advances formally secured by residential or commercial immovable property collateral, independently of their loan/collateral ratio (commonly referred as ‘loan-to-value’) and the legal form of the collateral, as defined in paragraph 86(a) of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

040

Of which instruments with LTV higher than 60 % and lower or equal to 80 %

The loan-to-value (LTV) ratio shall be calculated using the calculation method specified for ‘LTV Current’ in the Recommendation of the European Systemic Risk Board on closing real estate data gaps (ESRB/2016/14) (1). Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of loans and advances having an LTV ratio higher than 60 % and lower or equal to 80 %.

050

Of which instruments with LTV higher than 80% and lower or equal to 100 %

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of loans and advances having an LTV ratio higher than 80 % and lower than or equal to 100 %.

060

Of which instruments with LTV higher than 100 %

Gross carrying amount of loans and advances having a LTV ratio higher than 100 %

070

Accumulated impairment for secured assets

For secured debt instruments, accumulated impairment shall be calculated as the cumulative amount of impairment losses, net of use and reversals that has been recognised, where appropriate for each of the impairment stages (paragraph 70 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014).

The accumulated impairment related to the unsecured part of a partially secured or partially guaranteed exposure shall be included in this row.

090

Collateral – of which value capped at the value of exposure

Amounts for collateral received shall be calculated in accordance with paragraph 239 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. The sum of amounts for collateral in this row shall be capped at the carrying amount of the related exposure.

100

Of which immovable property

The part of the collateral consisting of residential or commercial immovable property (point (a) of paragraph 173 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014)

The sum of amounts for collateral in this row shall be capped at the carrying amount of the related exposure.

110

Collateral – of which value above the cap

In this row, the difference between the actual value of the collateral and the capped value of the collateral (carrying amount of the related exposure) shall be disclosed (institutions shall not apply for the calculation of the actual value of the collateral paragraph 239 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014).

120

Of which immovable property

The difference between the actual value and the capped value of the part of the collateral consisting of residential or commercial immovable property (point (a) of paragraph 173 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014)

130

Financial guarantees received

As defined in paragraph 114 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014

140

Accumulated partial write-off

This is to include the accumulated partial amount at the reference date of principal and accrued past-due interest and fees for any debt instrument that has been de-recognised to date using either of the methods described in paragraph 74 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014, to be disclosed because the institution has no reasonable expectation of recovering the contractual cash flows. These amounts are to be disclosed until the total extinguishment of all the institution’s rights by expiry of the statute-of-limitations period, forgiveness or another cause, or until recovery. Therefore, where the written-off amounts are not recovered, they are to be disclosed while they are subject to enforcement activities.

Write-offs constitute a de-recognition event and relate to a financial asset in its entirety or (in the case of a partial write-off) to a portion of it, including where the modification of an asset leads the institution to give up its right to collect cash flows either on a portion or on the entirety of that asset.

(1)   

RECOMMENDATION OF THE EUROPEAN SYSTEMIC RISK BOARD of 31 October 2016 on closing real estate data gaps (ESRB/2016/14) (OJ C 31, 31.1.2017, p. 1).



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Loans and advances

See the definition in template EU CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

b

Loans and advances – of which performing

See the definition in template EU CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

c

Of which past due > 30 days ≤ 90 days

Subcategory of performing loans and advances that are 31–90 days past due

d

Loans and advances – of which non-performing exposures

Non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a CRR

See the definition in template EU CR1: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions.

e

Of which unlikely to pay that are not past due or are past due ≤ 90 days

Subcategory of loans and advances that are either not past due or are up to 90 days past due but are nevertheless identified as non-performing, because of the likelihood of non-full repayment pursuant to Article 47a CRR

f

Past due > 90 days

Subcategory of loans and advances that are more than 90 days past due

g

Of which past due > 90 days ≤ 180 days

Subcategory of loans and advances that are 91–180 days past due

h

Of which past due > 180 days ≤ 1 year

Subcategory of loans and advances that are 181 days to 1 year past due

i

Of which past due > 1 years ≤ 2 years

Subcategory of loans and advances that are 1–2 years past due

j

Of which past due > 2 years ≤ 5 years

Subcategory of loans and advances that are 2–5 years past due

k

Of which past due > 5 years ≤ 7 years

Subcategory of loans and advances that are 5–7 years past due

l

Of which past due > 7 years

Subcategory of loans and advances that are more than 7 years past due.

Template EU CQ7: Collateral obtained by taking possession and execution processes

8. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (c) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CQ7 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Property, plant and equipment (PP&E)

Institutions shall disclose the stock of collateral obtained by taking possession that remains recognised in the balance sheet at the reporting reference date and that is classified as PP&E.

020

Other than PP&E

The stock of collateral obtained by taking possession that remains recognised in the balance sheet at the reporting reference date and is not classified as PP&E will automatically be disclosed in this row. The total stock will be calculated taking into account the initial stock (since the end of the last financial year), and the inflows and the outflows that occurred during the disclosure period (since the end of the last financial year). Collateral obtained by taking possession (other than PP&E) is in rows by type of collateral.

030

Residential immovable property

Collateral obtained by taking possession of residential property (e.g. houses, apartments, etc.) or property with potential use in the future as such (e.g. unfinished residential property etc.)

040

Commercial immovable property

Collateral obtained by taking possession of commercial or industrial property that can be used for business and/or investment purposes, or of any immovable property that is not residential property, as described above

Land (both non-agricultural and agricultural) shall also be included in this category.

050

Movable property (auto, shipping, etc.)

Collateral obtained by taking possession of property other than immovable property shall be disclosed in this row.

060

Equity and debt instruments

Collateral obtained by taking possession of equity or debt instruments shall be disclosed in this row.

070

Other collateral

Collateral obtained by taking possession not falling into the categories of the other rows

If the amount in this row is relatively material, institutions shall provide additional information in the narrative accompanying this template.

080

Total



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Collateral obtained by taking possession - Value at initial recognition

Institutions shall disclose in this column the gross carrying amount of the collateral obtained by taking possession at initial recognition in the institution’s balance sheet.

b

Collateral obtained by taking possession - Accumulated negative changes

Accumulated impairment or accumulated negative changes to the initial recognition value of the collateral obtained by taking possession, as described above

Institutions shall also include accumulated negative changes due to amortisation in the case of PP&E and investment properties, if applicable.

Template EU CQ8: Collateral obtained by taking possession and execution processes – vintage breakdown

9. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (c) of Article 442 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CQ8 which is presented in Annex XV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Property, plant and equipment (PP&E)

Institutions shall disclose the stock of collateral obtained by taking possession that remains recognised in the balance sheet at the reporting reference date and that is classified as PP&E.

020

Other than PP&E

The stock of collateral obtained by taking possession that remains recognised in the balance sheet at the reporting reference date and is not classified as PP&E will automatically be disclosed in this row. The total stock will be calculated taking into account the initial stock (since the end of the last financial year), and the inflows and the outflows that occurred during the disclosure period (since the end of the last financial year). Collateral obtained by taking possession (other than PP&E) is in rows by type of collateral.

030

Residential immovable property

Collateral obtained by taking possession of residential property (e.g. houses, apartments, etc.) or property with potential use in the future as such (e.g. unfinished residential property etc.)

040

Commercial immovable property

Collateral obtained by taking possession of commercial or industrial property that can be used for business and/or investment purposes, or of any immovable property that is not residential property, as described above

Land (both non-agricultural and agricultural) shall also be included in this category.

050

Movable property (auto, shipping, etc.)

Collateral obtained by taking possession of property other than immovable property shall be disclosed in this row.

060

Equity and debt instruments

Collateral obtained by taking possession of equity or debt instruments shall be disclosed in this row.

070

Other collateral

Collateral obtained by taking possession not falling into the categories of the other rows.

If the amount in this row is relatively material, institutions shall provide additional information in the narrative accompanying this template.

080

Total



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

a

Debt balance reduction - Gross carrying amount

The gross amount of the debt that was cancelled in exchange for the collateral obtained by taking possession, at the exact moment of the exchange, through judicial procedures or bilateral agreement

The gross amount shall be calculated as the gross reduction of the instrument balance, not taking into account any provisions. For the avoidance of doubt, balance reductions due to other reasons (e.g. cash collections) shall not be in this column.

b

Debt balance reduction - Accumulated negative changes

Accumulated impairment or accumulated negative changes to the initial recognition value of the collateral obtained by taking possession, as described above

See the definition in template CQ7, ‘Collateral obtained by taking possession and execution processes’.

Institutions shall include accumulated negative changes due to amortisation in the case of PP&E and investment properties, if applicable.

c

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Value at initial recognition

The gross carrying amount of the collateral obtained by taking possession at initial recognition in the institution’s balance sheet shall be disclosed in this column.

d

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Accumulated negative changes

Accumulated impairment or accumulated negative changes to the initial recognition value of the collateral obtained by taking possession, as described above

Institutions shall include accumulated negative changes due to amortisation in the case of PP&E and investment properties, if applicable.

e

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Foreclosed ≤ 2 years – of which value at initial recognition

Value at initial recognition for collateral obtained by taking possession and recognised in the balance sheet for 2 years or less at the reporting reference date

f

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Foreclosed ≤ 2 years – of which accumulated negative changes

Accumulated negative changes for collateral obtained by taking possession and recognised in the balance sheet for 2 years or less at the reporting reference date

g

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Foreclosed > 2 years ≤ 5 years – of which value at initial recognition

Value at initial recognition for collateral obtained by taking possession and recognised in the balance sheet for more than 2 years and up to 5 years at the reporting reference date

h

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Foreclosed > 2 years ≤ 5 years – of which accumulated negative changes

Accumulated negative changes for collateral obtained by taking possession and recognised in the balance sheet for more than 2 years and up to 5 years at the reporting reference date

i

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Foreclosed > 5 years – of which value at initial recognition

Value at initial recognition for collateral obtained by taking possession and recognised in the balance sheet for more than 5 years at the reporting reference date

j

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Foreclosed > 5 years – of which accumulated negative changes

Accumulated negative changes for collateral obtained by taking possession and recognised in the balance sheet for more than 5 years at the reporting reference date

k

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Of which non-current assets held for sale – of which value at initial recognition

Initial value for collateral obtained by taking possession that is classified as non-current assets held for sale shall be disclosed. If this classification is not relevant in accordance with the accounting framework applicable to the institution, this information shall not be provided.

l

Total collateral obtained by taking possession - Of which non-current assets held for sale – of which accumulated negative changes

Accumulated negative changes for collateral obtained by taking possession that is classified as non-current assets held for sale shall be disclosed. If this classification is not relevant in accordance with the accounting framework applicable to the institution, this information shall not be provided.

ANNEX XVII




ANNEX XVII

Table EU CRC – Qualitative disclosure requirements related to CRM techniques

Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information



Legal basis

Row number

Free format

Article 453 (a) CRR

(a)

A description of the core features of the policies and processes for on- and off-balance sheet netting and an indication of the extent to which institutions make use of balance sheet netting;

Article 453 (b) CRR

(b)

The core features of policies and processes for eligible collateral evaluation and management;

Article 453 (c) CRR

(c)

A description of the main types of collateral taken by the institution to mitigate credit risk;

Article 453 (d) CRR

(d)

For guarantees and credit derivatives used as credit protection, the main types of guarantor and credit derivative counterparty and their creditworthiness used for the purposes of reducing capital requirements, excluding those used as part of synthetic securitisation structures;

Article 453 (e) CRR

(e)

Information about market or credit risk concentrations within the credit mitigation taken;

Template EU CR3 – CRM techniques overview: Disclosure of the use of credit risk mitigation techniques



 

Unsecured carrying amount

Secured carrying amount

 

Of which secured by collateral

Of which secured by financial guarantees

 

Of which secured by credit derivatives

a

b

c

d

e

1

Loans and advances

 

 

 

 

 

2

Debt securities

 

 

 

 

 

3

Total

 

 

 

 

 

4

Of which non-performing exposures

 

 

 

 

 

EU-5

Of which defaulted

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX XVIII




ANNEX XVIII

Disclosure of the use of credit risk mitigation techniques

Table EU CRC – Qualitative disclosure requirements related to CRM techniques. Flexible table

Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in points (a) to (e) of Article 453 of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 17 ) (‘CRR’) by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete table EU CRC which is presented in Annex XVII.



Row reference

Legal reference and instructions

Explanation

(a)

Point (a) of Article 453 CRR

When disclosing information on their netting policies and use of netting in accordance with point (a) of Article 453 CRR, institutions shall provide a clear description of CRM policies and processes concerning on-balance-sheet, off-balance-sheet netting and master netting agreements. They shall also indicate to what extent on-balance-sheet, off-balance-sheet netting and master netting agreements have been used and their importance regarding credit risk management. Institutions could especially mention details about the techniques in use as well as the positions covered by on-balance-sheet netting agreements and the financial instruments included in the master netting agreements. Furthermore, the conditions necessary to assure effectiveness of these techniques and the controls in place for legal risk could also be described.

(b)

Point (b) of Article 453 CRR

As part of their disclosures on the core features of their policies and processes for eligible collateral valuation and management in accordance with point (b) of Article 453 CRR, institutions shall disclose:

— the basis for the assessment and evaluation of the pledged collateral including assessment of legal certainty of CRM techniques;

— type of valuation (market value, mortgage lending value, other types of values);

— to what extent the calculated value of collateral is reduced by a haircut;

— the process, frequency and methods in place to monitor the value of mortgage collateral and other physical collateral.

Additionally, institutions could also disclose if there is a system of credit exposure limits in place and the impact of accepted collateral in the quantification of those limits.

(c)

Point (c) of Article 453 CRR

When describing the collateral taken in accordance with point (c) of Article 453 CRR, institutions shall provide a detailed description of the main types of collateral accepted to mitigate credit risk, by type of exposures.

(d)

Point (d) of Article 453 CRR

The description of the main types of guarantors and counterparties in credit derivatives and their creditworthiness to be disclosed in accordance with point (d) of Article 453 CRR shall cover credit derivatives used for the purposes of reducing capital requirements, excluding those used as part of synthetic securitisation structures. Institutions could also include description of the methods used to recognise the effects of the guarantees or credit derivatives provided by the main types of guarantors and counterparties.

(e)

Point (e) of Article 453 CRR

When disclosing information about market or credit risk concentrations within CRM taken in accordance with point (e) of Article 453 CRR, institutions shall provide an analysis of any concentration that arises due to CRM measures and may prevent CRM instruments from being effective. Concentrations in the scope of those disclosures could include concentrations by type of instrument used as collateral, entity (concentration by guarantor type and credit derivative providers), sector, geographical area, currency, rating or other factors that potentially impact the value of the protection and thereby reduce this protection.

Template EU CR3 – CRM techniques overview: Disclosure of the use of credit risk mitigation techniques. Fixed template.

Institution shall disclose the information referred to in point (f) of Article 453 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR3 which is presented in Annex XVII to this Implementing Regulation.

This template covers all CRM techniques recognised under the applicable accounting framework regardless of whether these techniques are recognised under CRR, including, but not only, all types of collateral, financial guarantees and credit derivatives used for all secured exposures, irrespective of whether the standardised approach or the IRB approach is used for the calculation of risk weighted exposure amount (RWEA). Institutions shall supplement the template with a narrative commentary to explain any significant changes over the disclosure period and the key drivers of such changes.



Column reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

a

Unsecured carrying amount:

The carrying amount of exposures (net of allowances/impairments) that do not benefit from any CRM technique, regardless of whether this technique is recognised under CRR

In particular, it refers to exposures for which neither collateral was pledged nor financial guarantee were received. The unsecured part of a partially secured or partially guaranteed exposure shall not be included.

b

Secured carrying amount:

Carrying amount of exposures that have at least one CRM technique (collateral, financial guarantees, credit derivatives) associated with them

In case the value of collateral, financial guarantees and credit derivatives securing an exposure exceeds the carrying amount of that exposure, only the values up to the carrying amount of that exposure shall be included. In case the carrying amount of an exposure exceeds the value of collateral, financial guarantees and credit derivatives securing that exposure, the full carrying amount of that exposure shall be included.

For the purpose of the following columns c, d and e, the allocation of the carrying amount of multi-secured exposures to their different CRM techniques is made by order of priority, starting with the CRM technique expected to be called first in the event of non-payment, and within the limits of the carrying amount of the secured exposures. Any part of exposure shall be included in only one of the columns c, d or e of this template.

c

Of which secured by collateral:

This is a subset of column b of this template and represents the carrying amount of exposures (net of allowances/impairments) or parts of exposures secured by collateral. In case an exposure is secured by collateral and other CRM technique(s) expected to be called beforehand in the event of non-payment, the carrying amount of the exposure secured by collateral is the remaining share of the exposure after consideration of the shares of the exposures already secured by other mitigation techniques, up to the carrying amount of that exposure.

d

Of which secured by financial guarantees:

This is a subset of column b of this template and represents the carrying amount of exposures (net of allowances/impairments) or parts of exposures secured by guarantees. In case an exposure is secured by guarantees and other CRM techniques expected to be called beforehand in the event of non-payment, the carrying amount of the exposure secured by guarantees is the remaining part of the exposure after consideration of the shares of the exposure already secured by other mitigation techniques, up to the carrying amount of that exposure.

e

Of which secured by credit derivatives:

This is a subset of column d (financial guarantees) of this template and represents the carrying amount of exposures (net of allowances/impairments) or parts of exposures secured by credit derivatives. In case an exposure is secured by credit derivatives and other CRM techniques expected to be called beforehand in the event of non-payment, the carrying amount of the exposure secured by credit derivatives is the remaining share of the exposure after consideration of the shares of the exposure already secured by other mitigation techniques, up to the carrying amount of that exposure.



Row reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

1

Loans and advances

‘Loans and advances’ are debt instruments held by the institutions that are not securities; this item includes ‘loans’ in accordance with Regulation (EU) 1071/2013 (‘ECB BSI Regulation’) (1) as well as advances that cannot be classified as ‘loans’ in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation, as defined in paragraph 32 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014 (2).

2

Debt securities

Debt securities are debt instruments held by the institution issued as securities that are not loans in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation, as defined in paragraph 31 of Part 1 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014.

3

Total

Sum of amounts in rows 1 and 2 of this template

4

Of which non-performing exposures

Non-performing exposures in accordance with Article 47a CRR

EU-5

Of which defaulted

Defaulted exposures in accordance with Article 178 CRR

(1)   

REGULATION (EU) No 1071/2013 OF THE EUROPEAN CENTRAL BANK of 24 September 2013 concerning the balance sheet of the monetary financial institutions sector (ECB/2013/33) (OJ L 297, 7.11.2013, p. 1).

(2)   

COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) No 680/2014 of 16 April 2014 laying down implementing technical standards with regard to supervisory reporting of institutions according to Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 191, 28.6.2014, p. 1).

ANNEX XIX




ANNEX XIX

Table EU CRD – Qualitative disclosure requirements related to standardised approach



Legal basis

Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

Article 444 (a) CRR

(a)

Names of the external credit assessment institutions (ECAIs) and export credit agencies (ECAs) nominated by the institution, and the reasons for any changes over the disclosure period;

Article 444 (b) CRR

(b)

The exposure classes for which each ECAI or ECA is used;

Article 444 (c) CRR

(c)

A description of the process used to transfer the issuer and issue credit ratings onto comparable assets items not included in the trading book;

Article 444 (d) CRR

(d)

The association of the external rating of each nominated ECAI or ECA (as referred to in row (a)) with the risk weights that correspond with the credit quality steps as set out in Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three CRR (except where the institution complies with the standard association published by the EBA).

Template EU CR4 – standardised approach – Credit risk exposure and CRM effects



 

Exposure classes

Exposures before CCF and before CRM

Exposures post CCF and post CRM

RWAs and RWAs density

On-balance-sheet exposures

Off-balance-sheet exposures

On-balance-sheet exposures

Off-balance-sheet exposures

RWAs

RWAs density (%)

a

b

c

d

e

f

1

Central governments or central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Regional government or local authorities

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Public sector entities

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Multilateral development banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

International organisations

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Retail

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

Exposures in default

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

Exposures associated with particularly high risk

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

Covered bonds

 

 

 

 

 

 

13

Institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment

 

 

 

 

 

 

14

Collective investment undertakings

 

 

 

 

 

 

15

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

16

Other items

 

 

 

 

 

 

17

TOTAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CR5 – standardised approach



 

Exposure classes

Risk weight

Total

Of which unrated

0 %

2 %

4 %

10 %

20 %

35 %

50 %

70 %

75 %

100 %

150 %

250 %

370 %

1 250  %

Others

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

p

q

1

Central governments or central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Regional government or local authorities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Public sector entities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Multilateral development banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

International organisations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Retail exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Exposures secured by mortgages on immovable property

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

Exposures in default

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

Exposures associated with particularly high risk

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

Covered bonds

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13

Exposures to institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

14

Units or shares in collective investment undertakings

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

15

Equity exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16

Other items

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

17

TOTAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANEXO XX Instrucciones relativas a la divulgación de información sobre el uso del método estándar para el riesgo de crédito (excluidos el riesgo de contraparte y las posiciones de titulización)

ANEXO XX

Instrucciones relativas a la divulgación de información sobre el uso del método estándar para el riesgo de crédito (excluidos el riesgo de contraparte y las posiciones de titulización)

1. Los instrumentos sujetos a lo dispuesto en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 6, del RRC (exposiciones al riesgo de contraparte), así como los instrumentos a los que se aplican los requisitos establecidos en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 5, del RRC (exposiciones de titulización), no se contemplan en las plantillas a las que se refieren las instrucciones del presente anexo.

Cuadro EU CRD — Requisitos de divulgación de información cualitativa relacionados con el método estándar. Formato flexible.

2. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 444, letras a) a d), del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 ( 18 ) (RRC) siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU CRD, que se recoge en el anexo XIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencia de la fila

Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Explicación

a)

Artículo 444, letra a) del RRC

Las entidades divulgarán el nombre de las agencias externas de calificación crediticia (ECAI) y de las agencias de crédito a la exportación designadas a las que recurran, así como las razones de cualquier cambio en dichas designaciones durante el período de divulgación.

b)

Artículo 444, letra b) del RRC

Las entidades indicarán las categorías de exposición, especificadas en el artículo 112 del RRC, para las que calculen los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo, de conformidad con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, del RRC, utilizando la evaluación crediticia de la ECAI o la agencia de crédito a la exportación designada.

c)

Artículo 444, letra c) del RRC

Cuando se utilice la evaluación crediticia de un emisor o una emisión para determinar la ponderación de riesgo que debe asignarse a una exposición no incluida en la cartera de negociación de conformidad con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, artículo 139, del RRC, las entidades describirán el procedimiento empleado.

d)

Artículo 444, letra d) del RRC

Las entidades indicarán, para cada una de las categorías de exposición especificadas en el artículo 112 del RRC, la escala alfanumérica de cada ECAI o agencia de crédito a la exportación designada [según lo indicado en la fila a) de esta plantilla], con las ponderaciones de riesgo correspondientes a los niveles de calidad crediticia establecidos en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, del RRC, excepto cuando la entidad se atenga a la asociación estándar publicada por la ABE.

Plantilla EU CR4 — Exposición al riesgo de crédito y efectos de la reducción del riesgo de crédito. Formato fijo.

3. Las entidades que calculen los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo de crédito con arreglo a la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, del RRC divulgarán la información a que se refieren el artículo 453, letras g), h) e i), y el artículo 444, letra e), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU CR4, que se recoge en el anexo XIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencia de la columna

Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Explicación

a

Exposiciones antes de aplicar factores de conversión y de la reducción del riesgo de crédito — Exposiciones en balance

Las entidades divulgarán el valor de exposición en balance incluido en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial con arreglo al artículo 111 del RRC, tras los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico con arreglo al artículo 110 del RRC, los ajustes de valoración adicionales con arreglo a los artículos 34 y 105 del RRC, las deducciones con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra m), del RRC, y otras reducciones de fondos propios y fallidos (según lo definido en el marco contable aplicable), pero antes de aplicar: i) factores de conversión del crédito con arreglo a lo especificado en el mismo artículo y ii) las técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito especificadas en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 4, del RRC. Los valores de exposición de los arrendamientos financieros están sujetos a lo dispuesto en el artículo 134, apartado 7, del RRC.

b

Exposiciones antes de aplicar factores de conversión y de la reducción del riesgo de crédito — Exposiciones fuera de balance

Las entidades divulgarán el valor de exposición fuera de balance incluido en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial tras la reducción de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico y las deducciones con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra m), del RRC, pero antes de la aplicación de los factores de conversión del crédito de conformidad con el artículo 111 del RRC y de las técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito (en aplicación de la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 4, del RRC).

c

Exposiciones después de aplicar factores de conversión y de la reducción del riesgo de crédito — Exposiciones en balance

Las entidades divulgarán el valor de exposición en balance incluido en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial (con arreglo al artículo 111 del RRC), tras los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico con arreglo al artículo 110 del RRC, los ajustes de valoración adicionales con arreglo a los artículos 34 y 105 del RRC, las deducciones con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra m), del RRC, y otras reducciones de fondos propios y fallidos, según lo definido en el marco contable aplicable, y después de aplicar todas las medidas de reducción del riesgo de crédito y los factores de conversión del crédito. Se trata del importe al que se aplican las ponderaciones de riesgo (de conformidad con el artículo 113 del RRC y con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, sección 1, del RRC). Representa el importe de crédito equivalente neto, después de aplicar las técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito y los factores de conversión del crédito.

d

Exposiciones después de aplicar factores de conversión y de la reducción del riesgo de crédito — Exposiciones fuera de balance

Las entidades divulgarán el valor de la exposición fuera de balance tras tener en cuenta los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico definidos en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 183/2014 de la Comisión (1), los ajustes de valoración adicionales y otras reducciones de fondos propios, y después de aplicar todas las medidas de reducción del riesgo de crédito y los factores de conversión del crédito. Se trata del importe al que se aplican las ponderaciones de riesgo (de conformidad con el artículo 113 del RRC y con la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, sección 1, del RRC). Representa el importe de crédito equivalente neto, después de aplicar las técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito y los factores de conversión del crédito.

e

Importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo

El importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo calculado con arreglo a la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, sección 1, del RRC.

f

Densidad del importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo

[Columna e / columnas (c + d) de esta plantilla]

La ratio se calculará dividiendo el importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo de la respectiva categoría de exposición (columna e de esta plantilla ) por el importe de las correspondientes exposiciones tras tener en cuenta todas las medidas de reducción del riesgo de crédito y los factores de conversión del crédito (suma de los importes consignados en las columnas c y d de esta plantilla).

(1)   

Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 183/2014 de la Comisión, de 20 de diciembre de 2013, por el que se completa el Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo, sobre los requisitos prudenciales de las entidades de crédito y las empresas de inversión, en lo que respecta a las normas técnicas de regulación para especificar el cálculo de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico y por riesgo de crédito general (DO L 57 de 27.2.2014, p. 3).


Número de fila

Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Explicación

1 - 16

Categorías de exposición definidas en el artículo 112 del RRC.

No se incluyen las exposiciones asignadas a la categoría «elementos correspondientes a posiciones de titulización» establecida en el artículo 112, letra m), del RRC.

16

La categoría de exposición «otros elementos» se refiere:

— a activos sujetos a una ponderación de riesgo específica con arreglo al artículo 134 del RRC;

— a activos no deducidos en aplicación del artículo 39 del RRC (impuestos abonados por exceso, pérdidas fiscales retrotraídas y activos por impuestos diferidos que no dependen de rendimientos futuros), del artículo 41 del RRC (activos de fondos de pensiones de prestaciones definidas), del artículo 46 del RRC (inversiones no significativas en instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero), del artículo 48 del RRC (activos por impuestos diferidos e inversiones directas, indirectas y sintéticas en instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero hasta el umbral definido), de los artículos 49 y 471 del RRC (participaciones en empresas aseguradoras independientemente de que estén o no supervisadas con arreglo a la Directiva sobre conglomerados), de los artículos 60 y 475 del RRC (inversiones directas, indirectas y sintéticas, significativas y no significativas, en instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario y adicional y de nivel 2 emitidos por entes del sector financiero), del artículo 70 del RRC (tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas, significativas y no significativas, de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 emitidos por entes del sector financiero), cuando no se asignen a otras categorías de exposición, y a participaciones cualificadas fuera del sector financiero cuando no reciban una ponderación de riesgo del 1 250  % [en aplicación de la parte segunda, título I, capítulo 1, artículo 36, letra k), del RRC].

Plantilla EU CR5 — Método estándar Formato fijo.

4. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 444, letra e), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU CR5, que se recoge en el anexo XIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencia de la columna

Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Explicación

a - o

Ponderación de riesgo

Las entidades divulgarán información sobre la asignación de las ponderaciones de riesgo dentro de la correspondiente categoría de exposición con arreglo a la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 2, sección 2, del RRC.

p

Total

Importe total de las exposiciones en balance y fuera de balance incluidas en el ámbito de consolidación prudencial:

— tras los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico con arreglo al artículo 110 del RRC, los ajustes de valoración adicionales con arreglo a los artículos 34 y 105 del RRC, las deducciones con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra m), del RRC, y otras reducciones de fondos propios y fallidos (según lo definido en el marco contable aplicable), en lo que respecta a las exposiciones en balance, de conformidad con el artículo 111 del RRC;

— tras la reducción de los ajustes por riesgo de crédito específico y las deducciones con arreglo al artículo 36, apartado 1, letra m), del RRC, en lo que respecta a las exposiciones fuera de balance, de conformidad con el artículo 111 del RRC;

— tras i) la aplicación de los factores de conversión especificados en el mismo artículo y ii) la aplicación de las técnicas de reducción del riesgo de crédito especificadas en la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 4, del RRC, en lo que respecta tanto a las exposiciones en balance como a las exposiciones fuera de balance.

q

Del cual: sin calificar

Exposiciones para las que no se dispone de una evaluación crediticia de una ECAI designada y a las que se aplican ponderaciones de riesgo específicas en función de la categoría de exposición a la que pertenezcan, tal como se especifica en los artículos 113 a 134 del RRC.


Número de fila

Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Explicación

1 - 16

Categorías de exposición definidas en el artículo 112 del RRC.

No se incluyen las exposiciones asignadas a la categoría «elementos correspondientes a posiciones de titulización» establecida en el artículo 112, letra m), del RRC.

16

La categoría de exposición «otros elementos» se refiere:

— a activos sujetos a una ponderación de riesgo específica con arreglo a la parte tercera, título II, capítulo 4, artículo 134, del RRC;

— a activos no deducidos en aplicación del artículo 39 del RRC (impuestos abonados por exceso, pérdidas fiscales retrotraídas y activos por impuestos diferidos que no dependen de rendimientos futuros), del artículo 41 del RRC (activos de fondos de pensiones de prestaciones definidas), de los artículos 46 y 469 del RRC (inversiones no significativas en instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 ordinario de entes del sector financiero), de los artículos 49 y 471 del RRC (participaciones en empresas aseguradoras independientemente de que estén o no supervisadas con arreglo a la Directiva sobre conglomerados), de los artículos 60 y 475 del RRC (inversiones directas, indirectas y sintéticas, significativas y no significativas, en instrumentos de capital de nivel 1 adicional de entes del sector financiero), de los artículos 70 y 477 del RRC (tenencias directas, indirectas y sintéticas, significativas y no significativas, de instrumentos de capital de nivel 2 de entes del sector financiero), cuando no se asignen a otras categorías de exposición, y a participaciones cualificadas fuera del sector financiero cuando no reciban una ponderación de riesgo del 1 250  % [en aplicación de la parte segunda, título I, capítulo 1, artículo 36, letra k), del RRC].

ANNEX XXI




ANNEX XXI

Table EU CRE – Qualitative disclosure requirements related to IRB approach

Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information



Legal basis

Row number

Free format

Article 452 (a) CRR

(a)

The competent authority's permission of the approach or approved transition

Article 452 (c) CRR

(b)

(c)  The control mechanisms for rating systems at the different stages of model development, controls and changes, which shall include information on:

(i)  the relationship between the risk management function and the internal audit function;

(ii)  the rating system review;

(iii)  procedure to ensure the independence of the function in charge of reviewing the models from the functions responsible for the development of the models;

(iv)  the procedure to ensure the accountability of the functions in charge of developing and reviewing the models

Article 452 (d) CRR

(c)

The role of the functions involved in the development, approval and subsequent changes of the credit risk models;

Article 452 (e) CRR

(d)

The scope and main content of the reporting related to credit risk models;

Article 452 (f) CRR

(e)

A description of the internal ratings process by exposure class, including the number of key models used with respect to each portfolio and a brief discussion of the main differences between the models within the same portfolio, covering:

(i)  the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of PD, which shall include information on how PDs are estimated for low default portfolios, whether there are regulatory floors and the drivers for differences observed between PD and actual default rates at least for the last three periods;

(ii)  where applicable, the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of LGD, such as methods to calculate downturn LGD, how LGDs are estimated for low default portfolio and the time lapse between the default event and the closure of the exposure;

(iii)  where applicable, the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of credit conversion factors, including assumptions employed in the derivation of those variables.

Template EU CR6 – IRB approach – Credit risk exposures by exposure class and PD range



A-IRB

PD range

On-balance sheet exposures

Off-balance-sheet exposures pre-CCF

Exposure weighted average CCF

Exposure post CCF and post CRM

Exposure weighted average PD (%)

Number of obligors

Exposure weighted average LGD (%)

Exposure weighted average maturity (years)

Risk weighted exposure amount after supporting factors

Density of risk weighted exposure amount

Expected loss amount

Value adjust-ments and provisions

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

Exposure class X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,00 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,00 to < 0,10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,10 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,15 to < 0,25

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,25 to < 0,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,50 to < 0,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,75 to < 2,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,75 to < 1,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,75 to < 2,5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,50 to < 10,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,5 to < 5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5 to < 10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10 to < 20

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

20 to < 30

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

30,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

100,00 (Default)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Subtotal (exposure class)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total (all exposures classes)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



F-IRB

PD range

On-balance sheet exposures

Off-balance-sheet exposures pre-CCF

Exposure weighted average CCF

Exposure post CCF and post CRM

Exposure weighted average PD (%)

Number of obligors

Exposure weighted average LGD (%)

Exposure weighted average maturity (years)

Risk weighted exposure amount after supporting factors

Density of risk weighted exposure amount

Expected loss amount

Value adjust-ments and provisions

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

Exposure class X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,00 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,00 to < 0,10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,10 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,15 to < 0,25

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,25 to < 0,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,50 to < 0,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,75 to < 2,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,75 to < 1,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,75 to < 2,5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,50 to < 10,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,5 to < 5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5 to < 10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10 to < 20

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

20 to < 30

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

30,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

100,00 (Default)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Subtotal (exposure class)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total (all exposures classes)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CR6-A – Scope of the use of IRB and SA approaches



 

Exposure value as defined in Article 166 CRR for exposrues subject to IRB approach

Total exposure value for exposures subject to the Standardised approach and to the IRB approach

Percentage of total exposure value subject to the permanent partial use of the SA (%)

Percentage of total exposure value subject to IRB Approach (%)

Percentage of total exposurevalue subject to a roll-out plan (%)

a

b

c

d

e

1

Central governments or central banks

 

 

 

 

 

1,1

Of which Regional governments or local authorities

 

 

 

 

 

1,2

Of which Public sector entities

 

 

 

 

 

2

Institutions

 

 

 

 

 

3

Corporates

 

 

 

 

 

3,1

Of which Corporates - Specialised lending, excluding slotting approach

 

 

 

 

 

3,2

Of which Corporates - Specialised lending under slotting approach

 

 

 

 

 

4

Retail

 

 

 

 

 

4,1

of which Retail – Secured by real estate SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

4,2

of which Retail – Secured by real estate non-SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

4,3

of which Retail – Qualifying revolving

 

 

 

 

 

4,4

of which Retail – Other SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

4,5

of which Retail – Other non-SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

5

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

6

Other non-credit obligation assets

 

 

 

 

 

7

Total

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CR7 – IRB approach – Effect on the RWEAs of credit derivatives used as CRM techniques



 

Pre-credit derivatives risk weighted exposure amount

Actual risk weighted exposure amount

a

b

1

Exposures under F-IRB

 

 

2

Central governments and central banks

 

 

3

Institutions

 

 

4

Corporates

 

 

4,1

of which Corporates - SMEs

 

 

4,2

of which Corporates - Specialised lending

 

 

5

Exposures under A-IRB

 

 

6

Central governments and central banks

 

 

7

Institutions

 

 

8

Corporates

 

 

8,1

of which Corporates - SMEs

 

 

8,2

of which Corporates - Specialised lending

 

 

9

Retail

 

 

9,1

of which Retail – SMEs - Secured by immovable property collateral

 

 

9,2

of which Retail – non-SMEs - Secured by immovable property collateral

 

 

9,3

of which Retail – Qualifying revolving

 

 

9,4

of which Retail – SMEs - Other

 

 

9,5

of which Retail – Non-SMEs- Other

 

 

10

TOTAL (including F-IRB exposures and A-IRB exposures)

 

 

Template EU CR7-A – IRB approach – Disclosure of the extent of the use of CRM techniques



A-IRB

Total exposures

Credit risk Mitigation techniques

Credit risk Mitigation methods in the calculation of RWEAs

Funded credit Protection (FCP)

Unfunded credit Protection (UFCP)

RWEA without substitution effects

(reduction effects only)

RWEA with substitution effects

(both reduction and sustitution effects)

Part of exposures covered by Financial Collaterals (%)

Part of exposures covered by Other eligible collaterals (%)

 

Part of exposures covered by Other funded credit protection (%)

 

Part of exposures covered by Guarantees (%)

Part of exposures covered by Credit Derivatives (%)

Part of exposures covered by Immovable property Collaterals (%)

Part of exposures covered by Receivables (%)

Part of exposures covered by Other physical collateral (%)

Part of exposures covered by Cash on deposit (%)

Part of exposures covered by Life insurance policies (%)

Part of exposures covered by Instruments held by a third party (%)

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

1

Central governments and central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,1

Of which Corporates – SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,2

Of which Corporates – Specialised lending

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,3

Of which Corporates – Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Retail

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4,1

Of which Retail – Immovable property SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4,2

Of which Retail – Immovable property non-SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4,3

Of which Retail – Qualifying revolving

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4,4

Of which Retail – Other SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4,5

Of which Retail – Other non-SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



F-IRB

Total exposures

Credit risk Mitigation techniques

Credit risk Mitigation methods in the calculation of RWEAs

Funded credit Protection (FCP)

Unfunded credit Protection (UFCP)

RWEA without substitution effects

(reduction effects only)

RWEA with substitution effects

(both reduction and sustitution effects)

Part of exposures covered by Financial Collaterals (%)

Part of exposures covered by Other eligible collaterals (%)

 

Part of exposures covered by Other funded credit protection (%)

 

Part of exposures covered by Guarantees (%)

Part of exposures covered by Credit Derivatives (%)

Part of exposures covered by Immovable property Collaterals (%)

Part of exposures covered by Receivables (%)

Part of exposures covered by Other physical collateral (%)

Part of exposures covered by Cash on deposit (%)

Part of exposures covered by Life insurance policies (%)

Part of exposures covered by Instruments held by a third party (%)

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

1

Central governments and central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,1

Of which Corporates – SMEs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,2

Of which Corporates – Specialised lending

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,3

Of which Corporates – Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CR8 – RWEA flow statements of credit risk exposures under the IRB approach



 

Risk weighted exposure amount

a

1

Risk weighted exposure amount as at the end of the previous reporting period

 

2

Asset size (+/–)

 

3

Asset quality (+/–)

 

4

Model updates (+/–)

 

5

Methodology and policy (+/–)

 

6

Acquisitions and disposals (+/–)

 

7

Foreign exchange movements (+/–)

 

8

Other (+/–)

 

9

Risk weighted exposure amount as at the end of the reporting period

 

Template CR9 –IRB approach – Back-testing of PD per exposure class (fixed PD scale)

A-IRB



Exposure class

PD range

Number of obligors at the end of previous year

Observed average default rate (%)

Exposures weighted average PD (%)

Average PD (%)

Average historical annual default rate (%)

 

Of which number of obligors which defaulted in the year

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

 

0,00 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,00 to < 0,10

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,10 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,15 to < 0,25

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,25 to < 0,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,50 to < 0,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,75 to < 2,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,75 to < 1,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,75 to < 2,5

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,50 to < 10,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,5 to < 5

 

 

 

 

 

 

5 to < 10

 

 

 

 

 

 

10,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

10 to < 20

 

 

 

 

 

 

20 to < 30

 

 

 

 

 

 

30,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

100,00 (Default)

 

 

 

 

 

 

F-IRB



Exposure class

PD range

Number of obligors in the end of previous year

Observed average default rate (%)

Exposure weighted average PD (%)

Average PD (%)

Average historical annual default rate (%)

 

Of which number of obligors which defaulted in the year

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

 

0,00 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,00 to < 0,10

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,10 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,15 to < 0,25

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,25 to < 0,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,50 to < 0,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,75 to < 2,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

0,75 to < 1,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,75 to < 2,5

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,50 to < 10,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,5 to < 5

 

 

 

 

 

 

5 to < 10

 

 

 

 

 

 

10,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

10 to < 20

 

 

 

 

 

 

20 to < 30

 

 

 

 

 

 

30,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

100,00 (Default)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template CR9.1 –IRB approach – Back-testing of PD per exposure class (only for PD estimates according to point (f) of Article 180(1) CRR)

A-IRB



Exposure class

PD range

External rating equivalent

Number of obligors at the end of previous year

Observed average default rate (%)

Average PD (%)

Average historical annual default rate (%)

 

Of which number of obligors which defaulted in the year

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

F-IRB



Exposure class

PD range

External rating equivalent

Number of obligors in the end of previous year

Observed average default rate (%)

Average PD (%)

Average historical annual default rate (%)

 

Of which number of obligors which defaulted in the year

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX XXII Disclosure of the use of the IRB Approach to credit risk (excluding counterparty credit risk)




ANNEX XXII

Disclosure of the use of the IRB Approach to credit risk (excluding counterparty credit risk)

Table EU CRE – Qualitative disclosure requirements related to IRB Approach. Flexible table.

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to of points (a) to (f) of Article 452 of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 19 ) (‘CRR’) by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete table EU CRE which is presented in Annex XXI to this Implementing Regulation.



Row reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

(a)

Point (a) of Article 452 CRR

When disclosing information on the scope of the competent authority’s permission of approach or approved transition in accordance with point (a) of Article 452 CRR, institutions shall describe the main characteristics of the rating systems used under the IRB Approach for which the permission has been granted by a competent authority and the types of exposures covered by these rating systems. Institutions shall also describe the types of exposures for which they have permission to use permanent partial use of the Standardised Approach in accordance with Article 150 CRR and which are under their IRB roll-out plans in accordance with Article 148 CRR. The description shall be provided at the group level.

(b)

Point (c)(i)-(iv) of Article 452 CRR

The description of the control mechanisms for rating systems shall cover the estimation of risk parameters, including internal model development and calibration, as well as controls in the application of the models and changes to rating systems.

In accordance with point (c)(i)-(iv) of Article 452 CRR the description of the role of the functions referred to above shall also include:

(i)  the relationships between the risk management function and the internal audit function,

(ii)  the processes and methods for the reviews of the rating systems, including regular reviews of estimates in accordance with point (c) of Article 179(1) CRR and validations,

(iii)  the procedures and organisational arrangements to ensure the independence of the function in charge of reviewing the models (validation function) from the functions responsible for model development and calibration,

(iv)  and the procedure to ensure the accountability of the functions in charge of developing and reviewing the models.

(c)

Point (d) of Article 452 CRR

Institutions shall specify the role of the functions involved in the model development, calibration, approval and subsequent changes of the rating systems.

(d)

Point (e) of Article 452 CRR

Institutions shall disclose the scope and main content of management reporting related to IRB models referred to in Article 189 CRR, as well as addressees and frequency of such reporting.

(e)

Point (f) of Article 452 CRR

The disclosure of the internal rating systems by exposure class shall include the number of key models used in each exposure class with respect different types of exposures, with a brief description of the main differences among the models within the same exposure class. It shall also include a description of the main characteristics of the key approved models, in particular:

(i)  the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of PD, including estimation and validation of PDs for low default portfolios, any applicable regulatory floors, and the drivers for differences observed between PD estimates and actual default rates at least for the last three years;

(ii)  where applicable, the definitions, methods and data for the estimation and validation of LGD, including estimation and validation of downturn LGD, information on how LGDs are estimated for low default portfolio, and the average time lapse between the default event and the closure of the exposure;

(iii)  the definitions, methods and data for estimation and validation of conversion factors, including assumptions employed in the derivation of those estimates.

Template EU CR6 – IRB approach – Credit risk exposures by exposure class and PD range. Fixed template.

2. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (g)(i)-(v) of Article 452 CRR on the main parameters used for the calculation of capital requirements for IRB approach by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR6 which is presented in Annex XXI to this Implementing Regulation. Information disclosed in this template shall not include data on specialised lending referred to in Article 153(4) CRR. This template excludes counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposures (Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR), securitisation exposures and equity exposures.



Column reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

a

PD range

This is a fixed PD range which shall not be altered.

In case that the data on defaulted exposures in accordance with Article 178 CRR is further broken down in accordance with possible definitions for categories of defaulted exposures, the definitions and amounts for categories of defaulted exposures shall be explained in an accompanying narrative.

Exposures shall be allocated to an appropriate bucket of the fixed PD range based on the PD estimated for each obligor assigned to this exposure class (without considering any substitution effects due to CRM). All defaulted exposures shall be included in the bucket representing PD of 100 %.

b

On-balance sheet exposures

Exposure value calculated in accordance with Article 166(1) to (7) CRR without taking into account any credit risk adjustments and any conversion factors

c

Off-balance sheet exposures pre-conversion factors (CCF)

Exposure value in accordance with Article 166(1) to (7) CRR, without taking into account any credit risk adjustments and any conversion factors, neither own estimates nor conversion factors specified in Article 166(8) CRR, or any percentages specified in Article 166(10) CRR

Off balance sheet exposures shall comprise all committed but undrawn amounts and all off-balance sheet items, as listed in Annex I to CRR.

d

Exposure weighted average CCF

For all exposures included in each bucket of the fixed PD scale, the average conversion factor used by institutions in their calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, weighted by the off-balance sheet exposure pre-CCF as in column c of this template

e

Exposure value post CCF and post CRM

Exposure value in accordance with Article 166 CRR

This column includes the sum of exposure value of on-balance sheet exposures and off-balance sheet exposures post conversion factors and percentages in accordance with Article 166(8) to (10) CRR.

f

Exposure weighted average PD (%)

For all exposures included in each bucket of the fixed PD range, the average PD estimate of each obligor, weighted by the exposure value post-CCF and CRM as in column e of this template

g

Number of obligors

The number of legal entities or obligors allocated to each bucket of the fixed PD range, which were separately rated, regardless of the number of different loans or exposures granted

Joint obligors shall be treated the same as for the purpose of PD calibration. Where different exposures to the same obligor are separately rated, they shall be counted separately. Such situation may take place within the retail exposure class if the definition of default is applied at the level of individual credit facility in accordance with the last sentence of Article 178(1) CRR, or if separate exposures to the same obligor are assigned to different obligor grades in accordance with the second sentence of point (e) of Article 172(1) CRR in other exposure classes.

h

Exposure weighted average LGD (%)

For all exposures included in each bucket of the fixed PD range, the average of the LGD estimates for each exposure, weighted by the exposure value post-CCF and post-CRM as in column e of this template

The disclosed LGD shall correspond to the final LGD estimate used in the calculation of risk weighted amounts obtained after considering any CRM effects and downturn conditions where relevant. For retail exposures secured by immovable properties the disclosed LGD shall take into account the floors specified in Article 164(4) CRR.

In the case of exposures subject to the double default treatment the LGD to be disclosed shall correspond to the one selected in accordance with Article 161 (4) CRR.

For defaulted exposures under A-IRB Approach, provisions laid down in point (h) of Article 181(1) CRR shall be considered. The disclosed LGD shall correspond to the estimate of LGD in-default in accordance with the applicable estimation methodologies.

i

Exposure-weighted average maturity (years)

For all exposures included in each bucket of the fixed PD range, the average maturity of each exposure, weighted by the exposure value post-CCF as in column e of this template

The disclosed value of maturity reflects Article 162 CRR.

The average maturity shall be disclosed in years.

This data shall not be disclosed for the exposure values for which the maturity is not an element in the calculation of risk weighted exposure amounts in accordance with Chapter 3 of Title II of Part Three CRR. This means that this column shall not be filled in for the exposure class ‘retail’.

j

Risk weighted exposure amount after supporting factors

For exposures to central governments and central banks, institutions and corporates, the risk weighted exposure amount calculated in accordance with Article 153(1) to (4) CRR; for retail exposures, the risk weighted exposure amount calculated in accordance with Article 154 CRR

The SME and infrastructure supporting factors in accordance with Article 501 and Article 501a CRR shall be taken into account.

k

Density of risk weighted exposure amounts

Ratio between the sum of risk weighted exposure amounts after supporting factors as in column j of this template and the exposure value as in column e of this template

l

Expected loss amount

The expected loss amount calculated in accordance with Article 158 CRR

The expected loss amount to be disclosed shall be based on the actual risk parameters used in the internal rating system approved by the respective competent authority.

m

Value adjustments and provisions

Specific and general credit risk adjustments in accordance with the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 183/2014 (1), additional value adjustments in accordance with Articles 34 and 110 CRR, as well as other own funds reductions related to the exposures allocated to each bucket on the fixed PD range

These value adjustments and provisions shall be those considered for the implementation of Article 159 CRR.

General provisions shall be disclosed by assigning the amount pro rata – in accordance with the expected loss of different obligor grades.

(1)   

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) No 183/2014 of 20 December 2013 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council on prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms, with regard to regulatory technical standards for specifying the calculation of specific and general credit risk adjustments (OJ L 57, 27.2.2014, p. 3).



Row reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

Exposure class X

Where institutions have received permission to use own LGDs and convertion factors for the calculation of risk-weighted exposure amounts, they shall disclose the information required in this template separately for the exposure classes subject to that permission (A-IRB). For the exposure classes for which the institution does not have permission to use own estimates of LGD and conversion factors (F-IRB) the institution shall disclose the information on the relevant exposures separately using the F-IRB template.

A-IRB

Exposure class X

For each exposure class listed in Article 147(2) CRR, with the exceptions indicated above, institutions shall disclose a separate template, with a further breakdown for the following exposure classes:

— within the exposure class ‘exposures to corporates’ (point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR), breakdown into:

— 

a.exposures to corporates – SME, in accordance with internal classification of exposures to corporates based on the risk management policies;

b.exposures to corporates – specialised lending, in accordance with Article 147(8) CRR;

c.exposures to corporates – other.

— within the exposure class ‘retail exposures’ (point (d) of Article 147(2) and Article 147(5) CRR), breakdown into:

— 

a.Retail exposures – SME secured by immovable property collateral (point (d) of Article 147 (2) CRR in conjunction with Article 154(2) and (3) CRR);

b.Retail exposures – SME other;

c.Retail exposures – non-SME secured by immovable property collateral (point (d) of Article 147 (2) CRR in conjunction with Article 154(3) CRR);

d.Retail exposures – Qualifying revolving (point (d) of Article 147 (2) CRR in conjunction with Article 154(4) CRR);

e.Retail exposures – non-SME other.

The total exposures row shall be included at the end of each separate template per exposure class.

F-IRB

Exposure class X

For each exposure class listed in Article 147(2) CRR, with the exceptions indicated above, institutions shall disclose a separate template, with a further breakdown for the following exposure classes:

— within the exposure class ‘exposures to corporates’ (point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR), breakdown into:

— 

a.exposures to corporates – SME, in accordance with internal classification of exposures to corporates based on the risk management policies;

b.exposures to corporates – specialised lending, in accordance with Article 147(8) CRR;

c.exposures to corporates – other.

Template EU CR6-A – IRB Approach – Scope of the use of IRB and SA approaches. Fixed template

3. Institutions calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts under the IRB Approach to credit risk shall disclose information referred to in point (b) of Article 452 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR6-A which is presented in Annex XXI to this Implememting Regulation.

4. For the purpose of this template, institutions shall allocate their exposures subject to the Standardised Approach laid down in Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three or to the IRB Approach laid down in Chapter 3 of Title II of Part Three to the exposure classes as defined under the IRB Approach. This template excludes counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposures (Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR), and securitisation exposures.

5. Institutions shall explain in the accompanying narrative to the template any material difference between the exposure value as defined in Article 166 for IRB exposures as in column a of the template and the exposure value for the same exposures in accordance with Article 429(4) CRR, as in columns b and d of this template.



Legal references and instructions

Column reference

Explanation

a

Exposure value as defined in Article 166 CRR for exposures subject to IRB approach

Institutions shall disclose in this column the exposure value as defined in Article 166 CRR, only for those exposures under the IRB approach.

b

Total exposure value for exposures subject to the Standardised approach and to the IRB approach

Institutions shall use the exposure value in accordance with Article 429(4) CRR to disclose the total exposure value, including both the exposures under the standardized approach and the exposures under the IRB approach.

c

Percentage of total exposure value subject to the permanent partial use of the SA (%)

Part of exposure for each exposure class subject to the Standardised Approach (exposure subject to the Standardised Approach laid down in Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three, in accordance with the scope of permission for permanent partial use of the Standardised Approach received from a competent authority in accordance with Article 150 CRR), over the total exposure in that exposure class as in column b of this template.

d

Percentage of total exposure value subject to IRB Approach (%)

Part of exposure for each exposure class subject to the IRB approach (exposure subject to the IRB Approach laid down in Chapter 3 of Title II of Part Three over the total exposure in that exposure class), respecting the scope of permission received from a competent authority to use the IRB Approach in accordance with Article 143 CRR, over the total exposure in that exposure class as in column b of this template. This shall include both exposures where institutions have the permission to use their own estimation of LGD and conversion factors or not (F-IRB and A-IRB), including supervisory slotting approach for specialized lending exposures and equity exposures under the simple risk weight approach.

e

Percentage of total exposure value subject to a roll-out plan (%)

Part of exposure for each asset class subject to the sequential implementation of IRB approach pursuant to Article 148 CRR, over the total exposure in that exposure class as in column b. This shall include:

— both exposures where institutions plan to apply IRB approach with or without their own estimation of LGD and conversion factors(F-IRB or A-IRB)

— Immaterial equity exposures not included in columns c and d of this template

— exposures already under F-IRB where an institution is planning to apply A-IRB in the future.

— specialised lending exposures under the supervisory slotting approach not included in column d of this template.



Row number

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

Exposure classes

Institutions shall include the information in template CR 6-A by exposure classes, in accordance with the breakdown of exposure classes included in the rows of the template.

Template EU CR7 – IRB approach – Effect on the Risk Weighted Exposure amounts of credit derivatives used as CRM techniques. Fixed template.

6. Institutions shall disclose information referred to in point (j) of Article 453 CRR by following instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR7 as presented in Annex XXI to this Implementing Regulation. Institutions shall supplement the template with a narrative to explain the effect of credit derivatives on risk weighted exposure amounts. This template excludes counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposures (Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR ), securitisation exposures, other non-credit obligation assets and equity exposures.



Column reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

a

Pre-credit derivatives risk weighted exposure amount

Hypothetical risk weighted exposure amount calculated the actual RWEA assuming only the absence of recognition of the credit derivative as a CRM technique as specified in Article 204 CRR. The amounts shall be presented in the exposure classes relevant for the exposures to the original obligor.

b

Actual risk weighted exposure amount

Risk weighted exposure amount calculated taking into account the impact of the credit derivatives. Where institutions substitute the risk weight or the risk parameters of the obligor with the risk weight or risk parameters of the protection provider, the risk weighted exposure amounts shall be presented in the exposure class relevant for direct exposures to the protection provider.



Row reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

1 to 9

Institutions shall include the breakdown of pre-credit derivatives risk weighted exposure amount and actual risk weighted exposure by exposure class, in accordance with the exposure classes listed in Article 147 CRR with further breakdown as included in the template, and separately for exposures under F-IRB approach and exposures under A-IRB approach. Institutions shall disclose under rows 1 and 6 of this template the subtotals for F-IRB exposures and for A-IRB exposures.

Institutions shall disclose further breakdown for exposure class ‘exposures to corporates’ (point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR) in accordance with the below:

a.exposures to corporates – SME, in accordance with internal classification of exposures to corporates based on the risk management policies;

b.exposures to corporates – specialised lending, in accordance with Article 147(8) CRR, excluding specialised lending exposures under the slotting approach;

c.exposures to corporates – other.

Institutions shall disclose further breakdown for exposure class ‘retail exposures’ (point (d) of Article 147(2) and Article 147(5) CRR) Institutions shall disclose further breakdown for:

a.Retail exposures – SME secured by immovable property collateral (in conjunction with Article 154(2) and (3) CRR);

b.Retail exposures – non-SME secured by immovable property collateral (in conjunction with Article 154(3) CRR);

c.Retail exposures – Qualifying revolving (in conjunction with Article 154(4) CRR);

d.Retail exposures – SME other;

e.Retail exposures – non-SME other.

10

TOTAL EXPOSURES (including F-IRB exposures and A-IRB exposures)

Total pre-credit derivatives risk weighted exposure amount, and total actual risk weighted exposure amount for all IRB exposures (including F-IRB and A-IRB)

Template EU CR7-A IRB approach – Disclosure of the extent of the use of CRM techniques

7. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (g) of Article 453 CRR separately for exposures under A-IRB and F-IRB by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR7-A which is presented in Annex XXI to this Implementing Regulation. In case an item of funded credit protection applies to more than one exposure, the sum of the exposures considered secured by it may not exceed the value of the item of the credit protection.



Column reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

a

Total exposures

Exposure value (post conversion factors) in accordance with Articles 166 to 167 CRR

Exposures shall be disclosed in accordance with the exposure class applicable to the obligor, without taking into account any substitution effects due to the existence of a guarantee.

Institutions applying the simple risk weight approach shall also consider the offsetting provisions referred to in Article 155(2) CRR.

b

FCP - Part of exposures covered by financial collateral (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by financial collateral over total exposures as in column a of this template.

Financial collateral, including cash collateral, debt securities, and gold, as listed in Articles 197 and 198 CRR, shall be included in the numerator where all the requirements laid down in Article 207 (2) to (4) CRR are met. The value of collateral disclosed shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure.

When own estimates of LGD are used: financial collateral taken into account in the LGD estimates in accordance with points (e) and (f) of Article 181 (1) CRR. The amount to be disclosed shall be the estimated market value of the collateral.

c

FCP - Part of exposures covered by other eligible collaterals (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by other eligible collateral over total exposures as in column a of this template

The values disclosed in this column shall be the sum of the values in columns d to f of this template.

Where own estimates of LGD are not used: Article 199 (1) to (8) CRR and Article 229 CRR.

Where own estimates of LGD are used: other collateral taken into account in the LGD estimates in accordance with points (e) and (f) of Article 181 (1) CRR.

d

FCP - Part of exposures covered by immovable property collaterals (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by immovable property collateral including leasing in accordance with Article 199(7) CRR over total exposures as in column a of this template

Immovable property collateral shall be included in the numerator where they meet all the eligibility requirements laid down in Article 208(2) to (5) CRR.

Leasing on immovable property shall be included in the numerator where they meet all the eligibility requirements laid down in Article 211 CRR. The disclosed value of collateral shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure.

e

Part of exposures covered by Receivables (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by receivables in accordance with Article 199 (5) CRR over total exposures as in column a of this template

Receivables shall be included in the numerator where they meet all the eligibility requirements laid down in Article 209 CRR. The disclosed value of collateral shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure

f

Part of exposures covered by Other physical collateral (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by other physical collateral including leasing of those collaterals in accordance with Article 199 (6) and (8) CRR over total exposures as in column a of this template

Other physical collateral shall be included in the numerator where they meet all the eligibility requirements laid down in Article 210 CRR. The disclosed value of collateral shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure.

g

FCP - Part of exposures covered by Other funded credit protection (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by other FCP over total exposures as in column a

The values in this column shall be the sum of the values in columns h, i and j of this template.

h

FCP - Part of exposures covered by cash on deposit (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by cash or cash assimilated instruments held by third party institution over total exposures as in column a of this template; in accordance with point (a) of Article 200 CRR, other funded credit protection includes cash on deposit with, or cash assimilated instruments held by third party institution in a non-custodial arrangement and pledged to the lending institution.

The disclosed value of collateral shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure.

i

FCP - Part of exposures covered by life insurance policies (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by life insurance policies over total exposures as in column a of this template

In accordance with point (b) of Article 200 CRR, other funded credit protection includes life insurance policies pledged to the lending institution. The disclosed value of collateral shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure.

j

FCP - Part of exposures covered by instrument held by a third party (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by collateral in the form of instruments held by a third party over total exposures as in column a of this template; part of exposures covered by instruments issued by a third party over total exposures

In accordance with point (c) of Article 200 CRR, the disclosed value shall include instruments issued by a third party institution which will be repurchased by that institution on request. The value of collateral shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure. The percentage shall exclude those exposures covered by instruments held by a third party where, following Article 232 (4) CRR institutions treat instruments repurchased on request that are eligible under point (c) of Article 200 CRR as a guarantee by the issuing institution.

k

UFCP - Part of exposures covered by guarantees (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by guarantees over total exposures as in column a of this template.

The guarantees shall meet the requirement laid down in Articles 213, 214, 215 and, when relevant, 217 and 232(4) CRR. The value of guarantees shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure.

l

UFCP - Part of exposures covered by credit derivatives (%)

Percentage of exposures secured by credit derivatives over total exposures as in column a of this template.

Credit derivatives include the following:

— credit default swaps

— total returns swaps

— credit linked notes to the extent of their cash funding.

These instruments shall meet the requirement laid down in Articles 204(1) and (2), 213, 216, and when relevant, Article 217 CRR. The value of credit derivatives shall be limited to the value of the exposure at the level of an individual exposure.

m

RWEA without substitution effects (reduction effects only)

The risk-weighted exposure amounts calculated in accordance with points (a) and (f) of Article 92(3) CRR, including any reduction of RWEA due to the existence of funded or unfunded credit protection, including where the PD and LGD or the risk weight is substituted due to the existence of unfunded credit protection. Nevertheless, in all cases, including where substitution approach is used, exposures are disclosed in the original exposure classes applicable to the obligor.

n

RWEA with substitution effects (both reduction and substitution effects)

The risk-weighted exposure amounts calculated in accordance with Article 153 to 157 CRR, including any reduction of RWEA due to the existence of funded or unfunded credit protection. Where the PD and LGD or the risk weight is substituted due to the existence of unfunded credit protection, exposures are disclosed in the exposure class applicable to the protection provider.



Row reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

 

This disclosure shall be made separately for exposures under A-IRB approach, F-IRB approach as well as specialised lending under the slotting approach and equity exposures.

A-IRB

Institutions shall include the information on credit risk mitigation techniques included in this template by exposure class, in accordance with the exposure classes listed in Article 147 CRR with further breakdown for exposure class ‘Corporates’ (point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR) in accordance with the below:

a.exposures to corporates – SME, in accordance with internal classification of exposures to corporates based on the risk management policies;

b.exposures to corporates – specialised lending, in accordance with Article 147(8) CRR excluding specialised lending exposures under the slotting approach;

c.exposures to corporates – other.

Institutions shall disclose further breakdown for exposure class ‘Retail’ (point (d) of Article 147(2) and Article 147(5) CRR) Institutions shall disclose further breakdown for:

a.Retail exposures – SME secured by immovable property collateral (in conjunction with Article 154(2) and (3) CRR);

b.Retail exposures – non-SME secured by immovable property collateral (in conjunction with Article 154(3) CRR);

c.Retail exposures – Qualifying revolving (in conjunction with Article 154(4) CRR);

d.Retail exposures – SME other;

e.Retail exposures – non-SME other.

F-IRB

Institutions shall include the information on credit risk mitigation techniques included in this template by exposure class, in accordance with the exposure classes listed in Article 147 CRR with further breakdown for exposure class

‘Corporates’ (point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR) in accordance with the below:

a.exposures to corporates – SME, in accordance with internal classification of exposures to corporates based on the risk management policies;

b.exposures to corporates – specialised lending, in accordance with Article 147(8) CRR excluding specialised lending exposures under the slotting approach;

c.exposures to corporates – other.

Template EU CR8 – RWEA flow statements of credit risk exposures under the IRB approach. Fixed template.

8. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (h) of Article 438 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR8 which is presented in Annex XXI to this Implementing Regulation. The information in this template excludes counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposures (Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR).

9. Institutions shall disclose the flows of RWEA as the changes between the risk-weighted exposure amounts at the end of the disclosure reference period (as specified below in row 9 of this template) and the weighted exposure amounts at end of the prior disclosure reference period (as specified below in row 1 of this template; in the case of quarterly disclosures, end-of-quarter prior to the quarter of the disclosure reference period). Institutions may complement their Pillar 3 disclosures by disclosing the same information for the three previous quarters.

10. Institutions shall supplement the template with a narrative commentary to explain figures in row 8 of this template, i.e. any other drivers that contribute significantly to RWEA variations.



Column reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

a

Risk weighted exposure amount

Total risk weighted exposure amount for credit risk calculated under the IRB Approach, taking into account supporting factors in accordance with Articles 501 and 501a CRR.



Row number

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

1

Risk weighted exposure amount at the end of the previous disclosure period

2

Asset size (+/-)

Change in the risk weighted exposure amount between the end of the previous disclosure period and the end of the current disclosure period, due to asset size, i.e. organic changes in book size and composition (including the origination of new businesses and maturing loans) but excluding changes in book size due to acquisitions and disposal of entities

Increases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a positive amount and decreases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a negative amount.

3

Asset quality (+/-)

Change in the risk weighted exposure amount between the end of the previous disclosure period and the end of the current disclosure period, due to asset quality, i.e. changes in the assessed quality of the institution’s assets due to changes in borrower risk, such as rating grade migration or similar effects

Increases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a positive amount and decreases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a negative amount.

4

Model updates (+/-)

Change in the risk weighted exposure amount between the end of the previous disclosure period and the end of the current disclosure period, due to model updates, i.e. changes due to implementation of new models, changes in the models, changes in model scope, or any other changes intended to address model weaknesses

Increases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a positive amount and decreases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a negative amount.

5

Methodology and policy (+/-)

Change in the risk weighted exposure amount between the end of the previous disclosure period and the end of the current disclosure period, due to methodology and policy i.e. changes due to methodological changes in calculations driven by regulatory policy changes, including both revisions to existing regulations and new regulations, excluding changes in models, which are included in row 4 of this template

Increases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a positive amount and decreases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a negative amount.

6

Acquisitions and disposals (+/-)

Change in the risk weighted exposure amount between the end of the previous disclosure period and the end of the current disclosure period, due to acquisitions and disposals, i.e. changes in book sizes due to acquisitions and/or disposals

Increases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a positive amount and decreases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a negative amount.

7

Foreign exchange movements (+/-)

Change in the risk weighted exposure amount between the end of the previous disclosure period and the end of the current disclosure period, due to foreign exchange movements, i.e. changes arising from foreign currency translation movements

Increases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a positive amount and decreases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a negative amount.

8

Other (+/-)

Change in the risk weighted exposure amount between the end of the previous disclosure period and the end of the current disclosure period, due to other drivers

This category shall be used to capture changes that cannot be attributed to any other category. Institutions shall further describe any other material drivers of risk weighted amounts movements over the disclosure period included in this row in the accompanying narrative for this template.

Increases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a positive amount and decreases in risk weighted exposure amounts shall be disclosed as a negative amount.

9

Risk weighted exposure amount at the end of the disclosure period

Template EU CR9 – IRB approach – Back-testing of PD per exposure class. Fixed template.

11. Institutions shall disclose information referred to in point (h) of Article 452 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR9 which is presented in Annex XXI to this Implementing Regulation. When an institution makes use of both F-IRB approach and A-IRB approach, it shall disclose two separate sets of templates, one for F-IRB and one for A-IRB, with one template per exposure class in each set.

12. Institution shall consider the models used within each exposure class and they shall explain the percentage of risk weighted exposure amount of the relevant exposure class covered by the models for which back-testing results are disclosed here.

13. Institutions shall explain, in the accompanying narrative, the total number of obligors with short-term contracts at the disclosure date, indicating which exposure classes feature a larger number short-term contract obligors. Short-term contracts refer to contracts whose residual maturity is less than 12 months. Institutions shall also explain if there are overlapping windows in the calculation of long run average PD rates.

14. This template excludes counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposures (Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR), securitisation positions, other non credit-obligation assets and equity exposures.



Column reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

a (A-IRB)

Exposure classes

For each exposure class listed in Article 147(2) CRR, institutions shall disclose a separate template, with a further breakdown for the following exposure classes:

— within the exposure class ‘exposures to corporates’ (point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR), breakdown into:

— 

a.exposures to corporates – SME, in accordance with internal classification of exposures to corporates based on the risk management policies;

b.exposures to corporates – specialised lending, in accordance with Article 147(8) CRR;

c.exposures to corporates – other.

— within the exposure class ‘retail exposures’ (point (d) of Article 147(2) and Article 147(5) CRR), breakdown into:

— 

a.Retail exposures – SME secured by immovable property collateral (point (d) of Article 147 (2) CRR in conjunction with Article 154(2) and (3) CRR);

b.Retail exposures – non-SME secured by immovable property collateral (point (d) of Article 147 (2) CRR in conjunction with Article 154(3) CRR);

c.Retail exposures – Qualifying revolving (point (d) of Article 147 (2) CRR in conjunction with Article 154(4) CRR);

d.Retail exposures – SME other;

e.Retail exposures – non-SME other.

a (F-IRB)

Exposure classes

For each exposure class listed in Article 147(2) CRR, institutions shall disclose a separate template, with a further breakdown for the following exposure classes:

— within the exposure class ‘exposures to corporates’ (point (c) of Article 147(2) CRR), breakdown into:

— 

a.exposures to corporates – SME, in accordance with internal classification of exposures to corporates based on the risk management policies;

b.exposures to corporates – specialised lending, in accordance with Article 147(8) CRR;

c.exposures to corporates – other.

b

PD range

This is a fixed PD range that shall not be altered.

Exposures shall be allocated to an appropriate bucket of the fixed PD range based on the PD estimated at the beginning of the disclosure period for each obligor assigned to this exposure class (without considering any substitution effects due to CRM). All defaulted exposures shall be included in the bucket representing PD of 100 %.

c, d

Number of obligors at the end of the previous year

Institutions shall disclose the following two sets of information:

(i)  the number of obligors at the end of the previous year (column C of this template);

Number of obligors at the end of the year subject to disclosure

In both cases all obligors carrying a credit obligation at the relevant point in time shall be included.

Institutions shall disclose the number of legal entities or obligors allocated to each bucket of the fixed PD range by the end of the previous year, which were separately rated, regardless of the number of different loans or exposures granted.

Joint obligors shall be treated the same as for the purpose of PD calibration. Where different exposures to the same obligor are separately rated, they shall be counted separately. Such situation may take place within the retail exposure class, where the definition of default is applied at the level of individual credit facility in accordance with the last sentence of Article 178(1) CRR. Such situation can also take place if separate exposures to the same obligor are assigned to different obligor grades in accordance with second sentence of point (e) of Article 172(1) CRR in other exposure classes.

(ii)  of which number of obligors that defaulted during the year preceding the disclosure date (column d of this template)

This shall be a subset of column C of this template and represent the number of obligors that defaulted during the year. Defaults shall be determined in accordance with Article 178 CRR. Each defaulted obligor shall be counted only once in the numerator and denominator of the one-year default rate calculation, even if the obligor defaulted more than once during the relevant one-year period.

e

Observed average default rate

Arithmetic average of one-year default rates as defined in point (78) of Article 4(1) CRR, observed within the available dataset.

When calculating one-year default rates institutions shall ensure both of the following:

(a)  that the denominator consists of the number of non-defaulted obligors with any credit obligation observed at the beginning of the one-year observation period (beginning of the previous disclosure period, i.e. beginning of the year prior to the disclosure reference date); in this context a credit obligation refers to both of the following: (i) any on-balance sheet item, including any amount of principal, interest and fees; (ii) any off-balance sheet items, including guarantees issued by the institution as a guarantor.

(b)  that the numerator includes all those obligors considered in the denominator that had at least one default event during the one-year observation period (year prior to the disclosure reference date).

Institutions shall choose an appropriate approach between an approach based on overlapping one-year time windows, and an approach based on non-overlapping one-year time windows, to calculate the observed average default rate.

f

Exposure weighted average PD (%)

Exposure weighted average PD (%) as in column f of template EU CR6; for all exposures included in each bucket of the fixed PD range, the average PD estimate of each obligor, weighted by the exposure value post-CCF and CRM as in column e of template EU CR6

g

Average PD at the disclosure date (%)

Arithmetic average of PD at the beginning of the disclosure period of the obligors that fall within the bucket of the fixed PD range and counted in d (average weighted by the number of obligors)

h

Average historical annual default rate (%)

The simple average of the annual default rate of at least five most recent years (obligors at the beginning of each year that are defaulted during that year/total number of obligors at the beginning of the year)

The institution may use a longer historical period that is consistent with the institution’s actual risk management practices. If the institution uses a longer historical period they shall explain and clarify this in the accompanying narrative to the template.

Template EU CR9.1 – IRB approach– Back-testing of PD per exposure class (only for PD estimates in accordance with point (f) of Article 180(1) CRR

15. In addition to template EU CR9, institutions shall disclose information in template EU CR9.1 in case where they apply point (f) of Article 180(1) CRR for PD estimation and only for PD estimates in accordance with the same Article. Instructions are the same as for template EU CR9, with the following exceptions:

a. 

Under column b of this template institutions shall disclose the PD ranges in accordance with their internal grades that they map to the scale used by the external ECAI, instead of a fixed external PD range;

b. 

Institutions shall disclose one column for each ECAI considered following point (f) of Article 180(1) CRR. Institutions shall include in these columns the external rating to which their internal PD ranges are mapped.

ANNEX XXIII




ANNEX XXIII

Template EU CR10 – Specialised lending and equity exposures under the simple riskweighted approach



Template EU CR10.1

Specialised lending: Project finance (Slotting approach)

Regulatory categories

Remaining maturity

On-balancesheet exposure

Off-balancesheet exposure

Risk weight

Exposure value

Risk weighted exposure amount

Expected loss amount

a

b

c

d

e

f

Category 1

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

50 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

70 %

 

 

 

Category 2

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

70 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

90 %

 

 

 

Category 3

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

115 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

115 %

 

 

 

Category 4

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

250 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

250 %

 

 

 

Category 5

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

—

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

—

 

 

 

Total

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

 

 

 

 



Template EU CR10.2

Specialised lending: Income-producing real estate and high volatility commercial real estate (Slotting approach)

Regulatory categories

Remaining maturity

On-balancesheet exposure

Off-balancesheet exposure

Risk weight

Exposure value

Risk weighted exposure amount

Expected loss amount

a

b

c

d

e

f

Category 1

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

50 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

70 %

 

 

 

Category 2

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

70 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

90 %

 

 

 

Category 3

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

115 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

115 %

 

 

 

Category 4

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

250 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

250 %

 

 

 

Category 5

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

—

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

—

 

 

 

Total

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

 

 

 

 



Template EU CR10.3

Specialised lending: Object finance (Slotting approach)

Regulatory categories

Remaining maturity

On-balancesheet exposure

Off-balancesheet exposure

Risk weight

Exposure value

Risk weighted exposure amount

Expected loss amount

a

b

c

d

e

f

Category 1

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

50 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

70 %

 

 

 

Category 2

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

70 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

90 %

 

 

 

Category 3

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

115 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

115 %

 

 

 

Category 4

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

250 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

250 %

 

 

 

Category 5

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

—

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

—

 

 

 

Total

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

 

 

 

 



Template EU CR10.4

Specialised lending: Commodities finance (Slotting approach)

Regulatory categories

Remaining maturity

On-balancesheet exposure

Off-balancesheet exposure

Risk weight

Exposure value

Risk weighted exposure amount

Expected loss amount

a

b

c

d

e

f

Category 1

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

50 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

70 %

 

 

 

Category 2

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

70 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

90 %

 

 

 

Category 3

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

115 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

115 %

 

 

 

Category 4

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

250 %

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

250 %

 

 

 

Category 5

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

—

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

—

 

 

 

Total

Less than 2.5 years

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equal to or more than 2.5 years

 

 

 

 

 

 



Template EU CR10.5

Equity exposures under the simple risk-weighted approach

Categories

On-balancesheet exposure

Off-balancesheet exposure

Risk weight

Exposure value

Risk weighted exposure amount

Expected loss amount

a

b

c

d

e

f

Private equity exposures

 

 

190 %

 

 

 

Exchange-traded equity exposures

 

 

290 %

 

 

 

Other equity exposures

 

 

370 %

 

 

 

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX XXIV Disclosure of specialised lending and equity exposures under the simple risk weight approach




ANNEX XXIV

Disclosure of specialised lending and equity exposures under the simple risk weight approach

Template EU CR10 – Specialised lending and equity exposures under the simple risk-weighted approach. Fixed template.

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (e) of Article 438 of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 20 ) (‘CRR’) by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CR10 which is presented in Annex XXIII to this Implementing Regulation. Institutions shall disclose:

a. 

information on the following types of specialised lending exposures referred to in Table 1 of Article 153(5):

— 
‘Project finance’ in template EU CR10.1;
— 
‘Income-producing real estate and high volatility commercial real estate’ in template EU CR10.2;
— 
‘Object finance’ in template EU CR10.3;
— 
‘Commodities finance’ in template EU CR 10.4;
b. 

information on equity exposures under the simple risk-weighted approach in template EU CR10.5.



Column reference

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

a

On-balance-sheet exposures

Institutions shall disclose the exposure value of on-balance sheet exposures in accordance with Article 166(1) to (7) and Article 167(1) CRR.

b

Off-balance-sheet exposure

Institutions shall disclose the exposure value of off-balance sheet exposures in accordance with Articles 166 and 167 (2) CRR without taking into account any conversion factors specified in Article 166(8) or (9) CRR, or any percentages specified in Article 166(10) CRR.

Off balance sheet exposures shall comprise all committed but undrawn amounts and all off-balance sheet items, as listed in Annex I CRR.

c

Risk weight

This is a fixed column. It shall not be altered.

This column has been specified in accordance with Article 153(5) CRR for templates EU CR10.1 to EU CR10.4 and in accordance with Article 155(2) CRR for template EU CR10.5.

d

Exposure value

Exposure value in accordance with Article 166 or Article 167 CRR

This column shall include the sum of exposure value of on-balance sheet exposures and exposure value of off-balance sheet exposures post conversion factors and percentages in accordance with Article 166(8) to (10) CRR.

e (templates EU CR10.1 to EU CR10.4)

Risk-weighted exposure amount (specialised lending exposures under the slotting approach)

The risk-weighted exposure amount calculated in accordance with Article 153 (5) CRR, after supporting factors in accordance with Article 501 and 501a CRR, where relevant

e (template EU CR10.5)

Risk-weighted exposure amount (equity exposures under the simple risk weight approach)

The risk-weighted exposure amount calculated in accordance with Article 155(2) CRR

f (templates EU CR10.1 to EU CR10.4)

Expected loss amount (specialised lending exposures under the slotting approach)

Amount of expected loss calculated in accordance with Article 158 (6) CRR

f (template EU CR10.5)

Expected loss amount (equity exposures under the simple risk weight approach)

Amount of expected loss calculated in accordance with Article 158(7) CRR



Row number

Legal references and instructions

Explanation

Regulatory category

Templates EU CR10.1 – EU CR10.4

Regulatory categories applicable to specialised lending under the slotting approach for each class of specialised lending exposures; as specified in Article 153(5) CRR and in the final draft RTS on slotting approach

Categories

Template EU CR10.5

Regulatory categories applicable to equities under the simple risk-weight approach in accordance with Article 155(2) CRR

ANNEX XXV




ANNEX XXV

Table EU CCRA – Qualitative disclosure related to CCR



 

Flexible format disclosure

(a)

Article 439 (a) CRR

Description of the methodology used to assign internal capital and credit limits for counterparty credit exposures, including the methods to assign those limits to exposures to central counterparties

 

(b)

Article 439 (b) CRR

Description of policies related to guarantees and other credit risk mitigants, such as the policies for securing collateral and establishing credit reserves

 

(c)

Article 439 (c) CRR

Description of policies with respect to Wrong-Way risk as defined in Article 291 of the CRR

 

(d)

Article 431 (3) and (4) CRR

Any other risk management objectives and relevant policies related to CCR

 

(e)

Article 439 (d) CRR

The amount of collateral the institution would have to provide if its credit rating was downgraded

 

Template EU CCR1 – Analysis of CCR exposure by approach

Fixed format



 

 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

 

 

Replacement cost (RC)

Potential future exposure (PFE)

EEPE

Alpha used for computing regulatory exposure value

Exposure value pre-CRM

Exposure value post-CRM

Exposure value

RWEA

EU-1

EU - Original Exposure Method (for derivatives)

 

 

 

1,4

 

 

 

 

EU-2

EU - Simplified SA-CCR (for derivatives)

 

 

 

1,4

 

 

 

 

1

SA-CCR (for derivatives)

 

 

 

1,4

 

 

 

 

2

IMM (for derivatives and SFTs)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2a

Of which securities financing transactions netting sets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2b

Of which derivatives and long settlement transactions netting sets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2c

Of which from contractual cross-product netting sets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Financial collateral simple method (for SFTs)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Financial collateral comprehensive method (for SFTs)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

VaR for SFTs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CCR2 – Transactions subject to own funds requirements for CVA risk

Fixed format



 

a

b

Exposure value

RWEA

1

Total transactions subject to the Advanced method

 

 

2

(i)  VaR component (including the 3× multiplier)

 

 

3

(ii)  stressed VaR component (including the 3× multiplier)

 

 

4

Transactions subject to the Standardised method

 

 

EU-4

Transactions subject to the Alternative approach (Based on the Original Exposure Method)

 

 

5

Total transactions subject to own funds requirements for CVA risk

 

 

Template EU CCR3 – Standardised approach – CCR exposures by regulatory exposure class and risk weights

Fixed format



 

Exposure classes

Risk weight

 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

0 %

2 %

4 %

10 %

20 %

50 %

70 %

75 %

100 %

150 %

Others

Total exposure value

1

Central governments or central banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Regional government or local authorities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Public sector entities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Multilateral development banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

International organisations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Retail

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Institutions and corporates with a short-term credit assessment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

Other items

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

Total exposure value

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CCR4 – IRB approach – CCR exposures by exposure class and PD scale

Fixed format



 

 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

PD scale

Exposure value

Exposure weighted average PD (%)

Number of obligors

Exposure weighted average LGD (%)

Exposure weighted average maturity (years)

RWEA

Density of risk weighted exposure amounts

1 … x

Exposure class X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

0,00 to < 0,15

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

0,15 to < 0,25

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

0,25 to < 0,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

 

0,50 to < 0,75

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

 

0,75 to < 2,50

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

 

2,50 to < 10,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

 

10,00 to < 100,00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

 

100,00 (Default)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

x

 

Sub-total (Exposure class X)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

y

Total (all CCR relevant exposure classes)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CCR5 – Composition of collateral for CCR exposures

Fixed columns



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

Collateral used in derivative transactions

Collateral used in SFTs

 

Collateral type

Fair value of collateral received

Fair value of posted collateral

Fair value of collateral received

Fair value of posted collateral

Segregated

Unsegregated

Segregated

Unsegregated

Segregated

Unsegregated

Segregated

Unsegregated

1

Cash – domestic currency

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Cash – other currencies

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Domestic sovereign debt

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Other sovereign debt

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Government agency debt

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Corporate bonds

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Equity securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Other collateral

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU CCR6 – Credit derivatives exposures

Fixed



 

a

b

Protection bought

Protection sold

Notionals

 

 

1

Single-name credit default swaps

 

 

2

Index credit default swaps

 

 

3

Total return swaps

 

 

4

Credit options

 

 

5

Other credit derivatives

 

 

6

Total notionals

 

 

Fair values

 

 

7

Positive fair value (asset)

 

 

8

Negative fair value (liability)

 

 

Template EU CCR7 – RWEA flow statements of CCR exposures under the IMM

Fixed format



 

a

RWEA

1

RWEA as at the end of the previous reporting period

 

2

Asset size

 

3

Credit quality of counterparties

 

4

Model updates (IMM only)

 

5

Methodology and policy (IMM only)

 

6

Acquisitions and disposals

 

7

Foreign exchange movements

 

8

Other

 

9

RWEA as at the end of the current reporting period

 

Template EU CCR8 – Exposures to CCPs

Fixed format



 

a

b

Exposure value

RWEA

1

Exposures to QCCPs (total)

 

 

2

Exposures for trades at QCCPs (excluding initial margin and default fund contributions); of which

 

 

3

(i)  OTC derivatives

 

 

4

(ii)  Exchange-traded derivatives

 

 

5

(iii)  SFTs

 

 

6

(iv)  Netting sets where cross-product netting has been approved

 

 

7

Segregated initial margin

 

 

8

Non-segregated initial margin

 

 

9

Prefunded default fund contributions

 

 

10

Unfunded default fund contributions

 

 

11

Exposures to non-QCCPs (total)

 

 

12

Exposures for trades at non-QCCPs (excluding initial margin and default fund contributions); of which

 

 

13

(i)  OTC derivatives

 

 

14

(ii)  Exchange-traded derivatives

 

 

15

(iii)  SFTs

 

 

16

(iv)  Netting sets where cross-product netting has been approved

 

 

17

Segregated initial margin

 

 

18

Non-segregated initial margin

 

 

19

Prefunded default fund contributions

 

 

20

Unfunded default fund contributions

 

 

ANNEX XXVI




ANNEX XXVI

Counterparty credit risk disclosure tables and templates: Instructions

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to Article 439 CRR regarding their exposure to counterparty credit risk as referred to in Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 21 ) (‘CRR’) by following the instructions provided in this Annex to complete tables and templates which are presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

Table EU CCRA - Qualitative disclosure related to counterparty credit risk (CCR): Free format text boxes

2. Institutions shall disclose information referred to in points (a) to (d) of Article 439 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete table EU CCRA which is presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

(a)

When disclosing information required in point (a) of Article 439 CRR, institutions shall provide a description of the methodology used to assign internal capital and credit limits for counterparty credit exposures, including the methods to assign those limits to exposures to central counterparties.

(b)

When disclosing information required in point (b) of Article 439 CRR, institutions shall provide a description of policies related to guarantees and other credit risk mitigants, such as the policies for securing collateral and establishing credit reserves.

(c)

When disclosing information required in point (c) of Article 439 CRR, institutions shall provide a description of policies with respect to Wrong-Way risk as defined in Article 291 CRR.

(d)

In accordance with Article 431 (3) and (4) CRR institutions shall complement the above information by any other risk management objectives and relevant policies related to CCR.

(e)

When disclosing information required in point (d) of Article 439 CRR institutions shall provide the amount of collateral the institutions would have to provide if their credit rating was downgraded.

Where the central bank of a Member State undertakes liquidity assistance in the form of collateral swap transactions, the competent authority may exempt institutions to provide this information where it deems that the disclosure of the information referred to therein could reveal the provision of emergency liquidity assistance. For these purposes, the competent authority shall set out appropriate thresholds and objective criteria.

Template EU CCR1 - Analysis of CCR exposure by approach: Fixed format

3. Institutions shall disclose information referred to in points (f), (g), and (k) of Article 439 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CCR1 which is presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

4. This template excludes own funds requirements for CVA risk (Title VI of Part Three CRR) and exposures to a central counterparty (Section 9 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR) as defined for the purpose of template EU CCR8. For securities financing transactions, it includes the exposure values before and after the effect of credit risk mitigation as determined under the methods set out in Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR, whichever method is used, in accordance with Article 439 (g) CRR, and the associated risk exposure amounts broken down by applicable method.

5. Institutions using the methods set out in Sections 4 to 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR shall indicate, in the narrative accompanying the template, the size of their on- and off-balance-sheet derivative business as calculated in accordance with Article 273a(1) or (2) CRR, as applicable, in application of point (m) of Article 439 CRR.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

EU-1

Original Exposure Method (for derivatives)

Derivatives and long settlement transactions for which the institutions have chosen to calculate the exposure value as alpha*(RC+PFE) with α = 1,4, RC and PFE computed in accordance with Article 282 of Section 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

This simplified method for calculating the exposure value of derivative positions can only be used by institutions meeting the conditions laid down in Article 273a (2) or (4) of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

EU-2

Simplified Standardised Approach for CCR (Simplified SA-CCR for derivatives)

Derivatives and long settlement transactions for which the institutions have chosen to calculate the exposure value as alpha*(RC+PFE) with α = 1,4, RC and PFE computed in accordance with Article 281 of Section 4 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

This simplified standardised approach for calculating the exposure value of derivative positions can only be used by institutions meeting the conditions laid down in Article 273a (1) or (4) of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

1

Standardised Approach for CCR (SA-CCR for derivatives)

Derivatives and long settlement transactions for which the institutions have chosen to calculate the exposure value as alpha*(RC+PFE) with α = 1,4, RC and PFE computed in accordance with Section 3 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

2

IMM (for derivatives and SFTs)

Derivatives and long settlement transactions and SFTs for which institutions have been permitted to calculate the exposure value using the Internal Model Method (IMM) in accordance with Section 6 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

EU-2a

Of which securities financing transactions netting sets

Netting sets containing only SFTs, as defined in point (139) of Article 4(1) CRR, for which institutions have been permitted to determine the exposure value using the IMM

EU-2b

Of which derivatives and long settlement transactions netting sets

Netting sets containing only derivative instruments listed in Annex II to CRR and long settlement transactions as defined in point (2) of Article 272 CRR, for which institutions have been permitted to determine the exposure value using the IMM

EU-2c

Of which from contractual cross-product netting sets

Netting sets containing transactions of different product categories (point (11) of Article 272 CRR), i.e. derivatives and SFTs, for which a contractual cross product netting agreement as defined in point (25) of Article 272 CRR exists and for which institutions have been permitted to determine the exposure value using the IMM

3, 4

Financial collateral simple method (for SFTs) and Financial collateral comprehensive method (for SFTs)

Repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions and margin lending transactions for which institutions have chosen to determine the exposure value in accordance with Articles 222 and 223 of Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three CRR, as opposed to Article 271(2) of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

5

VaR for SFTs

Repurchase transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions, margin lending transactions, or other capital market-driven transactions other than derivative transactions for which (in accordance with Article 221 CRR) the exposure value is calculated using an internal model approach (IMA) that takes into account correlation effects between security positions subject to the master netting agreement, as well as the liquidity of the instruments concerned

6

Total

Column letter

Explanation

a, b

Replacement cost (RC) and Potential future exposure (PFE)

RC and PFE shall be computed:

— in accordance with Article 282 (3) and (4) of Section 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR for the Original Exposure Method (row EU-1 of this template),

— in accordance with Article 281 of Section 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR for the Simplified SA-CCR (row EU-2 of this template),

— in accordance with Articles 275 and 278 of Sections 4 and 5 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR for the SA-CCR (row 1 of this template)

Institutions shall disclose the sum of the replacement costs for all netting sets in the corresponding rows.

c

Effective expected positive exposure (EEPE)

The EEPE per netting set is defined in point (22) of Article 272 CRR and shall be calculated in accordance with Article 284(6) CRR.

The EEPE to be disclosed here shall be the one applied for the determination of own funds requirements in accordance with Article 284 (3) CRR, i.e. either the EEPE calculated using current market data, or the EEPE calculated using a stress calibration, whichever leads to a higher own funds requirement.

Institutions shall specify in the narrative accompanying this template which EEPE has been inserted.

d

Alpha used for computing regulatory exposure value

The value of α is fixed as 1,4 in rows EU-1, EU-2 and 1 of this template in accordance with Articles 282(2), 281(1) and 274(2) CRR

For IMM purposes, the value of α can either be the default of 1,4 or different when competent authorities require a higher α in accordance with Article 284(4) CRR or permit institutions to use their own estimates in accordance with Article 284(9) of Section 6 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

e

Exposure value pre-CRM

The exposure value pre-CRM for CCR business shall be calculated in accordance with the methods laid down in Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR taking into account the effect of netting, but disregarding any other credit risk mitigation techniques (e.g. through margin collateral).

In the case of SFTs the security leg shall not be considered in the determination of the exposure value pre-CRM when collateral is received and therefore shall not decrease the exposure value. On the contrary, the SFTs security leg shall be considered in the determination of the exposure value pre-CRM in the regular way when collateral is posted.

Furthermore, collateralised business shall be handled as uncollateralised, i.e. no margining effects apply.

For transactions where specific wrong way risk has been identified, the exposure value pre-CRM must be determined in accordance with Article 291 CRR.

The exposure value pre-CRM shall not consider the deduction of the incurred CVA loss in accordance with Article 273(6) CRR.

The institution shall disclose the sum of all exposure values pre-CRM in the respective row.

f

Exposure value (post-CRM)

The exposure value post-CRM for CCR business shall be calculated in accordance with the methods laid down in Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR, having applied CRM techniques as applicable in accordance with Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

For transactions where specific wrong way risk has been identified, the exposure value shall be determined in accordance with Article 291 CRR.

In accordance with Article 273(6) CRR, the incurred CVA loss shall not be deducted from the exposure value post-CRM.

The institution shall disclose the sum of all exposure values post-CRM in the respective row.

g

Exposure value

Exposure value for CCR business calculated in accordance with the methods laid down in Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR, which is the relevant amount for the own funds requirement calculation, i.e. having applied CRM techniques as applicable in accordance with Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR and considering the deduction of the incurred CVA loss in accordance with Article 273 (6) CRR

The exposure value for transactions where specific wrong way risk has been identified shall be determined in accordance with Article 291 CRR.

For cases in which more than one CCR approach is used for a single counterparty, the incurred CVA loss, which is deducted at counterparty level, shall be assigned to the exposure value of the different netting sets in each CCR approach reflecting the proportion of the exposure value post-CRM of the respective netting sets to the total exposure value post-CRM of the counterparty.

The institution shall disclose the sum of all exposure values post-CRM in the respective row.

h

RWEA

Risk weighted exposure amounts as defined in Article 92 (3) and (4) CRR calculated in accordance with Article 107 CRR, for elements whose risk weights are estimated on the basis of the requirements in Chapters 2 and 3 of Title II of Part Three CRR and for which the exposure value for CCR business is calculated in accordance with Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

Template EU CCR2 – Transactions subject to own funds requirements for CVA risk: Fixed format

6. Institutions shall disclose information referred to in point (h) of Article 439 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CCR2 which is presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

7. This template shall be filled with regulatory CVA information for all transactions subject to own funds requirements for CVA risk (Title VI of Part Three CRR).



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1

Total transactions subject to the Advanced method

Transactions subject to the advanced method to calculate own funds requirements for CVA risk in accordance with Article 383 CRR

2

VaR component (including the 3 × multiplier)

Transactions subject to own funds requirements for CVA risk for which the risk weighed exposure amounts are obtained via the formula in Article 383 CRR, using VaR calculation based on internal models for market risk (with current parameter calibrations for expected exposure as set out in the first subparagraph of Article 292 (2) CRR).

The calculation shall includes the use of a multiplier that is at least 3 (set by the supervisor).

3

Stressed VaR component (including the 3 × multiplier)

Transactions subject to own funds requirements for CVA risk for which the risk weighted exposure amounts are obtained via the formula in Article 383 CRR using stressed VaR calculation based on internal models for market risk (with stressed parameters for the calibration of the formula as set out in the first subparagraph of Article 292 (2) CRR).

The calculation shall include the use of a multiplier that is at least 3 (set by the supervisor).

4

Transactions subject to the Standardised method

Transactions subject to the standardised method to calculate own funds requirements for CVA risk in accordance with Article 384 CRR

EU-4

Transactions subject to the Alternative approach (Based on the Original Exposure Method)

Transactions subject to the alternative approach to calculate own funds requirements for CVA risk, in accordance with Article 385 CRR

5

Total transactions subject to own funds requirements for CVA risk

Column letter

Explanation

a

Exposure value

Exposure value that is determined in accordance with Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR (or in the case of transactions in the scope of Article 271(2) CRR, in accordance with Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three CRR) for transactions that are in the scope of Title VI of Part Three CRR

The exposure value shall be the value used in the calculation of own funds requirements for CVA risk considering mitigation effects in accordance with Title VI of Part Three CRR. For transactions treated under the Original Exposure Method (alternative approach), the exposure value shall be the value that has been used for computing risk weighted exposure amounts.

b

RWEA

Risk weighted exposure amounts in accordance with point (d) of Article 438 and with point (d) of Article 92 (3) CRR, i.e. own funds requirements for CVA risk calculated via the chosen method multiplied by 12.5 in accordance with point (b) of Article 92(4) CRR

Template EU CCR3 - Standardised approach – CCR exposures by regulatory exposure class and risk weights: Fixed format

8. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (e) of Article 444 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CCR3 which is presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

9. Institutions using the credit risk standardised approach to compute risk weighted exposure amounts (excluding those derived from own funds requirements for CVA risk and for exposures cleared through a CCP) for all or part of their CCR exposures in accordance with Article 107 CRR, irrespective of the CCR approach used to determine exposure values in accordance with Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR, shall disclose the following information.

10. If an institution deems that the information requested in this template is not meaningful because the exposure and risk weighted exposure amounts are not material, the institution may choose not to disclose the template. The institution is, however, required to explain in a narrative commentary why it considers the information not to be meaningful, including a description of the exposures in the portfolios concerned and the aggregate total of risk weighted exposures amounts from such exposures.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1-9

Exposure classes

These rows refer to the regulatory exposure classes as defined in Article 112 to Article 134 of Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three CRR. In each line, the corresponding exposure values (see definition provided in column g of template EU CCR1) shall be disclosed.

10

Other items

This refers to assets subject to a specific risk weight set out in Article 134 of Chapter 4 of Title II of Part Three CRR and any other items not covered in rows 1 to 9 of this template. It also refers to assets not deducted in the application of Article 39 CRR (tax overpayments, tax loss carrybacks and deferred tax assets that do not rely on future profitability), Article 41 CRR (defined benefit pension fund assets), Article 46 and Article 469 CRR (non-significant investments in CET1 of financial sector entities), Article 49 and Article 471 CRR (participations in insurance entities whether or not insurance entities are supervised under the conglomerate directive), Article 60 and Article 475 CRR (non-significant and significant indirect and investments in AT1 of financial sector entities), Article 70 and Article 477 CRR (insignificant and significant indirect and synthetic holdings of T2 from a financial sector entity) when not allocated to other exposure classes, and to qualifying holdings outside the financial sector when they are not 1 250  % risk-weighted in the application of point (k) of Article 36 of Chapter 2 of Title I of Part Two CRR.

11

Total exposure value

Column letter

Explanation

a-k

These columns refer to the credit risk quality steps/risk weights as set out in Chapter 2 of Title II of Part Three CRR for which the corresponding exposure values (see definition provided in column g of template EU CCR1) shall be disclosed.

l

Total exposure value

Template EU CCR4 - IRB approach – CCR exposures by exposure class and PD scale: Fixed format

11. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (g) of Article 452 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CCR4 which is presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

12. Institutions using either the advanced or the foundation IRB approach to compute risk weighted exposure amounts (excluding those derived from own funds requirements for CVA risk and for exposures cleared through a CCP) for all or part of their CCR exposures in accordance with Article 107 CRR, irrespective of the CCR approach used to determine exposure value in accordance with Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR shall disclose the following information.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1 to 8

PD scale

CCR exposures shall be allocated to the appropriate bucket of the fixed PD scale based on the PD estimated for each obligor assigned to this exposure class (without considering any substitution due to existence of guarantee or credit derivative). Institutions shall map exposure by exposure to the PD scale provided in the template, also taking into account continuous scales. All defaulted exposures shall be included in the bucket representing PD of 100 %.

1 to x

Exposure class X

This refers to the different exposure classes listed in Article 147 of Chapter 3 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

x and y

Sub-total (Exposure class X) / Total (all CCR relevant exposure classes)

The (sub-) total of exposure values, risk weighted exposure amounts and number of obligors shall just be the sum of the respective columns. Concerning the different parameters Average PD, Average LGD, Average Maturity and RWEA density the below definitions apply with respect to the sample of exposure class X or all CCR relevant exposure classes.

Column letter

Explanation

a

Exposure value

Exposure value (see definition provided in column g of template EU CCR1), broken down by exposure classes and the given PD scale as set out in Chapter 3 of Title II of Part Three CRR

b

Exposure weighted average PD (%)

Average of individual obligor grade PDs weighted by their corresponding exposure value in column a of this template

c

Number of obligors

The number of legal entities or obligors allocated to each bucket of the fixed PD scale, which were separately rated, regardless of the number of different loans or exposures granted

Where different exposures to the same obligor are separately rated, they shall be counted separately. Such situation may take place if separate exposures to the same obligor are assigned to different obligor grades in accordance with the second sentence of point (e) of Article 172(1) CRR.

d

Exposure weighted average LGD (%)

Average of obligor grade LGDs weighted by their corresponding exposure value

The disclosed LGD shall correspond to the final LGD estimate used in the calculation of own funds requirements obtained after considering any CRM effects and downturn conditions where relevant.

In the case of exposures subject to the double default treatment the LGD to be disclosed shall correspond to the one selected in accordance with Article 161 (4) CRR.

For defaulted exposures under A-IRB Approach, provisions laid down in point (h) of Article 181(1) CRR shall be considered. The disclosed LGD shall correspond to the estimate of LGD in-default.

e

Exposure weighted average maturity (years)

Average of obligor maturities in years weighted by their corresponding exposure value in column a of this template.

The disclosed value of maturity shall be determined in accordance with Article 162 CRR.

f

RWEA

Risk weighted exposure amounts calculated in accordance with the requirements laid down in Chapter 3 of Title II of Part Three CRR; for exposures to central governments and central banks, institutions and corporates, the risk weighted exposure amount calculated in accordance with Article 153(1) to (4) CRR; the SME and infrastructure supporting factor determined in accordance with Article 501 CRR and Article 501a CRR shall be taken into account; for equity exposures under the PD/LGD approach, the risk weighted exposure amount calculated in accordance with Article 155(3) CRR

g

Density of risk weighted exposure amounts

Ratio of the total risk weighted exposure amounts (in column f of this template) to the exposure value (in column a of this template)

Template EU CCR5 - Composition of collateral for CCR exposures: Fixed columns

13. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (e) of Article 439 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CCR5 as presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

14. This template shall be filled with fair values of collateral (posed or received) used in CCR exposures related to derivative transactions or to SFTs, whether or not the transactions are cleared through a CCP and whether or not collateral is posted to a CCP.

15. Where the central bank of a Member State undertakes liquidity assistance in the form of collateral swap transactions, the competent authority may exempt institutions to provide information in this template where it deems that the disclosure of this information could reveal the provision of emergency liquidity assistance. For these purposes, the competent authority shall set out appropriate thresholds and objective criteria.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1-8

Collateral type

Breakdown by type of collateral

9

Total

Column letter

Explanation

a, c, e and g

Segregated

Collateral that is held in a bankruptcy-remote manner as defined in Article 300(1) CRR

b, d, f and h

Unsegregated

Collateral that is not held in a bankruptcy-remote manner as defined in Article 300(1) CRR

a to d

Collateral used in derivative transactions

Collateral (including the initial margin and variation margin collateral) that is used in CCR exposures related to any derivative instrument listed in Annex II CRR or a long settlement transaction as per Article 271(2) CRR not qualifying as an SFTs

e to h

Collateral used in SFTs

Collateral (including the initial margin and variation margin collateral as well as the collateral appearing in the security leg of the SFT) that is used in CCR exposures related to any SFT or a long settlement transaction not qualifying as a derivative

Template EU CCR6 - Credit derivatives exposures: Fixed format



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1-6

Notionals

Sum of absolute notional derivative amounts before any netting broken down by product type

7-8

Fair values

Fair values broken down by assets (positive fair values) and liabilities (negative fair values)

Column letter

Explanation

a-b

Credit derivative protection

Credit derivative protection bought or sold in accordance with Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR

16. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (j) of Article 439 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CCR6 which is presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

Template EU CCR7 - RWEA flow statements of CCR exposures under the IMM: Fixed format

17. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (h) of Article 438 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CCR7 which is presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

18. Institutions using the IMM to compute risk weighted exposure amounts for all or part of their CCR exposures in accordance with Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR, irrespective of the credit risk approach used to determine the corresponding risk weights shall disclose a flow statement explaining changes in risk weighted exposure amounts of derivatives and SFTs in the IMM scope differentiated by key drivers and based on reasonable estimations.

19. This template excludes risk weighted exposure amounts for CVA risk (Title VI of Part Three CRR) and exposures to a central counterparty (Section 9 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR).

20. Institutions shall disclose the flows of RWEA as the changes between the risk-weighted exposure amounts at the end of the disclosure reference period (as specified below in row 9 of this template) and the risk-weighted exposure amounts at end of the prior disclosure reference period (as specified below in row 1 of this template; in the case of quarterly disclosures, end-of-quarter prior to the quarter of the disclosure reference period). Institutions may complement their Pillar 3 disclosures by disclosing the same information for the three previous quarters.

21. Institutions shall explain in the accompanying narrative to the template the figures disclosed in row 8 of this template, i.e. any other drivers that contribute significantly to RWEA variations.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1

RWEA as at the end of the previous disclosure period

Risk weighted exposure amounts for CCR exposures under the IMM as at the end of the previous disclosure period

2

Asset size

RWEA changes (positive or negative) due to organic changes in book size and composition (including the origination of new businesses and maturing exposures) but excluding changes in book size due to acquisitions and disposal of entities

3

Credit quality of counterparties

RWEA changes (positive or negative) due to changes in the assessed quality of the institution’s counterparties as measured under the credit risk framework, whatever approach the institution uses

This row shall include potential RWEA changes due to IRB models when the institution uses an IRB approach.

4

Model updates (IMM only)

RWEA changes (positive or negative) due to model implementation, changes in model scope, or any changes intended to address model weaknesses

This row shall reflect only changes in the IMM.

5

Methodology and policy (IMM only)

RWEA changes (positive or negative) due to methodological changes in calculations driven by regulatory policy changes, such as new regulations (only in the IMM)

6

Acquisitions and disposals

RWEA changes (positive or negative) due to changes in book sizes due to acquisitions and disposal of entities

7

Foreign exchange movements

RWEA changes (positive or negative) due to changes arising from foreign currency translation movements

8

Other

This category shall be used to capture RWEA changes (positive or negative) that cannot be attributed to the above categories. Institutions shall include the sum of these RWEA changes in this row. Institutions shall further describe any other material drivers of risk weighted amounts movements over the disclosure period in the accompanying narrative for this template.

9

RWEA as at the end of the current disclosure period

Risk weighted exposure amounts for CCR exposures under the IMM as at the end of the current disclosure period

Column letter

Explanation

a

RWEA

Template EU CCR8 - Exposures to CCPs: Fixed format

22. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (i) of Article 439 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU CCR8 which is presented in Annex XXV to this Implementing Regulation.

23. Exposures to CCPs: Contracts and transactions listed in Article 301(1) CRR for as long as they are outstanding with a CCP, including exposures to CCP-related transactions in accordance with Article 300(2) CRR, for which the own funds requirements are calculated in accordance with Section 9 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1-10

Qualifying CCP (QCCP)

A qualifying central counterparty or ‘QCCP’ as defined in point (88) of Article 4(1) CRR

7 and 8

17 and 18

Initial margin

Institutions shall disclose the fair values of collateral received or posted as initial margin defined in point (140) of Article 4(1) CRR.

For the purposes of this template, initial margin does not include contributions to a CCP for mutualised loss-sharing arrangements (i.e. in cases where a CCP uses initial margin to mutualise losses among the clearing members, it will be treated as a default fund exposure).

9 and 19

Prefunded default fund contributions

The contribution to the default fund of a CCP that is paid in by the institutions

‘Default fund’ is defined in point (89) of Article 4(1) CRR.

20

Unfunded default fund contributions

Contributions that an institution acting as a clearing member has contractually committed to provide to a CCP after the CCP has depleted its default fund to cover the losses it incurred following the default of one or more of its clearing members. ‘Default fund’ is defined in point (89) of Article 4(1) CRR.

7 and 17

Segregated

See definition in included in template EU CCR5.

8 and 18

Unsegregated

See definition in included in template EU CCR5.

Column letter

Explanation

a

Exposure value

Exposure value calculated in accordance with the methods laid down in Chapters 4 and 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR for transactions in the scope of Section 9 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR, after the application of the relevant adjustments provided for by Articles 304, 306 and 308 of that section

An exposure can be a trade exposure, as defined in point (91) of Article 4(1) CRR. The disclosed exposure value is the amount relevant for the own funds requirements calculation in accordance with Section 9 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR, considering the requirements in Article 497 CRR during the transitional period provided for by that Article.

b

RWEA

Risk weighted exposure amounts referred to in point (a) of Article 92(3) CRR calculated in accordance with Article 107 of Section 9 of Chapter 6 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

ANNEX XXVII




ANNEX XXVII

Table EU-SECA - Qualitative disclosure requirements related to securitisation exposures

Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information



Legal basis

Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

Article 449(a) CRR

(a)

Description of securitisation and re-securitisation activities; including institutions' risk management and investment objectives in connection with those activities, their role in securitisation and re-securitisation transactions whether they use the Simple Transparent and Standardised (STS) securitisation framework and the extent to which they use securitisation transactions to transfer the credit risk of the securitised exposures to third parties with, where applicable, a separate description of their synthetic securitisation risk transfer policy

Article 449(b) CRR

(b)

The type of risk that institutions are exposed to in their securitisation and re-securitisation activities by level of seniority of the relevant securitisation positions, providing a distinction between STS and non-STS positions and:

i)  risk retained in own-originated transactions;

ii)  risk incurred in relation to transactions originated by third parties

Article 449(c ) CRR

(c)

Institutions’ approaches to calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts that they apply to their securitisation activities, including the types of securitisation positions to which each approach applies with a distinction between STS and non-STS positions

Article 449(d) CRR

(d)

A list of SSPEs falling into any of the following categories, with a description of types of institution's exposures to those SSPEs, including derivatives contracts:

(i)  SSPEs which acquire exposures originated by the institutions;

(ii)  SSPEs sponsored by the institutions;

(iii)  SSPEs and other legal entities for which the institutions provide securitisation-related services, such as advisory, asset servicing or management services;

(iv)  SSPEs included in the institutions' regulatory scope of consolidation

Article 449(e ) CRR

(e)

A list of any legal entities in relation to which the institutions have disclosed that they have provided support in accordance with Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three CRR

Article 449(f) CRR

(f)

A list of legal entities affiliated with the institutions and that invest in securitisations originated by the institutions or in securitisation positions issued by SSPEs sponsored by the institutions

Article 449(g) CRR

(g)

A summary of their accounting policies for securitisation activity, including where relevant a distinction between securitisation and re-securitisation positions

Article 449(h) CRR

(h)

The names of the ECAIs used for securitisations and the types of exposure for which each agency is used

Article 449(i) CRR

(i)

Where applicable, a description of the Internal Assessment Approach as set out in Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three CRR including the structure of the internal assessment process and the relation between internal assessment and external ratings of the relevant ECAI disclosed in accordance with point (h), the control mechanisms for the internal assessment process including discussion of independence, accountability, and internal assessment process review, the exposure types to which the internal assessment process is applied and the stress factors used for determining credit enhancement levels

Template EU-SEC1 - Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

Institution acts as originator

Institution acts as sponsor

Institution acts as investor

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

STS

Non-STS

 

of which SRT

 

STS

Non-STS

 

STS

Non-STS

 

 

of which SRT

 

of which SRT

1

Total exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Retail (total)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

residential mortgage

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

credit card

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

other retail exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

re-securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Wholesale (total)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

loans to corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

commercial mortgage

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

lease and receivables

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

other wholesale

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

re-securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU-SEC2 - Securitisation exposures in the trading book



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

Institution acts as originator

Institution acts as sponsor

Institution acts as investor

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

STS

Non-STS

 

STS

Non-STS

 

STS

Non-STS

 

1

Total exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Retail (total)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

residential mortgage

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

credit card

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

other retail exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

re-securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Wholesale (total)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

loans to corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

commercial mortgage

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

lease and receivables

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

other wholesale

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

re-securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU-SEC3 - Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements - institution acting as originator or as sponsor



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

EU-p

EU-q

Exposure values (by RW bands/deductions)

Exposure values (by regulatory approach)

RWEA (by regulatory approach)

Capital charge after cap

≤ 20 % RW

> 20 % to 50 % RW

> 50 % to 100 % RW

> 100 % to < 1 250  % RW

1 250  % RW/ deductions

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

(including IAA)

SEC-SA

1 250  % RW/ deductions

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

(including IAA)

SEC-SA

1 250  % RW/

deductions

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

(including IAA)

SEC-SA

1 250  % RW/

deductions

1

Total exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Traditional transactions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Retail

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Of which STS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Wholesale

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Of which STS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Re-securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Synthetic transactions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

Securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

Retail underlying

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

Wholesale

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13

Re-securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU-SEC4 - Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements - institution acting as investor



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

EU-p

EU-q

Exposure values (by RW bands/deductions)

Exposure values (by regulatory approach)

RWEA (by regulatory approach)

Capital charge after cap

≤ 20 % RW

> 20 % to 50 % RW

> 50 % to 100 % RW

> 100 % to < 1 250  % RW

1 250  % RW/ deductions

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

(including IAA)

SEC-SA

1 250  % RW/ deductions

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

(including IAA)

SEC-SA

1 250  % RW/ deductions

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

(including IAA)

SEC-SA

1 250  % RW/ deductions

1

Total exposures

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Traditional securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Retail underlying

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Of which STS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Wholesale

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Of which STS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Re-securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Synthetic securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

Securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

Retail underlying

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

Wholesale

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13

Re-securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU-SEC5 - Exposures securitised by the institution - Exposures in default and specific credit risk adjustments



 

a

b

c

Exposures securitised by the institution - Institution acts as originator or as sponsor

Total outstanding nominal amount

Total amount of specific credit risk adjustments made during the period

 

Of which exposures in default

1

Total exposures

 

 

 

2

Retail (total)

 

 

 

3

residential mortgage

 

 

 

4

credit card

 

 

 

5

other retail exposures

 

 

 

6

re-securitisation

 

 

 

7

Wholesale (total)

 

 

 

8

loans to corporates

 

 

 

9

commercial mortgage

 

 

 

10

lease and receivables

 

 

 

11

other wholesale

 

 

 

12

re-securitisation

 

 

 

ANNEX XXVIII




ANNEX XXVIII

Instructions for disclosure on exposures to securitisation positions

Table EU SECA - Qualitative disclosure requirements related to securitisation exposures. Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in points (a) to (i) of Article 449 of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 22 ) (‘CRR’) by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete table EU SECA which is presented in Annex XXVII to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row reference

Explanation

(a)

Description of securitisation and re-securitisation activities; includingrisk management and investment objectives in connection with those activities, their role in securitisation and re-securitisation transactions whether they use the Simple Transparent and Standardised (STS) securitisation framework and the extent to which they use securitisation transactions to transfer the credit risk of the securitised exposures to third parties with, where applicable, a separate description of their synthetic securitisation risk transfer policy, in accordance with point (a) of Article 449 CRR

(b)

The type of risk that institutions are exposed to in their securitisation and re-securitisation activities by level of seniority of the relevant securitisation positions, providing a distinction between STS and non-STS positions and:

i)  risk retained in own-originated transactions;

ii)  risk incurred in relation to transactions originated by third parties,

in accordance with point (b) of Article 449 CRR

(c)

Institutions’ approaches to calculating the risk-weighted exposure amounts that they apply to their securitisation activities, including the types of securitisation positions to which each approach applies with a distinction between STS and non-STS positions, in accordance with point (c) of Article 449 CRR

(d)

A list of SSPEs falling into any of the following categories, with a description of types of institution’s exposures to those SSPEs, including derivatives contracts:

(i)  SSPEs which acquire exposures originated by the institutions;

(ii)  SSPEs sponsored by the institutions;

(iii)  SSPEs and other legal entities for which the institutions provide securitisation-related services, such as advisory, asset servicing or management services;

(iv)  SSPEs included in the institutions' scope of prudential consolidation,

in accordance with point (d) of Article 449 CRR

(e)

A list of any legal entities in relation to which the institutions have disclosed that they have provided support in accordance with point (e) of Article 449 of Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three CRR

(f)

A list of legal entities affiliated with the institutions and that invest in securitisations originated by the institutions or in securitisation positions issued by SSPEs sponsored by the institutions, in accordance with point (f) of Article 449 CRR

(g)

A summary of their accounting policies for securitisation activity, including where relevant a distinction between securitisation and re-securitisation positions, in accordance with point (g) of Article 449 CRR

(h)

The names of the ECAIs used for securitisations and the types of exposure for which each agency is used, in accordance with point (h) of Article 449 CRR

(i)

Where applicable, a description of the Internal Assessment Approach as set out in Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three CRR, including the structure of the internal assessment process and the relation between internal assessment and external ratings of the relevant ECAI disclosed in accordance with point (h), the control mechanisms for the internal assessment process including discussion of independence, accountability, and internal assessment process review, the exposure types to which the internal assessment process is applied and the stress factors used for determining credit enhancement levels, in accordance with point (i) of Article 449 CRR

EU-SEC1 - Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book. Fixed format.

2. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (j) of Article 449 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU SEC1 which is presented in Annex XXVII to this Implementing Regulation. Institutions shall explain in the narrative accompanying the template if they have within their traditional securitisations, ABCP programmes, and, if they have, the volume of ABCP transactions.



Legal references and instructions

Column reference

Explanation

a - g

Institution acts as originator

When the ‘institution acts as originator’, as defined in point (13) of Article 4 (1) CRR, the securitisation exposures are the retained positions, even where not eligible for the securitisation framework due to the absence of significant risk transfer. Securitisation exposures in transactions that have achieved significant risk transfer (SRT) shall be presented separately.

Originator institutions shall disclose the carrying amount at the disclosure date of all current securitisation exposures they hold in the securitisation transactions that they originated. As such, on-balance sheet securitisation exposures (e.g. bonds, subordinated loans) as well as off-balance sheet exposures and derivatives (e.g. subordinated credit lines, liquidity facilities, interest rate swaps, credit default swaps, etc.) in those securitisation shall be disclosed.

h - k

Institution acts as sponsor

When ‘the institution acts as sponsor’ (as defined in point (14) of Article 4(1) CRR) the securitisation exposures shall include exposures to commercial paper conduits to which the institution provides programme-wide enhancements, liquidity and other facilities. Where the institution acts both as originator and sponsor, it shall avoid double-counting. In this regard, the institution can merge the two columns of ‘institution acts as originator’ and ‘institution acts as sponsor’ and use ‘institution acts as originator/sponsor’ columns.

l - o

Institution acts as investor

Securitisation exposures when ‘the institution acts as an investor’ are the investment positions purchased in third-party deals.

The CRR does not provide an explicit definition for investor. Therefore, in this context it shall be understood as an institution that holds a securitisation position in a securitisation transaction for which it is neither the originator, nor the sponsor.

In case the pool of securitised exposures is a mix of the types of securitisation position, the institution shall indicate the most important type.

a – d; h, i, l, m

Traditional transactions

In accordance with point (13) of Article 242 CRR, in connection with point (9) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402 (1), ‘traditional securitisation’ means a securitisation involving the transfer of the economic interest in the exposures being securitised. This shall be accomplished by the transfer of ownership of the securitised exposures from the originator institution to an SSPE or through sub-participation by an SSPE. The securities issued do not represent payment obligations of the originator institution.

In the case of traditional securitisations where the originator does not hold any position, then the originator shall not consider that securitisation in the disclosing of this template.

e, f, j, n

Synthetic transactions

In accordance with point (14) of Article 242 CRR, in connection with point (10) of Article 2 of Regulation (EU) 2017/2402, ‘synthetic securitisation’ means a securitisation where the transfer of risk is achieved by the use of credit derivatives or guarantees, and the exposures being securitised remain exposures of the originator institution.

If the institution has purchased protection it shall disclose the net exposure amounts to which it is exposed and which are not subject to the purchased protection under columns originator/sponsor (i.e. the amount that is not secured) of this template. If the institution has sold protection, the exposure amount of the credit protection shall be disclosed in the ‘investor’ column of this template.

a, b, h, l,

STS exposure

Total amount of STS securitisation positions in accordance with the criteria set out in Articles 18 to 26 of the Regulation (EU) 2017/2402

b, d, f

SRT exposure

Total amount of securitisation positions in respect of which the originator institution has achieved significant risk transfer (SRT) in accordance with Article 244 (traditional securitisation) and Article 245 (synthetic securitisation) CRR

(1)   

REGULATION (EU) 2017/2402 OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 12 December 2017 laying down a general framework for securitisation and creating a specific framework for simple, transparent and standardised securitisation, and amending Directives 2009/65/EC, 2009/138/EC and 2011/61/EU and Regulations (EC) No 1060/2009 and (EU) No 648/2012 (OJ 347, 28.12.2017, p. 35).



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

06, 12

Re-securitisation

Total amount of outstanding re-securitisation positions as defined in points (63) and (64) of Article 4(1) CRR

All securitisation exposures related to re-securitisation shall be completed in rows ‘re-securitisation’, and not in the preceding rows (by type of underlying asset) which contain only securitisation exposures other than re-securitisation.

Template EU SEC2 - Securitisation exposures in the trading book. Fixed format.

3. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to point (j) of Article 449 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU SEC2 which is presented in Annex XXVII to this Implementing Regulation.

4. Institutions shall refer to instructions to template EU SEC1 - Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book.

Template EU SEC3 - Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements - institution acting as originator or as sponsor. Fixed format.

5. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (k)(i) of Article 449 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU SEC3 which is presented in Annex XXVII to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Column reference

Explanation

a to d

Exposure values (by risk weight bands /deductions)

Values to be disclosed in columns (a) to (d) of this template in relation to regulatory risk weights shall be determined in accordance with Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three CRR.

f to h

Exposure values (by regulatory approach)

Columns (f) to (h) of this template corresponding to the regulatory approach used in accordance with the hierarchy of approaches of Article 254 CRR

j, k, l

RWEA (by regulatory approach)

Risk weighted exposure amount (RWEA) by regulatory approach in accordance with Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three CRR Part Three before application of cap

n to EU-p

Capital charge after cap

These columns refer to capital charge after application of the cap in accordance with Articles 267 and 268 CRR.

e, i, m, EU-q

1 250  % RW/deductions

Columns refer to items:

— Subject to a 1 250  % risk weight or deducted in accordance with Chapter 5 of Title II of Part Three CRR;

— Subject to a 1 250  % risk weight or deducted in accordance with point (b) of Article 244(1)) and with point (b) of Article 245(1) CRR;

— Subject to a 1 250  % risk weight in accordance with Article 254(7) CRR;

— or deducted in accordance with Article 253 CRR



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1

Total Exposures

Total exposures shall refer to the total amount of securitisation and re-securitisation positions held by the institution acting as originator or sponsor. This row shall summarise information on traditional and synthetic securitisation disclosed by originators and sponsors in subsequent rows.

2

Traditional transactions

See explanation for template EU SEC1.

3, 10

Securitisation

Total amount of outstanding securitisation positions as defined in point (62) of Article 4(1) CRR that are not re-securitisation positions as defined in point (64) of Article 4(1) CRR

5, 7

STS

See explanation for template EU SEC1.

8, 13

Re-securitisation

See explanation for template EU SEC1.

9

Synthetic transactions

See explanation for template EU SEC1.

Template EU SEC4 - Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements - institution acting as investor. Fixed format.

6. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (k)(ii) of Article 449 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU SEC4 which is presented in Annex XXVII to this Implementing Regulation.

7. Institutions shall refer to instructions to template EU SEC3 - Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements - institution acting as originator or as sponsor.

Template EU SEC5 - Exposures securitised by the institution - Exposures in default and specific credit risk adjustments. Fixed format.

8. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in Article 449(l) CRR by type of securitisation exposure, by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU SEC5 which is presented in Annex XXVII to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Column reference

Explanation

a

Total outstanding nominal amount

Total outstanding nominal amount of exposures securitised by the institution (institution acts as originator or as sponsor), broken down by type of securitisation exposure

b

Total outstanding nominal amount - Of which exposures in default

Total outstanding nominal amount of exposures securitised by the institution (institution acts as originator or as sponsor) which have been classified as ‘defaulted exposures’ in accordance with Article 178 CRR, broken down by type of securitisation exposure

c

Specific credit risk adjustments made during the period

Amount of the specific credit risk adjustments made during the period, in accordance with Article 110 CRR, on the exposures securitised by the institution (institution acts as originator or as sponsor), broken down by type of securitisation exposure

ANNEX XXIX




ANNEX XXIX

Table EU MRA: Qualitative disclosure requirements related to market risk



 

Flexible format disclosure

a

Points (a) and (d) of Article 435 (1) CRR

A description of the institution's strategies and processes to manage market risk, including:

— An explanation of management’s strategic objectives in undertaking trading activities, as well as the processes implemented to identify, measure, monitor and control the institution’s market risks

— A description of their policies for hedging and mitigating risk and strategies and processes for monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges

 

b

Point (b) of Article 435 (1) CRR

A description of the structure and organisation of the market risk management function, including a description of the market risk governance structure established to implement the strategies and processes of the institution discussed in row (a) above, and that describes the relationships and the communication mechanisms between the different parties involved in market risk management.

 

c

Point (c ) of Article 435 (1) CRR

Scope and nature of risk reporting and measurement systems

 

Template EU MR1 - Market risk under the standardised approach



 

a

 

 

RWEAs

 

Outright products

 

1

Interest rate risk (general and specific)

 

2

Equity risk (general and specific)

 

3

Foreign exchange risk

 

4

Commodity risk

 

 

Options

 

5

Simplified approach

 

6

Delta-plus approach

 

7

Scenario approach

 

8

Securitisation (specific risk)

 

9

Total

 

Table EU MRB: Qualitative disclosure requirements for institutions using the internal Market Risk Models



 

Flexible format disclosure

EU (a)

Article 455(c) CRR

Description of the procedures and systems implemented for the assurance of tradability of the positions included in the trading book in order to comply with the requirements of Article 104.

Description of the methodology used to ensure that the policies and procedures implemented for the overall management of the trading book are appropriate.

 

EU (b)

Article 455(c) CRR

For exposures from the trading and the non-trading book that are measured at fair value in accordance with the applicable accounting framework and that have their exposure value adjusted in accordance with Part Two, Title I, Chapter 2, Article 34 and Part Three, Title I, Chapter 3, Article 105 of the CRR (as well as the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 2016/101), institutions shall describe systems and controls to ensure that the valuation estimates are prudent and reliable. These disclosures shall be provided as part of the market risk disclosures for exposures from the trading book.

 

Point (i) of Article 455(a) CRR

(A)  Institutions using VaR models and SVaR models must disclose the following information:

 

(a)

Point (i) of Article 455 (a) and Article 455 (b) CRR

Description of activities and risks covered by VaR and SVaR models, specifying how they are distributed in portfolios/sub-portfolios for which the competent authority has granted permission.

 

(b)

Article 455(b) CRR

Description of the scope of application of the VaR and SVaR models for which the competent authority has granted permission, including which entities in the group use these models and how the models represent all the models used at the group level, as well as the percentage of own funds requirements covered by the models or if the same models of VaR/SVaR are used for all entities with market risk exposure

 

 

Point (i) of Article 455(a) CRR

Characteristics of the models used, including:

 

(c)

General description of regulatory VaR and SVaR models

 

(d)

Discussion of the main differences, if any, between the model used for management purposes and the model used for regulatory purposes (10 day 99%) for VaR and SVaR models.

 

(e)

For VaR models:

 

(i)

Data updating frequency;

 

(ii)

Length of the data period that is used to calibrate the model. Describe the weighting scheme that is used (if any);

 

(iii)

How the institutions determines the 10-day holding period (for example, does it scale up a 1-day VaR by the square root of 10, or does it directly model the 10-day VaR?);

 

(iv)

Aggregation approach, which is the method for aggregating the specific and general risk (i.e. do the institutions calculate the specific charge as a stand-alone charge by using a different method than the one used to calculate the general risk or do the institutions use a single model that diversifies general and specific risk?);

 

(v)

Valuation approach (full revaluation or use of approximations);

 

(vi)

Whether, when simulating potential movements in risk factors, absolute or relative returns (or a mixed approach) are used (i.e. proportional change in prices or rates or absolute change in prices or rates).

 

(f)

For SVaR models, specify:

 

(i)

How the 10-day holding period is determined. For example, does the institution scale up a 1-day VaR by the square root of 10, or does it directly model the 10-day VaR? If the approach is the same as for the VaR models, the institutions may confirm this and refer to disclosure (e) (iii) above;

 

(ii)

The stress period chosen by the institution and the rationale for this choice;

 

(iii)

Valuation approach (full revaluation or use of approximations).

 

(g)

Point (iii) of Article 455(a) CRR

Description of stress testing applied to the modelling parameters (main scenarios developed to capture the characteristics of the portfolios to which the VaR and SVaR models apply at the group level).

 

(h)

Point (iv) of Article 455(a) CRR

Description of the approach used for backtesting/validating the accuracy and internal consistency of data and parameters used for the internal models and modelling processes.

 

Point (ii) of Article 455(a) CRR

(B)  Institutions using internal models to measure the own funds requirements for the incremental default and migration risk (IRC) must disclose the following information:

 

(a)

Point (ii) of Article 455 (a) and Article 455 (b) CRR

Description of risks covered by the IRC models, specifying how they are distributed in portfolios/sub-portfolios for which the competent authority has granted permission.

 

(b)

Article 455(b) CRR

Description of the scope of application of the IRC model for which the competent authority has granted permission, including which entities in the group use these models and how the models represent all the models used at the group level, the percentage of own funds requirements covered by the models /or if the same models of IRC is used for all entities with market risk exposure

 

(c)

Point (ii) of Article 455(a) CRR

General description of the methodology used for internal models for incremental default and migration risk, including:

 

(i)

Information about the overall modelling approach (notably, the use of spread-based models or transition matrix-based models);

 

(ii)

Information on the calibration of the transition matrix;

 

(iii)

Information about correlation assumptions;

 

(d)

Approach used to determine liquidity horizons;

 

(e)

Methodology used to achieve a capital assessment that is consistent with the required soundness standard;

 

(f)

Approach used in the validation of the models.

 

(g)

Point (iii) of Article 455(a) CRR

Description of stress testing applied to the modelling parameters (main scenarios developed to capture the characteristics of the portfolios to which the IRC models apply at the group level).

 

(h)

Point (iv) of Article 455(a) CRR

Description of the approach used for backtesting/validating the accuracy and internal consistency of data and parameters used for the IRC internal models and modelling processes.

 

Point (ii) of Article 455(a) CRR

(C)  Institutions using internal models to measure own funds requirements for correlation trading portfolio (comprehensive risk measure) must disclosure the following information:

 

(a)

Point (ii) of Article 455 (a) and Article 455 (b) CRR

Description of risks covered by the comprehensive risk measure models, specifying how they are distributed in portfolios/sub-portfolios for which the competent authority has granted permission.

 

(b)

Article 455(b) CRR

Description of the scope of application of the comprehensive risk measure models for which the competent authority has granted permission, including which entities in the group use these models and how the models represent all the models used at the group level, including the percentage of own funds requirements covered by the models /or if the same models of IRC is used for all entities with market risk exposure

 

(c)

Point (ii) of Article 455(a) CRR

General description of the methodology used for correlation trading, including:

 

(i)

Information about the overall modelling approach (choice of model correlation between default/migrations and spread: (i) separate but correlated stochastic processes driving migration/default and spread movement; (ii) spread changes driving migration/default; or (iii) default/migrations driving spread changes);

 

(ii)

Information used to calibrate the parameters of the base correlation: LGD pricing of the tranches (constant or stochastic);

 

(iii)

Information on the choice of whether to age positions (profits and losses based on the simulated market movement in the model calculated based on the time to expiry of each position at the end of the 1-year capital horizon or using their time to expiry at the calculation date);

 

(d)

Approach used to determine liquidity horizons.

 

(e)

Methodology used to achieve a capital assessment that is consistent with the required soundness standard.

 

(f)

Approach used in the validation of the models.

 

(g)

Point (iii) of Article 455(a) CRR

Description of stress testing applied to the modelling parameters (main scenarios developed to capture the characteristics of the portfolios to which the comprehensive risk measure models apply at the group level).

 

(h)

Point (iv) of Article 455(a) CRR

Description of the approach used for backtesting/validating the accuracy and internal consistency of data and parameters used for the comprehensive risk measure internal models and modelling processes.

 

(i)

Point (f) of Article 455 CRR

Information on weighted average liquidity horizon for each subportfolio covered by the internal models for incremental default and migration risk and for correlation trading

 

Template EU MR2-A - Market risk under the internal Model Approach (IMA)



 

a

b

RWEAs

Own funds requirements

1

VaR (higher of values a and b)

 

 

(a)

Previous day’s VaR (VaRt-1)

 

 

(b)

Multiplication factor (mc) x average of previous 60 working days (VaRavg)

 

 

2

SVaR (higher of values a and b)

 

 

(a)

Latest available SVaR (SVaRt-1))

 

 

(b)

Multiplication factor (ms) x average of previous 60 working days (sVaRavg)

 

 

3

IRC (higher of values a and b)

 

 

(a)

Most recent IRC measure

 

 

(b)

12 weeks average IRC measure

 

 

4

Comprehensive risk measure (higher of values a, b and c)

 

 

(a)

Most recent risk measure of comprehensive risk measure

 

 

(b)

12 weeks average of comprehensive risk measure

 

 

(c)

Comprehensive risk measure - Floor

 

 

5

Other

 

 

6

Total

 

 

Template EU MR2-B - RWEA flow statements of market risk exposures under the IMA



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

VaR

SVaR

IRC

Comprehensive risk measure

Other

Total RWEAs

Total own funds requirements

1

RWEAs at previous period end

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1a

Regulatory adjustment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1b

RWEAs at the previous quarter-end (end of the day)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Movement in risk levels

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Model updates/changes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Methodology and policy

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Acquisitions and disposals

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Foreign exchange movements

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8a

RWEAs at the end of the disclosure period (end of the day)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8b

Regulatory adjustment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

RWEAs at the end of the disclosure period

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU MR3 - IMA values for trading portfolios



 

a

VaR (10 day 99%)

1

Maximum value

 

2

Average value

 

3

Minimum value

 

4

Period end

 

SVaR (10 day 99%)

5

Maximum value

 

6

Average value

 

7

Minimum value

 

8

Period end

 

IRC (99.9%)

9

Maximum value

 

10

Average value

 

11

Minimum value

 

12

Period end

 

Comprehensive risk measure (99.9%)

13

Maximum value

 

14

Average value

 

15

Minimum value

 

16

Period end

 

Template EU MR4 - Comparison of VaR estimates with gains/losses

image

Institutions must present an analysis of ‘outliers’ (backtesting exceptions as per Article 366 CRR) in backtested results, specifying the dates and the corresponding excess (VaR-P&L), including at least the key drivers of the exceptions, with similar comparisons for actual P&L and hypothetical P&L (as per Article 366 CRR).

Information about actual gains/losses, and especially a clarification whether they include reserves and, if not, how reserves are integrated into the backtesting process.

ANEXO XXX Cuadros y plantillas para la divulgación de información sobre los métodos estándar e interno para el riesgo de mercado: Instrucciones

ANEXO XXX

Cuadros y plantillas para la divulgación de información sobre los métodos estándar e interno para el riesgo de mercado: Instrucciones

1. El presente anexo contiene las instrucciones que deberán seguir las entidades, cuando divulguen la información a que se refieren los artículos 435, 445 y 455 del Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 ( 23 ) (RRC), para cumplimentar los cuadros y plantillas de divulgación de información sobre el riesgo de mercado que se recogen en el anexo XXIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.

Cuadro EU MRA — Requisitos de divulgación de información cualitativa relacionados con el riesgo de mercado. Casillas de texto de formato libre

2. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 435, apartado 1, letras a) a d), del RRC con respecto al riesgo de mercado siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU MRA, que se recoge en el anexo XXIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

a)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 435, apartado 1, letras a) y d), del RRC sobre los objetivos y las políticas de gestión del riesgo de mercado, las entidades incluirán:

— una explicación de los objetivos estratégicos de su dirección a la hora de emprender actividades de negociación;

— los procesos realizados para identificar, medir, supervisar y controlar los riesgos de mercado de la entidad;

— las políticas de cobertura y reducción del riesgo;

— las estrategias y procesos para supervisar la continuidad de la eficacia de las coberturas.

b)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 435, apartado 1, letra b), del RRC sobre la estructura y organización de la función de gestión del riesgo de mercado, las entidades incluirán:

— una descripción de la estructura de gobernanza del riesgo de mercado establecida para llevar a cabo las estrategias y procesos de la entidad mencionados en la fila a) anterior;

— una descripción de las relaciones y los mecanismos de comunicación entre las distintas partes implicadas en la gestión del riesgo de mercado.

c)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 435, apartado 1, letra c), del RRC sobre la cobertura y la naturaleza de los sistemas de medición del riesgo de mercado y de divulgación de información al respecto, las entidades facilitarán una descripción de la cobertura y la naturaleza de dichos sistemas.

Plantilla EU MR1 — Riesgo de mercado según el método estándar. Formato fijo

3. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 445 del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU MR1, que se recoge en el anexo XXIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

Productos directos

1

Riesgo de tipo de interés (general y específico)

Riesgo general y específico de las posiciones en instrumentos de deuda negociables de la cartera de negociación, de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 2, del RRC, excluido el riesgo específico relacionado con la titulización, y exceptuando los instrumentos opcionales.

2

Riesgo de renta variable (general y específico)

Riesgo general y específico de las posiciones en instrumentos de patrimonio de la cartera de negociación, de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 2, del RRC, exceptuando los instrumentos opcionales.

3

Riesgo de tipo de cambio

Riesgo de las posiciones en divisas, de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 3, del RRC, exceptuando los instrumentos opcionales.

4

Riesgo de materias primas

Riesgo de las posiciones en materias primas, de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 4, del RRC, exceptuando los instrumentos opcionales.

Opciones

5

Método simplificado

Opciones o certificados de opción de compra (warrants), tal como se definen en la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 2, artículo 329, apartado 3, del RRC, para los que las entidades calculan los requisitos de fondos propios en relación con el riesgo distinto de delta utilizando el método simplificado (1).

6

Método delta plus

Opciones o certificados de opción de compra (warrants) en la cartera de negociación, tal como se definen en la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 2, artículo 329, apartado 3, del RRC, para los que las entidades calculan los requisitos de fondos propios en relación con el riesgo distinto de delta utilizando el método delta plus (2).

7

Método de escenarios

Opciones o certificados de opción de compra (warrants) en la cartera de negociación, tal como se definen en la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 2, artículo 329, apartado 3, del RRC, para los que las entidades calculan los requisitos de fondos propios en relación con el riesgo distinto de delta utilizando el método de escenarios (3).

8

Titulización (riesgo específico)

Riesgo específico de las posiciones de titulización de la cartera de negociación de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 2, artículos 337 y 338, del RRC.

9

Total

Suma de los importes de las filas 1 a 8 de esta plantilla.

Letra de la columna

Explicación

a

Importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo

Divulgación de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo a que se refiere el artículo 438, letra d), del RRC, calculadas como el valor de la columna b multiplicado por 12,5 con arreglo al artículo 92, apartado 4, letra b), del RRC.

(1)   

Tal como se define en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 528/2014 de la Comisión, de 12 de marzo de 2014, por el que se completa el Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo en lo que respecta a las normas técnicas de regulación para el riesgo distinto de delta de las opciones en el método estándar del riesgo de mercado (DO L 148 de 20.5.2014, p. 29).

(2)   

Tal como se define en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 528/2014 de la Comisión, de 12 de marzo de 2014, por el que se completa el Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo en lo que respecta a las normas técnicas de regulación para el riesgo distinto de delta de las opciones en el método estándar del riesgo de mercado (DO L 148 de 20.5.2014, p. 29).

(3)   

Tal como se define en el Reglamento Delegado (UE) n.o 528/2014 de la Comisión, de 12 de marzo de 2014, por el que se completa el Reglamento (UE) n.o 575/2013 del Parlamento Europeo y del Consejo en lo que respecta a las normas técnicas de regulación para el riesgo distinto de delta de las opciones en el método estándar del riesgo de mercado (DO L 148 de 20.5.2014, p. 29).

Cuadro EU MRB: Requisitos de divulgación de información cualitativa aplicables a las entidades que utilizan modelos internos para el riesgo de mercado. Formato de texto libre

4. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letras a), b), c) y f), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar el cuadro EU MRB, que se recoge en el anexo XXIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

EU a)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra c), del RRC sobre los niveles y las metodologías de cumplimiento de los criterios establecidos en el artículo 104 del RRC, las entidades incluirán:

— una descripción de los procedimientos y sistemas aplicados para garantizar la negociabilidad de las posiciones incluidas en la cartera de negociación, a fin de cumplir los requisitos del artículo 104 del RRC;

— una descripción de la metodología utilizada para garantizar que las políticas y los procedimientos implantados para la gestión global de la cartera de negociación sean adecuados.

EU b)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra c), del RRC sobre los niveles y las metodologías de cumplimiento de los criterios establecidos en el artículo 105 del RRC, las entidades incluirán:

— una descripción de los métodos de valoración, incluida una explicación de la medida en que se utilizan métodos de valoración a precios de mercado y según modelo;

— una descripción del proceso de verificación independiente de precios;

— los procedimientos para calcular los ajustes de valoración o las reservas (incluida una descripción del proceso y la metodología utilizados para valorar las posiciones de negociación por tipo de instrumento).

A)

Entidades que utilizan modelos de VaR y SVaR, tal como se definen en el artículo 365 del RRC

a)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso i), y letra b), del RRC, las entidades incluirán una descripción de las actividades y riesgos cubiertos por los modelos de VaR y SVaR, especificando cómo se distribuyen en las carteras o subcarteras para las que la autoridad competente haya concedido autorización.

b)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra b), del RRC, las entidades incluirán:

— una descripción del ámbito de aplicación de los modelos de VaR y SVaR que la autoridad competente haya autorizado;

— cuando proceda, información sobre qué entes del grupo utilizan estos modelos y de qué manera los modelos representan todos los modelos utilizados al nivel del grupo, así como el porcentaje de los requisitos de fondos propios cubierto por los modelos o si se utilizan los mismos modelos de VaR/SVaR para todos los entes con exposición al riesgo de mercado.

 

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso i), del RRC sobre las características del modelo utilizado incluirá:

c)

Una descripción general de los modelos de VaR y SVaR reglamentarios.

d)

Una explicación de las principales diferencias, en su caso, entre los modelos utilizados a efectos de gestión y el modelo utilizado a efectos reglamentarios (10 días 99 %) en lo que respecta a los modelos de VaR y SVaR.

e)

En relación con los modelos de VaR:

i)

la frecuencia de actualización de los datos;

ii)

la duración del período de referencia que se utiliza para calibrar el modelo; la descripción del sistema de ponderación que se utiliza (en su caso);

iii)

una descripción de la forma en que las entidades determinan el período de tenencia de diez días (por ejemplo, ¿incrementan el VaR de un día por la raíz cuadrada de 10 o modelizan directamente el VaR de 10 días?);

iv)

una descripción del método de agregación, esto es, del método para agregar el riesgo específico y general (es decir, ¿las entidades calculan la exigencia específica como exigencia independiente, utilizando un método distinto del empleado para calcular el riesgo general, o utilizan un único modelo que diferencia el riesgo general y el riesgo específico?);

v)

el método de valoración (revaloración completa o uso de aproximaciones);

vi)

si, al simular posibles variaciones en los factores de riesgo, se utilizan rendimientos absolutos o relativos (es decir, un cambio proporcional de los precios o tipos o un cambio absoluto de los precios o tipos), o un método mixto.

f)

En relación con los modelos de SVaR:

i)

una descripción de la forma en que se determina el período de tenencia de diez días (por ejemplo, ¿la entidad incrementa el VaR de un día por la raíz cuadrada de 10 o modeliza directamente el VaR de 10 días?); si el método es el mismo que respecto de los modelos de VaR, las entidades podrán confirmar este hecho y remitir a la información indicada en la letra e), inciso iii), anterior;

ii)

una descripción del período de tensión escogido por la entidad y la motivación de dicha elección;

iii)

una descripción del método de valoración (revaloración completa o uso de aproximaciones).

g)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso iii), del RRC, las entidades incluirán una descripción de las pruebas de resistencia aplicadas a los parámetros de modelización coherente con la información divulgada con arreglo a la parte A), letra a), anterior (principales escenarios desarrollados para reflejar las características de las carteras a las que se aplican los modelos de VaR y SVaR al nivel del grupo).

h)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso iv), del RRC, las entidades incluirán una descripción del método utilizado para realizar pruebas retrospectivas o validar la exactitud y la coherencia interna de los datos y parámetros utilizados a efectos de los modelos internos y los procesos de modelización.

B)

Entidades que utilizan modelos internos para calcular los requisitos de fondos propios por riesgo incremental de impago y de migración (IRC) de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, secciones 3 y 4, del RRC

a)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso ii), y letra b), del RRC, las entidades incluirán una descripción de los riesgos cubiertos por los modelos de IRC, especificando cómo se distribuyen en las carteras o subcarteras para las que la autoridad competente haya concedido autorización.

b)

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra b), del RRC incluirá una descripción del ámbito de aplicación del modelo de IRC que la autoridad competente haya autorizado, junto con información sobre qué entes del grupo utilizan estos modelos y de qué manera los modelos representan todos los modelos utilizados al nivel del grupo, así como el porcentaje de los requisitos de fondos propios cubierto por los modelos o si se utilizan los mismos modelos de IRC para todos los entes con exposición al riesgo de mercado.

 

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso ii), del RRC sobre las características de los modelos de IRC utilizados incluirá:

c)

Una descripción general de la metodología empleada en los modelos internos a efectos del riesgo incremental de impago y de migración, que incluya:

i)

información sobre el enfoque de modelización general (en particular, el uso de modelos basados en diferenciales o de modelos basados en matrices de transición);

ii)

información sobre la calibración de la matriz de transición;

iii)

información sobre las hipótesis de correlación.

d)

Las entidades incluirán una descripción del método utilizado para determinar los horizontes de liquidez.

e)

Las entidades incluirán una descripción de la metodología utilizada para lograr que el cálculo del capital sea coherente con el preceptivo criterio de solidez.

f)

Las entidades incluirán una descripción del método utilizado en la validación de los modelos.

g)

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso iii), del RRC incluirá una descripción de las pruebas de resistencia aplicadas a los parámetros de modelización coherente con la información divulgada con arreglo a la parte B), letra a), anterior (principales escenarios desarrollados para reflejar las características de las carteras a las que se aplican los modelos de IRC al nivel del grupo).

h)

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso iv), del RRC, incluirá una descripción del método utilizado para realizar pruebas retrospectivas o validar la exactitud y la coherencia interna de los datos y parámetros utilizados a efectos de los modelos internos de IRC y los procesos de modelización.

C)

Entidades que utilizan modelos internos para calcular los requisitos de fondos propios para la cartera de negociación de correlación (medición del riesgo global) de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, sección 5, del RRC

a)

Al divulgar la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso ii), y letra b), del RRC, las entidades incluirán una descripción de los riesgos cubiertos por los modelos de medición del riesgo global, especificando cómo se distribuyen en las carteras o subcarteras para las que la autoridad competente haya concedido autorización.

b)

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra b), del RRC incluirá una descripción del ámbito de aplicación de los modelos de medición del riesgo global que la autoridad competente haya autorizado. Esta se complementará con información sobre qué entes del grupo utilizan estos modelos y de qué manera los modelos representan todos los modelos utilizados al nivel del grupo, así como el porcentaje de los requisitos de fondos propios cubierto por los modelos o si se utilizan los mismos modelos de IRC para todos los entes con exposición al riesgo de mercado.

 

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso ii), del RRC sobre las características de los modelos de medición del riesgo global utilizados incluirá:

c)

Una descripción general de la metodología utilizada para la negociación de correlación, que incluya:

i)

información sobre el método de modelización general (elección de la correlación de modelos entre impago/migraciones y diferencial: i) procesos estocásticos separados pero correlacionados que determinan migraciones/impagos y variaciones de los diferenciales; ii) cambios de los diferenciales que determinan migraciones/impagos; o iii) impagos/migraciones que determinan cambios de los diferenciales);

ii)

información utilizada para calibrar los parámetros de la correlación de base: determinación de precios LGD de los tramos (constantes o estocásticos);

iii)

información sobre la opción de envejecer o no las posiciones (ganancias y pérdidas basadas en la evolución simulada del mercado en el modelo y calculadas sobre la base del tiempo restante hasta el vencimiento de cada posición al final del horizonte de capital de un año o utilizando el tiempo restante hasta el vencimiento en la fecha de cálculo).

d)

Las entidades incluirán una descripción del método utilizado para determinar los horizontes de liquidez.

e)

Las entidades incluirán una descripción de la metodología utilizada para lograr que el cálculo del capital sea coherente con el preceptivo criterio de solidez.

f)

Las entidades incluirán una descripción del método utilizado en la validación de los modelos.

g)

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso iii), del RRC incluirá una descripción de las pruebas de resistencia aplicadas a los parámetros de modelización (principales escenarios desarrollados para reflejar las características de las carteras a las que se aplican los modelos de medición del riesgo global al nivel del grupo).

h)

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra a), inciso iv), del RRC incluirá una descripción del método utilizado para realizar pruebas retrospectivas o validar la exactitud y la coherencia interna de los datos y parámetros utilizados a efectos de los modelos internos de medición del riesgo global y los procesos de modelización.

i)

Las entidades complementarán la información divulgada sobre los modelos internos para el riesgo incremental de impago y de migración y para las carteras de negociación de correlación con la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra f), sobre el horizonte de liquidez medio ponderado de las subcarteras, en consonancia con la descripción facilitada en las filas B).a) y d), y C).a) y d) del cuadro EU MRB.

Plantilla EU MR2-A — Riesgo de mercado según el método de modelos internos (MMI). Formato fijo

5. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra e), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU MR2-A, que se recoge en el anexo XXIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1

VaR (el mayor de los valores a o b)

a

VaR del día anterior (VaRt-1)

Valor en riesgo del día anterior (VaRt-1) calculado con arreglo al artículo 365, apartado 1, del RRC.

b

Factor de multiplicación (mc) x media de los 60 días hábiles anteriores (VaRavg)

Media del valor en riesgo diario, calculado con arreglo al artículo 365, apartado 1, del RRC, durante los sesenta días hábiles anteriores (VaRavg), multiplicada por el factor de multiplicación (mc) de conformidad con el artículo 366 del RRC.

2

SVaR (el mayor de los valores a o b)

a

Último SVaR disponible (SVaRt-1)

Último valor en riesgo en situación de tensión disponible (SVaRt-1) calculado con arreglo al artículo 365, apartado 2, del RRC.

b

Factor de multiplicación (ms) x media de los 60 días hábiles anteriores (SVaRavg)

Media del valor en riesgo en situación de tensión, calculado en la forma y con la periodicidad especificadas en el artículo 365, apartado 2, del RRC, durante los sesenta días hábiles anteriores (sVaRavg), multiplicada por el factor de multiplicación (ms) de conformidad con artículo 366 del RRC.

3

IRC (el mayor de los valores a o b)

a

Cifra más reciente del IRC

Cifra de riesgo más reciente correspondiente al riesgo incremental de impago y de migración calculada de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, sección 3, del RRC.

b

Media de 12 semanas del IRC

Media de las cifras de riesgo correspondientes al riesgo incremental de impago y de migración calculadas con arreglo a la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, sección 3, del RRC durante las doce semanas anteriores.

4

Medición del riesgo global (el mayor de los valores a, b o c)

a

Cifra más reciente correspondiente a la medición del riesgo global

Cifra de riesgo más reciente correspondiente a la cartera de negociación de correlación calculada de conformidad con la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, sección 5, del RRC.

b

Media de 12 semanas correspondiente a la medición del riesgo global

Media de las cifras de riesgo correspondientes a la cartera de negociación de correlación calculadas con arreglo a la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, sección 5, del RRC durante las doce semanas anteriores.

c

Medición del riesgo global - Valor mínimo

El 8 % del requisito de fondos propios que, en el momento de calcular la cifra de riesgo más reciente a que se refiere la fila a de esta plantilla, se calcularía de conformidad con el artículo 338, apartado 4, del RRC en relación con todas aquellas posiciones incorporadas al modelo interno para la cartera de negociación de correlación.

5

Otros

«Otros» hace referencia a los fondos propios adicionales que los supervisores exijan a las entidades que utilicen el método de modelos internos para el riesgo de mercado (por ejemplo, capital adicional con arreglo al artículo 101 de la Directiva 2013/36/UE).

6

Total (1+2+3+4+5)

Letra de la columna

Explicación

a

Importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo

Divulgación de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo a que se refiere el artículo 438, letra d), del RRC, calculadas como el valor de la columna b multiplicado por 12,5 con arreglo al artículo 92, apartado 4, letra b), del RRC.

b

Requisitos de fondos propios

Requisitos de fondos propios por riesgo de mercado, tal como se determinan en la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, del RRC, de acuerdo con las instrucciones de las filas 1 a 4 anteriores.

Plantilla EU MR2-B — Estado de flujos de los importes ponderados por riesgo de las exposiciones al riesgo de mercado sujetas al MMI. Formato fijo

6. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 438, letra h), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU MR2-B, que se recoge en el anexo XXIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.

7. Las entidades divulgarán los flujos de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo indicando las variaciones entre dichos importes al final del día correspondiente a la fecha de referencia de la divulgación (tal como se especifica en la fila 8 siguiente) y esos mismos importes al final del día correspondiente a la fecha de referencia de la divulgación anterior (tal como se especifica en la fila 1 siguiente; cuando la divulgación sea trimestral, final del trimestre anterior al trimestre de la período de referencia de la divulgación). Las entidades podrán complementar la información divulgada con arreglo al pilar 3 proporcionando la misma información con respecto a los tres trimestres anteriores.

8. Las entidades explicarán en una reseña adjunta a la plantilla las cifras indicadas en su fila 8, es decir, cualesquiera otros factores que contribuyan significativamente a las variaciones de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

1

Importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo al cierre del período anterior

Importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo al final del período anterior resultantes de la suma de los requisitos de fondos propios con arreglo al artículo 364 del RRC, a excepción del artículo 364, apartado 2, letra a), del RRC, y cualesquiera fondos propios adicionales exigidos por los supervisores a las entidades que utilicen el método de modelos internos para el riesgo de mercado, multiplicada por 12,5 de conformidad con el artículo 92, apartado 4, letra b), del RRC.

2

Variación de los niveles de riesgo

Cambios debidos a cambios en las posiciones, distintos de los provocados por modificaciones de la política de regulación.

3

Modificaciones del modelo

Actualizaciones significativas del modelo para adaptarlo a la experiencia reciente (por ejemplo, recalibración), así como cambios significativos en el alcance del modelo. Si se han realizado varias actualizaciones del modelo, podrían ser necesarias filas adicionales.

4

Metodología y política

Cambios de los métodos de cálculo motivados por la modificación de las políticas de regulación.

5

Adquisiciones y cesiones

Modificaciones debidas a la adquisición o cesión de líneas de negocio/productos o entes.

6

Fluctuaciones de los tipos de cambio

Variaciones derivadas de las fluctuaciones en la conversión de divisas.

7

Otros

Esta categoría servirá para reflejar las variaciones que no puedan atribuirse a ninguna de las categorías de factores contempladas en las filas 2 a 6 de esta plantilla; las explicaciones relativas a los factores que hayan impulsado tales variaciones deberán facilitarse en la reseña adjunta.

8

Importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo al cierre del periodo de divulgación

Importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo al final del período resultantes de la suma de los requisitos de fondos propios con arreglo al artículo 364 del RRC, a excepción del artículo 364, apartado 2, letra a), del RRC, y cualesquiera fondos propios adicionales exigidos por los supervisores a las entidades que utilicen el método de modelos internos para el riesgo de mercado, multiplicada por 12,5 de conformidad con el artículo 92, apartado 4, letra b), del RRC.

1a /1b/ 8a/8b

Se utilizarán las filas 1a/1b y 8a/8b de esta plantilla cuando los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo / requisitos de fondos propios relativos a cualquiera de las columnas a a d de esta plantilla sean la media de sesenta días (para el VaR y el SVaR) o la media de doce semanas o la medida mínima (para el IRC y la medición del riesgo global), y no los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo / requisitos de fondos propios al final del período (anterior o de divulgación) de conformidad con el artículo 364, apartado 1, letra a), inciso i), y letra b), inciso i), apartado 2, letra b), inciso i), y apartado 3, letra a), del RRC. El importe que figurará en las filas adicionales 1a y 8b será la diferencia entre el importe de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo final obtenido a partir de las medidas medias, tal como se indica en las filas 1 u 8 de esta plantilla, y las medidas obtenidas directamente a partir de los modelos indicadas en las filas 1b/8a de esta plantilla. En estos casos, las filas adicionales relativas al ajuste reglamentario (1a y 8b de esta plantilla) garantizarán que las entidades puedan indicar el origen de los cambios en los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo o los requisitos de fondos propios basándose en las últimas cifras de estos al final del período (anterior o de divulgación), indicadas en las filas 1b y 8a de esta plantilla. En tal caso, las filas 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 y 7 de esta plantilla permitirán conciliar el valor de sus filas 1b y 8a (1).

Letra de la columna

Explicación

a

VaR Factores fundamentales de las variaciones durante el período, con arreglo a las filas 2 a 7 de esta plantilla (sobre la base de una estimación razonable), de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo según el valor en riesgo derivados de los requisitos de fondos propios de conformidad con el artículo 364, apartado 1, letra a), del RRC.

b

SVaR

Factores fundamentales de las variaciones durante el período, con arreglo a las filas 2 a 7 de esta plantilla (sobre la base de una estimación razonable), de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo según el valor en riesgo en situación de tensión derivados de los requisitos de fondos propios de conformidad con el artículo 364, apartado 1, letra b), del RRC, y cualesquiera fondos propios adicionales exigidos por los supervisores.

c

IRC

Factores fundamentales de las variaciones durante el período, con arreglo a las filas 2 a 7 de esta plantilla (sobre la base de una estimación razonable), de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo según el riesgo incremental de impago y de migración derivados de los requisitos de fondos propios de conformidad con el artículo 364, apartado 2, letra b), del RRC, y cualesquiera fondos propios adicionales exigidos por los supervisores.

d

Medición del riesgo global

Factores fundamentales de las variaciones durante el período, con arreglo a las filas 2 a 7 de esta plantilla (sobre la base de una estimación razonable), de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo según la cartera de negociación de correlación derivados de los requisitos de fondos propios de conformidad con el artículo 364, apartado 3, del RRC, y cualesquiera fondos propios adicionales exigidos por los supervisores.

e

Otros

Factores fundamentales de las variaciones durante el período, con arreglo a las filas 2 a 7 de esta plantilla, de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo sobre la base de aproximaciones mediante modelos no contempladas en las columnas a a d.

f

Total de los importes de las exposiciones ponderadas por riesgo (a + b + c + d + e)

g

Requisitos de fondos propios totales (f x 8 %)

(1)   

A modo ilustrativo, véase Comité de Supervisión Bancaria de Basilea del Banco de Pagos Internacionales, DIS Disclosure requirements, DIS99 Worked examples («Requisitos de divulgación DIS99, ejemplos prácticos», documento en inglés), diciembre de 2019.

Plantilla EU MR3 — Valores según el MMI para las carteras de negociación. Formato fijo

9. Las entidades divulgarán la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra d), del RRC siguiendo las instrucciones que figuran a continuación en el presente anexo para cumplimentar la plantilla EU MR3, que se recoge en el anexo XXIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

Número de fila

Explicación

 

VaR (10 días, 99 %)

Valor en riesgo con arreglo al artículo 365, apartado 1, del RRC.

Los importes no incluirán los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales impuestos por decisión del supervisor (en relación con el multiplicador, por ejemplo).

1 a 4

Cifra más alta / más baja / media del valor en riesgo diario durante el período y valor en riesgo diario al cierre del período.

 

SVaR (10 días, 99 %)

Valor en riesgo en situación de tensión con arreglo al artículo 365, apartado 2, del RRC.

Los importes no incluirán los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales impuestos por decisión del supervisor (multiplicador).

5 a 8

Cifra más alta / más baja / media del valor en riesgo diario en situación de tensión durante el período y valor en riesgo diario al cierre del período.

 

IRC (99,9 %)

Valor del riesgo incremental de impago y de migración con arreglo a la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, sección 3, del RRC.

Los importes no incluirán los requisitos de fondos propios adicionales impuestos por decisión del supervisor (multiplicador).

9 a 12

Cifra más alta / más baja / media del IRC durante el período y valor en riesgo diario al cierre del período.

 

Medición del riesgo global (99,9 %)

Valor de las carteras de negociación de correlación con arreglo a la parte tercera, título IV, capítulo 5, sección 5, del RRC.

13 a 16

Cifra más alta / más baja / media correspondiente a las carteras de negociación de correlación durante el período y valor en riesgo diario al cierre del período.

Letra de la columna

Explicación

a

Valores más altos / más bajos / medios durante el período de divulgación y valores al cierre del período correspondientes a las filas 1 a 16 de esta plantilla.

Plantilla EU MR4 — Comparación de las estimaciones del VaR con las pérdidas y ganancias. Plantilla flexible

10. En relación con la información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra g), del RRC, las entidades facilitarán el gráfico que se recoge en el anexo XXIX del presente Reglamento de Ejecución, incluyendo en él la información indicada en el cuadro.


Referencias jurídicas e instrucciones

 

Explicación

 

La información a que se refiere el artículo 455, letra g), del RRC incluirá la medida del valor en riesgo utilizada con fines reglamentarios de conformidad con el artículo 365, apartado 1, del RRC, calibrada según un período de tenencia de un día con un nivel de confianza del 99 % a efectos de comparación con los resultados de negociación de la entidad.

 

Las entidades presentarán un análisis de los «valores atípicos» (excepciones de las pruebas retrospectivas con arreglo al artículo 366 del RRC) observados en los resultados de las pruebas retrospectivas, especificando las fechas y el correspondiente exceso (VaR-pérdidas y ganancias). El análisis especificará, como mínimo, los factores fundamentales de las excepciones.

Las entidades facilitarán comparaciones similares de las pérdidas y ganancias reales e hipotéticas (es decir, partiendo de variaciones hipotéticas en los valores de la cartera que se producirían si las posiciones al cierre de la jornada se mantuvieran inalteradas) con arreglo al artículo 366 del RRC.

Las entidades complementarán esta información con información sobre sus pérdidas y ganancias reales y, en especial, aclararán si incluyen reservas y, en caso negativo, el modo en que las reservas se integran en el proceso de realización de pruebas retrospectivas.

ANNEX XXXI




ANNEX XXXI

Table EU ORA - Qualitative information on operational risk

Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information



Legal basis

Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

Points (a), (b), (c) and(d) of Article 435(1) CRR

(a)

Disclosure of the risk management objectives and policies

Article 446 CRR

(b)

Disclosure of the approaches for the assessment of minimum own funds requirements

Article 446 CRR

(c)

Description of the AMA methodology approach used (if applicable)

Article 454 CRRR

(d)

Disclose the use of insurance for risk mitigation in the Advanced Measurement Approach (if applicable)

Template EU OR1 - Operational risk own funds requirements and risk-weighted exposure amounts



Banking activities

a

b

c

d

e

Relevant indicator

Own funds requirements

Risk exposure amount

Year-3

Year-2

Last year

1

Banking activities subject to basic indicator approach (BIA)

 

 

 

 

 

2

Banking activities subject to standardised (TSA) / alternative standardised (ASA) approaches

 

 

 

 

 

3

Subject to TSA:

 

 

 

 

 

4

Subject to ASA:

 

 

 

 

 

5

Banking activities subject to advanced measurement approaches AMA

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX XXXII Instructions for operational risk disclosure templates




ANNEX XXXII

Instructions for operational risk disclosure templates

Table EU ORA - Qualitative information on operational risk. Flexible table

1. Institutions shall disclose the information included in this table in application of Articles 435(1), 446 and 454 of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 24 ) (‘CRR’).

2. Institutions shall follow the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete the Operational Risk disclosure table EU ORA as presented in Annex XXXI to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

(a)

Disclosure of the risk management objectives and policies

In accordance with Article 435(1) CRR, institutions shall disclose their risk management objectives and policies for operational risk, including:

— strategies and processes;

— structure and organisation of risk management function for operational risk;

— risk measurements and control;

— operational risk reporting;

— policies for hedging and mitigating operational risk.

(b)

Disclosure of the approaches for the assessment of minimum own fund requirements

Institutions shall provide a description of the methods used for calculating the own funds requirements for operational risk and the methods for identifying, assessing and managing operational risk.

In case of partial use of methodologies, institutions shall disclose the scope and coverage of the different methodologies used.

(c)

Description of the AMA methodology approach used (if applicable)

Institutions that disclose the information on the operational risk in accordance with Article 312(2) CRR shall disclose a description of the methodology used, including a description of standards on the external and internal data referred to in Articles 322(3) and (4) CRR.

(d)

Disclose the use of insurance for risk mitigation in the Advanced Measurement Approach (if applicable)

Institutions should provide information on the use of insurances and other risk transfer mechanism for operational risk mitigation when using Advance measurement approaches in accordance with Article 454 CRR.

Template EU OR1 - Operational risk own funds requirements and risk-weighted exposure amounts. Fixed template

3. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in Articles 446 and 454 CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete the Operational Risk disclosure template EU OR1 as presented in Annex XXXI to this Implementing Regulation. This template provides information on the calculation of own funds requirements in accordance with Articles 312 to 324 (for Operational Risk under the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA), the Standardised Approach (TSA), the Alternative Standardised Approach (ASA) and the Advanced Measurement Approaches (AMA)) of Title III of Part Three CRR.

4. Institutions using the BIA, TSA and/or ASA shall specify in the narrative accompanying the template if the information at financial year end that they are using for the calculation of own funds requirements is: a) based on audited figures, or: b) in case that they are not available, it is based on business estimates. In the latter case, institutions shall specify any exceptional circumstance that led to changes in these figures (e.g. recent acquisitions or disposals of entities or activities).



Instructions for completing the disclosure template EU OR1

Column

Explanation

a, b, c

Relevant Indicator

The term ‘relevant indicator’ refers to ‘the sum of the elements’ at the end of the financial year as defined in Table 1 (for institutions using BIA) included in Article 316(1) CRR. For institutions using TSA or ASA the ‘relevant indicator’ at the end of financial year as defined in Articles 317 to 319 CRR.

Institutions using the relevant indicator to calculate the own funds requirements for operational risk (BIA, TSA and ASA) shall disclose the relevant indicator for the respective years in columns a to c of this template. Moreover, in the case of a combined use of different approaches as referred in Article 314 CRR, institutions also disclose the relevant indicator for the activities subject to AMA. AMA banks shall also disclose the relevant indicator for the activities subject to AMA.

If the institution has less than 3 years of data on ‘relevant indicator’ available, the available historical data (audited figures) shall be assigned by priority to the corresponding columns in the template. If, for instance, historical data for only one year is available, it shall be disclosed in column c of this template. If it seems reasonable, the forward looking estimates shall then be included in column b (estimate of next year) and column a (estimate of year +2) of this template.

Furthermore if there are no historical data on ‘relevant indicator’ available the institution may disclose forward-looking business estimates used for own funds requirements computation.

d

Own fund requirements

The own fund requirements calculated in accordance with the approach used, in accordance with Articles 312 to 324 CRR. The resulting amount is disclosed in column d of this template.

e

Risk exposure amount

Point (e) of Article 92(3) and Article 92(4) CRR. Own funds requirements in column d of this template multiplied by 12.5.

Row

Explanation

1

Banking activities subject to Basic indicator approach (BIA)

This row shall present the amounts corresponding to activities subject to the BIA to calculate the own funds requirements for operational risk (Articles 315 and 316 CRR).

2

Banking activities subject to Standardised (TSA) / Alternative Standardised (ASA) approaches

This row shall present the own funds requirements calculated in accordance with the TSA and ASA (Articles 317 to 320 CRR).

3

Subject to TSA

In the case of using the TSA, relevant indicator for each respective year shall include all the business lines as defined in table 2, included in Article 317 CRR.

4

Subject to ASA

Institutions using the ASA (Article 319 CRR) shall disclose the relevant indicator for the respective years.

5

Banking activities subject to Advanced measurement approaches AMA

The relevant data for AMA institutions (Article 312(2) and Articles 321 to 323 CRR) shall be disclosed.

In the case of combined use of different approaches in accordance with Article 314 CRR, the relevant indicator for activities subject to AMA shall also be disclosed. AMA banks shall also disclose the relevant indicator for the activities subject to AMA.

ANNEX XXXIII




ANNEX XXXIII

Table EU REMA - Remuneration policy

Institutions shall describe the main elements of their remuneration policies and how they implement these policies. In particular, the following elements, where relevant, shall be described:



Qualitative disclosures

(a)

Information relating to the bodies that oversee remuneration. Disclosures shall include:

— Name, composition and mandate of the main body (management body or remuneration committee as applicable) overseeing the remuneration policy and the number of meetings held by that main body during the financial year.

— External consultants whose advice has been sought, the body by which they were commissioned, and in which areas of the remuneration framework.

— A description of the scope of the institution’s remuneration policy (eg by regions, business lines), including the extent to which it is applicable to subsidiaries and branches located in third countries.

— A description of the staff or categories of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on institutions' risk profile.

(b)

Information relating to the design and structure of the remuneration system for identified staff. Disclosures shall include:

— An overview of the key features and objectives of remuneration policy, and information about the decision-making process used for determining the remuneration policy and the role of the relevant stakeholders.

— Information on the criteria used for performance measurement and ex ante and ex post risk adjustment.

— Whether the management body or the remuneration committee where established reviewed the institution’s remuneration policy during the past year, and if so, an overview of any changes that were made, the reasons for those changes and their impact on remuneration.

— Information of how the institution ensures that staff in internal control functions are remunerated independently of the businesses they oversee.

— Policies and criteria applied for the award of guaranteed variable remuneration and severance payments.

(c)

Description of the ways in which current and future risks are taken into account in the remuneration processes. Disclosures shall include an overview of the key risks, their measurement and how these measures affect remuneration.

(d)

The ratios between fixed and variable remuneration set in accordance with point (g) of Article 94(1) CRD.

(e)

Description of the ways in which the institution seeks to link performance during a performance measurement period with levels of remuneration. Disclosures shall include:

— An overview of main performance criteria and metrics for institution, business lines and individuals.

— An overview of how amounts of individual variable remuneration are linked to institution-wide and individual performance.

— Information on the criteria used to determine the balance between different types of instruments awarded including shares, equivalent ownership interest, options and other instruments.

— Information of the measures the institution will implement to adjust variable remuneration in the event that performance metrics are weak, including the institution’s criteria for determining ‘weak’ performance metrics.

(f)

Description of the ways in which the institution seeks to adjust remuneration to take account of longterm performance. Disclosures shall include:

— An overview of the institution’s policy on deferral, payout in instrument, retention periods and vesting of variable remuneration including where it is different among staff or categories of staff.

— Information of the institution’ criteria for ex post adjustments (malus during deferral and clawback after vesting, if permitted by national law).

— Where applicable, shareholding requirements that may be imposed on identified staff.

(g)

The description of the main parameters and rationale for any variable components scheme and any other non-cash benefit in accordance with point (f) of Article 450(1) CRR. Disclosures shall include:

— Information on the specific performance indicators used to determine the variable components of remuneration and the criteria used to determine the balance between different types of instruments awarded, including shares, equivalent ownership interests, share-linked instruments, equivalent non cash-instruments, options and other instruments.

(h)

Upon demand from the relevant Member State or competent authority, the total remuneration for each member of the management body or senior management.

(i)

Information on whether the institution benefits from a derogation laid down in Article 94(3) CRD in accordance with point (k) of Article 450(1) CRR.

— For the purposes of this point, institutions that benefit from such a derogation shall indicate whether this is on the basis of point (a) and/or point (b) of Article 94(3) CRD. They shall also indicate for which of the remuneration principles they apply the derogation(s), the number of staff members that benefit from the derogation(s) and their total remuneration, split into fixed and variable remuneration.

(j)

Large institutions shall disclose the quantitative information on the remuneration of their collective management body, differentiating between executive and non-executive members in accordance with Article 450(2) CRR.

Template EU REM1 - Remuneration awarded for the financial year



 

a

b

c

d

MB Supervisory function

MB Management function

Other senior management

Other identified staff

1

Fixed remuneration

Number of identified staff

 

 

 

 

2

Total fixed remuneration

 

 

 

 

3

Of which: cash-based

 

 

 

 

4

(Not applicable in the EU)

 

 

 

 

EU-4a

Of which: shares or equivalent ownership interests

 

 

 

 

5

Of which: share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

 

 

 

 

EU-5x

Of which: other instruments

 

 

 

 

6

(Not applicable in the EU)

 

 

 

 

7

Of which: other forms

 

 

 

 

8

(Not applicable in the EU)

 

 

 

 

9

Variable remuneration

Number of identified staff

 

 

 

 

10

Total variable remuneration

 

 

 

 

11

Of which: cash-based

 

 

 

 

12

Of which: deferred

 

 

 

 

EU-13a

Of which: shares or equivalent ownership interests

 

 

 

 

EU-14a

Of which: deferred

 

 

 

 

EU-13b

Of which: share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

 

 

 

 

EU-14b

Of which: deferred

 

 

 

 

EU-14x

Of which: other instruments

 

 

 

 

EU-14y

Of which: deferred

 

 

 

 

15

Of which: other forms

 

 

 

 

16

Of which: deferred

 

 

 

 

17

Total remuneration (2 + 10)

 

 

 

 

Template EU REM2 - Special payments to staff whose professional activities have a material impact on institutions’ risk profile (identified staff)



 

a

b

c

d

MB Supervisory function

MB Management function

Other senior management

Other identified staff

 

Guaranteed variable remuneration awards

1

Guaranteed variable remuneration awards - Number of identified staff

 

 

 

 

2

Guaranteed variable remuneration awards -Total amount

 

 

 

 

3

Of which guaranteed variable remuneration awards paid during the financial year, that are not taken into account in the bonus cap

 

 

 

 

 

Severance payments awarded in previous periods, that have been paid out during the financial year

4

Severance payments awarded in previous periods, that have been paid out during the financial year - Number of identified staff

 

 

 

 

5

Severance payments awarded in previous periods, that have been paid out during the financial year - Total amount

 

 

 

 

 

Severance payments awarded during the financial year

6

Severance payments awarded during the financial year - Number of identified staff

 

 

 

 

7

Severance payments awarded during the financial year - Total amount

 

 

 

 

8

Of which paid during the financial year

 

 

 

 

9

Of which deferred

 

 

 

 

10

Of which severance payments paid during the financial year, that are not taken into account in the bonus cap

 

 

 

 

11

Of which highest payment that has been awarded to a single person

 

 

 

 

Template EU REM3 - Deferred remuneration



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

EU - g

EU - h

 

Deferred and retained remuneration

Total amount of deferred remuneration awarded for previous performance periods

Of which due to vest in the financial year

Of which vesting in subsequent financial years

Amount of performance adjustment made in the financial year to deferred remuneration that was due to vest in the financial year

Amount of performance adjustment made in the financial year to deferred remuneration that was due to vest in future performance years

Total amount of adjustment during the financial year due to ex post implicit adjustments (i.e.changes of value of deferred remuneration due to the changes of prices of instruments)

Total amount of deferred remuneration awarded before the financial year actually paid out in the financial year

Total of amount of deferred remuneration awarded for previous performance period that has vested but is subject to retention periods

1

MB Supervisory function

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Cash-based

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Shares or equivalent ownership interests

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Other instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Other forms

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

MB Management function

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Cash-based

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Shares or equivalent ownership interests

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

Share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

Other instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

Other forms

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13

Other senior management

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

14

Cash-based

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

15

Shares or equivalent ownership interests

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16

Share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

17

Other instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

18

Other forms

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

19

Other identified staff

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

20

Cash-based

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

21

Shares or equivalent ownership interests

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

22

Share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

23

Other instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

24

Other forms

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

25

Total amount

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU REM4 - Remuneration of 1 million EUR or more per year



 

a

 

EUR

Identified staff that are high earners as set out in Article 450(i) CRR

1

1 000 000 to below 1 500 000

 

2

1 500 000 to below 2 000 000

 

3

2 000 000 to below 2 500 000

 

4

2 500 000 to below 3 000 000

 

5

3 000 000 to below 3 500 000

 

6

3 500 000 to below 4 000 000

 

7

4 000 000 to below 4 500 000

 

8

4 500 000 to below 5 000 000

 

9

5 000 000 to below 6 000 000

 

10

6 000 000 to below 7 000 000

 

11

7 000 000 to below 8 000 000

 

x

To be extended as appropriate, if further payment bands are needed.

 

Template EU REM5 - Information on remuneration of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on institutions’ risk profile (identified staff)



 

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

Management body remuneration

Business areas

 

MB Supervisory function

MB Management function

Total MB

Investment banking

Retail banking

Asset management

Corporate functions

Independent internal control functions

All other

Total

1

Total number of identified staff

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Of which: members of the MB

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Of which: other senior management

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Of which: other identified staff

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Total remuneration of identified staff

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Of which: variable remuneration

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Of which: fixed remuneration

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX XXXIV




ANNEX XXXIV

Instructions for the disclosure of remuneration policy templates

Table EU REMA – Remuneration policy: Flexible format

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in points (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f), (j) and (k) of Article 450(1) and of Article 450(2) CRR ( 25 ) by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete table EU REMA which is presented in Annex XXXIII to this Implementing Regulation.

2. This table has a flexible format. In case that institutions apply a different format, they shall provide information comparable with the information required in this table, with a similar level of granularity and including all the substance information required.

3. For the purpose of this table and the templates explained in this annex, award means the granting of variable remuneration for a specific accrual period, independently of the actual point in time where the awarded amount is paid.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

(a)

Information relating to the bodies that oversee remuneration. Disclosures shall include:

— name, composition and mandate of the main body (management body and remuneration committee where established) overseeing the remuneration policy and the number of meetings held by that main body during the financial year;

— external consultants whose advice has been sought, the body by which they were commissioned, and in which areas of the remuneration framework;

— a description of the scope of the institution’s remuneration policy (eg by regions, business lines), including the extent to which it is applicable to subsidiaries and branches located in third countries;

— a description of the staff or categories of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on institutions’ risk profile (identified staff).

(b)

Information relating to the design and structure of the remuneration system for identified staff. Disclosures shall include:

— an overview of the key features and objectives of remuneration policy, and information about the decision-making process used for determining the remuneration policy and the role of the relevant stakeholders (e.g. the shareholders’ meeting);

— information on the criteria used for performance measurement and ex ante and ex post risk adjustment;

— whether the management body and the remuneration committee, where established, reviewed the institution’s remuneration policy during the past year, and if so, an overview of any changes that were made, the reasons for those changes and their impact on remuneration;

— information of how the institution ensures that staff in internal control functions are remunerated independently of the businesses they oversee;

— policies and criteria applied for the award of guaranteed variable remuneration and severance payments.

(c)

Description of the ways in which current and future risks are taken into account in the remuneration processes

Disclosures shall include an overview of the key risks, their measurement and how these measures affect remuneration.

(d)

The ratios between fixed and variable remuneration set in accordance with point (g) of Article 94(1) of Directive (EU) 2013/36(‘CRD’) (1)

(e)

Description of the ways in which the institution seeks to link performance during a performance measurement period with levels of remuneration

Disclosures shall include:

— an overview of main performance criteria and metrics for institution, business lines and individuals.

— an overview of how amounts of individual variable remuneration are linked to institution-wide and individual performance.

— information on the criteria used to determine the balance between different types of instruments awarded including shares, equivalent ownership interest, options and other instruments

— information of the measures the institution will implement to adjust variable remuneration in the event that performance metrics are weak, including the institution’s criteria for determining performance metrics when the performance metrics are considered ‘weak’. In accordance with point (n) of Article 94(1) CRD, to be paid or vested the variable remuneration has to be justified on the basis of the performance of the institution, the business unit and the individual concerned. Institutions shall explain the criteria/thresholds for determining that the performance is weak and that does not justify that the variable remuneration can be paid or vested.

(f)

Description of the ways in which the institution seeks to adjust remuneration to take account of long-term performance

Disclosures shall include:

— an overview of the institution’s policy on deferral, payout in instrument, retention periods and vesting of variable remuneration including where it is different among staff or categories of staff.

— information of the institution’ criteria for ex post adjustments (malus during deferral and clawback after vesting, if permitted by national law).

— where applicable, shareholding requirements that may be imposed on identified staff.

(g)

The description of the main parameters and rationale for any variable components scheme and any other non-cash benefit, as referred to in point (f) of Article 450(1) CRR. Disclosures shall include:

— Information on the specific risk/performance indicators used to determine the variable components of remuneration and the criteria used to determine the balance between different types of instruments awarded, including shares, equivalent ownership interests, share-linked instruments, equivalent non cash-instruments, options and other instruments.

(h)

Upon demand from the relevant Member State or competent authority, the total remuneration for each member of the management body or senior management, as referred to in point (j) of Article 450(1) CRR

(i)

Information on whether the institution benefits from a derogation laid down in Article 94(3) CRD, as referred to in point (k) of Article 450(1) CRR

For the purposes of this point, institutions that benefit from such a derogation shall indicate whether this is on the basis of point (a) and/or point (b) of Article 94(3) CRD. They shall also indicate which of the remuneration requirements they apply the derogation(s), (i.e., point (l) and/or (m) and/or (o) of Article 94(1) CRD), the number of staff members that benefit from the derogation(s) and their total remuneration, split into fixed and variable remuneration.

(j)

Large institutions shall disclose the quantitative information on the remuneration of their collective management body, differentiating between executive and non-executive members, as referred to in Article 450(2) CRR.

(1)   

DIRECTIVE 2013/36/EU OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 26 June 2013 on access to the activity of credit institutions and the prudential supervision of credit institutions and investment firms, amending Directive 2002/87/EC and repealing Directives 2006/48/EC and 2006/49/EC (OJ L 176, 27.6.2013, p. 338).

Template EU REM1 – Remuneration awarded for the financial year: Fixed format

4. Institutions shall apply the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU REM1 as presented in Annex XXXIII to this Implementing Regulation, in application of point (h)(i)-(ii) of Article 450(1) CRR.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1 and 9

Number of identified staff

The number of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on the institutions’ risk profile in accordance with Article 92 CRD and the Commission Delegated Regulation on identified staff (1) implementing Article 94(2) CRD (identified staff) and are beneficiaries of the remuneration components listed in this template. It shall be calculated using the FTE (full time equivalent) approach for identified staff other than members of the management body where numbers shall be disclosed as headcount.

2

Total fixed remuneration

Sum of amounts in rows 3 to 7 of this template

3

Of which: cash-based

The amount of cash-based remuneration within the fixed remuneration

EU-4a

Of which: shares or equivalent ownership interests

The sum of the amounts of shares or equivalent ownership interests, subject to the legal structure of the institution concerned referred to in point (l)(i) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the fixed remuneration.

5

Of which: share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

The sum of the amounts of share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments referred to in point (l)(i) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the fixed remuneration

EU-5x

Of which: other instruments

The amount of other instruments referred to in point (l)(ii) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the fixed remuneration

7

Of which: other forms

The amounts of fixed remuneration awarded for the financial year that are other than disclosed in other rows under the total fixed remuneration heading

This could include proportionate regular pension contributions, or benefits (where such benefits are without consideration of any performance criteria), referred to in recital (64) CRD or other forms of remuneration like car allowances.

10

Total variable remuneration

Sum of amounts in rows 11, EU-13a, EU-13b, EU-14x and 15 of this template

The sum of all remuneration components that are not fixed remuneration that is disclosed in row 2 of this template, including guaranteed variable and severance payments awarded during that year.

11

Of which: cash-based

The amount of cash-based remuneration within the variable remuneration

12, EU-14a, EU-14b, EU-14y and 16

Of which: deferred

The amounts of variable remuneration by different types of component that are deferred, determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD.

EU-13a

Of which: shares or equivalent ownership interests

The sum of the amounts of shares or equivalent ownership interests, subject to the legal structure of the institution concerned referred to in point (l)(i) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the variable remuneration

EU-13b

Of which: share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

The sum of the amounts of share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments referred to in point (l)(i) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the variable remuneration

EU-14x

Of which: other instruments

The amount of other instruments referred to in point (l)(ii) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the variable remuneration

15

Of which: other forms

The amounts of variable remuneration awarded for the financial year that are other than those disclosed in other rows under the variable remuneration heading

17

Total remuneration

Sum of amounts in rows 2 and 10 of this template.

Column letter

Explanation

a

MB Supervisory function

The Management Body in its Supervisory function, as the management body acting in its role of overseeing and monitoring management decision-making, as defined in point (8) of Article 3(1) CRD

Institutions shall disclose information based on headcount.

In accordance with Article 13 CRR, EU parent institutions shall disclose this information on the basis of their consolidated situation and large subsidiaries of EU parents institutions shall disclose this information on an individual basis or, where applicable in accordance with this Regulation and with CRD, on a sub-consolidated basis. The disclosure entity will reflect in this column information on their management body. If following Articles 6 and 13 CRR, the disclosure is at consolidated or sub-consolidated level, information on the identified staff of the management bodies of the subsidiaries shall be disclosed under the relevant business area

b

MB Management function

The members of the Management Body, who are responsible for its Management functions

Institutions shall disclose information based on headcount.

Institutions shall disclose information based on headcount. In accordance with Article 13 CRR. EU parent institutions shall disclose this information on the basis of their consolidated situation and large subsidiaries of EU parents institutions shall disclose this information on an individual basis or, where applicable in accordance with this Regulation and with CRD, on a sub-consolidated basis .The disclosure entity will reflect in this column information on their management body. If following Articles 6 and 13 CRR, the disclosure is at consolidated or sub-consolidated level, information on the identified staff of the management bodies of the subsidiaries shall be disclosed under the relevant business area

c

Other senior management

Senior management as defined in point (9) of Article 3(1) CRD

Institutions shall disclose the number of senior managers that are not disclosed under Management Body in its management function and as Other identified staff. Institutions shall disclose information based on FTE.

d

Other identified staff

Other staff than Management Body in its Supervisory function or in its Management function, and other than senior management, whose professional activities have a material impact on the institution’s risk profile in accordance with the criteria set out in the Commission Delegated Regulation on identified staff implementing Article 94(2) CRD and where appropriate in addition based on institutions’ criteria

Institutions may include in this template the breakdown by business areas proposed in template EU REM5. Institutions shall disclose information based on FTE.

(1)   

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) No 604/2014 of 4 March 2014 supplementing Directive 2013/36/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council with regard to regulatory technical standards with respect to qualitative and appropriate quantitative criteria to identify categories of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on an institution's risk profile (OJ L 167, 6.6.2014, p. 30).

Template EU REM2 – Special payments to staff whose professional activities have a material impact on institutions’ risk profile (identified staff): Fixed format

5. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in point (h)(v)-(vii) of Article 450(1) CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU REM2 which is presented in Annex XXXIII to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1, 4 and 6

Number of identified staff

The number of identified staff whose professional activities have a material impact on the institutions’ risk profile in accordance with Article 92 CRD and the Commission Delegated Regulation on identified staff implementing Article 94(2) CRD, for each specific remuneration components

For columns a and b (MB) of this template the value shall be based on headcount. For columns c and d of this template the value shall be calculated using the FTE (full time equivalent) method.

Row 4 of this template refers to severance payments awarded in previous periods and paid out during the financial year (present year) while row 6 of this template refers to awarded during the financial year (present year).

2

Guaranteed variable remuneration awards – Total amount

The amount of guaranteed variable remuneration awards, as referred to in point (e) of Article 94(1) CRD.

3

Of which, guaranteed variable remuneration awards paid during the financial year, that are not taken into account in the bonus cap

The amounts of guaranteed variable remuneration awards as referred to in point (e) of Article 94(1) CRD paid during the financial year (present year), which are not taken into account in the bonus cap

With regard to the disclosed information referred to in points (g) and (h)(v)-(vi) of Article 450(1) CRR, institutions shall clearly state whether the aggregate quantitative information on remuneration broken down by business area reflects the bonus cap when new sign-on and severance payments are involved.

5

Severance payments awarded in previous periods, that have been paid out during the financial year – Total amount

The amount of severance payments as referred to in point (h) of Article 94(1) CRD that have been awarded in previous periods and have been paid out during the financial year (present year)

7

Severance payments awarded during the financial year – Total amount

The amount of severance payments as referred to in point (h) of Article 94(1) CRD, awarded during the financial year (present year)

8

Of which, severance payments awarded during the financial year – Paid during the financial year

The amount of severance payments as referred to in point (h) of Article 94(1) CRD, awarded during the financial year that has been paid during the financial year

9

Of which, severance payments awarded during the financial year – Deferred

The amounts of severance payments as referred to in point (h) of Article 94(1) CRD, awarded during the financial year, which are deferred, determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD

10

Of which, severance payments paid during the financial year, that are not taken into account in the bonus cap

The amounts of severance payments as referred to in point (h) of Article 94(1) CRD, paid during the financial year, which are not taken into account in the bonus cap

With regard to the disclosed information referred to in points (g) and (h)(v)-(vi) of Article 450(1) CRR, institutions shall clearly state whether the aggregate quantitative information on remuneration broken down by business area reflects the bonus cap when new sign-on and severance payments are involved.

11

Of which, severance payments awarded during the financial year – Highest payment that has been awarded to a single person

The amount of the highest severance payment, as referred to in point (h) of Article 94(1) CRD, that has been awarded to a single person during the financial year.

Column letter

Explanation

a

MB Supervisory function

The Management Body in its Supervisory function, as the management body acting in its role of overseeing and monitoring management decision-making, as defined in point (8) of Article 3(1) CRD (Headcount)

b

MB Management function

The members of the Management Body, who are responsible for its Management functions (Headcount)

c

Other senior management

Senior management as defined in point (9) of Article 3(1) CRD

Institutions shall disclose the number of senior managers that are not disclosed under Management Body in its management function and as Other identified staff (FTE).

d

Other identified staff

Other staff than Management Body in its Supervisory function or in its Management function, and other than senior management, whose professional activities have a material impact on the institution’s risk profile in accordance with the criteria set out in the Commission Delegated Regulation on identified staff implementing Article 94(2) CRD and where appropriate in addition based on institutions’ criteria

Institutions may include in this template the breakdown by business areas proposed in template EU REM5 (FTE).

Template EU REM3 –Deferred remuneration: Fixed format

6. Institutions shall disclose the information referred point (h)(iii)-(iv) of Article 450(1) CRR following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU REM3 which is presented in Annex XXXIII to this Implementing Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1

MB Supervisory function

The Management Body in its Supervisory function, as the management body acting in its role of overseeing and monitoring management decision-making, as defined in point (8) of Article 3(1) CRD

Sum of amounts in rows 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 of this template

2, 8, 14 and 20

Cash-based

The amount of cash-based remuneration within the variable remuneration

3, 9, 15 and 21

Shares or equivalent ownership interests

The sum of the amounts of shares or equivalent ownership interests, subject to the legal structure of the institution concerned referred to in point (l)(i) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the variable remuneration

4, 10, 16 and 22

Share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments

The sum of the amounts of share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments referred to in point (l)(i) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the variable remuneration

5, 11, 17 and 23

Other instruments

The amount of other instruments referred to in point (l)(ii) of Article 94(1) CRD, within the variable remuneration

6, 12, 18 and 24

Other forms

The amounts of variable remuneration other than disclosed in rows ‘Cash-based’, ‘Shares or equivalent ownership interests, subject to the legal structure of the institution concerned or share-linked instruments or equivalent non-cash instruments’ and ‘Other instruments’

This could include proportionate regular pension contributions, or benefits (where such benefits are without consideration of any performance criteria), referred to in recital (64) CRD, or other forms of remuneration like car allowances.

7

MB Management function

The members of the Management Body, who are responsible for its Management functions; sum of amounts in rows 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 of this template.

13

Other senior management

Senior management as defined in point (9) of Article 3(1) CRD; sum of amounts in rows 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 of this template

Institutions shall disclose the number of senior managers that are not disclosed under Management Body in its management function and as Other identified staff.

19

Other identified staff

Other staff than Management Body in its Supervisory function or in its Management function, and other than senior management, whose professional activities have a material impact on the institution’s risk profile in accordance with the criteria set out in the Commission Delegated Regulation on identified staff implementing Article 94(2) CRD and where appropriate in addition based on institutions’ criteria; sum of amounts in rows 20, 21, 22, 23 and 24 of this template

25

Total amount

Sum of amounts in rows 1, 7, 13 and 19 of this template

Column letter

Explanation

a

Total amount of deferred remuneration awarded for previous performance periods

The amount of deferred remuneration, as determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD, that has been awarded for previous performance periods (sum of amounts in columns b and c of this template)

b

Of which due to vest in the financial year

The amount of deferred remuneration awarded for previous performance periods, as determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD, that is due to vest in the financial year

c

Of which vesting in subsequent financial years

The amount of deferred remuneration awarded for previous performance periods, as determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD, that will be vested in the subsequent financial years

d

Amount of performance adjustment made in the financial year to deferred remuneration that was due to vest in the financial year

The amount of performance adjustment to deferred remuneration, as determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD, that was due to vest in the financial years

e

Amount of performance adjustment made in the financial year to deferred remuneration that was due to vest in future financial years

The amount of performance adjustment to deferred remuneration, as determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD, that was due to vest in future performance years

f

Total amount of adjustment during the financial year due to ex post implicit adjustments during the financial year (i.e. changes of value of deferred remuneration due to the changes of prices of instruments)

When relevant the amount of change of value during the financial year due to ex post implicit adjustments, like changes of value of deferred remuneration due to the changes of prices of instruments, estimated on a best effort basis.

EU - g

Total amount of deferred remuneration awarded before the financial year actually paid out in the financial year

The amount of deferred remuneration, as determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD, that has been paid out in the financial year

As soon as the deferred remuneration is vested it shall be considered as paid out.

EU - h

Total of amount of deferred remuneration awarded for previous performance period that has vested but is subject to retention periods

The amount of deferred remuneration, awarded for previous performance periods, that has been vested but is subject to retention periods, as determined in accordance with Article 94 CRD

Template EU REM4 – Remuneration of 1 million EUR or more per year: Fixed format

7. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to point (i) of Article 450(1) CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU REM4 which is presented in Annex XXXIII to this Implementing Regulation.

8. Data shall be submitted using accounting year-end figures in EUR. All amounts shall be disclosed as full amounts, i.e. not rounded amounts, in euro (e.g. EUR 1 234 567 instead of EUR 1.2 million). Where remuneration is in a currency other than EUR, the exchange rate used by the Commission for financial programming and the budget for December of the reporting year shall be used for the conversion of the consolidated figures to be disclosed.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1 to 8

Remuneration between 1 and 5 million EUR per financial year, broken down by 500.000 EUR bands

9 to x

Remuneration more than 5 million EUR per financial year, broken down by 1 million EUR bands

Column letter

Explanation

a

Number of identified staff that have been remunerated EUR 1 million or more per financial year

Institutions shall disclose information based on headcount.

Template EU REM5 – Information of staff whose professional activities have a material impact on institutions’ risk profile (identified staff): Fixed format

9. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to point (g) of Article 450(1) CRR by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete template EU REM5 which is presented in Annex XXXIII to this Implementing Regulation.

10. Regarding the columns with the business areas breakdown, all lending, including wholesale lending, shall be included in retail lending. For investment banking, it shall include corporate finance and trading and sales. Further guidance on the activities comprised in those business lines can be found in Article 317 CRR within the table defining the business lines within the standardised approach for operational risk.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

1

Total number of identified staff

Staff members, whose professional activities have a material impact on institutions’ risk profile (identified staff) of an institution and its subsidiaries, including subsidiaries not subject to the CRD and all members of their respective management bodies

The value shall be disclosed based on FTE.

2

Of which: members of the MB

The number of members in the respective Management body in its Supervisory function and in its Management function, and in the whole Management body

3

Of which: other senior management

Other staff than the members of the Management Body, who are senior management as defined in point (9) of Article 3(1) CRD

4

Of which: other identified staff

Other staff than members of the Management Body, and other than senior management, whose professional activities have a material impact on the institution’s risk profile in accordance with the criteria set out in the Commission Delegated Regulation on identified staff implementing Article 94(2) CRD and where appropriate in addition based on institutions’ criteria

5

Total remuneration of identified staff

The total amount of remuneration shall mean all forms of fixed and variable remuneration and shall include payments and benefits, monetary or non-monetary, awarded directly to staff by or on behalf of institutions in exchange for professional services rendered by staff, carried interest payments within the meaning of point (d) of Article 4(1) of Directive 2011/61/EU (1), and other payments made via methods and vehicles which, if they were not considered as remuneration, would lead to a circumvention of the remuneration requirements of CRD.

6

Of which: variable remuneration

The sum of all remuneration components which are not fixed remuneration that are referred to in row 7 of this template.

7

Of which: fixed remuneration

Institutions shall consider remuneration fixed where the conditions for its award and its amount:

a.  are based on a predetermined criteria;

b.  are non-discretionary reflecting the level of professional experience and seniority of staff;

c.  are transparent with respect to the individual amount awarded to the individual staff member;

d.  are permanent, i.e. maintained over a period tied to the specific role and organisational responsibilities;

e.  are non-revocable; the permanent amount is only changed via collective bargaining or following renegotiation in line with national criteria on wage setting;

f.  cannot be reduced, suspended or cancelled by the institution;

g.  do not provide incentives for risk assumption; and

h.  do not depend on performance.

Column letter

Explanation

a, b and c

Management body (MB)

The Management body of the institution, with the breakdown of Supervisory function and Management function

Institutions shall disclose information based on headcount.

d to h

Business areas

The major business areas of the institution, as Investment banking, Retail banking, Asset management, Corporate functions, Independent internal control functions

Information shall be disclosed based on FTE.

i

All other

All other business areas that were not covered in the previous columns separately

Information shall be disclosed based on FTE.

(1)   

Directive 2011/61/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 8 June 2011 on Alternative Investment Fund Managers and amending Directives 2003/41/EC and 2009/65/EC and Regulations (EC) No 1060/2009 and (EU) No 1095/2010 (OJ L 174, 1.7.2011, p. 1)

ANNEX XXXV




ANNEX XXXV

Template EU AE1 - Encumbered and unencumbered assets



 

Carrying amount of encumbered assets

Fair value of encumbered assets

Carrying amount of unencumbered assets

Fair value of unencumbered assets

 

of which notionally eligible EHQLA and HQLA

 

of which notionally eligible EHQLA and HQLA

 

of which EHQLA and HQLA

 

of which EHQLA and HQLA

010

030

040

050

060

080

090

100

010

Assets of the disclosing institution

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

030

Equity instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

040

Debt securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

050

of which: covered bonds

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

060

of which: securitisations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

070

of which: issued by general governments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

080

of which: issued by financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

090

of which: issued by non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

120

Other assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Template EU AE2 - Collateral received and own debt securities issued



 

Fair value of encumbered collateral received or own debt securities issued

Unencumbered

Fair value of collateral received or own debt securities issued available for encumbrance

 

of which notionally eligible EHQLA and HQLA

 

of which EHQLA and HQLA

010

030

040

060

130

Collateral received by the disclosing institution

 

 

 

 

140

Loans on demand

 

 

 

 

150

Equity instruments

 

 

 

 

160

Debt securities

 

 

 

 

170

of which: covered bonds

 

 

 

 

180

of which: securitisations

 

 

 

 

190

of which: issued by general governments

 

 

 

 

200

of which: issued by financial corporations

 

 

 

 

210

of which: issued by non-financial corporations

 

 

 

 

220

Loans and advances other than loans on demand

 

 

 

 

230

Other collateral received

 

 

 

 

240

Own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or securitisations

 

 

 

 

241

Own covered bonds and securitisations issued and not yet pledged

 

 

 

 

250

TOTAL COLLATERAL RECEIVED AND OWN DEBT SECURITIES ISSUED

 

 

 

 

Template EU AE3 - Sources of encumbrance



 

Matching liabilities, contingent liabilities or securities lent

Assets, collateral received and own debt securities issued other than covered bonds and securitisations encumbered

010

030

010

Carrying amount of selected financial liabilities

 

 

Table EU AE4 - Accompanying narrative information

Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information, in accordance with Article 443 CRR



Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

(a)

General narrative information on asset encumbrance

(b)

Narrative information on the impact of the business model on assets encumbrance and the importance of encumbrance to the institution's business model, which provides users with the context of the disclosures required in Template EU AE1 and EU AE2.

ANNEX XXXVI




ANNEX XXXVI

Instructions for the assets encumbrance disclosure templates

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in Article 443 of Regulation (EU) 575/2013 ( 26 ) (‘CRR’) by following the instructions provided below in this Annex to complete templates EU AE1 to EU AE4 which are presented in Annex XXXV to this Implementing Regulation.

2. For the purpose of the Asset encumbrance disclosure templates, the definition of asset encumbrance included in point 1.7 of Annex XVII (instructions for reporting templates on asset encumbrance) to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014 ( 27 ) shall apply.

3. Institutions shall disclose the items referred in templates EU AE1, EU AE2 and EU AE3 in the same manner as reported in accordance with Annex XVI (reporting templates on asset encumbrance) to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014, unless otherwise specifically provided in those tables.

4. The items referred to in paragraph 3 shall be disclosed using median values. Median values shall be rolling quarterly medians over the previous twelve months and shall be determined by interpolation.

5. When disclosures take place on a consolidated basis, the applicable scope of consolidation shall be the scope of prudential consolidation as defined in Section 2 or Chapter 2 of Title II of Part One CRR.

6. Asset quality indicators by asset type in columns C030, C050, C080 and C100 of template EU AE1 and by types of collateral received and debt securities issued, including covered bonds and securitisations, in columns C030 and C060 as set out in template EU AE2 shall apply only to credit institutions that meet either of the following conditions:

(a) 

their total assets, calculated in accordance with paragraph 10 of point 1.6 of Annex XVII to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014, amount to more than EUR 30 billion;

(b) 

their asset encumbrance level, calculated in accordance with paragraph 9 of point 1.6 of Annex XVII to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014, is above 15 %.

Template EU AE1- Encumbered and unencumbered assets

7. Institutions shall complete template EU AE1, which is presented in Annex XXXV to this Implementing Regulation, by following the instructions below.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Assets of the disclosing institution

International Accounting Standards (IAS) 1.9 (a), Implementation Guidance (IG) 6, in the case of IFRS institutions

Total assets of the institution registered in its balance sheet, with the exception of own debt securities and own equity instruments when the applicable accounting standards allow their recognition on-balance sheet

The value disclosed in this row shall be the median of the sums of four quarterly end-of-period values over the previous twelve months for rows 030, 040 and 120.

030

Equity instruments

The median values of equity instruments as defined in the applicable accounting principles (IAS 32.1 in the case of IFRS institutions), with the exception of own equity instruments when the applicable accounting standards allow their recognition on-balance sheet

040

Debt securities

The median values of debt instruments held by the institution issued as securities that are not loans in accordance with the Regulation (EU) 1071/2013 of the European Central Bank (‘ECB BSI Regulation’) (1), with the exception of own debt securities when the applicable accounting standards allow their recognition on-balance sheet

050

of which: covered bonds

The median values of debt securities held by the institution that are bonds referred to in the first subparagraph of Article 52(4) of Directive (EC) 2009/65 (2), irrespective of whether these instruments take the legal form of a security or not

060

of which: securitisations

The median values of debt securities held by the institution that are securitisation positions as defined in point (62) of Article 4(1) CRR

070

of which: issued by general governments

The median values of debt securities held by the institution which are issued by general governments

080

of which: issued by financial corporations

The median values of debt securities held by the institution issued by credit institutions as defined in point (1) of Article 4(1) CRR and by other financial corporations

Other financial corporations shall include all financial corporations and quasi-corporations other than credit institutions such as investment firms, investment funds, insurance companies, pension funds, collective investment undertakings, and clearing houses as well as remaining financial intermediaries, financial auxiliaries and captive financial institutions and money lenders.

090

of which: issued by non-financial corporations

The median values of debt securities held by the institution issued by corporations and quasi-corporations not engaged in financial intermediation but principally in the production of market goods and non-financial services in accordance with the ECB BSI Regulation

120

Other assets

The median value of other assets of the institution registered in the balance sheet, other than those disclosed in the above rows and different from own debt securities and own equity instruments that may not be derecognised from the balance sheet by a non-IFRS institution

In this case, own debt instruments shall be included in row 240 of template EU AE2 and own equity instruments excluded from the asset encumbrance disclosure.

Other assets shall include cash on hand (holding of national and foreign banknotes and coins in circulation that are commonly used to make payments), loans on demand (IAS 1.54(i) for IFRS institutions) including the balances receivable on demand at central banks and other institutions. Other assets also include loans and advances other than loans on demand, that is, debt instruments held by the institutions that are not securities, other than balances receivable on demand, including loans collateralized by immovable property as defined in point (a) of paragraph 86 of Part 2 of Annex V to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. Other assets may also include intangible assets, including goodwill, deferred tax assets, property, plant and other fixed assets, derivative assets, reverse repo and stock borrowing receivables.

When underlying assets and cover pool assets of retained securitisations and retained covered bonds are loans on demand or loans and advances other than loans on demand, they shall also be included in this row.

(1)   

REGULATION (EU) No 1071/2013 OF THE EUROPEAN CENTRAL BANK of 24 September 2013 concerning the balance sheet of the monetary financial institutions sector (ECB/2013/33) (OJ L 297, 7.11.2013, p. 1).

(2)   

DIRECTIVE 2009/65/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 13 July 2009 on the coordination of laws, regulations and administrative provisions relating to undertakings for collective investment in transferable securities (UCITS) (OJ L 302, 17.11.2009, p. 32).



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

010

Carrying amount of encumbered assets

The median value of the carrying amount of the assets held by the institution that are encumbered

Carrying amount shall mean the amount on the asset side of the balance sheet.

For each asset class, the disclosed carrying amount shall be the median value of the different disclosed carrying amounts at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

030

of which: notionally eligible EHQLA and HQLA

The median value of the carrying amount of encumbered assets which are notionally eligible to the qualification of assets of extremely high liquidity and credit quality (EHQLA) and assets of high liquidity and credit quality (HQLA)

For the purpose of this Regulation, notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA shall be those assets listed in Articles 10, 11, 12, 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 (1) and that would comply with the general and operational requirements set out in Articles 7 and 8 of that Delegated Regulation, were it not for their status as encumbered assets in accordance with Annex XVII to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. Notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA shall also comply with the exposure class-specific requirements set out in Articles 10 to 16 and 35 to 37 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. The carrying amount of notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA shall be the carrying amount before the application of the haircuts specified in Articles 10 to 16 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

For each asset class, the disclosed carrying amount shall be the median value of the different disclosed carrying amounts at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

040

Fair value of encumbered assets

The median value of the fair value of the debt securities held by the disclosing institution that are encumbered in accordance with the definition of asset encumbrance

Fair value of a financial instrument shall be the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (see IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement and IFRS 13 and Article 8 of Directive 2013/34/EU (2) for non-IFRS institutions).

For each asset class, disclosed fair value shall be the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

050

of which: notionally eligible EHQLA and HQLA

The median value of the fair value of encumbered assets that are notionally eligible to the qualification of EHQLA and HQLA. For the purpose of this Regulation, notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA are those assets listed in Articles 10, 11, 12, 13, 15 and 16 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and that would comply with the general and operational requirements set out in Articles 7 and 8 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, were it not for their status as encumbered assets in accordance with Annex XVII to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. Notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA shall also comply with the exposure class-specific requirements set out in Articles 10 to 16 and 35 to 37 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. The fair value of notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA shall be the fair value before the application of the haircuts specified in Articles 10 to 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

For each asset class, disclosed fair value is the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

060

Carrying amount of unencumbered assets

The median value of the carrying amount of the assets held by the institution that are unencumbered in accordance with the definition provided of asset encumbrance. Carrying amount means the disclosed amount in the asset side of the balance sheet.

For each asset class, the disclosed carrying amount is the median value of the different disclosed carrying amounts at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

080

of which: EHQLA and HQLA

The median value of the carrying amount of unencumbered EHQLA and HQLA as listed in Articles 10, 11, 12, 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and that comply with the general and operational requirements set out in Articles 7 and 8 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, as well as with the exposure class-specific requirements set out in Articles 10 to 16 and 35 to 37 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. The carrying amount of EHQLA and HQLA shall be the carrying amount before the application of the haircuts specified in Articles 10 to 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

For each asset class, the disclosed carrying amount is the median value of the different disclosed carrying amounts at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

090

Fair value of unencumbered assets

The median value of fair value of the debt securities held by the institution that are unencumbered. Fair value of a financial instrument is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (See IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement and IFRS 13 and Article 8 of Directive (EU) 2013/34).

For each asset class, disclosed fair value is the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

100

of which: EHQLA and HQLA

The median value of the fair value of unencumbered EHQLA and HQLA as listed in Articles 10, 11, 12, 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and that comply with the general and operational requirements set out in Articles 7 and 8 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, as well as with the exposure class-specific requirements set out in Articles 10 to 16 and 35 to 37 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. The fair value of EHQLA and HQLA shall be the fair value before the application of the haircuts specified in Articles 10 to 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

For each asset class, disclosed fair value is the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

(1)   

COMMISSION DELEGATED REGULATION (EU) 2015/61 of 10 October 2014 to supplement Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 of the European Parliament and the Council with regard to liquidity coverage requirement for Credit Institutions (OJ L 11, 17.1.2015, p. 1).

(2)   

Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2013 on the annual financial statements, consolidated financial statements and related reports of certain types of undertakings, amending Directive 2006/43/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council and repealing Council Directives 78/660/EEC and 83/349/EEC (OJ L 182, 29.6.2013, p. 19).

Template EU AE2 - Collateral received and own debt securities issued

8. Institutions shall complete template EU AE2, which is presented in Annex XXXV to this Implementing Regulation, by following the instructions below.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

130

Collateral received by the disclosing institution

All classes of collateral received by the institution. All securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transactions shall be disclosed in this row. The total collateral received by the institution is the median of the sums of four quarterly end of period values over the previous twelve months for rows 140 to 160, 220 and 230.

140

Loans on demand

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises loans on demand shall be disclosed in this row (see legal references and instructions regarding row 120 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

150

Equity instruments

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises equity instruments (see legal references and instructions regarding row 030 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transactions.

160

Debt securities

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises debt securities (see legal references and instructions regarding row 040 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

170

of which: covered bonds

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises covered bonds (see legal references and instructions regarding row 050 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

180

of which: securitisations

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises asset- backed securities (see legal references and instructions regarding row 060 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

190

of which: issued by general governments

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises debt securities issued by general governments (see legal references and instructions regarding row 070 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

200

of which: issued by financial corporations

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises debt securities issued by financial corporations (see legal references and instructions regarding row 080 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

210

of which: issued by non-financial corporations

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises debt securities issued by non-financial corporations (see legal references and instructions regarding row 090 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

220

Loans and advances other than loans on demand

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises loans and advances other than loans on demand (see legal references and instructions regarding row 120 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

230

Other collateral received

The median value of collateral received by the institution that comprises other assets (see legal references and instructions regarding row 120 of template EU AE1). It includes all securities received by a borrower institution in any securities borrowing transaction.

240

Own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or securitisations

The median value of own debt securities issued other than own covered bonds or securitisations. As the retained or repurchased own debt securities issued, in accordance with IAS 39.42, for IFRS institutions, decrease the relating financial liabilities, these securities are not included in the category of assets of the disclosing institution. Own debt securities that may not be derecognised from the balance sheet by a non-IFRS institution shall be included in this row.

241

Own covered bonds and securitisations issued and not yet pledged

The median value of own covered bonds and securitisations issued that are retained by the disclosing institution and not encumbered. To avoid double counting, the following rule applies in relation to own covered bonds and securitisations issued and retained by the disclosing institution:

(a)  where those securities are pledged, the amount of the cover pool/underlying assets that are backing them shall be disclosed in template EU AE1 as encumbered assets. The source of funding in the event of pledging own covered bonds and securitisations is the new transaction in which the securities are being pledged (central bank funding or other type of secured funding) and not the original issuance of covered bonds or securitisations.

(b)  where those securities are not yet pledged, the amount of the cover pool/underlying assets that are backing those securities shall be disclosed in template EU AE1 as unencumbered assets.

250

Total collateral received and own debt securities issued

All classes of collateral received by the institution and own debt securities issued retained by the institution that are not own covered bonds issued or own securitisations issued.

This row is the sum of the median values for row 010 in template EU AE1 and rows 130 and 240 in template EU AE2.



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

010

Fair value of encumbered collateral received or own debt securities issued

The median of the fair value of the collateral received, including in any securities borrowing transaction, or own debt securities issued held/retained by the institution that are encumbered in accordance with Article 100 CRR.

The fair value of a financial instrument is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (as in IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement for IFRS institutions). For each item of collateral, disclosed fair value is the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

030

of which: notionally eligible EHQLA and HQLA

The median value of the fair value of the encumbered collateral received, including in any securities borrowing transaction, or own debt securities issued held/retained by the institution that are notionally eligible to the qualification of EHQLA and HQLA. For the purpose of this Regulation, notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA are items of collateral received or own debt securities issued held/retained by the institution listed in Articles 10, 11, 12, 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and that would comply with the general and operational requirements set out in Articles 7 and 8 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, were it not for their status as encumbered assets in accordance with Annex XVII to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 680/2014. Notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA shall also comply with the exposure class-specific requirements set out in Articles 10 to 16 and 35 to 37 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. The fair value of notionally eligible encumbered EHQLA and notionally eligible encumbered HQLA shall be the fair value before the application of the haircuts specified in Articles 10 to 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

For each item of collateral, disclosed fair value is the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

040

Fair value of collateral received or own debt securities issued available for encumbrance

The median of the fair value of the collateral received, including in any securities borrowing transaction, by the institution that are unencumbered but are available for encumbrance since the institution is permitted to sell or re-pledge it in absence of default by the owner of the collateral. It also includes the fair value of own debt securities issued, other than own covered bonds or securitisation positions, that are unencumbered but available for encumbrance. For each item of collateral, disclosed fair value is the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

060

of which: EHQLA and HQLA

The median value of the fair value of the unencumbered collateral received or own debt securities issued held/retained by the institution other than own covered bonds or securitisation positions available for encumbrance which qualify as EHQLA and HQLA as listed in Articles 10, 11, 12, 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and that comply with the general and operational requirements set out in Articles 7 and 8 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61, as well as with the exposure class-specific requirements set out in Articles 10 to 16 and 35 to 37 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61. The fair value of EHQLA and HQLA shall be the fair value before the application of the haircuts specified in Articles 10 to 16 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61.

Template EU AE3 - Sources of encumbrance

9. Institutions shall complete template EU AE3, which is presented in Annex XXXV to this Implementing Regulation, by following the instructions below.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

010

Carrying amount of selected financial liabilities

The median value of the item ‘Carrying amount of selected financial liabilities’ of the institution, insofar as these liabilities entail asset encumbrance for that institution.



Legal references and instructions

Column number

Explanation

010

Matching liabilities, contingent liabilities or securities lent

The median values of matching liabilities, contingent liabilities (loan commitments received and financial guarantees received) or securities lent with non-cash collateral, insofar as these transactions entail asset encumbrance for that institution.

Financial liabilities are disclosed at their carrying amount; contingent liabilities are disclosed at their nominal value; and securities lent with non-cash collateral are disclosed at their fair values.

Disclosed fair value is the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

Liabilities without any associated funding, such as derivatives, shall be included.

030

Assets, collateral received and own securities issued other than covered bonds and securitisations encumbered

The amount of the assets, collateral received and own securities issued other than covered bonds and securitisations that are encumbered as a result of the different types of transactions hereby disclosed.

To ensure consistency with the criteria in templates EU AE1 and EU AE2, assets of the institution registered in the balance sheet shall be disclosed at the median value of their carrying amount, whereas re-used collateral received and encumbered own securities issued other than covered bonds and securitisations shall be disclosed at the median value of their fair value. Disclosed fair value is the median value of the different fair values observed at the end of each disclosure period considered for the computation of the median.

Assets encumbered without matching liabilities shall also be included.

Table EU AE4 - Accompanying narrative information

10. Institutions shall complete table EU AE4, which is presented in Annex XXXV to this Implementing Regulation, by following the instructions below.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

a

General narrative information on asset encumbrance, including:

(a)  an explanation of any difference between the regulatory consolidation scope used for the purpose of the disclosures on asset encumbrance and the scope retained for the application of the liquidity requirements on a consolidated basis as defined in Chapter 2 of Title I of Part Two CRR, which is used to define (E)HQLA eligibility;

(b)  an explanation of any difference between, on the one hand, pledged and transferred assets in accordance with the applicable accounting frameworks and as applied by the institution and, on the other hand, encumbered assets and an indication of any difference of treatment of transactions, such as when some transactions are deemed to lead to pledge or transfer of assets but not to encumbrance of assets, or vice versa;

(c)  the exposure value used for the purposes of disclosure and how median exposure values are derived.

b

Narrative information relating to the impact of the institution’s business model on its level of encumbrance and the importance of encumbrance on the institution’s funding model, including the following:

(a)  the main sources and types of encumbrance, detailing, where applicable, encumbrance due to significant activities with derivatives, securities lending, repos, covered bonds issuance and securitisation;

(b)  the structure of encumbrance between entities within a group, and especially whether the encumbrance level of the consolidated group stems from particular entities and whether there is significant intragroup encumbrance;

(c)  information on over-collateralisation, especially regarding covered bonds and securitisations, and the incidence of over-collateralisation on the levels of encumbrance;

(d)  additional information on encumbrance of assets, collateral and off-balance sheet items and the sources of encumbrance by any significant currencies other than the reporting currency as referred to in Article 415(2) CRR;

(e)  a general description of the proportion of items included in column 060 'Carrying amount of unencumbered assets' in template EU AE1 that the institution would not deem available for encumbrance in the normal course of its business (e.g. intangible assets, including goodwill, deferred tax assets, property, plant and other fixed assets, derivative assets, reverse repo and stock borrowing receivables);

(f)  the amount of underlying assets and of cover pool assets of retained securitisations and retained covered bonds, and whether those underlying and cover pool assets are encumbered or unencumbered, along with the amount of associated retained securitisations and retained covered bonds;

(g)  where relevant for explaining the impact of their business model on their level of encumbrance, details (including quantitative information if relevant) on each of the following:

(i)  the types and amounts of encumbered and unencumbered assets included in row 120 of template EU AE1;

(ii)  the amounts and types of encumbered assets and off-balance sheet items included in row 010 of template EU AE3 that are not associated with any liabilities;

(h)  where relevant in the context of their use of encumbrance in relation to their business model, additional information on the breakdown of the following rows in the templates EU AE1, EU AE2 and EU AE3:

(i)  Row 120 of template EU AE1 - ‘Other assets’,

(ii)  Row 230 of template EU AE2 ‘Other collateral received’,

(iii)  Row 010 of template EU AE3 - ‘Carrying amount of selected financial liabilities’ (especially if part of the encumbrance of assets is associated with liabilities and another part is not).

ANNEX XXXVII




ANNEX XXXVII



Table EU IRRBBA - Qualitative information on interest rate risks of non-trading book activities

Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information

Row number

Qualitative information - free format

Legal basis

(a)

A description of how the institution defines IRRBB for purposes of risk control and measurement

 

Article 448(1), point (e)

(b)

A description of the institution's overall IRRBB management and mitigation strategies

 

Article 448(1), point (f)

(c)

The periodicity of the calculation of the institution's IRRBB measures, and a description of the specific measures that the institution uses to gauge its sensitivity to IRRBB

 

Article 448(1), points (e) (i) and (v); Article 448(2)

(d)

A description of the interest rate shock and stress scenarios that the institution uses to estimate changes in the economic value and in net interest income (if applicable)

 

Article 448(1), point (e) (iii); Article 448(2)

(e )

A description of the key modelling and parametric assumptions different from those used for disclosure of template EU IRRBB1 (if applicable)

 

Article 448(1), point (e) (ii); Article 448(2)

(f)

A high-level description of how the Institution hedges its IRRBB, as well as the associated accounting treatment (if applicable)

 

Article 448(1), point (e) (iv); Article 448(2)

(g)

A description of key modelling and parametric assumptions used for the IRRBB measures in template EU IRRBB1 (if applicable)

 

Article 448(1), point (c); Article 448(2)

(h)

Explanation of the significance of the IRRBB measures and of their significant variations since previous disclosures

 

Article 448(1), point (d)

(i)

Any other relevant information regarding the IRRBB measures disclosed in template EU IRRBB1 (optional)

 

 

(1) (2)

Disclosure of the average and longest repricing maturity assigned to non-maturity deposits

 

Article 448(1), point (g)



Template EU IRRBB1 - Interest rate risks of non-trading book activities

Supervisory shock scenarios

a

b

c

d

Changes of the economic value of equity

Changes of the net interest income

Current period

Last period

Current period

Last period

1

Parallel up

 

 

 

 

2

Parallel down

 

 

 

 

3

Steepener

 

 

 

 

4

Flattener

 

 

 

 

5

Short rates up

 

 

 

 

6

Short rates down

 

 

 

 

ANNEX XXXVIII




ANNEX XXXVIII

Instructions for interest rate risk on positions not held in the trading book disclosure templates

Disclosure instructions for Template EU IRRBBA

Institutions are to disclose the qualitative information specified below on the basis of their internal risk measurement system methodology, standardised methodology or the simplified standardised methodology, when applicable, in accordance with Article 84 of Directive 2013/36/EU.

These instructions have been developed based on the requirements in Article 448 of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 and in line with the Basel Pillar 3 disclosure standard.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

(a)

A description of how the institution defines IRRBB for purposes of risk control and measurement

In accordance with Article 448(1), point (e), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions are to provide a general description of how the interest rate risk of their non-trading book activities for the purposes of the competent authorities’ review in accordance with Article 84 of Directive 2013/36/EU is defined, measured, mitigated and controlled.

(b)

A description of the institution’s overall IRRBB management and mitigation strategies

In accordance with Article 448(1), point (f), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions are to provide a general description of the overall IRRBB management and mitigation strategies, including:: the monitoring of economic value of equity and net interest income in relation to established limits, hedging practices, conduct of stress testing, outcome analysis, the role of independent audit, the role and practices of the asset and liability management committee, the institution’s practices to ensure appropriate model validation, and timely model updates in response to changing market conditions.

(c)

The periodicity of the calculation of the institution’s IRRBB measures, and a description of the specific measures that the institution uses to gauge its sensitivity to IRRBB

In accordance with Article 448(1), point (e)(i) and (v), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions are to provide a general description of the specific risk measures that are used to estimate changes in their economic value of equity and in their net interest income and indicate the periodicity of the evaluation of the interest rate risks.

In accordance with Article 448(2) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, the description of the specific risk measures used to gauge the sensitivity to IRRBB are not to apply to institutions that use the standardised methodology or the simplified standardised methodology referred to in Article 84(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

(d)

A description of the interest rate shock and stress scenarios that the institution uses to estimate changes in the economic value and in net interest income (if applicable)

In accordance with Article 448(1), point (e)(iii), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions are to provide a general description of the interest rate shock scenarios used to estimate the interest rate risk.

In accordance with Article 448(2) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, those disclosure requirements are not to apply to institutions that use the standardised methodology or the simplified standardised methodology referred to in Article 84(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

(e)

A description of the key modelling and parametric assumptions different from those used for disclosure of template EU IRRBB1 (if applicable)

In accordance with Article 448(1), point (e)(ii), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, where key modelling and parametric assumptions used in the institution’s internal measurement systems differ from those referred to in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU used for disclosure of template EU IRRBB1, the institution is to provide a general description of those assumptions, including the rationale for those differences (e.g. historical data, published research, management judgement and analysis, etc.).

In accordance with Article 448(2) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, those disclosure requirements are not to apply to institutions that use the standardised methodology or the simplified standardised methodology referred to in Article 84(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

(f)

A high-level description of how the institution hedges its IRRBB, as well as the associated accounting treatment (if applicable)

Specifically, in accordance with Article 448(1), point (e)(iv), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions are to identify the effect of hedges against their interest rate risks, including internal hedges that meet the requirements laid down in Article 106(3) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

In accordance with Article 448(2) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, those disclosure requirements are not to apply to institutions that use the standardised methodology or the simplified standardised methodology referred to in Article 84(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

(g)

A description of key modelling and parametric assumptions used for the IRRBB measures in template EU IRRBB1 (if applicable)

In accordance with Article 448(1), point (c), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions are to provide a general description of the key modelling and parametric assumptions, other than those referred to in Article 98(5a), points (b) and (c), of Directive 2013/36/EU used for the purpose of calculating changes to the economic value of equity and to the net interest income in template EU IRRBB1. This general description is to include at least:

(a)  how the average repricing maturity of non-maturity deposits has been determined, including any unique product features that affect the assumed behavioural repricing date;

(b)  the methodology used to estimate the loan prepayment rates, and/or the early withdrawal rates for fixed-term deposits, and other significant assumptions;

(c)  any other assumptions, including for instruments with behavioural optionalities, that have a material impact on the IRRBB measures disclosed in template EU IRRBB1, including an explanation of why these are material.

In accordance with Article 448(2) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, those disclosure requirements are not to apply to institutions that use the standardised methodology or the simplified standardised methodology referred to in Article 84(1) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

(h)

Explanation of the significance of the IRRBB measures and of their significant variations since previous disclosures

In accordance with Article 448(1), point (d), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions are to provide a general explanation of the significance of the IRRBB measures disclosed in template EU IRRBB1 and of any significant variations of those IRRBB measures since the previous disclosure reference date.

(i)

Any other relevant information regarding the IRRBB measures disclosed in template EU IRRBB1 (optional)

Any other relevant information which institutions wish to disclose regarding the IRRBB measures included in template EU IRRBB1.

. Until the criteria of the guidelines specified in Article 84(6) of Directive 2013/36/EU and the further elements listed in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU are applicable, institutions are to disclose the parameters used for the supervisory shock scenarios, the definition of net interest income they are using and any other relevant information for understanding how the changes of net interest income have been computed in template EU IRRBB1.

(1), (2)

Disclosure of the average and longest repricing maturity assigned to non-maturity deposits

In accordance with Article 448(1), point (g), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions are to disclose the average and longest repricing maturity assigned to non-maturity deposits from retail and non-financial wholesale counterparties. The disclosure shall refer separately to both the core part and the full amount of non-maturity deposits from retail and non-financial wholesale counterparties.

Disclosure instructions for Template EU IRRBB1

1. Institutions are to assess the interest rate risk of non-trading book activities on the basis of their internal measurement system methodology, standardised methodology or simplified standardised methodology, when applicable, as defined in accordance with Article 84 of Directive 2013/36/EU, given the supervisory shock scenarios and the common modelling and parametric assumptions defined in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

2. These instructions have been developed based on the requirements in Article 448 of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 and in line with the Basel Pillar 3 disclosure standard.

3. Institutions are not required to provide in their first-time disclosure the information for the previous period.



Instructions for completing the disclosure template EU IRRBB1

Column

Explanation

a, b

Changes of the economic value of equity

Article 448(1), point (a), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

Institutions shall report the changes in the economic value of equity under each supervisory interest rate shock scenario, for the current and previous period, in accordance with the requirements under Articles 84 and 98(5) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

c, d

Changes of the net interest income

Article 448(1), point (b), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

Institutions shall report the changes in the net interest income under the two supervisory interest rate shock scenarios envisaged in the template for the current and previous period, in accordance with the requirements under Articles 84 and 98(5) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

Until the criteria of the guidelines specified in Article 84(6) of Directive 2013/36/EU and the further elements listed in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU are applicable, institutions shall describe the definition and key characteristics (scenarios, assumptions and net interest income horizons) of net interest income they are using in point (i) of table EU IRRBBA or, if they leave those columns blank, they shall explain the reasons in point (i) of table EU IRRBBA.

Row

Explanation

1

Parallel up

Institutions are to disclose the changes of the economic value of equity and the changes of the net interest income under a constant parallel upward shock in the yield curve.

Until the criteria of the guidelines specified in Article 84(6) of Directive 2013/36/EU and the further elements listed in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU are applicable, the parameters used for this scenario shall be described in point (i) of table EU IRRBBA.

2

Parallel down

Institutions are to disclose the changes of the economic value of equity and the changes of the net interest income under a constant parallel downward shock in the yield curve.

Until the criteria of the guidelines specified in Article 84(6) of Directive 2013/36/EU and the further elements listed in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU are applicable, the parameters used for this scenario shall be described in point (i) of table EU IRRBBA.

3

Steepener

Institutions are to disclose the changes of the economic value of equity under a scenario of short rates down and long rates up of the yield curve.

Until the criteria of the guidelines specified in Article 84(6) of Directive 2013/36/EU and the further elements listed in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU are applicable, the parameters used for this scenario shall be described in point (i) of table EU IRRBBA.

4

Flattener

Institutions are to disclose the changes of the economic value of equity under a scenario of short rates up and long rates down of the yield curve.

Until the criteria of the guidelines specified in Article 84(6) of Directive 2013/36/EU and the further elements listed in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU are applicable, the parameters used for this scenario shall be described in point (i) of table EU IRRBBA.

5

Short rates up

Institutions are to disclose the changes of the economic value of equity under a scenario of short rates up of the yield curve.

Until the criteria of the guidelines specified in Article 84(6) of Directive 2013/36/EU and the further elements listed in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU are applicable, the parameters used for this scenario shall be described in point (i) of table EU IRRBBA.

6

Short rates down

Institutions are to disclose the changes of the economic value of equity under a scenario of short rates down of the yield curve.

Until the criteria of the guidelines specified in Article 84(6) of Directive 2013/36/EU and the further elements listed in Article 98(5a) of Directive 2013/36/EU are applicable, the parameters used for this scenario shall be described in point (i) of table EU IRRBBA.

ANNEX XXXIX Prudential disclosures on ESG risks (Article 449a CRR)




ANNEX XXXIX

Prudential disclosures on ESG risks (Article 449a CRR)



INDEX - Prudential disclosures on ESG risks (Article 449a CRR)

Table 1 - Qualitative information on Environmental risk

Table 2 - Qualitative information on Social risk

Table 3 - Qualitative information on Governance risk

Template 1: Banking book- Indicators of potential climate Change transition risk: Credit quality of exposures by sector, emissions and residual maturity

Template 2: Banking book - Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Loans collateralised by immovable property - Energy efficiency of the collateral

Template 3: Banking book - Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Alignment metrics

Template 4: Banking book - Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Exposures to top 20 carbon-intensive firms

Template 5: Banking book - Indicators of potential climate change physical risk: Exposures subject to physical risk

Template 6. Summary of key performance indicators (KPIs) on the Taxonomy-aligned exposures

Template 7 - Mitigating actions: Assets for the calculation of GAR

Template 8 - GAR (%)

Template 9 - Mitigating actions: BTAR

Template 10 - Other climate change mitigating actions that are not covered in Regulation (EU) 2020/852

Table 1 - Qualitative information on Environmental risk

in accordance with Article 449a CRR



Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

 

Business strategy and processes

 

(a)

Institution's business strategy to integrate environmental factors and risks, taking into account the impact of environmental factors and risks on institution's business environment, business model, strategy and financial planning

 

(b)

Objectives, targets and limits to assess and address environmental risk in short-, medium-, and long-term, and performance assessment against these objectives, targets and limits, including forward-looking information about the design of business strategy and processes

 

(c)

Current investment activities and (future) investment targets towards environmental objectives and EU Taxonomy-aligned activities

 

(d)

Policies and procedures relating to direct and indirect engagement with new or existing counterparties on their strategies to mitigate and reduce environmental risks

 

 

Governance

 

(e)

Responsibilities of the management body for setting the risk framework, supervising and managing the implementation of the objectives, strategy and policies in the context of environmental risk management covering relevant transmission channels

 

(f)

Management body's integration of short-, medium- and long-term effects of environmental factors and risks, organisational structure both within business lines and internal control functions

 

(g)

Integration of measures to manage environmental factors and risks in internal governance arrangements, including the role of committees, the allocation of tasks and responsibilities, and the feedback loop from risk management to the management body covering relevant transmission channels

 

(h)

Lines of reporting and frequency of reporting relating to environmental risk

 

(i)

Alignment of the remuneration policy with institution's environmental risk-related objectives

 

 

Risk management

 

(j)

Integration of short-, medium- and long-term effects of environmental factors and risks in the risk framework

 

(k)

Definitions, methodologies and international standards on which the environmental risk management framework is based

 

(l)

Processes to identify, measure and monitor activities and exposures (and collateral where applicable) sensitive to environmental risks, covering relevant transmission channels

 

(m)

Activities, commitments and exposures contributing to mitigate environmental risks

 

(n)

Implementation of tools for identification, measurement and management of environmental risks

 

(o)

Results and outcome of the risk tools implemented and the estimated impact of environmental risk on capital and liquidity risk profile

 

(p)

Data availability, quality and accuracy, and efforts to improve these aspects

 

(q)

Description of limits to environmental risks (as drivers of prudential risks) that are set, and triggering escalation and exclusion in the case of breaching these limits

 

(r)

Description of the link (transmission channels) between environmental risks with credit risk, liquidity and funding risk, market risk, operational risk and reputational risk in the risk management framework

 

Table 2 - Qualitative information on Social risk

in accordance with Article 449a CRR



Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

 

Business strategy and processes

 

(a)

Adjustment of the institution's business strategy to integrate social factors and risks taking into account the impact of social risk on the institution's business environment, business model, strategy and financial planning

 

(b)

Objectives, targets and limits to assess and address social risk in short-term, medium-term and long-term, and performance assessment against these objectives, targets and limits, including forward-looking information in the design of business strategy and processes

 

(c)

Policies and procedures relating to direct and indirect engagement with new or existing counterparties on their strategies to mitigate and reduce socially harmful activities

 

 

Governance

 

(d)

Responsibilities of the management body for setting the risk framework, supervising and managing the implementation of the objectives, strategy and policies in the context of social risk management covering counterparties' approaches to:

 

(i)

Activities towards the community and society

(ii)

Employee relationships and labour standards

(iii)

Customer protection and product responsibility

(iv)

Human rights

(e)

Integration of measures to manage social factors and risks in internal governance arrangements, including the role of committees, the allocation of tasks and responsibilities, and the feedback loop from risk management to the management body

 

(f)

Lines of reporting and frequency of reporting relating to social risk

 

(g)

Alignment of the remuneration policy in line with institution's social risk-related objectives

 

 

Risk management

 

(h)

Definitions, methodologies and international standards on which the social risk management framework is based

 

(i)

Processes to identify, measure and monitor activities and exposures (and collateral where applicable) sensitive to social risk, covering relevant transmission channels

 

(j)

Activities, commitments and assets contributing to mitigate social risk

 

(k)

Implementation of tools for identification and management of social risk

 

(l)

Description of setting limits to social risk and cases to trigger escalation and exclusion in the case of breaching these limits

 

(m)

Description of the link (transmission channels) between social risks with credit risk, liquidity and funding risk, market risk, operational risk and reputational risk in the risk management framework

 

Table 3 - Qualitative information on Governance risk

in accordance with Article 449a CRR



Row number

Qualitative information - Free format

 

Governance

 

(a)

Institution's integration in their governance arrangements of the governance performance of the counterparty, including committees of the highest governance body, committees responsible for decision-making on economic, environmental, and social topics

 

(b)

Institution's accounting of the counterparty's highest governance body’s role in non-financial reporting

 

(c)

Institution's integration in governance arrangements of the governance performance of their counterparties including:

 

(i)

Ethical considerations

(ii)

Strategy and risk management

(iii)

Inclusiveness

(iv)

Transparency

(v)

Management of conflict of interest

(vi)

Internal communication on critical concerns

 

Risk management

 

(d)

Institution's integration in risk management arrangements the governance performance of their counterparties considering:

 

(i)

Ethical considerations

(ii)

Strategy and risk management

(iii)

Inclusiveness

(iv)

Transparency

(v)

Management of conflict of interest

(vi)

Internal communication on critical concerns

Template 1: Banking book- Indicators of potential climate Change transition risk: Credit quality of exposures by sector, emissions and residual maturity

image

Template 2: Banking book - Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Loans collateralised by immovable property - Energy efficiency of the collateral

image

Template 3: Banking book - Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Alignment metrics

image

Template 4: Banking book - Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Exposures to top 20 carbon-intensive firms



 

a

b

c

d

e

 

Gross carrying amount (aggregate)

Gross carrying amount towards the counterparties compared to total gross carrying amount (aggregate) (*1)

Of which environmentally sustainable (CCM)

Weighted average maturity

Number of top 20 polluting firms included

1

 

 

 

 

 

(*1)   

For counterparties among the top 20 carbon emitting companies in the world

Template 5: Banking book - Indicators of potential climate change physical risk: Exposures subject to physical risk

image

Template 6. Summary of key performance indicators (KPIs) on the Taxonomy-aligned exposures



 

KPI

% coverage (over total assets) (*1)

 

Climate change mitigation

Climate change adaptation

Total (Climate change mitigation + Climate change adaptation)

GAR stock

 

 

 

 

GAR flow

 

 

 

 

(*1)   

% of assets covered by the KPI over banks’ total assets

Template 7 - Mitigating actions: Assets for the calculation of GAR

image

Template 8 - GAR (%)

image

Template 9 - Mitigating actions: BTAR

Template 9.1 - Mitigating actions: Assets for the calculation of BTAR

image

Template 9.2 - BTAR %

image

Template 9.3 - Summary table - BTAR %

image

Template 10 - Other climate change mitigating actions that are not covered in Regulation (EU) 2020/852

image

ANNEX XL Instructions for disclosure of ESG risks




ANNEX XL

Instructions for disclosure of ESG risks

1. Institutions shall disclose the information referred to in Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 by following the instructions provided in this Annex. The instructions are to be used to complete the tables and templates which are set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation.

2. For the purposes of these instructions, the following terms shall be understood as follows:

(a) 

‘environmental, social or governance (ESG) risks’ means the risk of losses arising from any negative financial impact on the institution stemming from the current or prospective impacts of environmental, social or governance (ESG) factors on the institution’s counterparties or invested assets;

(b) 

‘environmental risk’ means the risk of losses arising from any negative financial impact on the institution stemming from the current or prospective impacts of environmental factors on the institution’s counterparties or invested assets, including factors related to the transition towards the following environmental objectives:

(i) 

climate change mitigation;

(ii) 

climate change adaptation;

(iii) 

the sustainable use and protection of water and marine resources;

(iv) 

the transition to a circular economy;

(v) 

pollution prevention and control;

(vi) 

the protection and restoration of biodiversity and ecosystems;

Environmental risk includes both physical risk and transition risk.

(c) 

‘physical risk’, as part of the overall environmental risk, means the risk of losses arising from any negative financial impact on the institution stemming from the current or prospective impacts of the physical effects of environmental factors on the institution’s counterparties or invested assets;

(d) 

‘transition risk’, as part of the overall environmental risk, means the risk of losses arising from any negative financial impact on the institution stemming from the current or prospective impacts of the transition to an environmentally sustainable economy on the institution’s counterparties or invested assets;

(e) 

‘social risk’ means the risk of losses arising from any negative financial impact on the institution stemming from the current or prospective impacts of social factors on the institution’s counterparties or invested assets;

(f) 

‘governance risk’ means the risk of losses arising from any negative financial impact on the institution stemming from the current or prospective impacts of governance factors on the institution’s counterparties or invested assets.

3. References to the international and Union policy frameworks and available benchmarks throughout these instructions include: the Paris Agreement adopted under the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change ( 28 ) (the ‘Paris Agreement’), the Communication from the Commission on the European Green Deal ( 29 ), Directive 2013/34/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 30 ), Directive 2014/95/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 31 ), the Communication from the Commission – Guidelines on non-financial reporting: Supplement on reporting climate-related information ( 32 ), the guidance made available by the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) Recommendations ( 33 ), the United Nations Environment Programme Finance Initiative (UNEP FI) ( 34 ), the Global Reporting Initiative Sustainability Reporting Standards ( 35 ), and the United Nations’ Principles for Responsible Investment (UNPRI) ( 36 ).

Table 1 – Qualitative information on Environmental risk: Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information in Annex XXXIX.

4. Institutions shall use the following instructions to complete Table 1 – ‘Qualitative information on Environmental risk’ as set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation to describe the integration of environmental risks, including specific information on climate change risks and on other environmental risks, in their business strategy and processes, governance and risk management. This is for the purposes of Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, read in conjunction with Article 435 of that Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

 

Business strategy and processes

(a)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), points (a) and (e), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide an explanation of how their business model, strategy and processes, and their financial planning integrate the risks stemming from environmental factors (i.e. environmental risks) and how those risks may evolve over time given changing technology, policy framework, business environment, stakeholder preferences, and changes in the physical environment itself.

(b)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (a) and points (c) to (f) of that Regulation, institutions shall set out the objectives, the targets and the limits for the assessment and management of environmental risks. Institutions shall explain the processes they use to set out those objectives, targets and limits.

Institutions are to explain how those objectives, targets and limits are linked to the current international and Union policy framework, and to the available benchmarks.

(c)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions shall provide information on their current and future (planned) investment in environmentally sustainable activities and in activities and sectors aligned to the environmental objectives, including climate change objectives, set out in Article 9 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Where that information depends on the institution’s own approach or is based on the institutions’ internal terms of reference, institutions shall include in their disclosures a description of those approaches and internal terms of reference.

(d)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (d), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the measures taken to mitigate the risks associated to environmental factors. Institutions are to consider the counterparty’s capacity to manage environmental risks.

 

Governance

(e)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (b), and Article 435(2), points (a), (b) and (c), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the involvement of their management body in the supervision and management of environmental risks. Institutions are to take into account the potential transmission channels of such environmental risks (including physical, transition and liability risks).

(f)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2), point (d), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on how their management body integrates short-term, medium-term and long-term effects of environmental risks in the organisational structure of the institution for the purposes of risk management. Institutions are to explain how such exercise at management body’s level is then reflected in their business lines and internal control functions.

(g)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2), points (a), (b) and (c), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the organisation of their risk committees and on the allocation of tasks and responsibilities in the risk management framework to monitor and manage environmental risks, taking into account physical, transition and liability risk transmission channels.

(h)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2), point (e), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the ways in which they include environmental risks into their internal reporting framework and structure, as well as information on the frequency of their internal reporting and information exchange on such risks.

(i)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2), point (e), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on whether environmental risks are included in their remuneration policy, and on the criteria and metrics used to determine the impact of environmental risk considerations on variable remunerations.

 

Risk management

(j)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (f), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the integration of short-, medium- and long-term effects of environmental factors and risks in the risk tolerance framework. Institutions shall decide on the relevant time horizon in accordance with their own risk profile and exposures.

(k)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (a), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the methods, definitions and standards used to identify and manage environmental factors and risks, as well as the framework on which those standards, definitions and methods are based.

Institutions shall explain how such methods, definitions and standards relate to the applicable international and Union policy framework and available benchmarks.

(l)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (a), of that Regulation, institutions shall disclose:

(a)  the processes by which the institution identifies and monitors its activities and exposures which are sensitive and vulnerable to environmental risks, including any movable and immovable assets associated with such activities and exposures;

(b)  the processes by which the institution identifies and monitors environmental risks that are financially material or currently non-material with a prospect to become material in the future.

Activities, exposures and assets which are sensitive and vulnerable to environmental risks shall include those related to agriculture, fisheries, forestry, energy sectors in combination with their geographical location, reliance on water or other environmental factors and risks, which may be vulnerable to different factors, including flood, draught, fires, and loss of biodiversity. They shall also include concentration of the counterparty’s operations in endangered zones, and they shall be deemed to cover the entire value chain of the counterparty.

When disclosing the information referred to in this point, institutions shall indicate the materiality (including double materiality) which is to be understood in the sense set out in the definitions contained in the report referred to in Article 98(8) of Directive 2013/36/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council (1) and shall cover the life-cycle of exposures, including loan origination together with creditworthiness assessment of the counterparty and monitoring.

Institutions shall explain the extent to which such assessment covers the relevant transmission channels, including (i) lower profitability, (ii) lower real estate value, lower household wealth, (iii) lower asset performance, (iv) increase cost of compliance, and (v) increase legal costs.

Institution that identify no environmental risks as material shall explain and substantiate why that is the case and describe the methods they used to reach such conclusion.

(m)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (d), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the activities, commitments, and exposures they have put in place to mitigate environmental risks.

Institutions shall disclose the methods they use to identify risk mitigating measures and activities. In addition, they shall provide information on the extent to which those activities, commitments and exposures account for relevant transmission channels, including (i) lower profitability, (ii) lower real estate value, lower household wealth, (iii) lower asset performance, (iv) increase cost of compliance, and (v) increase legal costs.

(n)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), points (a) and (f), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the implementation tools that they use to identify and manage environmental risks. Such tools include stress testing, sensitivity analysis or other forward-looking indicators, applied at exposure-level, portfolio-level, counterparty-level or sectoral-level, depending on the materiality of the risk.

The disclosed information shall indicate the assumptions and the methods underlying the relevant implementation tools. Institutions shall also indicate the time horizon used for the assessment of environmental risks on the basis of accounting and prudential metrics, that is short-term, medium-term or long-term time horizons.

(o)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), points (a) and (f), of that Regulation, institutions shall describe the outcome of the assessment from the risk tool used in accordance with point 14.

Institutions shall provide the estimated impact of environmental risk, including climate change risk, on the institution’s solvency, regulatory capital requirements and liquidity risk profile in the framework of internal capital adequacy assessment process (ICAAP) and internal liquidity adequacy assessment process (ILAAP).

(p)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions shall provide information on the data and information available to them to carry out the risk management of environmental risks, the key data and information currently missing and measures they are taking to address the data gaps and to improve data quality and accuracy.

(q)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (f), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the limits they set on financing projects or counterparties which significantly harm environmental objectives in line with their business strategy.

Those limits shall include limits set by the institutions at the point of origination and monitoring to avoid or mitigate environmental risks, and limits that indicate when a specific exposure would trigger corrective actions, further investigation, internal escalation, or exclusion from portfolio.

(r)

Institutions shall describe how they map and link the emergence of environmental risks on their balance sheet through credit risk, liquidity risk, market risk and operational risk.

Institutions are to explain how they assess and manage the impact of transition to a low-carbon and climate-resilient economy on the prudential risk categories including credit risk, liquidity risk, market risk and operational risk.

(1)   

Directive 2013/36/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 June 2013 on access to the activity of credit institutions and the prudential supervision of credit institutions and investment firms, amending Directive 2002/87/EC and repealing Directives 2006/48/EC and 2006/49/EC (OJ L 176, 27.6.2013, p. 338).

Table 2 – Qualitative information on Social risk: Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information in Annex XXXVII

5. Institutions shall use the following instructions to complete Table 2 – ‘Qualitative Information on Social risk’ set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation, in order to describe the integration of social risks in their business strategy and processes, governance and risk management, in accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 in conjunction with Article 435 of that Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

 

Business strategy and processes

(a)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 in conjunction with Article 435(1), points (a) and (e), of that Regulation, institutions shall describe how their business model, strategy, processes and financial planning integrate risks stemming from social factors (i.e. social risks) and how those risk evolve over time given changing technology, policy framework, business environment and stakeholders’ preferences.

(b)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (a) and points (c) to (f), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide a description of their objectives, targets and limits for the assessment and management of social risks, and a description of the processes they use to set out those objectives, targets and limits.

Institutions are to explain the linkages of those objectives, targets and limits to the applicable international and Union policy framework and to available benchmarks.

Social aspects include human rights violation, labour rights, income inequality, lack of human rights, customer safety and protection, privacy, poverty and non-discrimination. Furthermore, climate change and transition to low carbon economy have social impacts that include changes to the job market. These include the decrease in the demand for certain jobs and skills, the emergence of new jobs and skills, consumers’ changing preferences, shareholders’ willingness to swiftly integrate climate, environmental and social changes in their companies, as set out in paragraph 78 of the EBA report adopted under Article 98(8) of Directive 2013/36/EU.

(c)

In accordance with Article 449a Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (d), of that Regulation, institutions shall describe how they take measures to mitigate risks associated with social factors, including understanding the counterparties’ capacity to manage social risks and entering into a dialogue with them to mitigate social risks.

 

Governance

(d)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (b), and Article 435(2), points (a), (b) and (c), of that Regulation, institutions shall describe how their management body is involved in the supervision and management of social risks. That information shall cover the rationale of the approach taken by the management body and take into account a number of social factors. Those factors include the institution’s engagement towards the community and society, its relationships with employees and compliance with labour standards, customer protection and product responsibility, and human rights.

(e)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2), points (a), (b) and (c), of that Regulation, institutions shall describe how they organise their risk committees and how they allocate tasks and responsibilities in the risk management framework to monitor and manage social risks.

Institutions shall provide information on both their internal and external resources devoted to the assessment of social risks.

(f)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2), point (e), of that Regulation, institutions shall describe how they include social risks into their internal reporting framework and structure, and set out the frequency of their internal reporting and information exchange on social risks.

(g)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2), point (e), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on whether social risks are included in their remuneration policy, as well as on the criteria and metrics used to determine the impact of social risk considerations on variable remunerations.

 

Risk management

(h)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (a), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on what methods, definitions and standards they use for the identification and management of social factors and risks, as well as the framework on which those standards, definitions and methods are based.

Institutions are to explain how those methods, definitions and standards relate to the current international and Union policy framework and available benchmarks.

(i)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (a), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the process by which they identify and monitor their activities and exposures, which are sensitive to social risks, including via their counterparties, investment or asset management activities, and including any movable and immovable assets associated with those activities and exposures.

Institutions shall provide information on the process by which they identify and monitor social risks that are financially material or currently non-material with a prospect to be material in the future.

Such activities, exposures and assets sensitive to social risks may be related to counterparties breaching labour law, human rights or other social laws or rights that may face legal dispute. More precisely, sectors with enhanced social risk may include those with migrant workers, low wages, poor labour standards or poor working conditions negatively affecting communities and having an enhanced chance of being under public and political scrutiny.

(j)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (a), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the activities, commitments and assets that they have in place to mitigate social risks.

(k)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (a), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the implementation tools that they use for identification and management of social risks. Such tools include the scenario analysis, applied at exposure-level, portfolio-level, counterparty-level or sectoral-level and cover factors including migration, demographic trends, change in labour force and technological change.

Social risks can also include change of consumer behaviour, issues around discrimination and social inclusiveness, scenario analysis on increasing inequality, social impact of climate change, climate change adaptation/mitigation and environmental degradation.

Institutions shall provide information about the assumptions and methods used to perform such scenario analysis. Institutions shall indicate the time horizon used for the assessment of the social risk on the accounting and prudential metrics, i.e. short-term, medium-term or long-term time horizon.

(l)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1), point (f), of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the limits they set out in relation to financing projects or counterparties which significantly harm the social objectives of their business strategy.

Such limits shall include those set by institutions at the point of origination and monitoring to avoid or mitigate social risks as well as the limits that indicate when a specific exposure would trigger further investigation, internal escalation, corrective actions or exclusion from the portfolio.

(m)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, institutions shall provide information on the ways in which they map and link the emergence of social risks on their balance sheet through credit risk, liquidity risk, market risk and operational risk.

Institutions are to provide information on the ways in which they assess and manage the impact of relevant socially harmful events on the prudential risks categories including credit risk, liquidity risk, market risk and operational risk.

Table 3 – Qualitative information on Governance risk: Free format text boxes for disclosure of qualitative information in Annex XXXVII

6. Institutions shall use the following instructions to complete Table 3 – Qualitative information on Governance risk set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation in order to describe the integration of governance risks in their governance and risk management, in accordance with of Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, read in conjunction with Article 435 of that Regulation.



Legal references and instructions

Row number

Explanation

 

Governance

(a)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2) of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on the ways in which they integrate the counterparty’s governance performance in their governance arrangements.

The considerations on the counterparty’s governance performance are to cover the necessary steps of the decision-making, supervision and management processes of the counterparty at all levels, including committees of the highest governance body and committees responsible for decision-making on economic, environmental, and social topics.

(b)

Institutions shall explain how they take into account the role of the counterparty’s top governing body in non-financial reporting, including the top committee or functional position that formally reviews and approves the organisation’s sustainability report and ensures that all material topics are covered.

(c)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(2) of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on how they integrate their counterparties’ governance performance in their governance arrangements.

The considerations related to the governance performance of the institution’s counterparties are to cover all of the following:

(a)  ethical considerations, including integrity of conduct, values and ethics, anti-bribery and anti-corruption measures, accountability and rule of law;

(b)  strategy and risk management, including strategy implementation, operational execution and monitoring, internal controls and risk management policies and procedures;

(c)  inclusiveness; including, gender gap and representation of people from minority groups in the management, income gap;

(d)  transparency; including disclosures on discrimination, tax commitments and payments, disclosure on lobbying activities, and rules and practices;

(e)  management of conflict of interest, including processes for the highest governance body to ensure that any conflict of interest is avoided, managed and mitigated; and

(f)  internal communication on critical concerns, including how internal process of the counterparty operates for communicating critical concerns to the highest governance body.

 

Risk management

(d)

In accordance with Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, in conjunction with Article 435(1) of that Regulation, institutions shall provide information on how they integrate in their risk management arrangements the governance performance of their counterparties considering aspects set out in row 3.

Template 1 – Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Credit quality of exposures by sector, emissions and residual maturity. Fixed format.

1. Institutions shall use the following instructions to complete template 1 set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation to provide information on the exposures that are more prone to the risks that institutions may face from the transition to a low-carbon and climate resilient economy. For the purposes of Article 449a of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013:

(a) 

institutions shall disclose information on their exposures towards non-financial corporates operating in carbon-related sectors, and on the quality of those exposures, including non-performing status, stage 2 classification, and related provisions as well as maturity buckets;

(b) 

institutions shall start disclosing information on scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions of their counterparties, if already available, including qualitative information in the narrative accompanying this template on the methodology and sources used for the calculation of those emissions. Where institutions are not yet estimating their counterparties’ emissions associated with their financing activities, including lending and investment activities, they shall disclose information on their plans to implement methodologies to estimate and disclose this information. Institutions shall start disclosing information in columns (i) to (k) of the template with first disclosure reference date as of 30 June 2024.

2. Institutions shall include in the narrative accompanying the template, explanations on the information disclosed and the changes compared to previous disclosure periods, as well as any implications that those exposures may have in terms of credit, market, operational, reputational and liquidity risks for the institutions.

3. Institutions shall include in the rows of the template the breakdown of the gross carrying amount of loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments to non-financial corporations, other than those held for trading, by sector of economic activities using the Nomenclature of Economic Activities (NACE) codes, laid down in Regulation (EC) No 1893/2006 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 37 ), based on the principal activity of the counterparty. They shall also include subtotals that aggregate the gross carrying amount of exposures towards sectors and subsectors that highly contribute to climate change. In particular, reference is made to the sectors listed in Sections A to H and Section L of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 1893/2006, which include the oil, gas, mining and transportation sectors, as sectors that highly contribute to climate change, as specified in Recital 6 of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2020/1818 ( 38 ); and a subtotal of exposures towards ‘other sectors’ not mentioned in that Recital.

4. The counterparty NACE sector allocation shall be based on the nature of the direct counterparty. Where the institutions’ counterparty is a holding company, institutions shall consider the NACE sector of the specific obligor under the holding company (if different from the holding company) which receives the funding (i.e. the specific subsidiary of the holding company in question) rather than that of the holding company, particularly in those cases where the obligor that is benefiting from the financing is a non-financial corporate. Similarly, when the direct counterparty of an institution (the obligor) is a special purpose vehicle (SPV), institutions shall disclose the relevant information under the NACE sector associated with the economic activity of the parent company of the SPV. The classification of the exposures incurred jointly by more than one obligor shall be based on the characteristics of the obligor that was the more relevant, or determinant, for the institution to grant the exposure. The distribution of jointly incurred exposures by NACE codes shall be driven by the characteristics of the more relevant or determinant obligor. Institutions shall disclose information by NACE codes with the level of granularity required in the rows of the template.



Columns

Instructions

a

Total gross carrying amount

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount, referred to in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, of those exposures towards non-financial corporates, including loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments, classified in the accounting portfolios in the banking book in accordance with that Implementing Regulation, excluding financial assets held for trading or held for sale assets.

b

Of which exposures towards companies excluded from EU Paris-aligned Benchmarks

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of those exposures towards counterparties that are excluded from the EU Paris-aligned benchmarks as specified in Article 12(1), points (d) to (g) and Article 12(2) of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2020/1818.

c

Of which environmentally sustainable (CCM)

Institutions shall disclose exposures that qualify as environmentally sustainable because they are financing activities that contribute or enable the environmental objective of climate change mitigation in accordance with Articles 10 and 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, as disclosed in template 7 of Annex XXXIX to this Regulation.

Institutions shall start disclosing that information in 2024, with first disclosure reference date as of 31 December 2023, for exposures included in the numerator of the GAR.

Institutions may start disclosing that information in 2025, with first disclosure reference date as of 31 December 2024, for those exposures included in the numerator of the BTAR but not in the numerator of the GAR.

d

Of which stage 2

Institutions applying the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) shall disclose the gross carrying amount of ‘Stage 2’ instruments as referred to in IFRS 9.

The columns on ‘Of which stage 2’ shall not be disclosed by institutions that apply national generally accepted accounting principles based on Council Directive 86/635/EEC (1).

e

Of which non-performing exposures

Institutions shall disclose non-performing exposures as defined in Article 47a(3) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

f

Accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions

Institutions shall disclose the amounts set out in Part 2, points 11, 69, 70, 71, 106 and 110, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

g

Of which stage 2

Institutions shall disclose the accumulated impairment amount of stage 2 exposures.

Institutions applying IFRS are to disclose the gross carrying amount of ‘Stage 2’ instruments as set out in IFRS 9.

The columns on ‘Of which stage 2’ shall not be disclosed by institutions that apply national generally accepted accounting principles based on Directive 86/635/EEC.

h

Of which non-performing exposures

Institutions shall disclose non-performing exposures as referred to in Article 47a(3) Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

i

GHG financed emissions (scope 1, scope 2 and scope 3 emissions of the counterparty) (in tons of CO2 equivalent)

Where the information is available, institutions shall disclose the estimates of the scope of their scope 3 GHG emissions in CO2 tonnes (TCO2) as part of column (i). The disclosure covers all sectors and subsectors that highly contribute to climate change, including the oil, gas, mining and transportation sectors, – as specified in recital 6 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2020/1818 – included in rows 2 to 52 of the template.

Institutions shall base the estimation of scope 3 emissions on the information on emissions gathered from their counterparties and on the information on sector-average emissions intensity. The methods to compute the carbon emission of companies include the Global GHG Accounting and Reporting Standard for the Financial Industry, developed by the Partnership for Carbon Accounting Financials (2) (PCAF, of particular relevance for the TCFD), or the Carbon Disclosure Project (3).

Institutions shall estimate the scope 3 emissions per sector in a proportionate manner, including by taking into account their exposures (loans and advances, debt securities and equity holdings) towards the counterparty compared to the total liabilities (accounting liabilities and shareholders’ equity) of the counterparty.

In the narrative part accompanying the template, institutions shall provide detailed explanations of the data sources used and of the methodology that they have applied for the estimation of their scope 3 GHG emissions. In particular, institutions shall explain whether they are disclosing any of the following:

(a)  reported emissions (emissions are collected from the borrower or investee company directly);

(b)  physical activity-based emissions (emissions are estimated by the reporting financial institution based on primary physical activity data collected from the borrower or investee);

(c)  economic activity-based emissions (emissions are estimated by the reporting financial institution based on economic activity data collected from the borrower or investee company).

Where institutions are not yet estimating their counterparties’ emissions associated to their financing activities, including lending and investment activities, they shall disclose information on their plans to implement methods to estimate that information. Institutions shall disclose the information in columns (i), (j) and (k) of the template with first disclosure reference date as of 30 June 2024.

Institutions may decide to start disclosing this information earlier, i.e. with first disclosure reference date as of 31 December 2022.

j

Of which Scope 3 financed emissions

Institutions shall disclose their counterparties’ scope 3 emissions associated with institutions’ lending and investment activities. Where institutions are not yet estimating their scope 3 emissions, they shall leave column (j) blank and, in the narrative part accompanying the template, they shall disclose their plans to implement methods to estimate and disclose that information.

Institutions shall disclose their scope 3 emissions on a best effort basis, covering the most relevant sectors in line with PCAF approach and the phased-in approach for scope 3 emissions included in Article 5 of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2020/1818.

Institutions shall disclose information on scope 3 emissions of the counterparty for all sectors included in the template with first reference date as of 30 June 2024.

For sectors where data and methodological challenges exist, institutions shall follow the Greenhouse Gas Protocol and its 15 stages, both upstream and downstream.

In line with the TCFD guidance on metrics and targets, institutions shall be transparent about the challenges to collect that type of information and avoid double counting to the extent possible.

Institutions shall start disclosing information in column (j) of the template, with first disclosure reference date as of 30 June 2024.

Institutions may decide to start disclosing this information earlier, i.e. with first disclosure reference date as of 31 December 2022.

k

GHG emissions (column (i)): gross carrying amount percentage of the portfolio derived from company-specific reporting

Institutions shall indicate the percentage of the portfolio (gross carrying amount of the exposures) for which they have been able to estimate their counterparties’ scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions associated with institutions’ lending and investment activities based on information disclosed by their counterparties or reported to the institution on bilateral basis.

l – p

< = 5 years; > 5 year < = 10 years; > 10 year < = 20 years; > 20 years; Average weighted maturity

Institutions shall allocate the exposures to the relevant bucket depending on the remaining maturity of the financial instrument, taking into account the following:

(a)  where the amount is repaid in instalments, the exposure shall be allocated in the maturity bucket corresponding to the last instalment;

(b)  where an exposure has no stated maturity for reasons other than the counterparty having the choice of the repayment date, or in the case of equity holdings, the amount of this exposure shall be disclosed in the largest maturity bucket ‘> 20 years’;

(c)  for the computation of the average maturity of the exposures, institutions shall weigh the maturity of each exposure by the gross carrying amount of the exposures.

(1)   

Council Directive 86/635/EEC of 8 December 1986 on the annual accounts and consolidated accounts of banks and other financial institutions (OJ L 372, 31.12.1986, p. 1).

(2)   

https://carbonaccountingfinancials.com/standard.

(3)   

https://www.cdp.net/en.

Template 2: Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Loans collateralised by immovable property – Energy efficiency of the collateral. Fixed format.

1. Institutions shall use the following instructions to disclose the information required in ‘Template 2: Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Loans collateralised by immovable property – Energy efficiency of the collateral’, as set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation.

2. Directive 2010/31/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 39 ) and Directive 2012/27/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 40 ) promote policies that aim to achieve a highly energy efficient and decarbonised building stock by 2050. Directive 2010/31/EU introduced the Energy performance certificates (EPC) as instruments for improving the energy performance of buildings. Those certificates are referred to as a certificate recognised by a Member State or by a legal person designated by it, which indicates the energy performance of a building or building unit, calculated in accordance with that Directive.

3. This template shows the gross carrying amount, as referred to in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, of loans collateralised with commercial and residential immovable property and of repossessed real estate collaterals, including information on the level of energy efficiency of the collaterals measured in terms of kWh/m2 energy consumption (columns (b) to (g) of the template), in terms of the label of the energy performance certificate (EPC) of the collateral as referred to in Article 2, point (12), of Directive 2010/31/EU for Member States, or as defined in any relevant local regulation for those exposures outside the Union, where a mapping to the Union EPC label exists (columns (h) to (n)).

4. In particular, in columns (b) to (g), institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of exposures by energy efficiency buckets based on the specific energy consumption of the collateral in kWh/m2, as indicated in the EPC label of the collateral or estimated by institutions in the absence of the EPC label. Institutions shall indicate in rows 5 and 10 of the template the extent to which those data are estimated and not based on EPC labels. In columns (h) to (n), institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of exposures grouped by the EPC label of the collateral for those collaterals where the EPC is available to the institution.

5. When disclosing the EPC distribution of the collaterals, institutions shall disclose separately, in column (o), those exposures for which they do not have the EPC information of the collateral. Where institutions do not have the EPC information, but are using internal calculations to estimate the energy efficiency of the collateral, institutions are to disclose the percentage of the exposures without EPC label of the collateral for which they are providing estimates (the percentage is to be computed based on the gross carrying amount of the exposures). Institutions shall disclose the total gross carrying amounts by energy consumption level and by EPC label, with a breakdown by location (Union vs non-Union area) differentiating between loans collateralised by commercial immovable property, loans collateralised by residential immovable property and collateral obtained by taking possession.

6. In the case of exposures to entities located in third countries where there is no EPC label equivalent, institutions shall leave columns (h) to (n) blank. However, institutions shall disclose the information required in columns (o) and (p) and, when relevant, columns (b) to (g) with estimated data.

7. For those exposures linked to more than one collateral, such as two immovable properties, the energy efficiency information of the properties linked to the exposure shall be split and disclosed separately under energy efficiency levels (both for the KWh/m2 of the collateral, columns (b) to (g), and for the EPC label, columns (h) to (n) corresponding to energy efficiency of each collateral). More specifically, institutions shall calculate the share of each collateral in the gross carrying amount of exposure based on the value of the collateral and disclose under the energy efficiency bucket linked to each collateral. For example, the institution has a loan with a gross carrying amount of EUR 100 000 collateralised by two properties: property A and property B. Property A has a collateral value of EUR 80 000 and EPC label A, while property B has a collateral value of EUR 70 000 and EPC label D. In this example, institutions should disclose EUR 53 333 (that is EUR 100 000 * [80 000 /(80 000  + 70 000 )] under EPC label A and EUR 46 667 (that is EUR 100 000 * [70 000 /(80 000  + 70 000 )] under EPC label D, both corresponding to the specific loan in question.

Template 3: Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Alignment metrics. Flexible format (fixed columns, flexible rows).

1. Institutions shall use the following instructions to disclose the information required in ‘Template 3: Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Alignment metrics’, as set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation.

2. Institutions shall disclose in this template information on their alignment efforts with the objectives of the Paris Agreement for a selected number of sectors. The disclosures on the alignment shall capture the extent to which financial flows are consistent with a pathway towards low greenhouse gas emissions and climate-resilient development as referred to in the Paris Agreement. The economic scenario that describes that decarbonisation pathway is the International Energy Agency (IEA) Net Zero Emissions by 2050 Scenario (NZE2050) ( 41 ). Institutions shall take into account that scenario. Given that the IEA provides scenarios at global level and some specific metrics at European level, institutions are to measure the distance from the IEA scenario benchmarks at global level and, where the specific European level metrics are available, at European level.

3. Institutions that are already estimating information on their sectoral alignment to the Paris Agreement shall disclose the information in this template. Institutions are to explain in the narrative part accompanying the template the method used and the data source. Those institutions that are not yet estimating their sectoral alignment shall disclose information on their plans to implement a method to estimate and disclose that information. In any case, institutions shall start disclosing the information included in this template with first disclosure reference date as of 30 June 2024.

4. Institutions shall disclose in this template:

(a) 

Columns (a) and (b): these columns contain the sectors (IEA sectors) in column (a) under which rows 1-8 list the mandatory minimum set of sectors, and subsectors (NACE sectors in column (b) according to the minimum ‘list of NACE sectors to be considered’ as indicated in the template).

(b) 

Where the institution’s counterparty is a holding company, institutions shall consider the NACE sector of the specific obligor controlled by the holding company (if different from the holding company) which receives the funding rather than that of the holding company, particularly in those cases where the obligor is a non-financial corporate. Similarly, where the direct counterparty of the institution (the obligor) is a special purpose vehicle (‘SPV’), institutions shall disclose the relevant information under the NACE sector associated with the economic activity of the parent company of the SPV.

(c) 

The classification of the exposures incurred jointly by more than one obligor shall be based on the characteristics of the obligor that was the more relevant, or determinant, for the institution to grant the exposure. Institutions shall disclose information by NACE codes with the level of granularity required in column (b).

(d) 

Column (c): the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451 of those exposures towards non-financial corporates in each of the sectors specified in columns (a) and (b), including loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments, classified in the accounting portfolios in the banking book in accordance with that Implementing Regulation, excluding financial assets held for trading or held for sale assets.

(e) 

Columns (d) and (e): alignment metric(s) applied by the institution and closest year of reference for the alignment metric(s) for each sector. Institutions shall use the alignment metric(s) that can be measured against the Net Zero Emissions by 2050 Scenario (NZE2050). Institutions are to ensure that the metrics allow to comprehensively disclose the institutions’ financed production capacities and encompass all relevant carbon-intensive financed activities. Some sample metrics are included in the template. Institutions are to disclose several metrics for each sector that is relevant to their financing activity. These are to cover emission intensity metrics, technology mix-based metrics and production-based metrics. Institutions are to rely on the assessment of the underlying assets and activities linked to the financial instruments.

For loans whose use of proceeds is known, the value shall be included for the relevant sector and alignment metric. For loans whose use of proceeds is unknown, the gross carrying amount of the exposure shall be allocated to the relevant sectors and alignment metrics based on the counterparties’ activity distribution, including by counterparties’ turnover by activity.

Institutions shall add a row in the template for each relevant combination of sectors disclosed in column (b) and alignment metrics included in column (d).

(f) 

Column (f): the point in time distance of the column (d) metric(s) to the 2030 data points of the Net Zero Emissions by 2050 Scenario (NZE2050), shall be expressed in percentage points. That distance shall represent the current degree of alignment with the scenario indicator for 2030 and shall be expressed as the difference between the indicator in column (d) and the IEA scenario projection for 2030, divided by the scenario benchmark indicator and converted into percentage terms.

Institutions can find the relevant information and the applicable scenario indicators for 2030 per sector on the IEA website. In particular, institutions shall refer to the ‘Net Zero by 2050 – A Roadmap for the Global Energy Sector’ that the IEA publish on an annual basis ( 42 ). The specific data points and indicators can be downloaded from the excel table included in the Net Zero by 2050 Scenario designed by the International Energy Agency

The exposures’ underlying activities shall be considered aligned where the level of the indicator is below that of the benchmark for decreasing benchmarks (carbon intensive activities) or above for increasing benchmarks (low carbon activities);

image

(g) 

Column (g): institutions’ target for 3 years after the year of reference indicated in column (e) and the alignment metric indicated in column (d). Column (g) shall indicate the portfolio alignment path and targets that institutions plan to achieve to remain on track with the IEA scenario in the long term.

Template 4 – Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Exposures to top 20 carbon-intensive firms. Fixed format

1. Institutions shall use the following instructions to disclose the information required in ‘Template 4: Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change transition risk: Exposures to top 20 carbon-intensive firms, as set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation.

2. Institutions shall disclose in this template aggregate information on exposures towards the most carbon-intensive counterparties in the world. They shall include aggregated and anonymised information on the gross carrying amount of exposures towards up to 20 counterparties that are among the top 20 most carbon-intensive corporates worldwide. Information shall be based on publicly available reputable and accurate information. Examples of data sources to identify the top carbon-intensive companies include the Carbon Majors Database and Reports of the Carbon Disclosure Project and Climate Accountability Institute as well as Thomson Reuters.

3. Institutions shall disclose in the narrative accompanying the disclosure the source of the data they use. Where institutions are not able to identify exposures towards the top 20 carbon-intensive firms in the world, they shall explain why they have not indicated such exposures, including in the case in which they do not have any exposures towards the top 20 carbon-intensive firms in the world.



 

Column

Instructions

a

Gross carrying amount (aggregate)

Gross carrying amount has the meaning referred to in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451. It includes loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments, classified under the accounting portfolios in the banking book according to that Implementing Regulation, excluding financial assets held for trading and held for sale assets.

Institutions shall include the aggregate exposures towards up to 20 counterparties of the institution that are among the top 20 most carbon-intensive corporates worldwide.

b

Gross carrying amount towards the company compared to total gross carrying amount (aggregate)

Institutions shall disclose the percentage resulting from the aggregate gross carrying amount indicated in column (a), divided by the total gross carrying amount of the institutions’ exposures in the banking book, as referred to in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, including loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments in the banking book, classified under the accounting portfolios in the banking book in accordance with that Implementing Regulation, excluding financial assets held for trading and held for sale assets.

c

Of which environmentally sustainable (CCM)

Institutions shall disclose the aggregate gross carrying amount of environmentally sustainable exposures contributing to the objective of climate change mitigation. That amount shall be based on the purpose of the activity funded, for special purpose lending, or on the counterparty’s information on the level of alignment of its economic activities with Regulation (EU) 2020/852, for the objective of climate change mitigation (% of turnover contributing substantially to climate change mitigation).

Institutions shall start disclosing this information with first disclosure reference date as of 31 December 2023.

d

Average maturity

Institutions shall disclose the average maturity of the exposures considered in the computation weighted by the gross carrying amount of the exposure.

e

Number of top 20 polluting firms included

Institutions shall indicate the number of top polluting companies included in the calculation of the aggregate gross carrying amount.

Template 5 – Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change physical risk: Exposures subject to physical risk. Fixed format.

1. Institutions shall use the following instructions to disclose the information required in ‘Template 5: Banking book – Indicators of potential climate change physical risk: Exposures subject to physical risk’, as set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation.

2. Institutions shall include in this template information on exposures in the banking book, including loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments not held-for-trading and not held-for-sale, towards non-financial corporates, on loans collateralized with immovable property and on repossessed real estate collaterals, exposed to chronic and acute climate-related hazards, with a breakdown by sector of economic activity (NACE classification) and by geography of location of the activity of the counterparty or of the collateral, for those sectors and geographical areas subject to climate change acute and chronic events.

3. For the identification of geographies prone to specific climate-related hazards, institutions shall use dedicated portals and databases. To obtain information on the characteristics of locations sensitive to climate-change events, institutions may use the data offered by Union bodies and by national government authorities including meteorological, environmental, statistical agencies or geoscience organisations. Examples of data sources to identify geographical areas subject to climate change related hazards include ( 43 ): GFDRR – ThinkHazard! (covering heatwaves, water scarcity and stress, floods, wildfires, hurricanes, landslide); PREP – PREPdata (coastal flood, extreme heat, landslide, water scarcity and stress, wildfire); WRI – Aqueduct Water Risk Atlas (flood, coastal flood, water scarcity and stress) Swiss Re – CatNet® (flood, tropical cyclone (hurricane &typhoon), wildfire); World Bank – Climate Change Knowledge Portal (extreme heat, extreme precipitation, drought); PCA – Global Drought Risk platform (drought); NOAA – Historical hurricane tracks (tropical cyclone (hurricane &typhoon).

4. When the counterparty is a holding company, institutions shall consider the NACE sector of the specific obligor controlled by the holding company (if different than the holding company itself) which receives the funding, particularly in those cases where the obligor is a non-financial corporate. Similarly, where the direct counterparty of the institution (the obligor) is an SPV, institutions shall disclose the relevant information under the NACE sector associated with the economic activity of the parent company of the SPV. The classification of the joint exposures towards more than one obligor shall be based on the characteristics of the obligor that was the most relevant for the institution to grant the exposure. The distribution of jointly incurred exposures by NACE codes shall be driven by the characteristics of the more relevant or determinant obligor.

5. Institutions shall disclose the information in this template on a best effort basis and explain in the narrative accompanying the template the sources of information and methods that they have used to identify exposures subject to climate-change physical risk.



Columns

Instructions

a

Geographical area subject to climate change acute and chronic events

Institutions shall cover geographical areas exposed to adverse impact from climate-change physical events. These geographical areas include the countries or other geographical or administrative regions where the counterparty’s activities or the collateral are located, and which are exposed to chronic or acute climate-change events. For geographical coverage of the exposures, institutions shall use the level of divisions indicated in Nomenclature of Territorial Units for Statistics (or NUTS), as appropriate.

b

Gross carrying amount

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451 of those exposures towards non-financial corporates (including loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments), classified under the accounting portfolios in the banking book in accordance with that Implementing Regulation, excluding financial assets held for trading and held for sale assets.

c – o

of which exposures sensitive to impact from climate change physical events

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of exposures prone to impact from climate change physical events. The gross carrying amount of exposures prone to impact from climate change physical events may be equal to the full exposure amount disclosed in column (b) of this template or may be a part of that exposure amount.

c – g

Breakdown by maturity bucket

Institutions shall allocate the exposures to the relevant bucket depending on the residual maturity of the financial instrument, taking into account the following:

(a)  where the amount is to be repaid in instalments, the exposure shall be allocated in the maturity bucket corresponding to the last instalment;

(b)  where an exposure has no stated maturity for reasons other than the counterparty having the choice of the repayment date, the amount of this exposure shall be disclosed in column ‘> 20 years’;

(c)  to compute the average maturity of the exposure, institutions shall weigh the maturity of each exposure by the gross carrying amount of the exposures.

h

of which exposures sensitive to impact from chronic climate change events

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of exposures sensitive to impact from chronic climate-change events only, including hazards relating to gradual changes in weather and climate and having a possible impact on economic output and productivity.

i

of which exposures sensitive to impact from acute climate change events

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of exposures sensitive to impact from acute climate change events only, including hazards that may cause sudden damage to properties, disruption of supply chains, and depreciation of assets.

j

of which exposures sensitive to impact both from chronic and acute climate change events

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount subject to impact from both chronic and acute climate change events, referred to in columns (h) and (i).

k

Of which stage 2

Institutions applying IFRS shall disclose the gross carrying amount of ‘Stage 2’ instruments as defined in IFRS 9.

The columns on ‘Of which stage 2’ shall not be disclosed by institutions that apply national generally accepted accounting principles based on Directive 86/635/EEC.

l

Of which non-performing exposures

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of non-performing exposures as referred to in Article 47a(3) Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, which are prone to impact from climate change events.

m, n, o

Accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions

Institutions shall disclose the amounts referred to in Part 2, points 11, 69, 70, 71, 106 and 110, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

n

of which Stage 2 exposures

Column (m) shall contain the accumulated impairment amount of stage 2 exposures.

Institutions applying IFRS shall disclose the gross carrying amount of ‘Stage 2’ instruments as defined in IFRS 9.

The columns on ‘Of which stage 2’ shall not be disclosed by institutions that apply national generally accepted accounting principles based on Directive 86/635/EEC.

o

of which non-performing exposures

Institutions shall disclose the amount of the accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions attributable to non-performing exposures, as referred to in Article 47a(3) Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

Template 6 – Summary of key performance indicators (KPIs) on the Taxonomy-aligned exposures. Fixed format.

1. Institutions shall provide in template 6 an overview of the KPIs calculated on the basis of templates 7 and 8 of Annex XXXIX, including the green asset ratio (GAR) as referred to in Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178 ( 44 )

2. While Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178 requires entities to estimate and disclose the GAR twice, once based on the turnover taxonomy alignment of the counterparty (for non-financial corporates) for those exposures the purpose of which is not to finance specific identified activities (general purpose lending), and again based on the capital expenditure (CapEx) taxonomy alignment of the counterparty for the same general purpose lending exposures, in this template institutions shall only disclose the GAR once, based on the turnover alignment of the counterparty for the general purpose lending part only.

3. For the stock, GAR (climate change mitigation), GAR (climate change adaptation), GAR (climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation) shall correspond to the KPI included in columns (b), (g) and (l) respectively of Template 8, accordingly. Similarly, for the flow, GAR (climate change mitigation), GAR (climate change adaptation), GAR (climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation) shall correspond to the KPI included in row 1, columns (r), (w) and (ab) of the same Template 8.

4. Information on the coverage shall be included in Template 8, row 1, column (p) for GAR stock, and (af) for GAR flow.

5. Institutions shall disclose this information with first reference date as of 31 December 2023, which is in line with the first reference date for the disclosure of the information on the GAR referred to in Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178.

Template 7 – Mitigating actions: Assets for the calculation of GAR. Fixed format

1. Institutions shall use the following instructions to disclose the information required in ‘Template 7 – Mitigating actions: Assets for the calculation of GAR’, as set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation.

2. Institutions shall disclose in this template information on gross carrying amount of institutions’ loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments on their banking book, with a breakdown of the information by type of counterparty, including financial corporations, non-financial corporations, households, local governments as well as real estate lending towards households, and the taxonomy eligibility and taxonomy alignment of the exposures with regard to the environmental objectives of climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation as referred to in Article 9, points (a) and (b), of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

3. In particular, institutions shall include in this template information necessary for the calculation of the GAR in accordance with Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178. While Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178 requires institutions to estimate and disclose the GAR twice, once based on the turnover taxonomy alignment of the counterparty (for non-financial corporates) for those exposures the purpose of which is not to finance specific identified activities (general purpose lending), and again based on the CapEx taxonomy alignment of the counterparty for the same general purpose lending exposures, in this template institutions shall only disclose the GAR once based only on the turnover alignment of the counterparty for the general purpose lending part.

4. Based on that information, institutions shall calculate and disclose their GAR as referred to in Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178. The information included shall relate to climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation as referred to in Article 9, points (a) and (b), of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

5. Institutions shall disclose this information with first reference date as of 31 December 2023 that is the first disclosure reference date for the information on the GAR as referred to in Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178.



Columns

Instructions

a

Gross carrying amount

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

b

Of which: towards taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of eligible exposures towards sectors (4 level NACE codes) relevant for the corresponding environmental objective according to the Taxonomy, as specified in Annex I to the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139 (1).

Institutions shall disclose exposures towards relevant sectors under the objective of climate change mitigation in accordance with Article 9, point (a), and Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

c

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of eligible exposures that are environmentally sustainable, as specified in the Annex I to Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139.

Institutions shall disclose environmentally-sustainable exposures under the objective of climate-change mitigation in accordance with Article 9, point (a), and Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

When the use of proceeds is known (specialised lending, including project finance loans, as referred to in Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451), institutions shall disclose the extent to which the exposure is environmentally-sustainable. Such disclosure is based on the extent which the funded project substantially contributes to climate change mitigation, in accordance with Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, or is an enabling activity in accordance with Article 16 of that Regulation, and meets the criteria specified in Article 3 of that Regulation. When the use of proceeds is unknown, institutions shall disclose the extent to which the exposure is environmentally sustainable by using the information received from the counterparty, in accordance with Article 8 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, on the proportion of the turnover derived from products or services associated with economic activities that qualify as environmentally sustainable under Article 3 of that Regulation.

Each exposure shall be considered only once and shall be allocated to only one environmental objective. Where the exposures are relevant for more than one environmental objective, the allocation shall be made to the most relevant objective.

d

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Specialised lending exposures shall be understood as referred to in Article 147(8) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013. It includes exposures which are environmentally sustainable under the objective of climate-change mitigation in accordance with Article 9, point (a), and Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

When the use of proceeds is known, in the case of specialised lending institutions shall disclose the extent to which the exposure is environmentally sustainable based on the extent and proportion to which the specific project funded qualify as contributing substantially to climate change mitigation (project specific information), in accordance with Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, or as enabling activity in accordance with Article 16, and meets the criteria specified in Article 3 of that Regulation. Institutions shall provide transparent information on the kind of economic activities that are being funded through specialised lending. Where the same specialised lending exposure is relevant to two environmental objectives, institutions shall allocate it to the most relevant one.

e

Of which: transitional

Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

f

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

g

Of which: towards taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of eligible exposures towards sectors (4 level NACE codes) relevant for the corresponding environmental objective according to the Taxonomy, as specified in Annex II to Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139.

Institutions shall disclose exposures towards relevant sectors under the objective of climate change adaptation in accordance with Article 9, point (b), and Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

h

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount of eligible exposures that are environmentally sustainable, as specified in Annex II to Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139.

Institutions shall disclose environmentally-sustainable exposures under the objective of climate change adaptation in accordance with Article 9, point (b), and Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

When the use of proceeds is known, in the case of specialised lending institutions shall disclose the extent to which the exposure is environmentally sustainable based on the extent and proportion to which the funded project qualifies as contributing substantially to climate change adaptation, in accordance with Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, or as enabling activity in accordance with Article 16 of that Regulation, and meets the criteria specified in its Article 3 of that Regulation.

Where the use of proceeds is unknown, institutions shall disclose the extent to which the exposure is environmentally sustainable by using the information from the counterparty, in accordance with Article 8 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, on the proportion of the turnover derived from products or services associated with economic activities that qualify as environmentally sustainable under Article 3 of that Regulation.

Each exposure shall be considered only once and shall be allocated to only one environmental objective. Where the exposures are relevant for more than one environmental objective, exposures shall be allocated to the most relevant objective.

i

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions are to disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Specialised lending exposures shall be understood as referred to in Article 147(8) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

Institutions shall disclose special lending exposures which are environmentally sustainable under the objective of climate change adaptation in accordance with Article 9, point (b), and Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the extent to which the exposure is environmentally sustainable by using the information from the counterparty.

When the use of proceeds is known, in the case of specialised lending institutions shall disclose the extent to which the exposure is environmentally sustainable based on the extent and proportion to which the specific funded project qualifies as contributing substantially to climate change adaptation (project specific information), in accordance with Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, or as enabling activity in accordance with Article 16 of that Regulation, and meets the criteria specified in its Article 3 of that Regulation. Institutions shall provide transparent information on the kind of economic activities that are being funded through specialised lending. Where the same specialised lending exposure can be relevant for two environmental objectives, the exposure shall be allocated to the most relevant one.

j

Of which: adaptation

Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852. These activities shall cover those that are not enabling activities.

k

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

l

Of which: towards taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Institutions shall include the sum of column (b) and column (g) of this template.

m

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Institutions shall include the sum of column (c) and column (h) of this template.

n

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as defined in Part 1 of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Specialised lending exposures shall be understood as referred to in Article 147(8) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

Institutions shall include the sum of column (d) and column (i) of this template.

o

Of which: transitional/adaptation

Article 10 and Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall include the sum of column (e) and column (j) of this template.

p

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall include the sum of column (f) and column (k) of this template.

(1)   

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139 of 4 June 2021 supplementing Regulation (EU) 2020/852 of the European Parliament and of the Council by establishing the technical screening criteria for determining the conditions under which an economic activity qualifies as contributing substantially to climate change mitigation or climate change adaptation and for determining whether that economic activity causes no significant harm to any of the other environmental objectives (OJ L 442, 9.12.2021, p. 1).



Rows

Instructions

 

GAR – Covered assets in both numerator and denominator

Eligible exposures shall be those that are related to the counterparties and asset classes covered in the scope of the disclosure requirements in accordance with Article 8 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

1

Loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments not HfT eligible for GAR

Institutions shall disclose loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments classified in the banking book, not held for trading and not held for sale as defined in Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

2

Financial corporations

Institutions shall disclose the exposures referred to in Part 1, point 42, point (c) and point (d), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

3

Credit institutions

Institutions shall disclose the exposures referred to in Part 1, point 42, letter (c), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

4, 9, 13, 17, 21, 34, 40

Loans and advances

Institutions shall disclose the loans and advances referred to in Part 1, point 32, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

5, 10, 14, 18, 22, 37, 41

Debt securities

Institutions shall disclose the debt securities as referred to in Part 1, point 31, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

6, 11, 15, 19, 23, 38, 42

Equity instruments

Institutions shall disclose the equity instruments as referred to in Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451. Equity instruments in the banking book include investments in associates, joint ventures and subsidiaries which are not fully or proportionally consolidated.

7

Other financial corporations

Institutions shall disclose the exposures to other financial corporations as referred to in Part 1, point 42, letter (d), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

8

Of which: investment firms

Institutions shall disclose the exposures to investment firms as defined in Article 4, paragraph (1), point (2), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

12

Of which: management companies

Institutions shall disclose the exposures to management companies as defined in Article 4(1), point (19), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.

16

Of which: insurance undertakings

Institutions shall disclose the exposures to insurance undertakings as defined in Article 4, paragraph (1), point (5), of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013

20

Non-financial corporations subject to NFRD disclosure obligations

Institutions shall disclose the exposures to non-financial corporation as referred to in Part 1, point 42, letter (e), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, which are subject to disclosure obligations under Directive 2014/95/EU.

28

Of which: commercial real estate loans

Institutions shall disclose the exposures referred to in Part 2, point 173, letter (a), and point 239ix of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

24

Households

Institutions shall disclose the loans and advances as referred to in Part 1, point 42, letter (f), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

Institutions are to collect information from their counterparties bilaterally through the loan origination process, and the regular credit review and monitoring process.

25

Of which: loans collateralised by residential immovable property

Institutions shall disclose the loans and advances collateralised by residential immovable property as referred to in Part 2, point 173, letter (a), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

The alignment of those exposures to Regulation (EU) 2020/852 shall only be assessed following a simplified approach for the objective of climate change mitigation in accordance with the technical screening criteria for buildings, namely renovation and acquisition and ownership in accordance with points 7.2., 7.3., 7.4., 7.5, 7.6., and 7.7. respectively, of Annex I to Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139, based on the energy efficiency of the underlying collateral.

26

Of which: building renovation loans

Institutions shall disclose the loans that are granted to households with the purpose of renovating their house.

The alignment of these exposures to Regulation (EU) 2020/852 shall only be assessed following a simplified approach for the objective of climate change mitigation in accordance with the technical screening criteria for buildings, namely renovation and acquisition and ownership in accordance with points 7.2., 7.3., 7.4., 7.5, 7.6., and 7.7., respectively, of Annex I to Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139, based on the energy efficiency of the underlying collateral.

27

Of which motor vehicle loans

Institutions shall disclose the motor vehicle loans as referred to in Part 2, point 173, letter (b)(ii), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451 and other loans granted for the acquisition of a motor vehicle assessed following a simplified approach for the objective of climate change mitigation in accordance with the technical screening criteria for financing, renting, leasing of vehicles in accordance with Section 6.5 of Annex I to Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139, based on the energy efficiency of the underlying vehicle.

28

Local governments financing

The addition of rows 29 and 30.

29

Housing financing

Institutions shall disclose the loans granted by institutions to local government with the aim of funding the acquisition of public housing.

30

Other local government financing

Institutions shall disclose the loans granted by institutions to local government with the aim of funding specialised lending exposures other than those resulting from the acquisition of public housing.

31

Collateral obtained by taking possession: residential and commercial immovable properties

Institutions shall disclose the collateral obtained by taking possession as referred to in Part 2, point 341, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

32

Total GAR assets

This row shall be equal to row 1 of this template.

 

Assets excluded from the numerator for GAR calculation (covered in the denominator)

33

EU Non-financial corporations (not subject to NFRD disclosure obligations)

Institutions shall disclose exposures to non-financial corporation as defined in Part 1, point 42(e), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, which are located in the Union and not subject to disclosure obligations under Directive 2014/95/EU.

37

Non-EU Non-financial corporations (not subject to NFRD disclosure obligations)

Institutions shall disclose exposures to non-financial corporation as defined in Part 1, point 42(e) of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, which are located outside the Union and not subject to disclosure obligations under Directive 2014/95/EU.

 

Assets excluded from the numerator for GAR (covered in the denominator)

41

Derivatives

Institutions shall disclose derivatives not held for trading as referred to in Part 1, Section 10, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

42

On demand interbank loans

Institutions shall disclose ‘Other demand deposits’ as referred in to Part 2, point 3, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

43

Cash and cash-related assets

Institutions shall disclose ‘Cash on hand’ as referred to in Part 2, point 1, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

44

Other assets (including goodwill, commodities etc.)

Institutions shall disclose other assets in the balance-sheet of the institution not included in rows 41, 42 and 43 of this template.

45

Total assets in the denominator (GAR)

This row shall be the sum of rows 32, 33, 37 and 41 to 44 of this template.

 

Other assets excluded from both the numerator and denominator for GAR calculation

46

Sovereigns

Institutions shall disclose general governments as referred to in Part 1, point 42, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, excluding exposures included in rows 29 and 30 of this template.

47

Central bank exposures

Institutions shall disclose exposures towards central banks.

48

Trading book

Institutions shall disclose financial assets held for trading or trading financial assets as defined in the applicable accounting principles.

49

Total assets excluded from numerator and denominator

This row shall be the sum of rows 46, 47 and 48 of this template.

50

Total assets

This row shall be the sum of rows 45 and 49 of this template.

Template 8 – GAR (%)

1. Institutions shall use the following instructions to disclose the information required in ‘Template 8 – GAR (%)’, as set out in Annex XXXIX to this Regulation.

2. Based on the information included in template 7, institutions shall disclose in this template the GAR as referred to in Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178.

3. The purpose of this template is to show to what extent institutions’ activities qualify as environmentally sustainable in accordance with Articles 3 and 9 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852 so that stakeholders can understand the actions put in place by the institutions to mitigate climate change transition and physical risks.

4. Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178 requires institutions to estimate and disclose the GAR twice. Once, the disclosure is based on the turnover taxonomy alignment of the counterparty (for non-financial corporates) for those exposures the purpose of which is not to finance specific identified activities (general purpose lending). A second disclosure is based on the CapEx alignment to Regulation (EU) 2020/852 of the counterparty for the same general purpose lending exposures. In this template, institutions shall only disclose the GAR once, based on the turnover alignment of the counterparty for the general purpose lending part only.

5. Institutions shall start disclosing this information with first reference date as of 31 December 2023, which is in line with the first reference date for the disclosure of the information on the GAR referred to in Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178.



Columns

Instructions

a

Proportion of assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets funding activities referred to in Regulation (EU) 2020/852 (i.e. eligible assets) in total stock of covered assets. This item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible assets funding taxonomy-relevant sectors referred to in Regulation (EU) 2020/852 for the objective of climate change mitigation as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (b) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as defined in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

b

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities (i.e., aligned assets) in the stock of eligible assets. The item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible assets funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate-change mitigation as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (c) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered exposures as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

c

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets categorised as specialised lending funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate change mitigation in the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (d) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

d

Of which: transitional

Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets related to transitional activities for the objective of climate change mitigation in the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (e) of Template 8.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

e

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets related to enabling activities for the objective of climate change mitigation in the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (f) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

f

Proportion of assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets funding taxonomy-relevant activities (i.e. eligible assets) in total stock of covered assets. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible assets funding taxonomy-relevant sectors for the objective of climate change adaptation as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (g) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

g

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities (i.e. aligned assets) in the stock of eligible assets. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible assets funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate change adaptation as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (h) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered exposures as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

h

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets categorised as specialised lending funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate change adaptation in the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (i) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

i

Of which: adaptation

Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets related to adaptation activities for the objective of climate change adaptation in the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (j) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

j

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets related to enabling activities for the objective of climate change adaptation in the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities. The item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (k) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

k

Proportion of assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets funding taxonomy-relevant activities (i.e. eligible assets) for the objectives of climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation, compared to the total stock of covered assets. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (l) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

l

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objectives of climate change mitigation and adaptation in the stock of eligible assets. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible assets funding environmentally sustainable activities as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (m) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered exposures as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

m

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the stock of assets categorised as specialised lending funding environmentally-sustainable activities for the objectives of climate change mitigation and adaptation in the stock of assets funding environmentally sustainable activities. The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (n) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

n

Of which: transitional/adaptation

Articles 10 and 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

The percentage shall correspond to column (d) and column (i).

o

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

The percentage shall correspond to column (e) and column (j).

p

Proportion of total assets covered

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of total assets covered by the GAR. The item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of the stock of covered assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (1) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of total assets on institutions’ balance sheet as referred to in the instructions corresponding to row 50 of Template 7.

q

Proportion of new assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding taxonomy-relevant activities (i.e. eligible assets) for the objective of climate change mitigation in total new eligible assets (i.e. eligible assets originated within the current disclosure period). New assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

Tis item shall be expressed as in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (b) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

r

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate change mitigation in total new eligible assets (i.e. eligible assets originated within the current disclosure period). New assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (c) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

s

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) categorised as specialised lending funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate change mitigation in total new eligible assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities. New eligible assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (d) of Template 8.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

t

Of which: transitional

Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) related to transitional activities for the objective of climate change mitigation in total new eligible assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities. New eligible assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (e) of Template 8.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered new assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

u

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) related to enabling activities for the objective of climate change mitigation in total new eligible assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities. New eligible assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (f) of Template 8.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of covered new assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

v

Proportion of new assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding activities covered by Regulation (EU) 2020/852 for the objective of climate change adaptation in total new eligible assets (i.e. eligible assets originated within the current disclosure period). New assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

This item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (g) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

w

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate change adaptation in total new eligible assets (i.e. eligible assets originated within the current disclosure period). New assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

This item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (h) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

x

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) categorised as specialised lending funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate change adaptation in total new eligible assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities. New eligible assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

This item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (i) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

y

Of which: adaptation

Article 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) related to transitional activities for the objective of climate change adaptation in total new eligible assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities. New eligible assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

This item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (j) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

z

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of the new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) related to enabling activities for the objective of climate change adaptation in total new eligible assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities. New eligible assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

This item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (k) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

aa

Proportion of assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding activities covered by the objectives laid down in Regulation (EU) 2020/852 of climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation in total new eligible assets (i.e. eligible assets originated within the current disclosure period). New assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

This item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets funding taxonomy relevant sectors as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (l) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

ab

Of which: environmentally sustainable

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objective of climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation in total new eligible assets (i.e. eligible assets originated within the current disclosure period). New assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

This item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (m) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

ac

Of which: specialised lending

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) categorised as specialised lending funding environmentally sustainable activities for the objectives of climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation in total new assets (i.e. assets originated within the current disclosure period) funding environmentally sustainable activities. New assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

This item shall be expressed in percentage terms.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of eligible new assets as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (n) of Template 7.

The denominator of the KPI shall be the gross carrying amount of new covered assets from those assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to column (a) of Template 7.

ad

Of which: transitional/adaptation

Articles 10 and 11 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

The percentage shall correspond to column (t) and column (y).

ae

Of which: enabling

Article 16 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

The percentage shall correspond to column (u) and column (z).

af

Proportion of new total assets covered

Institutions shall disclose the proportion of new total assets covered by the GAR. New assets shall be calculated net of repayments and other reductions.

The item shall be expressed as a percentage.

The numerator of the KPI shall be the difference in the gross carrying amount of covered assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to row 1 of Template 7, between current disclosure period (t) and previous disclosure period (t-1).

The denominator of the KPI shall be the difference in the gross carrying amount of new total assets, as referred to in the instructions corresponding to row 53 of Template 7, between current disclosure period (t) and previous disclosure period (t-1).



Rows

Instructions

1

GAR as referred to in Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178.

2

Loans and advances, debt securities and equity instruments not HfT eligible for GAR calculation

GAR % for exposures in row 1 of Template 7.

3

Financial corporations

GAR % for exposures in row 2 of Template 7.

4

Credit institutions

GAR % for exposures in row 3 of Template 7.

5

Other financial corporations

GAR % for exposures in row 7 of Template 7.

6

Of which: investment firms

GAR % for exposures in row 8 of Template 7.

7

Of which: management companies

GAR % for exposures in row 12 of Template 7.

8

Of which: insurance undertakings

GAR % for exposures in row 16 of Template 7.

9

NFCs subject to NFRD disclosure obligations

GAR % for exposures in row 20 of Template 7.

10

Households

GAR % for exposures in row 24 of Template 7.

11

Of which loans collateralised by residential immovable property

GAR % for exposures in row 25 of Template 7.

12

Of which building renovation loans

GAR % for exposures in row 26 of Template 7.

13

Of which motor vehicle loans

GAR % for exposures in row 27 of Template 7.

14

Local government financing

GAR % for exposures in row 28 of Template 7.

15

Housing financing

GAR % for exposures in row 29 of Template 7.

16

Other local government financing

GAR % for exposures in row 30 of Template 7.

17

Collateral obtained by taking possession: residential and commercial immovable properties

GAR % for exposures in row 31 of Template 7.

Template 9 – Mitigating actions: BTAR

1. Article 9 of Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/2178 provides that the Commission reviews the application of that Regulation by 30 June 2024. The Commission is to assess in particular the need for any further amendments with regards to the inclusion of:

(a) 

exposures to central governments and central banks in the numerator and denominator of key performance indicators of financial undertakings;

(b) 

exposures to undertakings that do not publish a non-financial statement pursuant to Articles 19a or 29a of Directive 2013/34/EU in the numerator of key performance indicators of financial undertakings.

2. Institutions may choose to include in this template the following information. For those counterparties that are non-financial corporates and do not have disclosure obligations, institutions may disclose, on a reasonable effort basis and based on information already available and collected on a voluntary and bilateral basis from their counterparties or calculated using estimates, extended information on the taxonomy eligibility and taxonomy alignment as referred to in Regulation (EU) 2020/852 with regard to the environmental objectives of climate-change mitigation and adaptation, as referred to in Article 9, points (a) and (b), of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, of those exposures towards European non-financial corporations that are not subject to the disclosure obligations laid down in Directive 2013/34/EU and non-European non-financial corporations not subject to the disclosure obligations laid down in Directive 2013/34/EU. That information may be disclosed only once, based on counterparties’ turnover alignment for the general-purpose lending loans, as in the case of the GAR.

The first disclosure reference date of this template is as of 31 December 2024. Institutions are not required to disclose this information before 1 January 2025.

Template 9.1 – Mitigating actions: Assets for the calculation of BTAR

1. Institutions may disclose in this template the gross carrying among of the assets relevant for the calculation of the BTAR. This template shall only apply to counterparties that are not subject to disclosure obligations.



1

TOTAL GAR ASSETS

As disclosed in row 32 of template 7.

2

EU Non-financial corporations (not subject to NFRD disclosure obligations)

Institutions shall disclose exposures to non-financial corporation as defined in Part 1, point 42(e), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, which are located in the Union and which are not subject to disclosure obligations under Directive 2013/34/EU.

Where the counterparty is not subject to disclosures under Article 8 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852, for the calculation of the percentage of taxonomy-aligned exposures as referred to in Regulation (EU) 2020/852, institutions may, on a reasonable effort basis, collect information from their counterparties on a voluntary and bilateral basis through the loan origination, and regular credit review and monitoring process. Only where the counterparty is not able or willing to provide the relevant data, credit institutions shall make use of internal estimates and proxies and explain in the narrative accompanying the template the extend of use of those estimates and the kind of estimates applied. Where institutions are unable to collect on a voluntary and bilateral basis or estimate relevant information, or are unable to do it in a reasonable way that is not overly burdensome for them or their counterparties, they shall explain that fact in the narrative accompanying the template, explaining the reasons and counterparties affected.

For disclosures involving corporates not subject to disclosure obligations under Directive 2013/34/EU, including small and medium enterprises (SMEs), when assessing general purpose lending/financing with unknown use of proceeds, institutions shall follow a simplified approach and focus their assessment on the main economic activity of the corporate, that is, on their main source of turnover, in order to determine the overall alignment of the exposures with Regulation (EU) 2020/852. In the case of specialised lending, the assessment shall be based on the extent to which the specific project funded qualifies as contributing substantially to climate change mitigation or adaptation (project specific information).

4

Of which: loans collateralised by commercial immovable property

The exposures referred to in Part 2, point 173, letter (a), and point 239ix, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

The taxonomy-alignment as referred to in Regulation (EU) 2020/852 of those exposures shall only be assessed following a simplified approach, for the objective of climate change mitigation in accordance with the technical screening criteria for buildings, namely renovation and acquisition and ownership in accordance with points 7.2., 7.3., 7.4., 7.5, 7.6., and 7.7. respectively, of Annex I to Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139, based on the energy efficiency of the underlying collateral.

5

Of which: building renovation loans

Loans that are granted to SMEs and other non-financial corporations not subject to disclosure obligations under Directive 2014/95/EU with the purpose of renovating a building.

The taxonomy alignment as referred to in Regulation (EU) 2020/852 of these exposures shall only be assessed following a simplified approach, for the objective of climate change mitigation in accordance with the technical screening criteria for buildings, namely renovation and acquisition and ownership in accordance with points 7.2., 7.3., 7.4., 7.5, 7.6., and 7.7. respectively, of Annex I to Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2139, based on the energy efficiency of the underlying collateral.

8

Non-EU Non-financial corporations (not subject to NFRD disclosure obligations)

Exposures to non-financial corporation as referred to in Part 1, point 42, letter (e), of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451, which are located outside the Union and not subject to disclosure obligations under Directive 2014/95/EU.

Where institutions are providing that information in their disclosures under Article 8 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852 in accordance with Article 7(7) of Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/2178, they shall disclose here the same information. Otherwise, institutions shall collect information from their counterparties on a bilateral basis through the loan origination, and regular credit review and monitoring process, or use the following proxies for the disclosure of information on non-EU exposures on a best-effort-basis:

(a)  their own models and the classification of exposures according to them; in this case institutions shall explain the main features of the models applied;

(b)  where available, counterparties’ public disclosures based on international standards (including TCFD); institutions shall in that case explain the type of information available and the standards applied;

(c)  other publicly available data.

Institutions are to explain in the narrative accompanying this template the sources used for the disclosure of this information. Where institutions are unable to collect on a bilateral basis or estimate relevant information or are unable to do it in a reasonable way that is not overly burdensome for them or their counterparties, they shall explain that fact in the narrative accompanying the template, explaining the reasons and counterparties affected.

For this type of counterparties, when assessing general purpose lending/financing with unknown use of proceeds, institutions shall follow a simplified approach and focus their assessment on the main economic activity of the corporate, that is, on their main source of turnover, in order to determine the overall alignment of the exposures with Regulation (EU) 2020/852. In the case of specialised lending, the assessment shall be based on the extent and proportion to which the specific project funded qualify as contributing substantially to climate change mitigation or adaptation (project specific information), and for the real estate portfolio the assessment shall be conducted for the objective of climate change mitigation based on the energy efficiency of the underlying collateral and their alignment with criteria specified for the relevant activities in Regulation (EU) 2020/852.

Row 12

TOTAL BTAR ASSETS

Sum of rows 1, 2 and 8

Rows 13 to 19

See definitions in template 7 (rows 41 to 50)

Template 9.2 – BTAR %

Institutions may disclose in this template the percentage of BTAR assets as disclosed in template 1 compared to the total assets in the denominator of the BTAR as disclosed in row 17 of template 9.1.

Template 9.3 – BTAR %

This template contains a summary of the BTAR KPI, breakdown by climate change environmental objective, and total, and with the breakdown for stock and flow.

Template 10 – Other climate change mitigating actions that are not covered in Regulation (EU) 2020/852

1. This template covers other climate change mitigating actions and includes exposures of the institutions that are not taxonomy-aligned as referred to in Regulation (EU) 2020/852 according to templates 7 and 8 but that still support counterparties in the transition and adaptation process for the objectives of climate change mitigation and climate change adaptation. Those mitigating actions and activities shall include bonds and loans issued under standards other than the Union standards, including green bonds; sustainable bonds that are linked to aspects on climate change; sustainability-linked bonds that are linked to aspects on climate change; green loans; sustainability-linked loans that are linked to aspects on climate change; sustainability-linked loans that are linked to aspects on climate change.

2. Institutions shall include in the narrative accompanying this template detailed explanations on the nature and type of mitigating actions reflected in this template, including information on the type of risks that they aim to mitigate, climate change objectives that they support and information on the related counterparties and the timing of the actions. They shall also explain why those exposures are not fully aligned with the criteria laid down in Regulation (EU) 2020/852, and are not sustainable in accordance with Regulation (EU) 2020/852 but still contribute towards mitigating climate change risk transition or physical risk, as well as any other relevant information that may help understand the risk management framework of the institution.

3. Institutions shall start disclosing the information included in the templates with first disclosure reference date as of 31 December 2022.



Columns

Instructions

a

Type of financial instrument

Institutions shall disclose the type of financial instrument as referred to in Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

b

Type of counterparty

Institutions shall disclose the type of counterparty as referred to in Part 1, point 42, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

c

Gross carrying amount (million EUR)

Institutions shall disclose the gross carrying amount as referred to in Part 1, point 34, of Annex V to Implementing Regulation (EU) 2021/451.

d

Type of risk mitigated (Climate change transition risk)

Institutions shall disclose the type of risk that is being mitigated with that action: climate change transition risk.

e

Type of risk mitigated (Climate change physical risk)

Institutions shall disclose the type of risk that is being mitigated with that action: climate change physical risk.

f

Qualitative information on the nature of the mitigating actions

Institutions shall describe the nature of the mitigating actions contributing to climate change mitigation referred to in Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2020/852 and to climate-change adaptation referred to in Article 11 of that Regulation, and on the reasons why the exposures are not regarded as taxonomy-aligned for the purpose of the GAR.

1.1 Referencias

1.2 Requisitos identificados

1.3 Estándares relacionados

2. Requisitos identificados

Requisitos
Fuente Requisito

3. Estándares relacionados

Estándares
Fuente Requisito